Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract 36643CITY SECRETARY~ CONTRACT NO . _.....,._.. .. SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF KHA No . 061018038 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTHSIDE III AVONDALE-HASLET ROAD ELEVATED STORAGE TANK PROJECT NO. P264-607180036833 ~,,,,,,,,,. ~*'€;.~.ld.!i, Prepared for :~ ... •*• ... ~~I -•: ·.•~ F W hW D ~ *: ~ * ~ ort ort ater epartment ~························~ .,,_ JOSEPH J. KOTRLA ""-~·•••••••••••••••••••••••~ ,!,~. 56361 i" ., ,...J • • - "'I. ··.(1c--~··· -,,,,,~.·.·;~(if(--- l\\~ November 2007 f1(:,...,... <>'l ~--r,a Kimley-Horn a........J [_J and Associates, Inc. ~'''"'''•· ~'~OF 1; ''1 ~~~ ·······-~, -"f-•• *.. '.J :",.•• •.. rl.. -fir.. .. * ~ ~·: ~·~ ~························~ .,,_ JENIFER TATUM ""-~1•••-:•••••87915••••••:9~~ n f, · ~ •• .. ,..,,,,__ t· 1,. ·-.<1c~·~ ,,,,~ip;;A~~,01 t1l\\\~\\~\O 02 -1 8-08 A09:23 IN ,, . City of Fort Worth, Texas Mayor and Council Communication COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 2/5/2008 -Ord. No. 17976-02-2008 (As Amended) DATE: Tuesday , February 05, 2008 LOG NAME: 60NS Ill EST SUBJECT: REFERENCE NO.: C-22661 Authorize Execution of Contract with CB&I Constructors, Inc., for the Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank and Adopt Appropriation Ordinance RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council: 1. Authorize the transfer of $3,258,990 from the Water and Sewer Operating Fund to the Water Capital Projects Fund; 2. Adopt the attached appropriation ordinance increasing estimated receipts and appropriations in the Water Capital Projects Fund in the amount of $3,258 ,990 from available funds ; and 3. Authorize the City Manager to execute a contract with CB&I Constructors , Inc ., for the construction of Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank, in the amount of $3 ,133 ,000. DISCUSSION: On September 26, 2007, (M&C C-21731) the City Council authorized the execution of an engineering agreement with Kimley Horn and Associates for the design of Northside Ill Elevated Storage Tank and associated 36-inch water transmission main . The Water Master Plan shows that this new elevated tank is required to serve the rapidly growing north side of Fort Worth. This project is for the construction of a two million gallon composite elevated storage tank and related site work on Avondale Haslet Road, just east of US-287 . This project was advertised for bid in the Fort Worth Star-Telegram on November 29 , and December 6, 2007. On, December 20 , 2007, the following bids were received . BIDDER CB&I Constructors, Inc. Landmark Structures BASE BID $3,120,000 $3,298 ,810 ADDITIVE TOTAL BID ITEM $13,000 $15 ,000 CONTRACT CONTRACT TIME $3,133,000 505 Calendar Days $3 ,313 ,810 The staff is requesting inclusion of the Additive Bid Item for the installation of a cathodic protection system which will reduce corrosion for the steel portion of the elevated tank . Staff has reviewed the Base Bid and requested Additive Bid Item and recommends awarding a contract for the Total Contract Amount. In addition to the contract cost , $93 ,990 is provided for project contingencies and $32 ,000 is provided for staff support and inspection. M/WBE -CB&I Constructors , Inc., is in compliar,ice with the City 's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to 8 percent M/WBE participation . The City 's goal on this project is 4 percent. This project is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 7. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director cert ifies that upon approval of the above recommendations and adoption of the attached appropriation ordinance , funds will be available in the current capital budget , as appropriated , of the Water Capital Projects Fund . TO Fund/Account/Centers 1&2) P253 472045 601800368ZZ ~ P253 541200 607180036880 ~ P253 511010 607180036880 $3 ,133,000.00 $226 ,990 .00 $32 ,000 .00 Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Originating Department Head: Additional Information Contact: FROM Fund/Account/Centers 1)PE45 538070 0609020 $3 ,258 ,990 .00 ~ P253 541200 607180036880 $3 • 133 ,000.00 Marc A. Ott (8476) S. Frank Crumb (8207) Farida S . Goderya (8214) TABLE OF CONTENTS Notice to Bidders Special Instructions to Bidders Proposal (completed forms to be submitted with Bid) Minority and Women Business Enterprises Specifications General Conditions Supplementary Conditions to Part C Special Conditions Technical Specifications Division 1 -General Requirements 01035 Control of Work 0 I 040 Construction Sequence 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals 013 15 Progress Schedule and Reports 01500 Construction Facilities and Controls 01700 Contract Closeout 01720 Project Record Documents 01 73 0 Operating and Maintenance Data 017 40 Warranties and Bonds Division 2 -Site Work 02100 Site Preparation 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading 02221 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction 02270 Sedimentation and Erosion Control 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type 0261 5 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02617 Steel Pipe 02641 Resilient Seated Gate Valve 02642 A WW A Butterfly Valve 02644 Expansion Joints and Couplings 02653 Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flow Meter 02831 Chain Link Fencing 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Division 8 -Doors and Windows 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors A A B B C Cl D E 08710 Finish Hardware Division 9 -Finishes 09900 Painting 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Division 11 -Equipment 11260 Chlorine Analyzer 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Division 13 -Tanks 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Division 15 -Mechanical 15400 Plumbing 15440 Plumbing Fixtures Division 16-Electrical 16010 Electrical General Provisions 1611 0 Raceways 16120 Wire and Cable 16191 Dry Type Transformers 16199 Miscellaneous 16210 Electric Utility Service 16410 Underground 16450 Grounding Systems 16455 Lightning Protection 16642 Cathodic Protection System 16910 Instrumentation Certificate of Insurance Contractor Compliance with Worker's Compensation Law Vendor Compliance to State Law Maintenance, Payment and Performance Bonds Contract Geotechnical Report HSQ RTU Quotation F F F F G Appendix A Appendix B C ity of Fort Worth No rth s ide III Avond ale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank NOTICE TO BIDDERS Se aled proposals for the following: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Project Number P264-607180036833 will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, located on the lower level, Municipal Building, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102, until 1:30 P.M., Thursday, December 201 \ 2007. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the City Council Chambers at 2 :00 P.M , December 20th, 2007. Contract Documents have been prepared by Kimley-Hom Associates, Inc ., (817) 335-6511 , 801 Cherry Street, Suite 950, Unit 11 , Fort Worth, Texas 76102, and may be examined without charge at their office. Contract Documents may be obtained from Kimley-Hom Associates, Inc . at the above address for a non- refundable charge of: Set of 11 " x l 7" (full scale) Plans and Specifications: $30 .00 General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department projects, dated January I, 1978 , with the latest revisions, also compromise a part of the Contract Documents for this project and may be obtained by paying a non-refundable fee of $50.00 for each set, at the Planning and Engineering Division Office of the Fort Worth Water Department, Municipal Office Building, l 000 Throckmorton Street , Fort Worth , T exas, 76102. All bidders submitting bids are required to be pre-qualified in accordance with the requirements of the special instructions to bidders. The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and waive any and/or all formalities. No bid may be withdrawn until the expiration of ninety (90) days from the date the bids are received . For additional information , contact Ms . Jenifer Tatum , P .E ., Kimley-Hom Associates, Inc. at (817) 335- 6511 . Advertising Dates : November 29, 2007 December 6, 2007 Pa rt A.doc A-1 C ity of Fo rt Worth North s id e JII Avond ale-Has let Roa d Elevated Stora ge T ank (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) Part A .doc A-2 City of Fort Worth North s ide Ill Avondal e-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SPECIAL PREQUALIFICA TION REQUIREMENTS . All contractors submitting bids are required to meet the Fort Worth Water Department special pre- qualification requirements for this project prior to submitting bids. Previous pregualification by the Fort Worth Water Department will not be considered as meeting this requirement. This one-time special project-specific process will prequalify potential bidders whose bids will be considered for award based upon technical evaluation , historical schedule compliance evaluation, evaluation of proposed manager and project superintendent. ln addition, the process will establish a bid limit based on a financial analysis of the contractor. It is the bidder's responsibility to submit documentation for those items listed below, to the Director of the Water Department or his designated representative, at least fourteen ( 14) calendar days prior to the date of bid opening. The Water Department may request any other documents it may deem necessary. Any additional documents so requested shall be submitted to the Director of the Water Department, or his designated representati,·e, at least seYen (7) calendar days prior to the date of the opening bids. Any additional documents so requested shall be submitted to th e Director of th e Wat er D epartment, or his d esignated r epresentative, at least three (3) calendar days prior to th e dat e of th e opening bids. a) COVER LETTER. The cover letter provided by the prospective bidder with the prequalification information must include the name of a contact individual that the City may contact for additional information if needed . b) FINANCIAL STATEMENT. The financial statement required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the submitting company. This statement must be current and not more than one (]) year old . In the case that a bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. c) EXPERIENCE RECORD. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in the work of both the same nature and technical level as that of the project for which bids are to be received. At a minimum, the following experience record must be met: a. Experience must be on at least five (5) 2.0 million gallon or larger elevated storage tank projects that have been in successful operation for no less than five (5) years prior to the date on which bids will be received. b . Experience must be on two or more 2.0 million gallon elevated storage tanks having been completed by constructing with a 3 5' Head Range . A minimum of three references must be included. References must include a contact person name , telephone number, project name and total cost, and type of work done. d) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. The prospective bidder shall list the equipment that the Contractor has available for the project and list the equipment that Contractor will rent as may be required to complete the project on which the Contractor submits a bid . e) LICENSING: The prospective bidder shall submit proof that a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas is employed by the bidder. t) PERSONNEL AND SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE RECORD. The prospective bidder shall submit the names and resumes for the proposed project manager and project superintendent. This information shall include a list of all projects that the proposed project manager and project Part A-rev Addi.doc A-3 City ofFort Worth Northside Ill Avond ale-Hasl et Road Elevated Storage Tank superintendent completed within the last five (5) years to demonstrate ability to coordinate complex plant rehabilitation work and to perform work while maintaining critical shutdown schedules, regardless of by whom they were employed. Provide list of contact persons for all projects (preferably fi e ld inspectors or resident engineers) with names and phone numbers for the last five years' project. In the event the Bidder on this contract is a Joint Venture , financial statements from each joint venturer shall be submitted for prequalification, as well as the experience record and list of equipment of each joint venturer. The financial statements required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or independent public accountant holding a valid license issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the each joint venturer. The statements must be current and not more than one ( 1) year old. In the case that a bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared , the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. It is not required that each joint venturer shall have the necessary experience and equipment, rather that combined, the joint venture has the required experience and equipment. Upon request, the joint venture agreement shall be submitted for review . The Water Department will review each pre-qualification submittal. From the financial statement, the maximum bid limit will be based on amount of liquid assets times 10. The following conditions will apply: a) The Director of the Water Department shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability for financial, experience and other qualifications to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. b) Bids received in excess of the bid limit shall be considered non -responsive and will be rejected as such. c) The City, in its sole discretion , may reject a bid for failure to demonstrate acceptable performance, experience and/or expertise. d) Any proposals submitted by a non pre-qualified bidder shall be returned unopened , and if inadvertently opened, shall not be considered . e) The City will attempt to notify prospective bidders whose qualifications (financial or experience) are not deemed to be appropriate to the nature and/or magnitude of the project on which bids are to be received. failure to notify shall be a wa,,ier of any necessary pre qualifications . Failure to notify shall not be a wavier of any necessary pre-qualifications. For additional information contact Farida Goderya, Fort Worth Water Department at (817) 392-8214 (Fax (817) 392-2585). Pre-qualification submittal should be sent to: Ms . Farida Goderya, PH.D., P.E. Fort Worth Water Department 1 000 Throckmorton Street Fort Worth, TX 76102-6311 2. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SJTE: 2.1 Before su bmitting his Bid, each Bidder must (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly , (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect performance of the work, (c) familiarize himself with federal , state and local laws , ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the work, and (d) carefully correlate his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.2 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those surveys and investigation reports of su bsurface or latent phys ical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting performance of the work which have be en relied upon by Engineer in preparing the Drawings and Part A-rev Add I .doc A-4 City offort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank Specifications. The data is furnished for information only and neither the Owner nor Engineer guarantees the accuracy of the data . Before submitting his Bid, each Bidder will , at his own expense, make such additional surveys and investigations as he may deem necessary to determine his bid price for performance of the work within the terms of the Contract Documents. The Bidder acknowledges by the submission of his bid that he is solely responsible for trench excavation safety as prescribed by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and HB662 and HB665as amended by the 72nd Session of the Texas legislature and amended by the 73rd Session of the Texas Legislature with HB 1569. 2.3 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of this Article 4. 3. BID FORM (PROPOSAL) 3 .1 Bidders shall use the Bid (Proposal) forms included in the documents for each contract Bid. Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included in same sealed envelope with Proposal. 3 .2 Bid (Proposal) Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words, if specifically requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict, words will take precedence. 3.3 Bids by corporation must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 3.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature . 3 .5 All names must be printed below the signature. 3 .6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the number of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form). 4 . SUBMISSION OF BIDS . Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation for Bids and shall be included in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. Bidders shall not separate, detach or remove any portion , segment or sheets from the contract document at any time. Bidders must complete the proposal section(s) and submit the complete specifications book or face rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Revised bid forms issued by addenda shall be stapled to the original bid form in the specifications book prior to submission. It is recommended that the bidder make a copy of the forms included in the Minority and Women Business Enterprise section for submittal within the time-line stated below or the bidder may request a copy of said forms from the City Project Manager named in this solicitation . 5 . MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids . Bids may not be withdrawn after opening of Bids for the period set forth in the Notice to Bidders. 6. OPENING OF BIDS. Bids will be opened as indicated in the Invitation for Bids. Bids received after such time will not be considered , and will be returned unopened. Part A-rev Addi.doc A-5 City of Fort Worth Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road El evated Storage Tank 7. BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN. All Bids shall remain open for the period of time set forth in the Invitation for Bids, but Owner may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 8. AW ARD OF CONTRACT. 8.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive any and all formalities , and the right to disregard all nonconforming or conditional Bids or counter proposals. 8.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and alternates and unit prices ifrequested in the Bid forms. He may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material or equipment) proposed for those portions of the work as to which the identity of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations must be submitted as specified in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. He may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. 8.3 If a contract is to be awarded, it will awarded to the lowest responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project. 8.4 It is expected that the Owner's evaluation of bids and award of contract will be made as set forth in the Invitation for Bids. The successful bidder will be notified by a Notice of Award which may be a letter or telegram. Time of completion is very important and failure to meet completion schedule will subject the Contractor to liquidated damages as provided in the Supplementary Conditions section of the Contract. 8.5 Bidders are informed that the site platting process is currently in progress. It is anticipated that the filing of the plat will be completed before the start of the construction. In the event the plat is not approved prior to award of the contract, the City reserves the right to postpone award of the contract until the plat has been approved and filed. As such, bidders shall hold their unit prices until the plat is filed and approved. 9. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. 9 .1 The accepted Bidder, within ten (10) days after formal notice of award, shall execute the formal Contract Agreement and required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the Owner. 9 .2 The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed authorizing the Contractor to commence work. 10. BID SECURITY. A cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City ofFort Worth, in the amount of not less than five (5%) percent of the largest possible total of the bid submitted must accompany the bid , and is subject to forfeiture in the event the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract Documents within ten (10) days after the contract has been awarded. To be an acceptable surety on the bond, (1) the name of the surety company shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, or (2) the surety company must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the limit on the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. The amount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the U.S. Treasury list or one-tenth (1 /I 0) the total capital and surplus. 1 1. BONDS. A performance bond, a payment bond, and a maintenance bond each for one hundred ( 1 00%) percent of the contract price will be required. Reference C3-3.7. 12. WAGE RA TES . Not less that the prevailing wage rates established by the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and as set forth in the Contract Documents, must be paid on this project. Part A-rev Add I .doc A-6 City of Fort Worth North s ide Ill Avondale-H as let Roa d Elevated St orage Tank 13. AMBIGUITY: In the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the Proposal, the City reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the Proposal. 14. BIDDER LICENSE : Prior to the award of contract to an out-of-state bidder, the bidder shall be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. For licensing procedures, contact the Texas Secretary of State Offices (Telephone Number 1-512-463-5555 or 1-900-263-0060) 15. NONRESIDENT BIDDERS: Pursuant to Article 601 g , Texas Revised Civil Statues, the City of Fort Worth will not award this contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident's bid is lower than the lowest bid submitted by a Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident principal place of business is located. "Nonresident bidder" means a bidder whose principal place of business is not in this state , but excludes a contract whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has a place of business in the State of Texas. This provision does not apply if this contract involves federal funds. The appropriate blanks of the Proposal must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for the bid to meet specifications . The failure of a nonresident contractor to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. 16 . AGE: In accordance with the policy of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officer, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors , while engaged in performing this contract, s hall , in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification , retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members , agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitation to advertisement for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirements . · Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend , indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or s ubcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply wit the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of the contract. 17 . DISABILITY : In accordance with provision of the American with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on; the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or condition s of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors . Contract warrants it will fully comply with ADA 's provision and any other applicable Federal, State , and local laws concerning disability and will defend , indemnify and hold harmless against any claim s or a llegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and /or its subcontractor 's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this contract. 18 . MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES : ln accord with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No . 15530 , the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts . A copy of the Ordnance can be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. The bidder shall submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER UTILIZATION FORM , PRIME CONTRACTOR W AIYER FORM, and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("with Documentation") and/or the JOINT VENTURE FORM as appropriate. The Documentation must be received by the manag ing department no later than 5:00 p .m., fiv e (5) City bu s in ess days afte r the bid opening d ate . The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the Part A-rev Ad d I.doc A-7 C ity of Fort Worth North s ide 111 Avondale-Hasle t Road Elevated Stora ge Tank appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made . Such receipt shall be evidence that the documentation was received by the City . Failure to comply shall render the bid non- res ponsive . ' Upon requ est , Contractor agrees to provide the Owner compl ete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or Women Business Enterprise (WBE) on a contract and payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit a ny audit and/or examination of any book s, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts ( other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements. Further, any such misrepresentation (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three (3) years. I 9 . ADD END A : Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, at least 96 hours prior to bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders . Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include any addenda issued by the Fort Worth Water D epartment, prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. Bidders are responsible for obtaining all addenda to the contract documents and acknowledging receipt of the addenda by initialing the appropriate s paces on the proposal form. Bids that do not acknowledge receipt of all addenda may be rejected as being non-responsive . Information regarding the status of addenda may be obtained by contacting the Water Department or Design Engineer. 20 . PRE-BID CONFERENCE: There will be no pre-bid conference held for this project. E ND OF SECTION Part A-rev Add I.doc A-8 PARTB TO: Mr. Charles Boswe ll City Manager Fort W orth , Te xas PROPOSAL FOR: Fort Worth Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Project No. P264-607180036833 Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder, having thoroughly examined the Contract Documents, including the plans, special contract documents, and General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department Projects, the site of the project and understanding the amount of work to be done, and the prevailing conditions , hereby proposes to do all the work and furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to fully complete all the work as provided in the Plans and Contract Documents and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director of the City of Fort Worth Water Department; and binds himself upon acceptance of this Proposal to execute a contract and furnish an approved Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and such other bonds, if any, as may be required by the Contract Documents for the performing and completing of the said work. Contractor proposes to do this work within the time stated and for the following sums, to-wit: BASE BID ITEMS ITEM I -CONSTRUCTION OF A 2.0 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK, COMPOSITE Lump sum to complete CONSTRUCTION of a 2.0 MG Composite Elevated Storage Tank and all appurtenances, painting, instrumentation , site work, piping, and landscaping, all equipment, materials and services required in accordance with the Contract Documents, plans and specifications for the project: (Words and Figures) Three Milli o n, One Hundred and Thousand, One Hundred Nin e ty Dollars $ 3 105 190 .00 ITEM 2 -TRENCH SAFETY Lump Sum to complete all trench safety related with the construction of the 2.0 MG Elevated Storage Tank and all appurten ances in accordance with General Conditions and the plans and specifications : (Words and Fi gures) Two Thousand Dollars $ 2 000.00 B - 1 ITEM 3 -Northside III RTU Lump Sum allowance for owner-provided HSQ Model 25x86 RTU with a required 1/0, radio , power supply , battery backup within a 36"H x 30"W x 8"D NEMA 4X aluminum enclosure, and required RTU software delivered to the project site. Item does not include installation , on-s ite testing or start-up, antenna, antenna cables or mast. Any items not included in this price are considered subsidiary to ITEM I -Construction of a 2.0 MG Elevated Storage Tank, Composite . A copy of the quotation for this item is included for reference in the Appendix of this document. (Words and Figures) Twelve Thousand Eight Hundred Ten Dollars TOTAL BASE BID (Items 1, 2, and 3): (Words and Figures) Three Million, One Hundred Twenty Thousand Dollars ADDITIVE BID ITEMS ADDITIVE ITEM 1 -CATHODIC PROTECTION $ ___ 12~8_1 O_.O_O __ $ 3,120,000.00 Lump Sum to complete installation of cathodic protection system related with the construction of the 2 .0 MG Elevated Storage Tank and all appurtenances in accordance with General Conditions and the plans and specifications : (Words and Figures) Thirteen Thousand Dollars $ 13 000 .00 TOTAL BASE BID (Items 1, 2, and 3) and ADDITIVE BID ITEMS (Additive Item 1): (Words and Figures) Three Million , One Hundred Thirty Three Thousand Dollars $ 3,133,000.00 Determination of the lowest responsible bidder will be based on either the lowest total base bid or the lowest total of the base bid and additive item, at the sole discretion of the owner. B -2 For changing quantities of work items from those indicated on the plans and necessitated by actual field conditions upon written instructions from the Engineer, the following unit prices shall prevail: I. Excavation and foundation for the elevated storage tank per vertical foot for depths different than elevation 841 , as determined by the geotechnical engineer. Extra Thirty Thousand Dollars ($ 30,000 .00 ) Credit Three Thousand Dollars ($ 3,000.00 ) B -3 PROPOSAL Within ten (10) days of notification by City, the undersigned will execute the formal contract and deliver an approved Surety Bond and such other bonds as required by the Contract Docume nts , for the faithful performance of this Contract. The attached bid security in an amount equal to 5% of the bid is to become th e property of the City of Fort Worth , Texas , in the event the contract and bond or bonds are not executed and delivered within the time above set forth as liquidated damages for the delay and additional work caused thereby. The undersigned bidder verified that he has obtained at least one set of the General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department Projects dated January 1, 1978, and that he has read and thoroughly understands all the requirements and conditions of those General Documents , and the specific Contract Documents and appurtenant plans. The undersigned assures that its employees and applicants for employment and those of any labor organization , subcontractors, or employment agency in either furnishing of referring employee applicants to the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance No . 7278 as amended by the City Ordinance No. 7400. The bidder agrees to begin construction within 10 calendar days after issue of the work order, and to complete the contract within 505 calendar days, and to meet the substantial completion require ments ( 445 calendar days) specified in Paragraph D-15 of the Special Conditions (Part D), as set forth in the written work order to be furnished by the Owner. The work order will be issued no later than 90 days after the award of the contract. A. The principal place of business of our company is in the State of ___________ ~ Non-resident bidders in the State of , our principal place of business, are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached. Non-resident bidders in the State of ________ , our principal place of business , are not required to underbid resident bidders. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is in the State of Texas . Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda: Addendum No. 1 (initials) OAE Addendum No . 2 (initials) OAE Addendum No . 3 (initials) ___ _ Addendum No . 4 (initials) ___ _ (SEAL) if Bidder is Corporation Date: December 20 2007 See attached Resolution of Authority B -4 Respectfully submitted , CB&!Cons~~ By: ~6 __ Name: Orvillle A. Earhart Title: Business Development Manager Address: 2103 Research Forest Drive The Woodland s, Texas 77380 Tel e phone: 832-513-1122 CERTIFICATION OF RESOLUTION AND AUTHORITY I, Robert H. Wolfe, do hereby certify that I am the duly-elected and acting Assistant Secretary of CB&I Constructors, Inc., a Texas corporation, and that as such officer I am duly authorized to make this certificate in behalf of that corporation. I further certify that by consent in lieu of a meeting dated March 6, 2001, as authorized by Texas law, the Board of Directors of said corporation adopted the following resolution in accordance with the By-laws of said corporation: RESOLVED, that the President, any Vice-President, the Treasurer, or any regional sales manager, contracting manager, regional construction manager, manufacturing manager, project manager or business development manager heretofore or hereafter appointed by the Company or any other sales representative as may from time to time be designated by any one of the President, any Vice- President or the Treasurer, is authorized to make bids, prepare quotations and submit and receive proposals for contracts; to negotiate and sign contracts and other agreements, bid bonds, performance bonds, and other related documents; and to otherwise bind and obligate the Company in the conduct of its normal business. I further certify that the foregoing resolution is in full force and effect and that Orville A. Earhart is a duly designated and authorized Business Development Manager of CB&I Constructors, Inc. This certificate shall remain in full force and effect for ninety days from the date it bears, unless sooner revoked, but no such revocation shall be effective as to anyone dealing with any individual named in this certificate in reliance hereon unless written notice of such revocation has been received by the person so relying on this certificate. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereonto set my hand and the seal of CB&I Constructors, Inc., this 4 day of ___ ---=-F-=eb=-r=u=a=rC..J.y _______ _ 20 08 RobertH.Wolfe,k;istant-Secretary CB&I Constructors,.._Inc. - - - - - - - ADDENDUM NO. 1 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTHSIDE III AVONDALE-HASLET ROAD ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Water Department Project No. P264-607180036833 Addendum No. 1. Issue Date: December 13, 2007 Bid Receipt Date: December 20, 2007 This addendum forms part of the contract docu!Tients referenced above and modifies the original Contract Documents. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by signing and attaching it to the Contract Documents (inside). Note receipt of the Addendum in the Bid Proposal and on the outer envelope of your bid . CLARIFICATION -CONSTRUCTION PLAN SHEET C6 AND ES The chlorine analyzer and adjacent receptacle must have three feet (3 ') of clearance to allow sufficient working room and to satisfy code requirements . If this cannot be achieved in the location shown, these items can be moved south approximately 1 to 3 feet to allow such clearance . Contractor shall adjust any affected bidding quantities accordingly . CLARIFICATION -CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS All motors shall be rated for 460 volt service . PART A -SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • Section 1 -Special Prequalification Requirements The last sentence of the second paragraph which begins "Any additional documents so requested ... " shall be DELETED and shall be REPLACED with the following: "Any additional documents so requested shall be submitted to the Director of the Water Department, or his designated representative, at least three (3) calendar days prior to the date of the opening bids ." • Section 1 -Special Prequalification Requirements The last sentence of paragraph ( e) on page A-4 of the Specifications which begins "Failure to notify ... " shall be DELETED and shall be REPLACED with the following ; "Failure to notify shall not be a waiver of any necessary pre-qualifications." PART E-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • Specification 09910, Steel Water Storage Tank Painting 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, Section 1.05, ADD the following Item C: "C. The Contractor shall control emissions from abrasive blasting in accordance with 30 TAC, Rule 111.135 or Rule 111.137." ADDENDUM NO. 1, Page I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator REPLACE the specification in its entirety as attached. Specification 13201, Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank 3 .04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE, Section 3 .04 .A, Architectural Concrete Construction The third sentence of the sixth paragraph, which states "Concrete pour height shall be a minimum of 6 ft. and a maximum of IO ft.", shall be DELETED in its entirety. • Specification 16910 -Instrumentation 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS , DELETE Paragraph E. and REPLACE with the following : "Intrusion sensors for pedestal doorways shall be SENTROL 2200 Series Miniature Surface Mount Intrusion Detectors with stainless steel armored cable (McMaster Carr Cat. # 8039A5 I). Intrusion detection at top of EST tank access hatch and vault NSIV Transfer meter vault hatch shall be Square-D LI OOWT or equal with 3 circuits, adjustable roller arm, set to close contacts when hatch is I (one) inch open ." • Specification 16910 -Instrumentation PART 2 -PRODUCTS, ADD Section 2.09 as follows: "2.09 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES "A. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for NSIV Transfer Vault Instrumentation Terminal panel shall be provided for equipment as shown on the drawings. UPS ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings. UPS shall have surge protection . UPS shall be installed in the instrument cabinet if possible or otherwise protected from the weather and shielded from the sun in a NEMA 4X panel. "B . UPS 's rated 350 VA shall be American Power Conversion (APC) model BK350 or equal." • Specification 16910 -Instrumentation PART 3 -EXECUTION, REPLACE the title "2.09 INSTALLATION GENERAL" with the following: "3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL" • Specification 16910 -Instrumentation PART 3 -EXECUTION, REPLACE the title "2 .10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS" with the following : "3 .02 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS " CONSTRUCTION PLANS • Sheet C12, Detail D/150 -The note referencing the Vault Ventilator shall be REVISED to read as follows: "Vault Ventilator, 811,i'' wheel, Loren Cook SRSH-D, or approved equal." • Sheet El -Underground Conduit Tag labeled "XXXX" from tank pedestal to SCADAAntenna is hereby REVISED as follows: "l -2"C., ANTENNA COAX CABLE ." ADDENDUM NO. 1, Page 2 - - - - - - - - - - - • Sheet E3 -Emergency light fixture identified as "E " under "MARK" column is hereby REVISED as follows: DELETE "COLUMBIA" and REPLACE with "GUTH" in manufacturer column and REVISE "CATALOG NUMBER" to be "G l 2NX-l 8-V-66 " • Sheet E3 -DELETE Note I on the CONTROL CONDUIT & CABLE SCHEDULE . • Sheet E3 -The circuit described as "VENTILATION FAN RECEPTACLE" in "PANEL SCHEDULE" is hereby REVISED to read as follows : "VENTILATION FAN MOTOR SWITCH." • Sheet E4, Control Schematic-Motorized Butterfly Valve Detail -The labels "208V 3PHASE (SYMBOL)" AND "PANELBOARD" are hereby REVISED to read as follows : "480V 3PHASE (SYMBOL)" and "ENCLOSED C.B.", respectively. • Sheet ES -Background information showing inlet/outlet, bypass, and drain piping as shown in ELECTRICAL PLAN is incorrect. REFER to Civil drawing sheets for accurate location of this information. • Sheet ES -The location of the Chlorine Analyzer and adjacent receptacle shown in ELECTRICAL PLAN is incorrect. REFER to Civil drawing sheets for location of the Chlorine Analyzer. See clarification. • Sheet ES -The reference in Note 11 which reads "REF XX/XX" is hereby REVISED to read as follows : "REF 01/El ." • Sheet E9, Detail OS-Item 1 of"VAULT EQUIPMENT LEGEND" referred to as "VENTILATION FAN RECEPTACLE" is hereby REVISED to read "MOTOR RATED NEMA 4 PADLOCKABLE DISCONNECT SWITCH." • Sheet E9, Detail 05 -Equipment location and arrangement is incorrect. REFER to Civil drawing sheets for the correct location. All other provisions of the contract documents, plans and specifications shall remain unchanged. Failure to return a signed copy of the addendum with the Proposal may be grounds for rendering the bid non- re sponsive . A signed copy of this addendum shall be placed into the Proposal at the time of bid submittal. Addendum Prepared by: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc . 801 Cherry Street, Unit 11, Suite 950 Fort Worth, Texas 76102 (817) 335-6511 Water Department Farida S. Goderya, Ph .D., P.E . Project Manager RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED: By:---------------- Company: ADDENDUM NO. I , Page 3 Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page I of 8 A . Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into operation, butterfly control valve as specified herein and shown on the drawings . 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Unit Responsibility and Coordination: The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this section to be furnished by the valve manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all valve components including the actuator. Any component of each complete unit not provided by the valve manufacturer shall be designed, fabricated, tested, and installed by factory- authorized representatives experienced in the design and manufacture of the valve equipment. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work . B. Design Requirements: Upstream Maximum Pressure Downstream Minimum Pressure Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate 24-inch 75 psi 55 psi Re: 02642 Re: 02642 Valve shall operate in the above conditions without damage to the valve 16-inch 85 psi 30 psi Re: 02642 Re:02642 Unit shall be designed to receive 4-20 mA signal from a flow meter and modulate to control flow based on a remote user setting. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS : The equipment to be provided under this section shall be suitable for installation and operation in potable water sy stems . 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A . Submittals required after award of contract and prior to installation : I . Technical bulletins and brochures. 2 . Electrical diagram . B. Submittals required prior to final walk through : 1. Operation a nd Maintenance Manual. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.05 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 2 of 8 A. A factory representative of all major component manufacturers, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided for one day to instruct representatives of the Owner on proper operation and maintenance. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment during instruction sessions, additional sessions shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. B. Prior to scheduling instructions, submit outline of instructions to Engineer for approval. C. Operating and maintenance manual shall be explained during these instructions. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS: A . Furnish one set of special tools required for the proper servicing of all equipment supplied under these Specifications, packed in a suitable steel tool chest with a lock. 1.07 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS : A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation . B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site . C. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges , strongly built and securely bolted thereto. D . Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Substantial Completion . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 BUTTERFLY CONTROL VALVE: A . See Section 02642 -Butterfly Valves. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. l -Page 3 of 8 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR: A . General : The actuator shall be manufactured by EIM Controls, Inc ., Rotork controls, Inc., or pre-approved equal. This specification requires the use of only non-intrusive design electric actuators. Electric actuator shall include the 460 VAC / 3 PH/ 60 Hz electric motor, integral \/.i-turn worm gear, reduction gearing, valve stem drive nut/bushing, position limit switches, mechanical overload torque switches, ductile iron gear case, local pushbutton control station, close-coupled circuit breaker disconnect and automatic de-clutchable handwheel. B. A <;tuator Sizing: The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure . The safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage l 0% below nominal. The operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 120 seconds. C. Ambient Temperature : The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from minus 22° F (- 300 C) to plus 158° F (+ 70° C). D. Motor: Electric motors shall be specifically designed for designed for valve actuator service, and shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated. The enclosure shall meet NEMA 4 (weatherproof), NEMA 6 (temporary submergence, 6 ft. head for 30 minutes) and NEMA 7 (explosion-proof) as standard. Motor shall be capable of operation under maximum specified loads when the voltage to the motor is +/- l 0% of the nominal voltage. Motor shall have Class F insulation with thermal overload sensors imbedded in the motor windings. Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows: l. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve . 2. A thermostat imbedded in the windings to protect against overheating shall sense motor temperature. E. Limit Switches: Limit switches shall be geared to the drive mechanism and in step with actual valve position at all times , whether operation is by power or manual mode. Switches shall be activated by a rotor type design . Contacts shall be silver and have a rating of 10 amps at 120 VAC , a minimum of(3) N .O . and (3) N .C. contacts shall be provided for each direction of travel plus two intermediate contacts . The limit switch gear mechanism shall be enclosed to prevent entrance of foreign matter or wire Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 4 of 8 entanglement. Use of cams or screws to set switches or designs requiring battery back-up methods to ensure position control in the event of a power failure , are unacceptable. F . Gearing: Motor speed reduction shall be by means of a gear train consisting of hardened steel spur gears and self-locking worm and worm gear set. The worm shall be heat treated alloy steel and have worm thread surface rolled or ground. The worm gear shall be bronze . Non-metallic gears in the power train are not acceptable. All gearing and shafting shall be supported on anti-friction bearings. All thrust components shall be supported by use of tapered roller bearings. All gearing and bearings shall be grease lubricated and suitable for year-round service based on prevailing ambient temperature conditions. G. Hand Operation : A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar means; the drive being restored to power automatically by starting the motor. The hand/auto selection lever should be padlockable in both "Hand" and "Auto" positions . It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in "Hand" without damage to the drive train . Handwheel or handcrank rim pull shall NOT exceed 80 pounds. The handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive, and any gearing should be such as to permit emergency manual operation in a reasonable time. Clockwise operation of the handwheel shall give opening movement of the valve per City of Fort Worth standards, unless otherwise stated in the job specification. For safety purposes, it shall be possible to disengage the electric drive with the declutch lever. This disengagement and any subsequent reengagement shall not cause any damage to the valve or operator -even with the motor running. H. Drive Bushing: The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Normally the drive bush shall be positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings , when housed in a separate thrust base, should be of the sealed-for-life type. I. Remote Valve Position/ Actuator Status Indication: Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve with each contact selectable as normally open or normally closed . The contacts shall be rated at SA, 120V AC, 30V DC. Current source 4-20 mA output transmitter shall provide constant valve position feedback. Gearbox visual indicator only is not acceptable. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 J. Local Position Indication: SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 5 of 8 The display shall be able to be rotated in 90-degree increments in order to provide easy viewing regardless of actuator mounting position. K. Integral Starter and Transformer: The reversing starter, control transformer, and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator, suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation buildup. For ON/OFF service, this starter shall be a solid-state type suitable for 60 starts per hour not to exceed a rate of 600 starts per hour and of a rating appropriate to the motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of the incoming three phases. The primary and secondary windings shall have short circuit and overload protection. It shall have the necessary tappings and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions: 1. 24V DC output, or alternate 11 OV AC output, where required for remote controls 2. Supply for all the internal electrical circuits L. Integral Push Buttons and Selector: Integral to the actuator shall be local controls for Open , Close, and Stop, and a local/remote selector switch pad lockable in any one of the following three positions: 1. Local Control Only 2 . Off (No Electrical Operation) 3 . Remote Control plus Local Stop Only. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control. The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed without the necessity of stopping the actuator. M. Modulating Service Controls Modulating service controls shall be provided with up to 1200 starts per hour with positioning accuracy to +/-1.0%, and shall include the following : Comparative Circuit shall be a solid-state plug-in PC board to accept a 4-20 mA input control signal from a position controller and have zero, span and deadband adjustments. The circuit shall provide, as standard , a 4-20 mA output signal for remote position indications . Both input and output signals shall be optically isolated . The circuit shall include a jumper selectable setting to Remain-In-Last Position or Close on Loss on control signal. Reversing Contactor Control voltage shall be 120 volts , 50 or 60 Hz. N.O. Seal-in contacts for momentary contact pushbutton control and N .C.contacts for electrical interlock shall be supplied. When specified, additional contacts(] N .O. and 1 N.C . for open and close coils) shall be supplied. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No . l -Page 6 of 8 The contactor shall be both electrically and mechanically interlocked. It shall be completely wired as an assembly and plug connected to the modular package. Control Power Transformer assembly shall provide 115 , 18 and 12 VAC. It shall be epoxy impregnated and encapsulated to prevent moisture incursion and shall be completely wired as an assembly and plug connected to the modular package. Each actuator shall be supplied with open-stop-close pushbuttons furnished integrally mounted. Pushbuttons shall be double o-ring sealed and include a protective silicone boot. Seal material shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet light. When integrally mounted pushbuttons are specified, the design shall permit operation of the buttons when the electrical enclosure cover is open. The actuator shall include two (2) long life high intensity LED type pilot lights to indicate open, closed and intermediate valve position (both lights on). Red shall indicate valve open and green shall indicate valve closed . The actuator shall include a 3-position selector switch, for local (hand)-off-remote (auto) control. The selector switch shall be padlockable in any position . N . Monitoring and Diagnostics Facilities: Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows : Monitor (availability) relay, having one change-over contact, the relay being energized from the control transformer only when the Local/Off/Remote selector is in the "Remote" position and thermostat is not "tripped" to indicate that the actuator is available for remote (control room) operation . Where required, it shall be possible to provide indication of thermostat trip and "Remote" selected as discreet signals. 0 . Wiring and Terminals: Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and three-phase power. E a ch wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a minimum of three threaded cable entries. When required, a forth cable entry shall be provided. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator shall be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable. Control logic circuit boards and relay boards must be mounted on plastic mounts to comply with double insulated standards. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided and attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 Nove mber 2007 1. Serial Number 2. External Voltage Values 3 . Wiring Diagram Number 4. Terminal Layout SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No . 1 -Page 7 of 8 This must be suitable for the contractor to inscribe cable core identification beside terminal numbers. P. Enclosure : Actuator shall be designed for non-intrusive start up/ commissioning Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 6. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be stainless steel. Q. Startup Kit: Each actuator shall be supplied with a startup kit comprising installation instruction, electrical wiring diagram, and sufficient spare cover screws and seals to make good any site losses during the commissioning period. R. Performance Test Certificate: Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free-of- charge. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load and the following parameters should be recorded : 1. Current at maximum torque setting 2. Torque at maximum torque setting 3. Flash Test Voltage 4. Actuator Output Speed or Operating Time In addition , the test certificate should record details of specification , such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, and wiring diagram code number. S. Warranty and Spare Parts: Each actuator shall be warranted for a period of 60 months from date of shipment. This warranty shall be held in effect regardless of precommissioning conditions in a typical indoor or outdoor environment as long as the actuator is not abused or disassembled . This warranty shall not require the use of special storage procedures (such as the use of indoor storage, plastic bags , desiccants, and the energization of heater(s) in order to be maintained . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 8 of 8 The successful bidder to allow for actuator rebuild or repair shall inventory a complete compliment of spare parts. All spares shall be available to plant personnel within 72 hours ofrequest as not to delay plant operations. T. Actuator Mounting and Service: Electric motor operators shall be provided by the local Representative. Cycle test to be witnessed by the Engineer, Contractor and Owner's Representative prior to delivery to jobsite if requested. Actuator for 24" valve to be direct-mounted using carbon steel bracket and coupling with black powder coat finish . Actuator for 16" valve to be floorstand mounted above grade with stem extension to 2" A WWA operating nut. Floorstand and stem extension to be fabricated from carbon steel with nylon powdercoat on floorstand. Powdercoat finish shall be UV resistant. Follow all manufacturers' instructions for storage, installation and field wiring actuator at jobsite. Local manufacturers' Representative shall provide start-up service on each actuator after installation and field wiring is complete. VALVE SCHEDULE TAG# QTY SIZE TYPE Actuator CYCLE TIME TBD 1 24" AWWA Y..-turn 120 sec. BFV TBD 1 16" AWWA Multi-turn 120 sec. BFV - PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION: A . All flow control valves shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. B. Installation and adjustment shall be checked and approved by a manufacturer's factory representative. After acceptance, the representative shall address a letter to the Engineer outlining all installation and start up procedures. The letter shall include a statement that the valves are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. The manufacturer or his qualified representative shall conduct training session for the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the valve. END OF SECTION - - - - ADDENDUM NO. 2 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTHSIDE III AVONDALE-HASLET ROAD ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Water Department Project No. P264-607180036833 Addendum No. 2 Issue Date: December 18, 2007 Bid Receipt Date: December 20, 2007 This addendum forms part of the contract documents referenced above and modifies the original Contract Documents. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by signing and attaching it to the Contract Documents (inside). Note receipt of the Addendum in the Bid Proposal and on the outer envelope of your bid. CLARIFICATION -CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The clarification regarding motors in Addendum No. I is hereby REVISED as follows: All motors for actuated butterfly valves shall be rated for 460 volt service . PART E -TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR, Section 2.02 .A, the actuator manufacturer listed in the first sentence of the first paragraph as "Rotork controls , Inc ." is hereby REVISED as follows: -"Rotork Controls , Inc ." - - - - • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR, Section 2.02.D, the second sentence of the first paragraph which begins "The enclosure shall meet. .. " shall be DELETED and shall be REPLACED with the following: "The enclosure shall meet NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 6 (temporary submergence , 6ft. head for 30 minutes)." • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2.02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR, Section 2 .02.E "Limit Switches" shall be DELETED in its entirety . • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR, Section 2.02 .F, the third paragraph which begins "All gearing and bearings ... " shall be DELETED in its entirety . ADDENDUM NO. 2 , Page 1 - - - - - - - - - - • Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator • • 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALV E ACTUATOR, Section 2 .02.1 , the first sentence of the fir st paragraph which begins "Four Contacts shall be provided ... " shall be DELETED and shall be REPLACED with the following : "Eight contacts, independently set, shall be provided which can be selected to indicate an y position of the valve with each contact selectable as normally open or normally closed ." Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2.02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR, Section 2 .02.M, the first paragraph which begins "Modulating service controls ... " shall be DELETED and shall be REPLACED with the following : "Modulating service controls shall be provided with up to 1200 starts per hour with positioning accuracy to+/-0 .25%, and shall include the following:" Specification 11296, Flow Control Valve and Actuator 2 .02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VAL VE ACTUATOR, Section 2 .02 .M, the third and fourth sentences of the second paragraph which begin "Both input and output signals ... " and "The circuit shall include ... " shall be DELETED in their entirety. CONSTRUCTION PLANS • Sheet C6, Detail B/C6 -The note referencing the Personnel Door shall be REVISED to read as follows : "3' X 7' Personnel Door." • Sheet Cl, Site Plan A/Cl -The coordinates for the Northeast Property Comer are hereby REVISED as follows : "N 7037947.51 , E 2303054.87 ." • Sheet Cl, Site Plan A/Cl -The coordinates for the Southeast Property Comer are hereby REVISED as follows : "N 7037747.49, E 2303054 .13 ." All other provisions of the contract documents , plans and specifications shall remain unchanged . Failure to return a signed copy of the addendum with the Proposal may be grounds for rendering the bid non- responsive. A signed copy of this addendum shall be placed into the Proposal at the time of bid submittal. Addendum Prepared by : Kimley-Hom and Associates , Inc . 801 Cherry Street, Unit 11 , Suite 950 Fort Worth , Texas 76102 (817)335-6511 Water Department Farida S. Goderya , Ph .D ., P.E . Project Manager RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED: By :---------------- Company : ADDENDUM NO. 2, Pa ge 2 .W. _., MEN zl :Ff f OF O t =tt 0 r thejai -. - c I a+ d e�uitabl'� p<arljda_ t ll k�5f h4�inpr �y end nme 6usiraes5 Erg#en`t' ,rocurerixeii# off: �kl':iti ±y , s F } '� - :,:, r1L�:servie:# lh Gi'y on a c:,l,fra'=.teal basis. if aeq�i�remerlts eg "r-; :,t k-{ ��r.t �' 5 2 s li rMts J wnty;s 7; Filen Birsin ss nletfriset7rdira ncB pS& to this bid. „ICE goal.C9'i rt5 r. .I 4 °' -�f J'l �:-1� I.--_—-.tr8 �trifbid iishJd Fpflrr,t3FarH.,nJC-Ityervicesl- 1 ! . r:f1i'c'vl:: , i l ��: "'j'�T n7r}r j•, l;J�irJvrS afa ro L,ir&' F f :. ,. I . to c )rJiply v�[i llle if, I III the' CA 's M Jb E3F � „a y r r 'iI, r..i�ti:: i. I �JTLf11'F1 k+ �.1�1;$t'.t Ctif �:•=1:�€�;iJ{' i3[}L}V•: S�r�t$Ci: f1t �����+�viil, L,r, � - . .. - - - . { }! .�JFr 4 yy}b L - _ - " � �•. f'�ii _ m� N- MOW �.d:by te.e.Marta inr C�e�,;=11 e ii +tiitk��� Ihe. f,�[j ��rrr_ri :J€[nos..911ocatt�d;tin-6fdcr:`.':;: EXIMIR 3`in#'ra' o .l#iii#iolrr F�¢L _ '.— -- _ t,k'' ai r .. .ed' R ... , fva'(5). Ci!y days aiter.'wo ti'J l - Cli[+ ;{J3�fGid 9cnIR'� dot i �L�,} �ve..{ tty: 2n�� r7 ss � y �f�k_r !h•_ �-I'_i 4t1 Rif M1•LYdY'l niri 13SJV 0f t+e.',id i. r. r?Irrc,J date 1•: n°�rini�'L�f�.'�a�'S�:."`.�si�::�}mac=t�sc.r�.� f,�rc�^�a' . ,l:. „ �_v.J.._.._ _-- . - _ - - — Ally Myiw� lea g:n n, S S(Gf�1S€Y$Ot'tfi bod:op8rk11 IT :-excu;i+��f�'�iteGiaa�ii aftII bid -V'c3iL'-. -� le$S day.5:�ttnrtf�e bl� I . ATTACHMENT fib 3 of 4 . u�a� �ti �a�� m�zF�a�v- Worm Sa�plis Purcht!olltirArerourit C T: <. `f' f rw r .t{r'+4l~1) Y7 am C � I 1Y � 'i � i' �-mil +fti 0:•4:C 1+ ci r C) IIF •1 - ±T~~~~~~}j~~~~ii~~~~~ iE:,;:J;l\~i ~~ii:;~~~:IT~~·!?~,t?t~~i,~1~7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FORT WORTH Rev. 5/30/03 "'-,--a W a ---- City of Fort Worth Prime Contractor Waiver Form PRIME COMPANY NAME : Check applicable block to describe prime PROJECT NAME : I M/W/DBE I I NON -M/W/DBE BIO DATE City's M/WBE Project Goal: PROJECT NUMBER % If both answers to this form are YES, do not complete ATTACHMENT 1C(Good Faith Effort Form). All questions on th is form must be completed and a detailed explanation provided, if applicable . If the answer to either question is NO, then you must complete ATTACHMENT 1C . This form is only applicable if both answers are yes . Failure to complete thi~·form jn its e!1tirety an~ be re,ceiv'ed 'by the Managing Department on or before -5:00 p.m., five (S}'City business days after· bid opening, exclusive ofthe bid opening date, will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to _l>id '~p~c::ifjc~tions.,. . v_;.•, Will you perform this entire contract without subcontractors? YES If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project , NO this is your normal business practice and provide an operational profile of your business . Will you perform this entire contract without suppliers? YES If yes , please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project , this is your normal business practice and provide an inventory profile of your business . NO The bidder further agrees to provide , directly to the City upon request , complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors , including M/WBE(s) on this contract , the payment therefore and any proposed changes to the original M/WBE(s) arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed by the M/WBEs on this contract , by an authorized officer or employee of the City . Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal , State or Local laws concerning false statements . Any failure to comply w ith this ordinance creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one ( 1) year. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Tille Contact Name (if different) Company Name Phone Number Fa x Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FORT WORTH .._.,, •. ~ PRIME COMPANY NAME: PROJECT NAME : City's M/WBE Project Goal: % City of Fort Worth Good Faith Effort Form PROJECT NUMBER Rev . 05/30/03 Check applicable block to describe prime I M/W/DBE I I NON-M/W/DBE BID DATE If you have failed to secure M/WBE participation and you have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities or if your DBE participation is less than the City's project goal, you must complete this form. If the bidder's method of compliance with the M/WBE goal is based upon demonstration of a "good faith effort", the bidder will have the burden of correctly and accurately preparing and submitting the documentation required by the City. Compliance with each item, 1 thru 6 below, shall satisfy the Good Faith Effort requirement absent proof of fraud, intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation the facts or intentional discrimination by the bidder. Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with supporting documentation, and received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m. five (5) City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date, will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. 1.) Please list each and every subcontracting and/or supplier opportunity} for the completion of this project, regardless of whether it is to be provided by a M/WBE or non-M/WBE. (DO NOT LIST NAMES OF FIRMS) On Combined Projects, list each subcontracting and or supplier opportunity through the 2"a tier. (Use additional sheets, if necessary) List of Subcontracting Opportunities List of Supplier Opportunities - - - - - - - - - - 2.) Obtain a current (not more than three (3) months old from the bid open date) list of M/WBE subcontractors and/or suppliers from the City's M/WBE Office. __ Yes __ No Date of Listing __ / ___ / __ Rev . 05/30/03 3.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by mail, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? __ Yes (If yes, attach M/WBE mail listing to include name of firm and address and a dated copy of letter mailed.) __ No 4.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by telephone, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? __ Yes (If yes, attach list to include name of M/WBE firm, person contacted, phone number and date and time of contact.) __ No NOTE: A facsimile may be used to comply with either 3 or 4, but may not be used for both. If a facsimile is used, attach the fax confirmation, which is to provide M/WBE name, date, time, fax number and documentation faxed. NOTE: If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is ten (10) or less, the bidder must contact the entire list to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is ten (10) or more, the bidder must contact at least two- thirds (2/3) of the list within such area of opportunity, but not less than ten to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. 5.) Did you provide plans and specifications to potential M/WBEs or information regarding the location of plans and specifications in order to assist the M/WBEs? __ Yes __ No 6.) Submit documentation if M/WBE quotes were rejected. The documentation submitted should be in the forms of an affidavit, include a detailed explanation of why the M/WBE was rejected and any supporting documentation the bidder wishes to be considered by the City. In the event of a bona fide dispute concerning quotes, the bidder will provide for confidential in-camera access to and inspection of any relevant documentation by City personnel. (Please use additional sheets, if necessarv, and attach.J Company Name Telephone Contact Person Scope of Work Reason for Rejection - - - - - - - - - Rev . 05/30/03 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Please provide additional information you feel will further explain your good and honest efforts to obtain M/WBE participation on this project. The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed on this contract, the payment thereof and any proposed changes to the original arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1) year. The undersigned certifies that the information provided and the M/WBE(s) listed was/were contacted in good faith. It is understood that any M/WBE(s) listed in Attachment 1 C will be contacted and the reasons for not using them will be verified by the City's M/WBE Office. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title Contact Name and Title (if different) Company Name Phone Number Fax Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date - - - - - - - - - FORT WORTH a . "-m • ~ CITY OF FORT WORTH Joint Venture Eligibility Form All questions must be answered; use "NA " if applicable. Rev . 5/30/03 Name of City project:---------------------------------- A j oi nt ve nture form mu st be completed on eac h proj ec t 1. Joint venture information: Joint Venture Name : Jo int Venture Addre ss : (If applica ble) Telephone : Ce llul ar: RFP/Bid/Purchas ing Number: --------------- Facsimile : E-mail address : Identify the firms that comprise the joint venture : Plea se attach ex tra sheets if additional space is required to provide detailed explanations of work to be performed by each firm comprising the ·oint venture M/WB E firm name : Busi ness Addr ess : C ity , State, Zip: Te leph one Cell ul ar Fa csimile Certification Status: Name of Certifying Agency: 2 S ti f k cope o wor per orme E-mail db th J ' t V t ,y e om en ore: Describe the scope of work of the M/WBE: Non-M/WBE firm name: Busin es s Addre ss : City , State, Zip : Teleph one Cellul ar E -m a il address Facs im ile Describe the scope of work of the non-M/WBE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - Rev . 5/30/03 3 . What is the percentage of M/WBE participation on this joint venture that you wish to be counted toward meeting the project goal? 4. Attach a copy of the joint venture agreement. 5. List components of ownership of joint venture: (Do not complete if this information is described in joint venture agreement) Profit an d los s sharing : Capital contributions, including equipment: Other appli cable ownership interests: 6. Identify by name, race, sex and firm those individuals (with titles) who are responsible for the day-to-day management and decision making of the joint venture: Financial decisions (to include Acc ount Payable an d Receivable): Management decisions : a . Est im atin g ------------------------------- --------------- b. Marketing and Sale s ---------------------------------------------- C. Hiring and Firing of manage ment p ersonn e l ---------------------------------------------- d . Purchasing of major equipment an d/or suppli es Su p ervision of field operations The City 's Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office will review your joint venture submission and will have final approval of the M/WBE percentage applied toward the goal for the project listed on this form . NOTE: From and after the date of project award , if any of the participants , the individually defined scopes of work or the dollar amounts/percentages change from the originally approved information, then the participants must inform the City's M/WBE Office immediately for approval. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the City's M/WBE Ordinance . Rev. 5/30/03 AFFIDAVIT -Th e und ers ign ed affirm s that the fore going statements ar e true and correct and includ e a ll material information nece ssary to identify and explain the terms and operation of the j o int ve nture. Furthermore, the undersigned shall agr ee to provide to the joint venture the stated scope of work , decision-making responsibilities and payments herein . The City also reserves the right to request any additiona l information deemed necessary to determine if the joint venture is eligib le. Fai lure to cooperate and/or provide requested information within the time specified is grounds for termination of the eligibility process . The undersigned agree to permit audits, interviews with owners and examination of the books, record s and file s of the joint venture by any authorized representatives of the City of Fort Worth . Failure to comply with this -provision shall result in the termination of any contract, which may be awarded under the provisions of th is joint venture's eligibility and may initiate action under Federal, State and/or Local laws/ordinances concerning false _ statements or wi 11 fu I_ misrepresentation of facts. _______________ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------_ Name of M/WB E firm Name of non-M/WB E firm Printed Name of Owner Printed Name of Own er Signature of Owner Si gnature of Own er Printed Name of Own er Print ed Name of Own er Signature of Ow ner Si gnatur e of Own er Title Titl e - Date Date - Nota riza tio n State of ___________________ County of ______________ _ On this _____________ day of ________ , 20 ___, before me appeared and ------------------------------------------ to me personally known and who, being dul y sworn , did execute the foregoing affidavit and did state that they were -properly authorized to execute this affidavit and did so as their free act and deed . Notary Public -P-,ri-nt_,..N,-am_e _____________________ _ -Notary Public------------------------ Signatur e Commission Expire s ______________________ _ (seal) - Cl-I Cl-I.I Cl-1.2 Cl-1.3 Cl-1.4 Cl-1.5 Cl-1.6 Cl-1.7 CI-1.8 Cl-1.9 Cl-I.IO Cl-1.11 Cl-1.12 Cl-1.13 Cl-1.14 Cl-1.15 Cl-1.16 Cl-1.17 Cl-1.18 Cl-1.19 Cl-1.20 Cl-1.21 Cl-1.22 Cl-1.23 Cl-1.24 Cl-1.25 Cl-1.26 Cl-1.27 Cl-1.28 Cl-1.29 Cl-1.30 Cl-1.31 Cl-1.32 PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 1, 1987 TABLE OF CONTENTS DEFINITIONS Definition of Terms Contract Documents Notice to Bidders Proposal Bidder General Conditions Special Conditions Specifications Bonds Contract Plans City City Council Mayor City Manager City Attorney Director of Public Works Director, City Water Department Engineer Contractor Sureties The Work or Project Working Day Calendar Days Legal Holidays Abbreviations Change Order Paved Streets and Alleys Unpaved Streets or Alleys City Street Roadway Gravel Street Cl-I (1) Cl-I (1) Cl-1 (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (2) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (3) Cl-I (4) Cl-1 (4) Cl-I (4) CI-1 (4) Cl-1 (4) Cl-I (4) Cl-I (5) Cl-I (5) Cl-I (6) Cl-1 (6) Cl-1 (6) Cl-1 (6) C2-2 'INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2 . l C2-2 .2 C2-2.3 C2-2 .4 C2 -2.5 Proposal Form Interpretation of Quantities Examination of Contract Documents and Site of Project Submitting of Proposal Rejection of Propo sa ls (I) C2-2(1) C2-2 (1) C2-2 (2) C2-2 (2) C2-2 (3) C2-2.6 C2-2.7 C2-2 .8 C2-2 .9 C2-2.10 C2-2.11 C2-2.12 C3-3 C3-3.1 C3-3.2 C3-3 .3 C3-3.4 C3-3 .5 C3-3.6 C3-3.7 C3-3.8 C3-3 .9 C-3-3 .10 C3-3.11 C3-3.12 C3-3.13 C3-3.14 C3-3.15 C4-4 C4-4 . I C4-4 .2 C4-4.3 C4-4.4 C4-4.5 C4-4.6 C4-4 .7 Bid Security Delivery of Proposal Withdrawing Proposals Telegraphic Modifications of Proposals Public Opening of Proposal Irregular Proposals Disqualification of Bidders AW ARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: Consideration of Proposals Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business Enterprise Compliance Equal Employment Provisions Withdrawal of Proposals A ward of Contract Return of Proposal Securities Bonds Execution of Contract Failure to Execute Contract Beginning Work Insurance Contractor's Obligations Weekly Payrolls Contractor's Contract Administration Venue SCOPE OF WORK Intent of Contract Documents Special Provisions Increased or Decreased Quantities Alteration of Contract Documents Extra Work Schedule of Operation Progress Schedules for Water and Sewer Plant Facilities C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERlALS C5-5.1 C5-5.2 C5-5.3 C5-5.4 C5-5.5 C5-5 .6 C5-5 .7 C5 -5.8 Authority of Engineer Conformity with Plans Coordination of Contract Documents · Cooperation of Contractor Emergency and/or Rectification Work Field Office Con struction Stakes Authority and Duties of City In s pector (2) C2-2 (3) C2-2 (3) C2 -2 (3) C2-2 (3) C2 -2 (4) C2-2 (4) C2-2 (4) C3 -3 (1) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (3) C3-3 (3) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (6) C3-3 (6) C3-3 (6) C3-3 (7) C4-4 (I) C4-4 (I) C4-4 (I) C4-4 (2) C4-4 (2) C4-4 (3) C4-4 (4) C?-5 (1) C5-5 (1) C5-5 (I) C5-5 (2) C5-5 (2) CS-5 (3) CS-5 (3) CS-5 (3) 'l )t l t C5-5 .9 C5-5.10 C5-5.l l C5-5. l 2 C5-5.13 C5-5. l 4 C5-5. l 5 C5-5. l 6 C5-5. l 7 C5-5.18 C6-6 C6-6.1 C6-6.2 C6-6.3 C6-6.4 C6-6.5 C6-6.6 C6-6 .7 C6-6.8 C6-6.9 C6-6 . l 0 C6.6. l l C6-6.12 C6-6 .13 C6-6 .14 C6-6. l 5 C6-6.16 C6-6 .l 7 C6-6 .18 C6-6 . l 9 C6-6.20 C6-6.21 C7-7 C7-7 . l C7-7 .2 C7-7.3 C7-7.4 C7-7.5 C7-7.6 C7-7.7 C7-7 .8 C7-7.9 Inspection Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work Substitute Materials or Equipment Samples and Tests of Materials Storage of Materials Existing Structures and Utilities Interruption of Service Mutual Responsibility of Contractors Clean-Up Final Inspection LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY Laws to be Observed Permits and Licenses Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes Sanitary Provisions Public Safety and Convenience Privileges f Contractor in Streets, Alleys, and Right-of-Way Railway Crossings Barricades, Warnings and Flagmen Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. Work Within Easements Independent Contractor Contractor's Responsibility for Damage Claims Contractor's Claim for Damages Adjustment or Relocation of Public Utilities, Etc. Temporary Sewer and Drain Connections Arrangement and Charges for Water Furnished by the City Use of a Section or Portion of the Work Contractor's Responsibility for the Work No Waiver of Legal Rights Personal Liability of Public Officials State Sales Tax PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS Subletting Assignment of Contract Prosecution of The Work Limitation of Operations Character of Workmen and Equipment Work Schedule Time of Commencement and Completion E xtension of Time Completion Del ay s (3) C5-5 (4) C5-5 (4) C5-5 (4) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (6) C5-5 (7) C5-5 (7) C5-5 (8) C6-6 (I) C6-6 (I) C6-6 (I) C6-6 (I) C6-6 (2) C6-6 (3) C6-6 (3) C6-6 (3) C6-6 (4) C6-6 (5) C6-6 (6) C6-6 (6) C6-6 (8) C6-6 (8) C6-6 (8) C6-6 (9) C6-6 (9) C6-6 (9) C6-6 (9) C6-6 (10) C6-6 (10) C7-7 (1) C7-7 (I) C7-7 (I) C7-7(2) C7-7(2) C7-7(3) C7-7(3) C7-7 (3) C7-7 (4) f ~ ,I • C7-7 .l 0 Time of Completion C7-7 (4) C 7-7 .l l Suspension by Court Order C7-7(5) C7-7 . l 2 Temporary Suspension C7-7(5) C7-7.l 3 Termination of Contract due to National Emergency C7-7 (6) C 7-7 .l 4 Suspension or Abandonment of the Work C7-7 (6) and Annulment of the Contract: C7-7 .l 5 Fulfillment of Contract C7-7 (8) C7-7 .16 Termination for Convenience of the Owner C7-7 (8) C7-7. I 7 Safety Methods and Practices C7-7 (11) C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ~ "- C8-8 . I Measurement Of Quantities C8-8 (I) t C8-8.2 Unit Prices C8-8 (I) l C8-8.3 Lump Sum C8-8 (I) C8-8.4 Scope of Payment C8-8 (I) . C8-8.5 Partial Estimates and Retainage C8-8 (2) ,, C8-8 .6 Withholding Payment C8-8 (3) C8-8 .7 Final Acceptance C8-8 (3) " C8-8 .8 Final Payment C8-8 (3) C8 -8.9 Adequacy of Design C8-8 (4) C8-8. l 0 General Guaranty C8-8 (4) CS-8 .11 Subsidiary Work C8-8 (4) \i; CS-8.12 Miscellaneous Placement of Material C8-8 (4) f Ji C8-8 .13 Record Documents C8-8 (4) ! \, . :J l ' ; ,. ,;;, i ., .., (4) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS Cl-1 DEFINITIONS SECTION Cl-1 DEFINITIONS Cl-1.1 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever in these Contract Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and meaning shall be understood and interpreted as follows: Cl-1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are in all of the written and drawn documents, such as specifications, bonds, addenda, plans, etc., which govern the terms and performance of the contract. These are contained on the General Contract Documents and the Special Contract Documents . a. GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The General Contract Documents govern all Water Department Projects and Include the following Items PART A -NOTICE TO BIDDERS PART B -PROPOSAL PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS PART D -SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E -SPECIF! CA Tl ONS PERMITS /EASEMENTS PART F -BONDS PART G -CONTRACT (Sample) (Sample) (CITY) (Developer) White White Canary Yellow Brown Green El-White E2-Golden Rod E2A-White Blue (Sample) White (Sample) White b . SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items : PART A -NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) same as above PART B -PROPOSAL (Bid) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS PART D -SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E -SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS PART F -BONDS PART G -CONTRACT PART H -PLANS (Usually bound separately) C l-1 ( 1) C 1-1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Al] of the legal publications either actually published in public advertising mediums or furnished direct to interested parties pertaining to the work contemplated under the Contract Documents constitutes the notice to bidders. C 1-1.4 PROPOSAL: The completed written and signed offer or tender of a bidder to perform the work which the Owner desires to have done, together with the bid security, constitutes the Proposal, which becomes binding upon the Bidder when it is officially received by the Owner, has been publicly opened and read and not rejected by the Owner. Cl-1.5 BIDDER: Any person, persons, firm, partnership, company, association, corporation, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, submitting a proposal for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents, constitutes a bidder. Cl-1.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions are the usual construction and contract requirements which govern the performance of the work so that it will be carried on in accordance with the customary procedure, the local statutes, and requirements of the City of Fort Worth's charter and promulgated ordinances . Whenever there may be a conflict between the General Conditions and the Special Conditions, the latter shall take precedence .. C 1-1. 7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Special conditions are the specific requirements which are necessary for the particular project covered by the Contract Documents and not specifically covered in the General Conditions. When considered with the General Conditions and other elements of the Contract Documents they provide the information which the Contractor and Owner should have in order to gain a thorough knowledge of the project. Cl-1.8 SPECIFICATIONS: The Specifications is that section or part of the Contract Documents which set forth in detail the requirements which must be met by all materials, construction, workmanship, equipment and services in order to render a completed an useful project. Whenever reference is made to standard specifications, regulations , requirements, statutes, etc., such referred to documents shall become a part of the Contract Documents just as though they were embodied therein. Cl-:1 .9 BONDS: The bond or bonds are the written guarantee or security furnished by the Contractor for prompt and faithful performance of the contract and include the following: a . Performance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) b. Payment Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) c. Maintenance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) d . Propo s al or Bid Security (see Special Instructions to Bidders , Part A and C2-2 .. 6) C 1-1 (2) C 1-1.10 CONTRA CT: The Contract is a fonnal signed agreement between the owner and the Contractor covering the mutual understanding of the two contracting parties about the project to be completed under the Contract Documents . C 1-1.11 PLANS: The plans are the drawings or reproductions therefrom made by the Owner's representative showing in detail the location, dimension and position of the various elements of the project, including such profiles, typical cross-sections, layout diagrams, working drawings, preliminary drawings and such supplemental drawings as the Owner may issue to clarify other drawings or for the purpose of showing changes in the work hereinafter authorized by the Owner. The plans are usually bound separately from the other parts of the Contract Documents, but they are part of the Contract Documents just as though they were bound therein . Cl-1.12 CITY: The City of Fort Worth, Texas, a municipal corporation, authorized and chartered .under the Texas State Statutes, acting by and through its governing body or its City Manager, each of which is required by charter to perform specific duties. Responsibility for final enforcement of the Contracts involving the City of Fort Worth is by Charter vested in the City Manager. The terms City and Owner are synonymous. C 1-1.13 CITY COUNCIL: The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Fort Worth, Texas . Cl-1.14 MAYOR: The officially elected Mayor, or in his absence, the Mayor Pro tern of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. Cl-1.15 CITY MANAGER: The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. Cl-1.16 CITY ATTORNEY: The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. C 1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed official of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, referred to · in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative. Cl-1.18 DIRECTOR, CITY WATER DEPARTMENT: The officially appointed Director of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. Cl-1.19 ENGINEER: The Director of Public Works, the Director of the Fort Worth City Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents , acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. Cl-1.20 CONTRACTOR: The person, person 's, partnership, company, firm, association , or corporation, entering into a contract with the Owner for the execution of work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. A sub-contractor is a person , finn, Cl-1 (3) corporation , supplying labor and materials or only labor, for the work at the site of the project. C 1-1.21 SURETIES: The Corporate bodies which are bound by such bonds as are required with and for the Contractor. The sureties engaged are to be fully responsible for the entire and satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract and for any and all requirements as set forth in the Contract Documents and approved changes therein. Cl-1.22 THE WORK OR PROJECT: The completed work contemplated in and covered by the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to produce a completed and serviceable project. Cl-1.23 WORKING DAY: A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of the principal unit of work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p .m., with exceptions as permitted in paragraph C7-7.6 Cl-1.24 CALENDAR DAYS: A calendar day is any day of the week or month, no days being excepted . Cl-1.25 : LEGAL HOLIDAYS: Legal holidays shall be observed as prescribed by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth for observance by City employees as follows: I. 2 . 3 . 4 . 5. 6 . 7. 8. 9. New Year's. day M .L. King, Jr. Birthday Memorial Day Independence Day Labor Day Thanksgiving Day Thanksgiving Friday Christmas Day Such other days in lieu of holidays as the City Council may determine January I Third Monday in January Last Monday in May July 4 First Monday in September Fourth Thursday in November Forth Friday in November December 25 When one of the above named holidays or a special holiday is declared by the City Council , falls on a Saturday, the holiday shall be observed on the preceding Friday, or if it falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday, by those employees working on working day operations. Employees working calendar day operations will consider the calendar as the holiday. Cl -1.26 ABBREVIATIONS: Whenever the abbreviations defined herein appear in the Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be as follows: AASHT American Association of State MGD Million Gallons Cl-I (4) 0 Highway Transportation Officials per Day ASCE American Society of Civil CFS Cubic Foot per Engineers Second IAW In Accordance With Min. Minimum ASTM American Society of Testing Mono. Monolithic Materials %· Percent um AWWA American Water Works R Radius Association I.D. Inside Diameter ASA American Standards Association O.D. Outside Diameter HI Hydraulic Institute Elev. Elevation Asph. Asphalt F Fahrenheit Ave. Avenue C Centigrade Blvd. Boulevard In. Inch CI Cast Iron Ft. Foot CL Center Line St. Street GI Galvanized Iron CY Cubic Yard Lin. Linear or Lineal Yd. Yard lb. Pound SY Square yard MH Manhole L.F. Linear Foot Max. Maximum D.I. Ductile Iron Cl-1.27 CHANGE ORDER: A "Change Order" is a written supplemental agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering some added or deducted item or feature which may be found necessary and which was not specifically included in the scope of the project on which bids were submitted. Increase in unit quantities stated in the proposal are not the subject matter of a Change Order unless the increase or decrease is more than 25% of the amount of the particular item or items in the original proposal. All "Change Orders" shall be prepared by the City from information as necessary furnished by the Contractor. C 1-1 .28 PAVED STREETS AND ALLEYS: A paved street or alley shall be defined as a street or alley having one of the following types of wearing surfaces applied over the natural unimproved surface: I. Any type of asphaltic concrete with or without separate base material . 2. Any type of asphalt surface treatment, not including an oiled surface , with or without separate base material. 3. Brick, with or without separate base material. 4. Concrete, with or without separate base material. 5. Any combination of the above. C 1-1.29 UNPAVED STREETS OR ALLEYS: An unpaved street, alley , roadway or other surface is any area except those defined for "Paved Streets and Alleys." Cl-1(5) C 1-1.30 CITY STREE T : A city street is defined as that area between the right-of-way lines as the str eet is de dicated. CI-I .3 I ROADWAY : The roadway is defined as the area between parallel lines two (2 ') back of the curb lines or four ('4) feet back of the average edge of pavement where no curb exists. CI-I .32 GRAVEL STREET: A gravel street is an unimproved street to which has been added one or more applications of gravel or similar material other than the natural m aterial found on the street surface before any improvement was made. ' C l-1 (6) j ? ' \ 4 'I! 1 , f< ~ t a I! l l ! ~ ~ 1, ,,. * <J } • J f l I' SECTION C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL SECTION C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2. l PROPOSAL FORM: The Owner wil1 furnish bidders with Proposal form, which wil1 contain an itemized list of the items of work to be done or materials to be furnished and upon which bid prices are requested . The Proposal form wil1 state the Bidder's general understanding of the project to be completed, provide a space for furnishing the amount of bid security, and state the basis for entering into a formal contract. The Owner wil1 furnish forms for the Bidder's "Experience Record," "Equipment Schedule," and "Financial Statement," all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the City Water Department one week prior to the hour for opening of bids . The financial statement required shal1 have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or an independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate state licensing agency, and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the current financial status. This statement must be current and no more than one ( 1) year old. In the case that bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. Liquid assets in the amount of ten (10) percent of the estimated project cost will be required. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in work of both the same nature and magnitude as that of the project for which bids are to be received, and such experience must have been completed not more than five (5) years prior to the date on which Bids are to be received. The Director of the Water Department shall be sole judge as to the acceptability of experience for qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. The prospective bidder shall schedule the equipment he has available for the project and state that he will rent such additional equipment as may be required to complete the project on which he submits a bid. C2-2.2 INTERPRETATION OF QUANTITIES : The quantities of work and materials to be furnished as may be listed in the proposal forms or other parts of the Contract Documents will be considered as approximate only and will be used for the purpose of comparing bids on a uniform basis. Payment will be made to the Contractor for only the actual quantitie s of work performed or materials furnished in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and Plans. The quantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased as hereinafter provided , without in any way invalidating the unit price s bid or any other requirements of the Contract Documents. C2-2( 1) C2-2.3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: Bidders are advised that the Contract Documents on file with the Owner shall constitute all of the information which the Owner will furnish . All additional information and data which the Owner will supply after promulgation of the formal contract documents shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original Contract Documents. Bidders are required, prior to filing of proposal, to read and become familiar with the Contract Documents, to visit the site of the project and examine carefully all local conditions, to inform themselves by their own independent research and investigations, tests, boring, and by such other means as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be encountered during construction of the project. They must judge for themselves the difficulties of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work or the time required for its completion, and obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal. No information given by the Owner or any representative of the Owner other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the Owner. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based. lt is mutually agreed that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be allowed. The Jogs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only and may not be correct. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of conditions which actually exist. C2-2.4 SUBMITTING OF PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his Proposal on the form furnished by the Owner. All blank spaces applicable to the project contained in the form shall be correctly filled in and the Bidder shall state the prices, written in ink in both words and numerals, for which he proposes to do work contemplated or furnish the m a terials re quired . All such prices shall be written legibly . In case of discrepancy between price written in words and the price written in numera ls , the price mo s t a dvant ageo us to the City shall govern. If a proposal is submitted by an individual , his or her name must be signed by him (her) or his (her) duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member of the firm , association, or partnership, or by p e rson duly authorized. If a proposal is submitted by a company or corporation , the company or corporation name and bu s iness address must be given, and the proposal s ign e d b y a n official or dul y authorized age nt. The corporate sea l mu s t be affixed. Power C2 -2(2) of Attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposal must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. C2-2.5 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS: Proposals may be rejected if they show any alteration of words or figures, additions not called for, conditional or uncalled for alternate bids, erasures , or irregularities of any kind, or contain unbalanced value of any items. Proposal tendered or delivered after the official time designated for receipt of proposal shall be returned to the Bidder unopened . C2-2.6 BID SECURITY: No proposal will be considered unless it is accompanied by a "Proposal Security" of the character and the amount indicated in the "Notice to Bidders" and the "Proposal." The Bid Security is required by the Owner as evidence of good faith on the part of the Bidder, and by way of a guaranty that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will within the required time execute a formal contract and furnish the required performance and other bonds. The bid security of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the contract is awarded or other disposition is made thereof. The bid security of all other bidders may be returned promptly after the canvass of bids. C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless 1t 1s delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the City Manager or his representative in the official place of business as set forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to deliver the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidder must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marker with the word "PROPOSAL," and the name or description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the City Manager, City Hall, Fort Worth, Texas. C2-2 .8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the City Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for opening proposals . A request for non-consideration must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non-con sideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non- consideration requests have been properly filed may, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAHIC MODIFICATIONS OF PROPOSALS: Any Bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the City Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight ( 48) hours after the proposal opening time , no further consideration will be given to the proposal. C2-2(3) C2-2 .10 PUBLIC OPENING OF PROPOSAL: Proposals which have been properly filed and for which no "Non-consideration Request" has been received will be publicly opened and read aloud by the City Manager or his authorized representative at the time and place indicated in the "Notice to Bidders." All proposals which have been opened and read will remain on file with the Owner until the contract has been awarded. Bidders or their authorized representatives are invited to be present for the opening of bids . C2-2.1 l IRREGULAR PROPOSALS: Proposals shall be considered as "Irregular" if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, or conditions not called for, unauthorized alternate bids, or irregularities of any kind. However, the · Owner reserves the right to waive any all irregularities and to make the award of the contract to the best interest of the City . Tendering a proposal after the closing hour is an irregularity which can not be waived. C2-2. I 2 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be disqualified and their proposals not considered for any of, but not limited to, the following reasons: a) Reasons for believing that collusion exists among bidders. b) Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for work contemplated. c) The bidder being interested in any litigation against the Owner or where the Owner may have a claim against or be engaged in litigation against the bidder. d) The bidder being in arrears on any existing contract or having defaulted on a previous contract. e) The bidder having performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner. f) Lack of competency as revealed by financial statement, experience statement, equipment schedule, and such inquiries as the Owner may see fit to make. g) Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Owner, will prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. h) The bidder not filing with the Owner, one week in advance of the hour of the opening of proposals the following: 1. Financial Statement showing the financial condition of the bidder as specified in Part "A" -Special Instructions 2. A current experience record showing especially the projects of a nature similar to the one under consideration, which have been successfully completed by the Bidder. 3. An equipment schedule showing the equipment the bidder has available for use on the project. The Bid Proposal of the bidder who , in the judgment of the Engineer, is disqualified under the requirements stated herein , shall be set aside and not opened . C2-2(4 ) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C3-3 A WARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS SECTION C3-3 A WARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3 .1 CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS : After proposals have been opened and read aloud, the proposals will be tabulated on the basis of the quoted prices, the quantities shown in the proposal, and the application of such formulas or other methods of bringing items to a common basis as may be established in the Contract Documents. The total obtained by taking the sum of the products of the unit prices quoted and the estimated quantities plus any lump sum items and such other quoted amounts as may enter into the cost of the completed project will be considered as the amount of the bid. Until the ward of the contract is made by the Owner, the right will be reserved to reject any or all proposals and waive technicalities, to re-advertise for new proposals, or to proceed with the work in any manner as may be considered for the best interest of the Owner. C3-3 .2 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRJSE/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRJSE COMPLIANCE: Contractor agrees to provide to Owner, upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman-owned Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and the payment therefor. Contractor further agrees, upon request by the Owner, to allow and audit and/or an examination of any books, records, or files in the possession of the Contractor that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MWE or WBE. Any material misrepresentation of any nature will be grounds for termination of the contract and for initiating any action under appropriate federal, state or local laws and ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation may be grounds for disqualification of Contractor at Owner's discretion for bidding on future Contracts with the Owner for a period of time of not less than six ( 6) months . C3-3.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall comply with Current City Ordinances prohibiting discrimination in employment practices. The Contractor shall post the required notice to that effect on the project site , and at his request, will be provided assistance by the City of Fort Worth's Equal Employment Officer who will refer any qualified applicant he may have on file in his office to the Contractor. Appropriate notices may be acquired from the Equal Employment Officer. C3-3.4 WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS: After a proposal has been read by the Owner, it cannot be withdrawn by the Bidder within forty-five (45) days after the date on which the proposals were opened . C 3-3 (I) C 3-3 .5 A WARD OF CONTRACT: The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed forty-five (45) days after the date of opening proposals , and in no event will an award be made until after investigations have been made as to the responsibility of the proposed awardee . The award of the contract , if award is made, will be to the lowest and best responsive bidder. The award of the contract shall not become effective until the Owner has notified the Contractor in writing of such award. C3-3.6 RETURN OF PROPOSAL SECURITIES: As soon as proposed price totals have been determined for comparison of bids, the Owner may, at its discretion, return the proposal security which accompanied the proposals which, in its judgment, would not be considered for the award . All other proposal securities, usually those of the three lowest bidders, will be retained by the Owner until the required contract has been executed and bond furnished or the Owner has otherwise disposed of the bids, after which they will be returned by the City Secretary. C3-3.7 BONDS: With the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish to, and file with the owner in the amounts herein required, the following bonds: a. PERFORMANCE BOND: A good and sufficient performance bond in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the full and faithful execution of the work and performance of the contract, and for the protection of the Owner and all other persons against damage by reason of negligence of the Contractor, or improper execution of the work or use of inferior materials . This performance bond shall guarantee the payment for all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and services used in the construction of the work, and shall remain in full force and effect until provisions as above stipulated are accomplished and final payment is made on the project by the City . b. MAINTENANCE BOND: A good and sufficient maintenance bond, in the amount of not Jess than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful performance of the general guaranty which is set forth in paragraph C8-8 . l 0 . c. PAYMENT BOND: A good and sufficient payment bond , in the amount of not less than l 00 percent of the amount of the contract , as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise , guarant ee ing the prompt , full and faithful pa ym ent of all claimants as defi ned in Article C3 -3 (2) . . 5160, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 561h Legislature , Regular Session, 1959, effective April 27, 1959, and/or the latest version thereof, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract being constructed under these specifications. Payment Bond shall remain in force until all payments as above stipulated are made. d. OTHER BONDS: Such other bonds as may be required by these Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Contractor. No sureties will be accepted by the Owner which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the Owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner and shall be executed by an approved surety company doing business in the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and which is acceptable to the Owner. In order to be acceptable, the name of the surety shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, and the amount of bond written by any one acceptable company shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list for that company. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and Surety Company. Should any surety on the contract be determined unsatisfactory at any time by the Owner, notice will be given the Contractor to that effect and the Contractor shall immediately provide a new surety satisfactory to the Owner. No payment will be made under the contract until the new surety or sureties, as required, have qualified and have been accepted by the Owner. The contract shall not be operative nor will any payments be due or paid until approval of the bonds by the Owner. C3-3 .8 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: Within ten (10) days after the Owner has appropriate resolution, or otherwise, awarded the contract, the Contractor shall execute and file with the Owner, the Contract and such bonds as may be required in the Contract Documents. No Contract shall be binding upon the Owner until it has been attested by the City Secretary, approved as to form and legality by the City Attorney, and executed for the Owner by either the Mayor or City Manager. C3-3 .9 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT: The failure of the Awardee to execute the required bond or bonds or to sign the required contract within ten ( 10) days after the contract is awarded shall be considered by the owner as an abandonment of his proposal, and the owner may annual the Award. By reason of the uncertainty of the market prices of material and labor, and it being impracticable and difficult to accurately determine the amount of damages occurring to the owner by reason of said awardee's failure to execute said bonds and contract within ten ( I 0) days, the proposal security accompanying the proposal shall be the agreed amount of damages which the Owner will (3-3 (3) suffer by reason of such failure on the part of the Awardee and shall thereupon immediately by forfeited to the Owner. The filing of a proposal will be considered as acceptance of this provision by the Bidder. C-3-3.10 BEGINNING WORK: The Contractor shal1 not commence work until authorized in writing to do so by the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to commence work at the site of the project within the time stipulated in the written authorization usual1y termed "Work Order" or "Proceed Order", it is agreed that the Surety Company will, within ten ( I 0) days after the commencement date set forth in such written authorization, commence the physical execution of the contract. C3-3 . l 1 INSURANCE: The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the Contract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner. The prime Contractor shal1 be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub-contractor's certificate of insurance for approval. The prime Contractor shall indicate on the certificate of insurance included in the documents for execution whether or not his insurance covers sub-contractors . It is the intention of the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all sub-contractors. a . COMPENSA TJON INSURANCE: The Contractor shall maintain, during the life of this contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance on all of his employees to be engaged in work on the project under this contract , and for all sub-contractors. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this contract is not protected under the Worker 's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide adequate employer's general liability insurance for the protection of such of his employees not so protected . b. c . COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE : The Contractor Shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this contract, Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance) in the amount not less than $500,000 covering each occ urre nce on accoun t of bodily injury , including death , and in an amount not Jess than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of property dam age with $2 ,000 ,000 umbrella policy coverage. ADDITIONAL LIABILITY: The Contractor shall furni sh insurance as a separate policies or by additional endorsement to one of the a bove-mention ed policie s, and in the amount as set forth for public li abi lity and property damage, the following insurance : I . Co ntin gen t Liability ( covers General Contractor's Liability for ac ts of s ub -con trac tors). C3 -3 (4) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6 . Blasting, prior to any blasting being done . Collapse of buildings or structures adjacent to excavation .(if excavation are performed adjacent to same). Damage to underground utilities for $500,000. Builder's risk (where above-ground structures are involved). Contractual Liability ( covers all indemnification requirements of Contract). d. AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE -BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $250,000 for injuries including accidental death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident, and automobile property damage insurance in an amount not less than $100,000 . e . f. g. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The msurance required under the above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his sub-contractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and also against any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts and by carriers satisfactory to the Owner. (Sample attached.) All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-contractors, should the Prime Contractor's i_nsurance not cover the sub-contractor's work operations. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING: The insurance and bonding companies with whom the Contractor's insurance and C3-3 (5) performance, payment , maintenance and all such other bonds are written , shall be represented by an agent or agents having an office located within the city limits of the City of Fort Worth . Tarrant County, Texas. Each such agent shall be a duly qualified , one upon whom authority and power to act on behalf of the insurance and/or bonding company to negotiate and settle with the City of Fort Worth, or any other claimant, and claims that the City of Fort Worth or other claimant or any property owner who has been damaged, may have against the Contractor, insurance, and/or bonding company. If the local insurance representative is not so empowered by the insurance or bonding companies, then such authority must be vested in a local agent or claims officer residing in the Metroplex, the Fort Worth- Dallas area. The name of the agent, or agents shall be set forth on all such bonds and certificates of insurance. C3-3.12 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS: Under the Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all materials, labor and services when due . C3-3.13 WEEKLY PAYROLLS: A certified copy of each payroll covering payment of wages to all persons engaged in work on the project at the site of the project shall be furnished to the Owner's representative within seven (7) days after the close of each payroll period. A copy or copies of the applicable minimum wage rates as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be kept posted in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times during the course of the Contract. Copies of the wage rates will be furnished the Contractor, by the Owner; however, posting and protection of the wage rates shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C3-3.14 CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: Any Contractor, whether a person, persons, partnership, company, firm, association, corporation or other who is approved to do business with and enters into a contract with the City for construction of water and/or sanitary sewer facilities, will have or shall establish a fully operational business office within the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area . The Contractor shall charge, delegate, or assign this office (or he may delegate his Project Superintendent) with full authority to transact all business actions required in the performance of the Contract. This local authority shall be made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters made responsible to act for the Contractor in all mat1ers pertaining to the work governed by the Contract whether it be administrative or other wise and as such shall be empowered, thus delegated and directed, to settle all material, labor or other expenditure, all claims against work or any other mater associated such as maintaining adequate and appropriate insurance or security coverage for the project. Such local authority for the administration of the work under the Contract shall be maintained until all business transactions executed as part of the Contract are complete . Should the Contractor 's principal base of operations be other than in the Fort Worth- Dallas metropolitan area , notification of the Contractor's assignment of local authority shall be made in writin g to the E ngin eer in advance of any work on the project, all C3-3 (6 ) appropriately signed and sealed, as applicable, by the Contractor 's responsible offices with the und erstanding that this written assignment of authority to the local representative shall become part of the project Contract as though bound directly into the project documents . The intent of these requirements is that all matters associated with the Contractor's administration, whether it be oriented in furthering the work, or other, be governed direct by local authority . This same requirement is imposed on insurance and surety coverage. Should the Contractor's local representative fail to perform to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer, at his sole discretion , may demand that such local represe ntative be replaced and the Engineer may, at his sole discretion, stop all work until a new local authority satisfactory to the Engineer is assigned . No credit of working time will be allowed for periods in which work stoppages are in effect for this reason . C3-3 .15 VENUE: Venue of any action hereinunder shall be exclusively in Tarrant County , Texas. C3 -3 (7) SECTION C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C4-4 .1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: It is the definite intention of these Contract Documents to provide for a complete, useful project which the Contractor undertakes to construct or furnish, all in full compliance with the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. It is definitely understood that the Contractor shall do all work as provided for in the Contract Documents, shall do all extra or special work as may be considered by the Owner as necessary to complete the project in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specifically stated in these Contract Documents, furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, special services, and incidentals necessary to the prosecution and completion of the project. C4-4.2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Should any work or conditions which are not thoroughly and satisfactorily stipulated or covered by General or Special Conditions of these Contract Documents be anticipated, or should there be any additional proposed work which is not covered by these Contract Documents, the "Special Provisions" covering all such work will be prepared by the Owner previous to the time of receiving bids or proposals for any such work and furnished to the Bidder in the form of Addenda. All such "Special Provisions" shall be considered to be part of the Contract Documents just as though they were originally written therein. C4-4.3 INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES: The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be necessary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the unit prices . Such increased or decreased quantity shall not be more than twenty-five (25) percent of the contemplated quantity of such item or items . When such changes increase or decrease the original quantity of any item or items of work to be done or materials to be furnished by the 25 percent or more , then either party to the contract shall upon written request to the other party be entitled to a revised consideration upon that portion of the work above or below the 25 percent of the original quantity stated in the proposal ; such revised consideration to be determined by special agreement or as hereinafter provided for "Extra Work ." No allowance will be made for any changes in anticipated profits not shall such changes be considered as waivin g or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract Documents . Variations in quantities of sanitary sewer pipes in depth categories , shall be interpreted herein as applying to overall quantities of sanitary sewer pipe in each pipe size , but not to the various depth c ategories . C4-4 (I) C4-4.4 ALTERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: By Change order, the owner reserves the right to make such changes in the Contract Documents and in the character or quantities of the work as may be necessary or desirable to insure completion in the most satisfactory manner, provided such changes do not materially alter the original Contract Documents or change the general nature of the project as a whole. Such changes shall not be considered as waiving or invalidating any condition or provision of the Contract Documents. C4-4.5 EXTRA WORK: Additional work made necessary by changes and alterations of the Contract Documents or of quantities or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documents, shall be defined as "Extra Work" and shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with these Contract Documents or approved additions thereto; provided however, that before any extra work is begun a "Change order'' shall be executed or written order issued by the Owner to do the work for payments or credits as shall be determined by one or more combination of the following methods: a . Unit bid price previously approved . b . An agreed lump sum . c . The actual reasonable cost of (1) labor, (2) rental of equipment used on the extra work for the time so used at Associated General Contractors of America current equipment rental rates, (3) materials entering permanently into the project, and (4) actual cost of insurance , bonds, and social security as determined by the Owner, plus a fixed fee to be agreed upon but not to exceed IO percent of the actual cost of such extra work. The fixed fee is not to include any additional profit to the Contractor for rental of equipment owner by him and used for extra work. The fee shall be full and complete compensation to cover the cost of superintendence, overhead , other profit, general and all other expense not included in (I), (2), (3), and (4) above. The Contractor shall keep accurate cost records on the form and in the method suggested by the Owner and shall give the Owner access to all accounts, bills, vouchers, and records relating to the Extra Work. No "Change Order" shall become effective until it has been approved and signed by each of the Contracting Parties. No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Owner. In case any orders or instructions , either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation , he shall make written request to the Engineer for written orders authorizing such Extra Work , prior to beginning such work. C4-4 (2) ,, Should a difference arise as to what does or dose not constitute Extra Work , or as to the payment thereof, and the Engineer insists upon its performance , the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost thereof as provided under method (Item C). Claims for extra work will not be paid unless the Contractor shall file his claim with the Owner within five (5) days before the time for making the first estimate after such work is done and unless the claim is supported by satisfactory vouchers and certified payrolls covering all labor and materials expended upon said Extra Work. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the Owner to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of plans showing the actual installation . The compensation agreed upon for "Extra Work" whether or not initiated by a "Change Order" shall be a full, complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or extra work, whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or unchanged work as a result of the change or extra work . C4-4.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION: Before commencing any work under this contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and receive the Owner's approval thereof, a "Schedule of Operations," showing by a straight line method the date of commencing and finishing each of the major elements of the Contract. There shall be also shown the estimated monthly cost of work for which estimates are to be expected . There shall be presented also a composite graph showing the anticipated progress of construction with the time being plotted horizontally and percentage of completion plotted vertically. The progress charts shall be prepared on 8-1 /2" x 11 " sheets and at least five black or blue line prints shall be furnished to the Owner. C4-4.7 PROGRESS SCHEDULES FOR WATER AND SEWER PLANT FACILITIES: Within ten (10) days prior to submission of the first monthly progress payment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the owner for approval six copies of the schedule in which the Contractor proposes to carry on activities (including procurement of materials, plans, and equipment) and the contemplated dates for completing the same. The schedule shall be in the form of a time schedule Critical Path Method (CPM) network diagram . As the work progresses, the Contractor shall enter on the diagram the actual progress at the end of each partial payment period or at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also revise the schedule to reflect any adjustments in contract time approved by the Engineer. Three copies of the updated schedule shall be delivered at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. As a minimum , the construction schedule shall incorporate all work elements and activities indic a ted in the proposal and in the technical specification s . C 4-4 (3) Prior to the final drafting of the detailed construction schedule, the Contractor shall review the draft schedule with the Engineer to ensure the Contractor's understanding of the contract requirements. The following guidelines shall be adhered to in preparing the construction schedule: a. b. Milestone dates and final project completion dates shall be developed to conform to the time constraints, sequencing requirements and completion time. The construcfion progress shall be divided into acttv1ttes with time durations of approximately fourteen days (14) days and construction values not to exceed $50,000. Fabrication, delivery and submittal activities are exceptions to this guideline . c. Durations shall be in calendar days and normal holidays and weather conditions over the duration of the contract shall be accounted for within the duration of each activity. d. One critical path shall be shown on the construction schedule. e. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities of the CPM construction schedule. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the Owner. f. Thirty days shall be used for submittal review unless otherwise specified. The construction schedule shall as a minimum, be divided into general categories as indicated in the Proposal and Technical Specifications and each general category shall be broken down into activities in enough detail to achieve activities of approximately fourteen ( 14) days duration. For each general category, the construction schedule shall identify all trades or subcontracts whose work is represented by activities that follow the guidelines of this Section . For each of the trades or subcontracts , the construction schedule shall indicate the following procurements, construction and preacceptance activities and events in their logical sequence for equipment and materials . 1. Preparation and transmittal of submittals 2 . Submittal review periods . 3. Shop fabrication and delivery . C4-4 (4 ) i I ., 4. Erection or installation . 5. Transmittal of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions . 6. Installed equipment and materials testing. 7 . Owner's operator instruction (if applicable). 8. Final inspection. 9. Operational testing. If, in the opinion of the Owner, work accomplished falls behind that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary to improve his progress. In addition, the Owner may require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program and proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and to insure completion of the work within the contract time. If the owner finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require the Contractor to increase the work force, the construction plant and equipment, the number of work shifts or overtime operations without additional cost to the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall be considered grounds for determination by the Owner that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified. C4-4 (5) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS CS-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS SECTION CS-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MA TERJALS CS-5.1 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER: The work shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall decide all questions which arise as to the quality and acceptability of the materials furnished, work performed, rate of progress of the work, overall sequence of the construction, interpretation of the Contract Documents, acceptable fulfillment of the Contract, compensation, mutual rights between Contractor and Owner under these Contract Documents, supervision of the work, resumption of operations, and all other questions or disputes which may arise. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequence or procedures of construction, or the safety precaution and programs incident thereto, and he will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the work completed and materials furnished, and his decisions and estimates shall be final. His estimates in such event shall be a condition to the right of the Contractor to receive money due him under the Contract. The Owner shall have executive authority to enforce and make effective such necessary decisions and orders as the Contractor fails to carry out promptly. In the event of any dispute between the Engineer and Contractor over the decision of the Engineer on any such matters, the Engineer must, within a reasonable time, upon written request of the Contractor, render and deliver to both the owner and Contractor, a written decision on the matter in controversy. CS-5.2 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS: The finished project in all cases shall conform with lines, grades, cross-sections, finish, and dimensions shown on the plans or any other requirements other wise described in the Contract Documents. Any deviation from the approved Contract Documents required by the Engineer during construction will in all cases be determined by the Engineer and authorized by the Owner by Change Order. CS-5.3 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are made up of several sections, which, taken together, are intended to describe and provide for a complete and useful project, and any requirements appearing in one of the sections is as binding as though it occurred in all sections . In case of discrepancies, figured dimension shall govern over scaled dimensions, plans shall govern over specifications, special conditions shall govern over general conditions and standard specification , and quantities shown on the plans shall govern over those shown in the proposal. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission in C S-5 (I) the Contract Documents, and the owner shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor discovers an apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call this condition to the attention of the Engineer. In the event of a conflict in drawings, specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the award of Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have quoted the most expensive resolution of the conflict. CS-5.4 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR: The Contractor will be furnished with three sets of Contract Documents and shall have available on the site of the project at all times, one set of such Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give to the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer, his inspector, and other Contractors in every possible way. The Contractor shall at all times have competent personnel available to the project site for proper performance of the work. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times at the site of the project a competent, English-speaking superintendent and an assistant who are fully authorized to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such superintendent and his assistant shall be capable of reading and understanding the Contract Documents and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Owner, the Engineer, or his authorized representatives. Pursuant to this responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall designate in writing to the project superintendent, to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such assistant project superintendent shall be a resident of Tarrant County, Texas, and shall be subject to call, as is the project superintendent, at any time of the day or night on any day of the week on which the Engineer determines that circumstances require the presence on the project site of a representative of the Contractor to adequately provide for the safety or convenience of the traveling public or the owners of property across which the project extends or the safety of the property contiguous to the project routing. The Contractor shall provide all facilities to enable the Engineer and his inspector to examine and inspect the workmanship and materials entering into the work. CS-5 .5 EMERGENCY AND/OR RECTIFICATION WORK: . When, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, a condition of emergency exists related to any part of the work , the Contractor, or the Contractor through his designated representative, shall respond with dispatch to a verbal request made by the Owner or Engineer to alleviate the emergency condition. Such a response shall occur day or night , whether the project is scheduled on a calendar-day or a working-day basis. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the Engineer to rectify any discrepancies, omissions, or correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the project specifications or plans , the Engineer shall give the Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct attention to the CS-5 (2) discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill trus written request, or does not shoe just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action with City forces or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for such remedial action, plus 25%, from any funds due the Contractor on the project. C5-5.6 FIELD OFFICE: The Contractor shall provide, at no extra compensation, an adequate field office for use of the Engineer, if specifically called for. The field office shall be not less than 10 x 14 feet in floor area, substantially constructed, well heated, air conditioned, lighted, and weather proof, so that documents will not be damaged by the elements. C5-5.7 CONTRUCTION STAKES: The City, through its Engineer, will furnish the Contractor with all lines, grades, and measurements necessary to the proper prosecution and control of the work contracted under these Contract Documents, and lines, grades and measurements will be established by means of stakes or other customary method of marking as may be found consistent with good practice. These stakes or markings shall be set sufficiently in advance of construction operations to avoid delay. Such stakes or markings as may be established for Contractor's use or guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor until he is authorized by the Engineer to remove them . Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any stakes or markings have been carelessly or willfully destroyed, disturbed, or removed by the Contractor or any of his employees, the full cost of replacing such stakes or marks plus 25% will be charged against the Contractor, and the full amount will be deducted from payment due the Contractor. C5-5 .8 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF CITY INSPECTOR: City Inspectors will be authorized to inspect all work done and to be done and all materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work, and the preparation or manufacturing of the materials to be used or equipment to be installed. A City Inspector may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed, to report any evidence that the materials being furnished or the work being performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents, and to call the attention of the Contractor to any such failure or other infringements. Such inspection or lack of inspection will not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the City Inspector as to the materials or equipment furnished or the manner of performing the work, the City Inspector will have the authority to reject materials or equipment, and/or to suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The City Inspector will not, however, be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or release any requirement of these Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion or section of the work, nor to issue any instructions contrary tot he requirement s of the Contract Documents . The City Inspector will in no case act as superintendent or C5-5 (3) foreman or perform any other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management or operation of the work. He will not accept from the Contractor any compensation in any form for performing any duties. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the City Inspector or Engineer when the same are consistent with the obligations of the Contract Documents of the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders or instructions or the City Inspector, the Contractor may within six days make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision on the matter in Controversy . C5-5 .9 INSPECTION: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements of · the Contract Documents. If the Engineer so requests, the Contractor shall, at any time before acceptance of the work, remove or uncover such portion of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the Contract Documents. Should the work exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be paid for as extra work, but should Work so exposed or examined prove to be unacceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of all adjacent defective or damaged parts shall be at the Contractor's expense . No work shall be done or materials used without suitable supervision or inspection. C5-5.10 REMOVAL OF EDEFCTIVE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK: All work, materials, or equipment which has been rejected shall be remedied or removed and replaced in an acceptable manner by the Contractor at this expense. Work done beyond the lines and grades given or as shown on the plans, except as herein specially provided, or any Extra Work done without written authority, will be considered as unauthorized and done at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for by the Owner. Work so done may be ordered removed at the Contractor's expense. Upon the failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any order' of the Engineer made under the provisions of this paragraph, the Engineer will have the authority to cause defective work to be remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized work to be removed , and the cost thereof may be deducted from any money due or to become due tot he Contractor. Failure to require the removal of any defective or unauthorized work shall not constitute acceptance of such work. C5-5 .1 l SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT: If the Specifications, law, ordinance, codes or regulations permit Contractor to furnish or use a substitute that is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if Contractor wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to the preconstruction conference, make written application to ENGINEER for approval of such substitute certifying in writing that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the function called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of performing the same function as that specified ; and identifying all variations of th e propo se d sub stitute from that s pecified and indicating available maintenance CS-5 (4 ) service . No substitute shall be ordered or installed without written approval of Engineer who will be the judge of the equality and may require Contractor to furnish such other data about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and bonds as Owner may require which shall be furnished at Contractor's expense. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and anyone directly or indirectly employees by either of them from and against the claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of substituted materials or equipment. CS-5.12 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATER1ALS: Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, or as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for direct to the testing agency by the Owner unless other wise specifically provided. The failure of the Owner to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment fully conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests and sampling of materials, unless otherwise specified, will be made in accordance with the latest methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing Materials or specific requirements of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the Engineer may require for collecting and forwarding samples and shall not, without specific written permission of the Engineer, use materials represented by the samples until tests have been made and the materials approved for use. The Contractor will furnish adequate samples without charge to the Owner. In case of concrete, the aggregates, design minimum, and the mixing and transporting equipment shall be approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed, and the Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any concrete which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests shall be made at least 9 days prior to the placing of concrete, using samples from the same aggregate, cement, and mortar which are to be used later in the concrete. Should the source of supply change , new tests shall be made prior to the use of new materials. CS-5.13 STORAGE OF MA TER1ALS: All materials which are to be used in the construction contract shall be stored so as to insure the preservation of quality and fitness of the work. When directed by the Engineer, they shall be placed on wooden platforms or other hard, clean durable surfaces and not on the ground, and shall be placed under cover when directed. Stored materials shall be placed and located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. CS-5 .14 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITJES : The location and dimensions shown on the plans relative to the existing utilities are based on the best information available. Omission from, the inclusion of utility locations on the Plans is not to be considered as nonexistence of, or a definite location of, existing underground utilities. The location of many gas mains, water mains, conduits , sewer lines and service lines for all utilities , etc., is unknown to the Owner, and the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all such structures and utilities on the plans or to show them in their exact location . It is mutually agreed that s uch failure will not be considered CS-5 (5) sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for Extra Work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless an obstruction encountered is such as to necessitate changes in the lines and grades of considerable magnitude or requires the building of special works, provision of which is not made in these Contract Documents, in which case the provision in these Contract Documents for Extra Work shall apply. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify locations of the adjacent and/or conflicting utilities sufficiently in advance of construction in order that he may negotiate such local adjustments as necessary in the construction process to provide adequate clearances. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in order to protect all existing utilities, structures, and service lines. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies at least forty-eight ( 48) hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if necessary. All verification of utilities and their adjustment shall be considered subsidiary work . C5-5.l 5 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE: a . Normal Prosecution: In the normal prosecution of work where the interruption of service is necessary, the Contractor, at least 24 hours in advance, shall be required to: I. Notify the Water Department's Distribution Division as to location, time, and schedule of service interruption. 2 . Notify each customer personally through responsible personnel as to the time and schedule of the interruption of their service, or 3 . In the event that personal notification of a customer cannot be made, a prepared tag form shall be attached to the customer's door knob. The tag shall be durable in composition, and in large bold letters shall say : CS -5 (6) ~ . I ' > . " t .. "NOTJCE" Due to Utility Improvement in your neighborhood, your (water) (sewer) service will be interrupted on ----- between the hours of and This inconvenience will be as short as possible. Thank You, Contractor Address Phone b. Emergency: In the event that an unforeseen service interruption occurs, notice shall be as above, but immediate. CS-5.16 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS: If, through act or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or any other Contractor or any sub-contractor shall suffer loss or damage of the work, the Contractor agrees to settle with such other Contractor or sub-contractor by agreement or arbitration . If such other Contractor or sub- contractor shall assert any claim against the owner on account of damage alleged to have been sustained, the owner will notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the owner against any such claim. CS-5 .17 CLEAN-UP: Clean-up of surplus and/or waste materials accumulated on the job site during the prosecution of the work under these Contract Documents shall be accomplished in keeping with a daily routine established to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Twenty-four (24) hours after written notice is given the Contractor that the clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the Engineer, if the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as the Engineer deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice, and the costs of such direct action , plus 25 % of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Upon the completion of the project as a whole as covered by these Contract Documents , and before final acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the project all surplus and discarded materi a ls , temporary structures , and debris of every kind . He shall leave the site of all work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by him and shall deliver over such materials and equipment in a bright , clean , polished and new appearing condition. No extra compensation will be made to the Contractor for any clean-up required on the project. CS-5 (7) C5-5. l 8 FINAL INSPECTION: Whenever the work · provided for in and contemplated under the Contract Documents has been satisfactorily completed and final clean-up performed, the Engineer will notify the proper officials of the Owner and request that a Final Inspection be made . Such inspection will be made within 10 days after such notification. After such final inspection, if the work and materials and equipment are found satisfactory, the Contractor will be notified in writing of the acceptance of the same after the proper resolution has been passed by the City Council. No time charge will be made against the Contractor between said date of notification of the Engineer and the date of final inspection of the work. CS-5 (8) •• < ~· ' .., ' t ~ I { .i r.. • .. (' ·~ ~ ~ 'f { :.! ' J ~- t lit ' . t I ,: ,Ii, ,, 1 1' ' J " PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY SECTION C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6 .I LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all Federal and State Laws and City ordinances and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work or his operations, and shall observe and comply with all orders, laws, ordinances and regulations which exist or which may be enacted later by bodies having jurisdiction or authority for such enactment. No plea or misunderstanding or ignorance thereof will be considered. The Contractor and his Sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any and all claims or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, or order, whether it be by himself or his employees . C6-6.2 PERMITS AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, costs and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work . C6-6.3 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERJALS, AND PROCESSES: If the Contractor is required or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letter, patent, or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner of such patent, letter, or copyrighted design. It is mutually agreed and understood that without exception the contract price shall include all royalties or cost arising from patents, trademarks, and copyrights in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and his sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such trade-mark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed under these Contract Documents, and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense, or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work, provided, however, that the Owner will assume the responsibility to defend any and all suits brought for the infringement of any patent claimed to be infringed upon the design, type of construction or material or equipment specified in the Contract Documents furnished the Contractor by the Owner, and to hold the Contractor harmless on account of such suits . C6-6.4 SANITARY PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall establish and enforce among his employees such regulations in regard to cleanliness and disposal of garbage and waste as will tend to prevent the inception · and spread of infectious or contagious diseases and to effectively prevent the creation of a nuisance about the work on any property either public or private, and such regulations as are required by Law shall be put into immediate force and effect by the Contractor. The necessary sanitary conveniences for use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation , shall be con structed and maintained by the Contractor and their use shall be strictly enforced by C6-6(1) the Contractor. All such facilities shall be kept in a clean and sanitary condition, free from objectionable odors so as not to cause a nuisance . All sanitary laws and regulations of the State of Texas and the City shall be strictly complied with . C6-6.5 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE: Materials or equipment stored about the work shall be placed and used, and the work shall at all times be so conducted, as to cause no greater obstruction or inconvenience to the public than is considered to be absolutely necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to maintain at all times all phases of his work in such a manner as not to impair the safety or convenience of the public, including, but not limited to, safe and convenient ingress and egress to the property contiguous tot he work area. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to render reasonable ingress and egress for normal vehicular traffic, except during actual trenching or pipe installation operations, at all driveway crossings. Such provisions may include bridging, placement or crushed stone or gravel or such other means of providing proper ingress and egress for the property served by the driveway as the Engineer may approve as appropriate. Such other means may include the diversion of driveway traffic, with specific approval by the Engineer, If diversion of traffic is approved by the Engineer at any location, the Contractor may make arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer for the diversion of traffic, and shall, at his expense, provide all materials and perform all work necessary for the construction and maintenance of roadways and bridges for such diversion of traffic. Sidewalks must not be obstructed except by special permission of the Engineer. The materials excavated and the construction materials such as pipe used in construction of the work shall be placed so as not to endanger the work or prevent free access to all fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, police call boxes, water valves, gas valves, or manholes in the vicinity . The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of the Contractor as regards to public convenience and safety which may come to its attention, after twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, save in cases of emergency when it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice, and in either case, the cost of such work or materials furnished by the Owner or by the City shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. The Contractor, after approval of the Engineer, shall notify the Fire Department Headquarters, Traffic Engineer, and Police Department , when any street or alley is requested to be closed or obstructed or any fire hydrant is to be made inaccessible, and when so directed by the Engineer, shall keep any street , streets, or highways in condition for unobstructed use by fire apparatus. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Fire Department Headquarters when all such obstructed streets, alleys , or hydrants are placed back in service. Where the Contractor is required to construct temporary bridges or make other arrangements for crossing over ditches or streams, hi s responsibility for accidents in connection with such crossings shall include the roadway approaches as well as the structures of such cro s sin g s . C6-6(2) ,{ \ l ' r The Contractor shall at all times conduct his operation and use of construction machinery so as not to damage or destroy trees and scrubs located in close proximity to or on the site of the work. Wherever any such damage may be done, the Contractor shall immediately satisfy all claims of property owners, and no payment will be made by the Owner in settlement of such claims. The Contractor shall file with the Engineer a written statement showing all such claims adjusted. C6-6.6 PRIVILEGES OF CONTRACTOR IN STREETS, ALLEYS, AND RIGHT-OF-WAY : For the performance of the contract, the Contractor will be permitted to use and occupy such portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid delay in the construction operations. Excavated and waste materials shall be piled or staked in such a way as not to interfere with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks , the work shall be carried on in such manner as not to interfere with the operation of trains, loading or unloading of cars, etc. Other contractors of the Owner may, for all purposes required by the contract, enter upon the work and premises used by the Contractor and shall be provided all reasonable facilities and assistance for the completion of adjoining work. Any additional grounds desired by the Contractor for his use shall be provided by him at his own cost and expense. C6-6. 7 RAILWAY CROSSINGS: When the work encroaches upon any right-of-way of any railroad, the City will secure the necessary easement for the work . Where the railroad tracks are to be crossed , the Contractor shall observe all the regulations and instructions of the railroad company as to the methods of performing the work and take all precautions for the safety of property and the public. Negotiations with the railway companies for the permits shall be done by and through the City. The Contractor shall give the City Notice not less than five days prior to the time of his intentions to begin work on that portion of the project which is related to the railway properties . The Contractor will not be given extra compensation for such railway crossings unless specifically set forth in the Contract Documents. C6-6 .8 BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND WATCHMEN: Where the work is carried on in or adjacent to any street, alley, or public place, the Contractor shall at his own expense furnish, erect, and maintain such barricades, fences, lights, and danger s ignals, shall provide such watchman, and shall take . all such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as are necessary . Barricades and fences shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one easily visible burning light at each barricade. A sufficient number of barricades shall be erected and maintained to keep pedestrians away from, and vehicles from being driven on or into, any work under C6-6(3) construction or being maintained. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen and keep them at their respective assignments in sufficient numbers to protect the work and prevent accident or damage. \ All installations and procedures shall be consistent with provisions set forth in the "1980 ,, Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" issued under the authority of the "State of Texas Uniform Act Regulating Traffic on Highways", codified as Article 6701 d Veron' s Civil Statues, pertinent section being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. The Contractor will not remove any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign, or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is determined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shaJJ contact the Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division (phone number 871-8075), to remove the sign. In case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above referred manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shaJJ be left in place until the temporary sign requirements are met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be re- installed, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to re-install the permanent sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such re-installation is completed. The Contractor will be held responsible foe all damage to the work or the public due to failure of barricades, signs, fences, lights, or watchmen to protect them. Whenever evidence is found of such damage to the work the Engineer may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, fences and lights, and for providing watchmen shall not cease until the project shall have been completed and accepted by the Owner. No compensation, except as specifically provided in these Contract Documents, will be paid to the Contractor for the Work and materials involved in the constructing, providing, and maintaining of barricades, signs, fences, and lights or salaries of watchmen , for the subsequent removal and disposal of such barricades, signs, or for any other incidentals necessary for the proper protection, safety, and convenience of the public during the contract period, as this work is considered to be subsidiary to the several items for which unit or lump sum prices are requested in the Proposal. C6-6.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES, DROP WEIGHT, ETC .: Should the Contractor elect to use explosives, drop weight, etc., in the prosecution of the work , the utmost care shall be exercised at all times so as not to endanger life or property . The Contractor shall notify the proper representative of any public service corporation, any company, individual , or utility , and the Owner, not less than twenty-four hours in advance of the use C6-6(4) of any activity which might damage or endanger their or his property along or adjacent to the work. Where the use of explosives is to be permitted on the project, as specified in the Special Conditions Documents, or the use of explosives is requested, the Contractor shall submit notice to the Engineer in writing twenty-four hours prior to commencing and shall furnish evidence that he has insurance coverage to protect against any damages and/or injuries arising out of such use of explosives . C6-6. l O WORK WITHIN EASEMENTS: Where the work passes over, through, or into private property, the Owner will provide such right-of-way or easement privileges, as the City may deem necessary for the prosecution of the work. Any additional rights-of- way or work area considered necessary by the Contractor shall be provided by him at his expense. Such additional rights-of-way or work area shall be acquired for the benefit of the City. The City shall be notified in writing as to the rights so acquired before work begins in the affected area. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously obtained permission from the owner of such property. The Contractor will not be allowed to store equipment or material on private property unless and until the specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the Contractor and a copy furnished to the Engineer. Unless specifical1y provided otherwise, the Contractor shall clear al1 rights-of-way or easements of obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as a part of the project construction operations. The Contractor shal1 be responsible for the preservation of and shall use every precaution to prevent damage to, all tress, shrubbery, plants, lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to al1 conduits, overhead pole lines, or appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all other public or private property adjacent to the work. The Contractor shall notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the work. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the work. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies or any corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, whose land or interest in land might be affected by the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or execution of the work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or equipment. When and where any direct or indirect or injury is done to public or private property on account of any act, omission , neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of non-execution thereof on the part of the Contractor, he shall restore or have restored as his cost and expense such property to a condition at least equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done , by repairing, rebuilding , or otherwise C6-6(5) replacing and restoring as may be directed by the Owner, or he shall make good such damages or injury in a manner acceptable to the owner of the property and the Engineer. All fences encountered and removed during construction of this project shall be restored to the original or a better than original condition upon completion of this project. When wire fencing, either wire mesh or barbed wire is to be crossed, the Contractor shall set cross brace posts on either side of the permanent easement before the fence is cut. Should additional fence cuts be necessary, the Contractor shall provide cross-braced posts at the point of the proposed cut in addition to the cross braced posts provided at the permanent easements limits, before the fence is cut. Temporary fencing shall be erected in place of the fencing removed whenever the work is not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to prevent livestock from entering the construction area. The cost for fence removal, temporary closures and replacement shall be subsidiary to the various items bid in the project proposal. Therefore, no separate payment shall be allowed for any service associated with this work. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or to make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 48 hour written notice under ordinary circumstances, and without notice when a nuisance or hazardous condition results, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be determined by the Owner to be necessary, and the cost thereby will be deducted from any monies due to or to become due to the Contractor under this contract. C6.6. l l INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: It is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that the Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, and not as an officer, agent, servant, or employee of the Owner. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and exclusive right to control the details of all work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing the same, and shall be solely responsible for the acts and omissions of its officers, agents, servants, employees, contractor, subcontractors, licensees and invitees . The doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply as between Owner and Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors and subcontractors, and nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between Owner and Contractor. C6-6 . 12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to, and does hereby indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims or suits for property damage or loss and/or personal injury, including death , to any and all persons, of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, 1 icen sees or invitee s, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart , by alleged negligence on the part of o ffic e rs, agents , employees , contractors , subcontractors , licen sees or invitees of the C6-6(6) Owner; and said Contractor does hereby covenant and agree to assume all liability and responsibility of Owner, its officers, agents , servants, and employees for property damage or loss, and/or personal injuries, including death, to any and all person of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to, and does hereby, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all injuries, Joss or damages to property of the Owner during the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether arising out of or in connection with or resulting from, in whole or in apart, any and all alleged acts of omission of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees, or invitees of the Owner. In the event a written claim for damages against the contractor or its subcontractors remains unsettled at the time all work on the project has been completed to the satisfaction of the Director of the Water Department, as evidenced by a final inspection, final payment to the Contractor shall not be recommended to the Director of the Water Department for a period of 30 days after the date of such final inspection, unless the Contractor shall submit written evidence satisfactory to the Director that the claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved. If the claims concerned remains unsettled as of the expiration of the above 30-day period, the Contractor may be deemed to be entitled to a semi-final payment for work completed, such semi-final payment to be in the amount equal to the total dollar amount then due Jess the dollar value of any written claims pending against the Contractor arising out of performance of such work, and such semi-final payment may then be recommended by the Director. The Director shall not recommend final payment to a Contractor against whom such a claim for damages is outstanding for a period of six months following the date of the acceptance of the work performed unless the Contractor submits evidence in writing satisfactory tot he Director that: I. The claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved, or 2. Good faith efforts have been made to settle such outstanding claims, and such good faith efforts have failed. If condition ( 1) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director shall recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made . If condition (2) above is met at any time within the six month period , the Director may recommend that final payment to the Contractor be made . At the expiration of the s ix month period , the C6-6(7) Direc tor may re commend that final payment be made if all other work has been performed and all other obligations of the Contractor have been met to the satisfaction of the Director. Th e Director may , if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other Water Department Contract work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. C6-6 .13 CONTRACTOR'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES: Should the Contractor claim compensation foe any alleged damage by reason of the acts or omissions of the Owner, he shall within three days after the actual sustaining of such alleged damage, make a written st atement to the Engineer, setting out in detail the nature of the alleged damage, and on or before the 25th day of the month succeeding that in which ant such damage is claimed to have been sustained , the Contractor shall file with the Engineer an itemized statement of the detail s and the amount of such alleged damage and, upon request, shall give the Engineer access to all books of account, receipts, vouchers, bills of lading, and other books or papers containing any evidence as to the amount of such alleged damage. Unless such· statements sh all be filed as hereinabove required, the Contractor's claim for compen sa tion shall be waived, and he shall not be entitled to payment on account of such . dama ges . C6-6 .14 ADJUSTMENT OR RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES, ETC.: In case it is necessary to change, move , or alter in any manner the property of a public utility or others , the said property shall not be moved or interfered with until orders thereupon have been is sued by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owners of public utilities to enter the geographical limits of the Contract for the purpose of making such changes or repairs to the prop ert y th at may be necessary by the performance of this Contract. C6-6 . l 5 TE MPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS : When existing se we r lin es ha ve to be taken up or removed, the Contractor shall , at his own expense and co st , pro vide and maintain temporary outlets and connections for all private or public drain s and sewers . The Contractor shall also take care of all sewage and drainage which w ill be receiv ed from these drains and sewers , and for this purpose he shall provide and ma int a in , at hi s own co st and ex pense, adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlet s or di v is ion s. T he Co ntract or , at his own cost and expense, shall construct such troughs , pipes , o r other stru c tures nec e ssary , and be prepared at all times to dispose of drainage and sewage recei ve d from th es e temporary connections until such times as the permanent conn ections are built and ar e in se rvice . The existing sewers and connections shall be ke pt in service and m a int a in ed und er the Contract , except when specified or ordered to be a bandon ed by th e E ngi nee r. A ll water, sewa ge , and other waste shall be dispo sed of in a satisfactory m ann er so th at no nui sa nc e is crea ted a nd so th at the work under con struction will be a dequ a te ly pro tec t ed. C6 -6(8 ) C6-6. I 6 ARRANGEMENT AND CHARGES FOR WATER FURNISHED BY THE CITY: When the Contractor desires to use City water in connection with any construction work, he shall make complete and satisfactory arrangements with the Fort Worth City Water Department for so doing. City water furnished to the Contractor shall be delivered to the Contractor from a connection on an existing City main. All piping required beyond the point of delivery shall be installed by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor's responsibility in the use of all . existing fire hydrant and/or valves is detailed in Section E2-l .2 USE OF FIRE HYDRANTS AND VALVES in these General Contract Documents. When meters are used to measure the water, the charges, if any, for water will be made at the regular established rates. When meters are not used, the charges, if any, will be as prescribed by the City ordinance, or where no ordinances applies, payment shall be made on estimates and rates established by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. C 6-6.17 USE OF A SECTION OR PORTION OF THE WORK: Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any section or portion of the work or any structure is in suitable condition, it may be put into use upon the written notice of the Engineer, and such usage shall not be held to be in any way an acceptance of said work or structure or any part thereof or as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Contract Documents. All necessary repairs and removals of any section of the work so put into use, due to defective materials or workmanship, equipment, or deficient operations on the part of the Contractor, shall be performed by the Contractor at his expense . C6-6. I 8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK: Until written acceptance by the Owner as provided for in these Contract Documents, the work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution to prevent injury or damage to the work or any part thereof by action of the elements or from any cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good at his own expense all injuries or damage to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the hereinabove causes. C6-6 . I 9 NO W AIYER OF LEGAL RIGHTS: Inspection by the Engineer or any order by the Owner by payment of money or any payment for or acceptance of any work , or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the City shall not operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract Documents. Any waiver of any breach or Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach . The Owner reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents . C6-6(9) C6-6.20 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS: In carrymg out the provisions of these Contract Documents or in exercising any power of authority granted thereunder, there shall be no liability upon the authorized representative of the Owner, either personally or other wise as they are agents and representatives of the City. C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX: On a contract awarded by the City of Fort Worth, and organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller's Ruling .007. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with the provision of State Comptroller's Ruling .011, and any other applicable State Comptroller's rulings pertaining to the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. On a contract awarded by a developer for the construction of a publicly-owner improvement in a street right-of-way or other easement which has been dedicated to the public and the City of Fort Worth, an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor can probably be exempted in the same manner stated above . Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act permits and information can be obtained from: Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin, TX C6-6( I 0) t PART C-GENERAL CONDITIONS C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS : C7-7.I SUBLETTING: The Contractor shall perform with his own organization, and with the assistance of workmen under his immediate superintendance, work of a value of not less than fifty (50%) percent of the value embraced on the contract. If the Contractor sublets any part of the work to be done under these Contract Documents, he will not under any circumstances be relieved of the responsibility and obligation assumed under these Contract Documents. All transactions of the Engineer will be with the Contractor. Subcontractors will be considered only · in the capacity of employees or workmen of the Contractor and shall be subject tot he same requirements as to character and competency. The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times, when the work is in operation, be represented either in person or by a superintendent or other designated representatives. C7-7 .2 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contractor shall not assign , transfer, sublet, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his rights , title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof without the previous consent of the Owner expressed by resolution of the City Council and concurred in by the Sureties. If the Contractor does , without such previous consent, assign, transfer, sublet, convey, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his right, title, or interest therein or any part thereof, to any person or persons, partnership, company, firm, or corporation, or does by bankruptcy , voluntary or involuntary, or by assignment under the insolvency laws of any states, attempt to dispose of the contract may, at the option of the Owner be revoked and annulled, unless the Sureties shall successfully complete said contract, and in the event of any such revocation or annulment, any monies due or to become due under or by virtue of said contract shall be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages for the reason that it would be impracticable and extremely difficult to fix the actual damages . C7-7 .3 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK: Prior to beginning any construction operations , the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in five or more copies , if requested by the Engineer, a progress schedule preferably in chart or diagram form, or a brief outlining in detail and step by step the manner of prosecuting the work and ordering materials and equipment which he expects to follow in order to complete the project in the scheduled time. There shall be submitted a table of estimated amounts to be earned by the Contractor during each monthly estimate period . The Contractor shall commence the work to be performed under this contract within the time limit stated in these Contract Documents and shall conduct the work in a continuous manner and with sufficient equipment , materials , and labor as is necessary to insure its compl etion within the tim e limit. C 7-7(1) The sequence requested of all construction operations shall be at all times as specified in the Special Contract Documents. Any Deviation from such sequencing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. Contractor shall not proceed with any deviation until he has received written approval from the Engineer. Such specification or approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility of the complete performance of the Contract. The contract time may be changed only as set forth in Section C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME OF COMPLETION of this Agreement, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the contract time. C7-7.4 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS: The working operations shall at all times be conducted by the Contractor so as to create a minimum amount of inconvenience to the public. At any time when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor has obstructed or closed or is carrying on operations in a portion of a street or public way greater than is necessary for proper execution of the work, the Engineer may require the Contractor to finish the section on which operations are in progress before the work is commenced on any additional section or street. C7-7.5 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT: Local labor shall be used by the Contractor when it is available. The Contractor may bring from outside the City of Fort Worth his key men and his superintendent. All other workmen, including equipment operators, may be imported only after the local supply is exhausted. The Contractor shall employ only such superintendents, foremen, and workmen who are careful, competent, and fully qualified to perform the duties and tasks assigned to them, i and the Engineer may demand and secure the summary dismissal of any person or persons employed by the Contractor in or about or on the work who, in the opinion of the Owner, shall misconduct himself or to be found to be incompetent, disrespectful, intemperate, dishonest, or otherwise objectionable or neglectful in the proper performance of his or their duties, or who neglect or refuses to comply with or carry out the direction of the owner, and such person or persons shall not be employed again thereon without written consent of the Engineer. All workmen shall have sufficient skill, ability, and experience to properly perform the work assigned to them and operate any equipment necessary to properly carry out the performance of the assigned duties. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain on the work all such equipment as is considered to be necessary for the prosecution of the work in an acceptable manner and at a satisfactory rate of progress. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for handling materials and executing any part of the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be maintained in a satisfactory, safe and efficient working condition . Equipment on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to the work. Workmen or adjacent property will result from its use. C7-7(2) ' .. C7-7 .6 WORK SCHEDULE: Elapsed working days shall be computed starting with the first day of the work completed as defined in C 1-1.23 "WORKING DAYS" or the date stipulated in the "WORK ORDER" for beginning work, whichever comes first. Nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holidays, providing that the following requirements are met: a . A request to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be made to the Engineer no later that the preceding Thursday. b. Any work to be done on the project on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be, in the opinion of the Engineer, essential to the timely completion of the project. The Engineer's decision shall be final in response to such a request for approval to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday, and no extra compensation shall be allowed to the Contractor for any work performed on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday. Calendar Days shall be defined in C 1-1.24 and the Contractor may work as he so desires. C7-7 .7 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION: The Contractor shall commence the working operations within the time specified in the Contract Documents and set forth in the Work Order. Failure to do so shall be considered by the owner as abandonment of the Contract by the Contractor and the Owner may proceed as he sees fit. The Contractor shall maintain a rate of progress such as will insure that the whole work will be performed and the premises cleaned up in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time established in such documents and such extension of time as may be properly authorized. C7-7 .8 EXTENSION OF TIME COMPLETION: The Contractor's request for an extension of time of completion shall be considered only when the request for such extension is submitted in writing to the Engineer within seven days from and after the time alleged cause of delay shall occurred . Should an extension of the time of completion be requested such request will be forwarded to the City Council for approval. In adjusting the contract time for completion of work, consideration will be given to unforeseen causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, fire , flood, tornadoes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes , embargoes , or delays of sub-contractors due to such causes. C7-7(3) When the date of completion is based on a calendar day bid , a request for extension of time because of inclement weather will not be considered. A request for extension of time due to inability to obtain supplies and materials will be considered only when a review of the Contractor's purchase order dates and other pertinent data as requested by the Engineer indicates that the Contractor has made a bonafide attempt to secure delivery on schedule. This shall include efforts to obtain the supplies and materials from alternate sources in case the first source cannot make delivery . If satisfactory execution and completion of the contract should require work and materials in greater amounts or quantities than those set forth in the approved Contract Documents, then the contract time mat be increased by Change Order. C7-7.9 DELAYS: The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City. When such extra compensation is claimed, a written statement thereof shaJI be presented by the Contractor to the Engineer and if by the Engineer found correct, shaJI be approved and referred by the Engineer to the City Council for final approval or disapproval; and the action thereon by the City Council shall be final and binding. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the Engineer to stop work, or by the performance of extra work, or by the failure of the City to provide material or necessary instructions for carrying on the work, then such delay will entitle the Contractor to an equivalent extension of time, his application for sha11, however, be subject to the approval of the City Council: and no such extension of time shaJI release the Contractor or the surety on his performance bond from al1 his obligations hereunder which shaJI remain in full force until the discharge of the contract. C7-7.10 TIME OF COMPLETION: The time of completion is an essential element of the Contract. Each bidder shall indicate in the appropriate place on the last page of the proposal, the number of working days or calendar days that he will require to fully complete this contract or the time of completion wiJI be specified by the City in the proposal section of the Contract Documents. The number of days indicated sha11 be a realistic estimate of the time required to complete the work covered by the specific contract being bid upon. The amount of time so stated by the successful bidder or the City will become the time of completion specified in the Contract Documents. For each calendar day that any work shaJI remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, or increased time granted by the Owner, or as automatically increased by additional work or materials ordered after the contract is signed , the sum per day given in the following schedule, unless otherwise specified in other parts of the Contract Documents, wil1 be deducted from the monies due the Contractor, not as a pen a lty , but as liquidated da mages s uffered by the Owner. C7-7(4) l ' ' •. AMOUNT OF CONTRACT AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY Less than $ 5,000 inclusiv.e $ 35.00 $ 5,001 to $ 15,000 inclusive $ 45.00 $ 15,001 to $ 25,000 inclusive $ 63.00 $ 25,001 to $ 50,000 inclusive $ 105.00 $ 50,001 to $ 100,000 inclusive $ 154.00 $ 100,001 to $ 500,000 inclusive $ 210.00 $ 500,001 to $ 1,000,000 inclusive $ 315 .00 $ 1,000,001 to $2,000,000 inclusive $ 420 .00 $2,000,000 and over $ 630.00 The parties hereto understand and agree that any harm to the City caused by the Contractor's delay in completing the work hereunder in the time specified by the Contract Documents would be incapable or very difficult to calculate due to lack of accurate information, and that the "Amount of Liquidated Damages Per Day", as set out above , is a reasonable forecast of just compensation due the City for harm caused by any delay. C7-7.I I SUSPENSION BY COURT ORDER: The Contractor shall suspend operations on such part or parts of the work ordered by any court, and will not be entitled to additional compensation by virtue of such court order. Neither will he be liable to the City in the vent the work is suspended by a Court Order. Neither will the Owner be liable to the Contractor by virtue of any Court Order or action for which the Owner is not solely responsib I e. C7-7.12 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION : The Owner shall have the right to suspend the work operation wholly or in part for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather conditions or any other unsuitable conditions which in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer cause further prosecution of the work to be unsatisfactory or detrimental to the interest of the project. During temporary suspension of the work covered by this contract, for any reason, the Owner will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. lf it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period , the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way, and he shall ·take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work , and erect temporary structures where necessary. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor as set forth in Paragraph C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF THETJME OF COMPLETION , and should it be C7-7(5) determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and the Engineer that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable period of time, then the Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the Engineer that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will be allowed. No reimbursement shall be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City of Fort Worth . The Contractor shall not suspend work without written notice from the Engineer and shall proceed with the work operations promptly when notified by the Engineer to so resume operations. C7-7.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO NATIONAL EMERGENCY : Whenever, because of National Emergency, so declared by the president of the United States or other lawful authority, it becomes impossible for the Contractor to obtain all of the necessary labor,. materials, and equipment for the prosecution of the work with reasonable continuity for a period of two months, the Contractor shall within seven days notify the City in writing, giving a detailed statement of the efforts which have been made and listing all necessary items of labor, materials, and equipment not obtainable. If, after investigations , the owner finds that such conditions existing and that the inability of the Contractor to proceed is not attributable in whole or in part to the fault or neglect of the Contractor, than if the Owner cannot after reasonable effort assist the Contractor in procuring and making available the necessary labor, materials, and equipment within thirty days, the Contractor my request the owner to terminate the contract and the owner may comply with the request, and the termination shall be conditioned and based upon a final settlement mutually acceptable to both the Owner and the Contractor and final payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the agreed settlement, which shall include . But not be limited to the payment for all work executed but not anticipated profits on work which has not been performed. C7-7.14 SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF THE CONTRACT: The work operations on all or any portion or section of the work under Contract shall be suspended immediately on written order of the Engineer or the Contract may be declared canceled by the City Council for any good and sufficient cause. The following , by way of example, but not of limitation, may be considered grounds for suspension or cancellation : a. Failure of the Contractor to commence work operations within the time specified in the Work Order issued by the Owner. b . Substantial ev idence that progress of the work operations by the Contractor is insufficient to complete the work within the specified time . C7 -7(6) ; 'i ,. c . Failure of the Contractor to provide and maintain sufficient labor and equipment to properly execute the working operations. d. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has abandoned the work . e. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt , or otherwise financially unable to carry on the work satisfactorily . f. Failure on the part of the Contractor to observe any requirements of the Contract Documents or to comply with any orders given by the Engineer or Owner provided for in these Contract Documents. g. Failure of the Contractor promptly to make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or any defects of any nature the correction of which has been directed in writing by the Engineer or the Owner. h . Substantial evidence of collusion for the purpose of illegally procuring a contract or perpetrating fraud on the City in the construction of work under contract. 1. A substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose . J. If the Contractor shall for any cause whatsoever not carry on the working operation in an acceptable manner. k. If the Contractor commences legal action against the Owner. A Copy of the suspension order or action of the City Council shalJ be served on the Contractor's Sureties. When work is suspended for any cause or causes , or when the contract is canceled, the Contractor shall discontinue the work or such part thereof as the owner shall designate, whereupon the Sureties may, at their option, assume the contract or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue , and may perform the same or may , with written consent of the owner, sublet the work or that portion of the work as taken over, provided however, that the Sureties shall exercise their option, if at all, within two weeks after the written notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and upon the Sureties or their authorized agents. The Sureties, in such event shalJ assume the Contractor 's place in alJ respects, and shall be paid by the Owner for all work performed by them in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. All monies remaining due the Contractor at the time of this default shall thereupon become due and payable to the Sureties as the work progresses , subject to all of the terms of the Contract Documents . C7-7(7) In case the Sureties do not , within the hereinabove specified time , exercise their right and option to assume the contract responsibilities, or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, then the Owner shall have the power to complete, by contract or otherwise , as it may determine , the work herein described or such work thereof as it may deem necessary, and the Contractor hereto agrees that the Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any materials, plants, tools, equipment, supplies, and property of any kind provided by the Contractor for the purpose of carrying on the work and to procure other tools, equipment, materials, labor and property for the completion of the work, and to charge to the account of the Contractor of said contract expense for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and all expenses incidental thereto . The expense so charged shall be deducted by the owner from such monies as may be due or may become due at any time thereafter to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract or any part thereof. The Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work completing the contract, but the expense to be deducted shall be the actual cost of the owner of such work In case such expenses shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had been completed by the Contract, then the Contractor and his Sureties shall pay the amount of such excess to the City on notice from the Owner of the excess due. When any particular part of the work is being carried on by the Owner by contract or otherwise under the provisions of this section, the Contractor shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity with the terms of the Contract Documents and in such a manner as to not hinder or interfere with the performance of the work by the Owner. C7-7 . l 5 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contract will be considered as having been fulfilled, save as provided in any bond or bonds or by law, when all the work and all sections or parts of the project covered by the Contract Documents have been finished and completed , the final inspection made by the Engineer, and the final acceptance and final payment made by the Owner. C7-7.16 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE OWNER: The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the Owner in . whole , or from time to time in part, in accordance with this section, whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner. A . NOTICE OF TERMINATION: Any Termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of work under the contract is terminated , and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the Owner. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is made with ju st ca use as therein s tated ; and no proof in any C 7-7(8 ) .. " claim , demand or suit shall be required of the Owner regarding such discretionary action B. CONTRACTOR ACTION: After receipt of a notice of termination , and except as otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall: 1. Stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination; 2 . place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under the contract as is not terminated; 3 . terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by notice of termination ; 4 . transfer title to the Owner and deliver in the manner, at the times , and to the extent, if any , directed by the Engineer: a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the work terminated by the notice of the termination ; and b. The completed , or partially completed plans, drawings , information and other property which , if the contract had been completed, would have been re quired to be furnished to the Owner. 5 . complete performance of such work as shall not ha v e been terminated by the notice of termination ; and 6 . Take such action as may be necessary , or as th e Enginee r m ay direct , for the protection and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the owner has or may acquire the re st. At a time not later th a n 30 days after the termination d at e specified in the · notic e of termin ation , the Contractor may submit to th e En g ineer a li st , certifi ed as to qu antity and qu a li ty, of any or all it em s o f te rmin ati o n in ve nt o ry no t prev iou sly di s p osed of, exclu s iv e of it em s th e di s position o f C 7-7(9) which has been directed or authorized by Engineer, Not later than 15 days thereafter, the owner shall accept title to such items provided, that the list submitted shall be subject to verification by the Engineer upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored, within 45 days from the date of submission of the list , and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement. C . TERMINATION CLAIM: Within 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim to the Engineer in the form and with the certification prescribed by the Engineer. Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Owner upon request of the Contractor, made in writing within such 60-day period or authorized extension thereof, any and all such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived. D . AMOUNTS: Subject to the prov1s1ons of Item C7-7 .J(C), the Contractor and the Owner may agree upon the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or partial termination of the work pursuant hereto; provided, that such agreed amount or amounts shall never exceed the total contract price reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the contract price work not terminated . The contract shall be amended accordingly, and the Contractor shall be paid the agreed amount. No amoµnt shall be due for lost or anticipated profits> Nothing in C7-7 . J 6(E) hereafter, prescribing the amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount or amounts which may be agreed upon to be paid to the Contractor pursuant to this paragraph. E . FAIL URE TO AGREE: In the event of the failure of the Contractor and the Owner to agree as provided in C7-7. J 6(0) upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the work pursuant to this section , the Owner shall determine , on the basis of information available to it , the amount , if any , due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined . No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits . F . DEDUCTIONS: In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this section there shall be deducted; 1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the terminated portion of thi s contract ; C 7-7(10) 2 . any claim which the Owner may have against the Contractor in connection with this contract; and 3. the agreed price for, or the proceeds of the sale of, any materials, supplies or other things kept by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the Owner. G. ADJUSTMENT: If the termination hereunder be partial, prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of this contract, the Contractor may file with the Engineer a request in writing for an equitable adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued portion of the contract (the portion not terminated by notice of termination), such equitable adjustment as may be agreed upon shall be made in such price or prices; noting contained herein, however, sha11 limit the right of the owner and the Contractor to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid tot he Contractor for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not contain an established contract price for such continued portion . H . NO LIMITATION OF RIGHTS: Noting contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the Owner may have for termination of this contract under C7-7.14 hereof entitled "SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF CONTRACT" or any other right which the Owner may have for default or breach of contract by Contractor. C7-7. l 7 SAFETY METHODS AND PRACTICES : The Contractor sha11 be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work at all times and shall assume all responsibilities for their enforcement. The Contractor shall comply with federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations so as to protect person and property from injury, including death, or damage in connection with the work. C 7-7(1 l) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.l MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES: The determination of quantities of work performed by the Contractor and authorized by the Contract Documents acceptably completed under the terms of the Contract Documents shall be made by the Engineer, based on measurements made by the Engineer. These measurements will be made according to the United States Standard Measurements used in common practice, and will be the actual length, area, solid contents, numbers, and weights of the materials and item installed . C8-8.2 UNIT PRJCES: When in the Proposal a "Unit Price" is set forth, the said "Unit Price" shall include the furnishing by the Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appliances and appurtenances necessary for the construction of and the completion in a manner acceptable to the Engineer of all work to be done under these Contract Documents. The "Unit Price" shall include all permanent and temporary prot_ection of overhead, surface, and underground structures, cleanup, finishing costs, overhead expense, bond, insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements and other clauses, delays, profits, injuries, damages claims, taxes, and all other items not specifically mentioned that may be required to fully construct each item of the work complete in place and in a satisfactory condition for operation. C8-8.3 LUMP SUM: When in the Proposal a "Lump Sum" is set forth, the said "Lump Sum" shall represent the total cost for the Contractor to furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appurtenances, and all subsidiary work necessary for the construction and completion of all the work to provide a complete and functional item as detailed in the Special Contract Documents and/or Plans. C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor, tools, materials, and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Document s , for all Joss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, ( except as provided in paragraph CS-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks , copyrights, or other legal reservations, C8-8( 1) and for completing the work m an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the one year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein. C8-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND RETAINAGE: Between the l st and the 5th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement showing an estimate of the value of the work done during the previous month, or estimate period under the Contract Documents. Not later than the I 0th day of the month, the Engineer shall verify such estimate, and if it is found to be acceptable and the value of the work performed since the last partial payment was made exceeds one hundred dollars ($100.00) inn amount, 90% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is Jess than $400,000.00, or 95% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is $400,000 .00 or greater, within twenty-·five (25) days after the regular estimate period . The City will have the option of preparing estimates on forms furnished by the City. The partial estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the estimate have not been installed (such payment will be allowed on a basis of 85% of the net invoice value thereof). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer such information as he may request to aid him as a guide in the verification or the preparation of partial estimates . It is understood that partial estimates from month to month will be approximate only, all partial monthly estimates and payment will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate, and such estimate shall not , in any respect , be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work done or of its quantity of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work strictly in accordance with the specifications or provisions of this Contract. C 8-8(2) j !, : C8-8.6 WITHHOLDING PAYMENT: Payment on any estimate or estimates may be held in abeyance if the performance of the construction operations is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C8-8.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Whenever the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents shall have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the improvements are ready for final inspection. The Engineer shall notify the appre>priate officials of the Owner, will within a reasonable time make such final inspection, and if the work is satisfactory, in an acceptable condition, and has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof, the Engineer will initiate the processing of the final estimate and recommend final acceptance of the project and final payment thereof as outlines in paragraph C8-8.8 below. C8-8.8 FINAL PAYMENT: Whenever all the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, a final estimate showing the value of the work will be prepared by the Engineer as soon as the necessary measurements, computations, and checks can be made . All prior estimates upon which payment has been made are subject to necessary corrections or revisions in the final payment. The amount of the final estimate, less previous payments and any sums that have been deducted or retained under the provisions of the Contract Documents , will be paid to the Contractor within 60 days after the final acceptance by the Owner on a proper resolution of the City Council, provided the Contractor has furnished to the owner satisfactory evidence of compliance as follows: Prior to submission of the final estimate for payment, the Contractor shall execute an affidavit as furnished by the City, certifying that ; A . all persons , firms, associations, corporations, or other organizations furnishing labor and/or materials have been paid in full , B. that the wage scale established by the City Council in the City of Fort Worth has been paid , and C . that there are no claims pending for personal mJury and/or property damages. The acceptance by the Contractor of the last or final payment as aforesaid shall operate as and shall release the owner from all claims or liabilities under the Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or neglect of said City relating to or connected with the Contract. C8-8(3) The making o f the final payment by the Owner shall no t relieve th e Contractor of any guarantees or other requi rem ents of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter . C8-8 .9 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN : It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers to prepare the Contract Documents and all modifications of the approved Contract Documents . It is, therefore, agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of its own design features, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure, and the practicability of the operations of the completed project, provided the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereof approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all alterations thereof. C8-8 . l O GENERAL GUARANTY: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of the work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any ex press warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship . The Contractor sha ll remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to the other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of I 00 percent of the amount of the contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness . C 8-8. l l SUBSIDIARY WORK : Any and all work specifically govern ed by docum ent ary requirements for the project , such as conditions imposed by the Plans, the General Contract Docum ents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has be en provided for in the Propo s al , shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work , the co st of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal , for each bid it e m . Surface re storation , rock excav ation and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the c ategory of subsidi ary work . C 8-8. l 2 MISC E LLANEOUS PLAC E MENT OF MA TERlAL: Materi a l may be a ll oc at ed under v arious bid item s in the Proposal to establish unit pric e s for miscellaneous placement of material. These materials shall be used only when directed by the E ng in eer, depending on fi eld conditions . Payment for miscellaneous placement of materi a l will be made for only that amount of material us ed , measured to the nearest one- tenth unit. P ay m ent for mi sce ll ane ou s pl acem ent of m aterial shall be in accordance with the G e ner al Contract D o cument s reg ardle ss of the actual amount us ed for the Proj e ct. C 8-8 . l 3 REC ORD DO CU M ENTS : Th e Cont rac t o r sh all k ee p on record a co py o f all s pec ific ati o ns , pl ans, add end a, m o dific a ti o n s, sho p dr awin gs and sa mpl es at th e C8-8(4) site , in good order and annotated to show a11 changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work . C8-8(5) PART Cl PART CI SUPPLEMENT ARY CONDITIONS TO PART C -GENERAL CONDITJONS A. GENERAL These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and affect. B . CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: In Section C 1-I .2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, delete Paragraph C. C 1-1 .2b SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and add the following: SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items : PART A -NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) White SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS White PARTB -PROPOSAL (Bid) White M/WBE BID SPECIFICATIONS Golden Rod PARTC -GENERAL CONDITIONS Canary Yellow PART CI -SUPPLEMENT ARY CONDITIONS Green PART D -SPECIAL CONDITIONS Green PART E -TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS White PERMJTS/EASEMENTS White PART F -BONDS AND INSURANCE White PARTG CONTRACT White PART H -PLANS/FIGURES (may be bound separately) White DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: Delete entire Paragraph CI- 1.17 , and replace with the following : C 1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed Director of the Transportation and Public Works Department of the City of Fort Worth , or his duly authorized repre sentative , as s istant , or agents . D . DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING : Add the following paragraph after Cl-1.17 and before Cl- 1.18: Part C l Cl-I. I 7 A DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING : The officially appointed Director of the Department of Engineering of the City of Fort Worth , referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative as s istant, or agents. CJ-I E. ENGINEER: Delete entire Paragraph Cl-1.19, and replace with the following: The Director of the Fort Worth Department of Engineer, the Director of Fort Worth Transportation and Public Works Department, the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. F . EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: In Section C2- 2.3, Paragraph 2, add the following to last sentence: "except for changes in the site conditions caused by factors outside of the control of the Contractor which occur after the Contractor's inspection and prior to installation." G . Part C-General Conditions, Section C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL, Page C2-2 (4) exchange paragraphs C2-2.7, C2-2.8 and C2-2 .9 with the following: Part C l C2-2 .7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the Purchasing Manager or his representative at the official location and stated time set forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to deliver the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidders must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marked with the word "PROPOSAL," and the name or description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort Worth Purchasing Division, P .O. Box 17027, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. C2-2 .8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the Purchasing Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for opening proposals. A request for non-consideration . of a proposal must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for the opening of proposals . After all proposals not requested for non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed may, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAPHIC MODIFICATION OF PROPOSALS: Any bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight ( 48) hours after the proposal opening time , no further consideration will be given to the proposal C l-2 - H . MINORJTY /WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Reference Part C (General Conditions), Section C3-3.2 Entitled "MINORJTY BUSINESS ENTERPRJSE/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRJSE COMPLIANCE" shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide to Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and payment therefore. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the -contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation (other than negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than thee (3) years . I. C3-3.5 A WARD OF CONTRACT is modified to read as follows: J. Pan C l "The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed the period state for the duration of the Bid Security stated in the Notice to Bidders or 90 days, whichever is shorter." C3-3.7 BONDS {CITY LET PROJECTS): Reference Part C, General Conditions, dated November 1, 1987; (City let projects) make the following revisions: 1. Page C3-3(3); the paragraph after paragraph C3-3 .7d Other Bonds should be revised to read: In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, the surety must (I) hold a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of $100,000 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion, will determine the adequacy of the proof required herein . 2 . Pg. C3-3(5) Paragraph C3-3.l l INSURANCE delete subparagraph "a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE". 3. Pg. C3-3(6), Paragraph C3-3.l l INSURANCE delete subparagraph "g. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING ". Cl -3 K. Pan C l INSURANCE. Ch ange the following portions of C3-3.I I Insurance as shown below: I. INSURANCE FOR SUBCONTRACTORS: At the end of the first paragraph of Section C3-3 . I I, aft e r "and for all subcontractors", insert the following sentence: "The General Contractor may re quire all subcontractors to be insured and submit documentation ensuring that the requirements ofC3-3.l 1 are met for all subcontractors . Failure of the OWNER to request required documentation shall not constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein. The Contractor' liability shall not be limited to the specified mounts of insurance required herein." 2. INSURANCE LIMITS. In Section C3-3.l 1, after the word "occurrence", add "/aggregate". 3. COMPENSATION INSURANCE. Add the following to the end of Paragraph C3-3.11 a: "Worker's compensation insurance covering employees in the project site shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the OWNER." 4 . COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: In Paragraph C3-3.1 lb: Replace the word "Comprehensive" with "Commercial" Add the following to Paragraph C3-3 .l lb: "Certificates of insurance shall state that Insurance is on an "occurrence basis ." Certificate shall also contain a statement that no exclusions by endorsement have been made to the Commercial General Liability Policy". 5. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY (CGL) POLICY: Amend Paragraph C3-3. l lc, Additional Liability by adding the following: a . Add the following to Section 6 CONTRATURAL LIABILITY: "The City, its offices, employees and servants shall be endorsed as additional insured on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under Contractor 's worker's compensation insurance policy . Contractor's insurance policies shall be endorsed to provide that such insurance is primary protection and any self- funded or commercial coverage maintained by the OWNER shall not be called upon to contribute to loss recovery." b . Add the following paragraph : "When required by the Contract documents, Environmental Impairment Liability Cov e rage must be provided in the limits of$ I ,000,000 per occurrence and $2 ,000 ,000 annual aggregate . The Environmental Impairment Liability (EIL) must contain coverage for s udd en and accidental contamination or pollution, liability for gradu a l emi s sions , and clean-up costs . The EIL coverage shall include hvo year completed o perati ons coverage on a per Project basis . A separate in s urance policy may be need ed to fulfill this require ment. EIL for damages incurre d in th e course of tran s po rtin g s lud ge shall be covered und er th e contract o r 's insurance polic y(s)." C l-4 Part C l 6 . AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE LIMITS: Revise Paragraph C3-3 .11 d so that the insurance limit are as follows : Bodily Injury Bodily Injury Property Damage $250,000 each person $500,000 aggregate $100,000 aggregate 7. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: revise paragraph C3-3.l 1fby inserting the following after the first sentence: "Other than Worker's Compensation Insurance, in lieu of specified insurance, the City may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The City must approve in writing any alternative coverage." 8. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING: For Paragraph C3-3.l lg, delete entire paragraph beginning "Local Agent for Insurance Bonding". 9. DEDUCT ABLE LIMITS: Add the following Paragraph C3-3. l l .g: "DEDUCTIBLE LIMITS. The deductible limits or self-funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000 per occurrence unless otherwise approved by the City." 10. INSURANCE COMPANY: Add the following Paragraph C3-3.11 .h: "INSURANCE COMPANY: The insurance company with whom the Contractor's insurance is written shall be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and shall have a current A.M. Best Rating of"A:VJJ" or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency." 11 . NOTIFICATION: Add the following Paragraph C3-3. l I .i: "NOTJFICA TION: During the lifetime of this contract, the Contractor shall notify the ENGINEER in writing, of any known loss occurrence that could give rise to a liability claim or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss." 12. CANCELLATION: Add the following Paragraph C3-3 .l l.j: "CANCELLATION: Insurance shall be endorsed to provide the City with a minimum of thirty days notice of cancellation, non-renewal and/or material change in insurance policy terms or coverage. A minimum I 0-day notice shall be acceptable in the event of non- payment of insurance premium to insurance company." 13. ADDITIONAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: a. The City, its officers, employees and servants shall be endorsed as an additional insured on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under Contractor's workers' compensation insurance policy. b. Certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the City of Fort Worth, contract admini s trator in the respective department as specified in the bid documents , I 000 Throckmorton Street , Fort Worth , TX 76102, prior to commencement of work on the Cl-5 Part C l contracted project. b. Any failure on part of the City to request required insurance documentation shall not constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein . c. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to provide the City a minimum thirty days notice of cancellation, non-renewal, and/or material change in policy terms or coverage. A ten days notice shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of premium. e. Insurers must be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and have a current A.M. Best rating of A: Vil or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency. f. Deductible limits, or self-funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000 .00 per occurrence unless otherwise approved by the City. g. Other than worker's compensation insurance, in lieu of traditional insurance, City may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The City must approve in writing any alternative coverage. h. Workers' compensation insurance policy(s) covering employees employed on the project shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the City. 1. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for contractor's insurance. J. Contractor's insurance policies shall each be endorsed to provide that such insurance is primary protection and any self-funded or commercial coverage maintained by City shall not be called upon to contribute to loss recovery . k . In the course of the project, Contractor shall report, in a timely manner, to City's officially designated contract administrator any known loss occurrence which could give rise to a liability claim or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss. I. Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance m. Upon the request of City, Contractor shall provide complete copies of all insurance policies required by these contract documents. l 0 . CITY RESPONSIBTLITIES: Add the following paragraph to the end of Section C3-3 . l l : "CITY RESPONSIBILITIES: The City shall not be responsible for direct payment of insurance premium costs for Contractor 's Insurance ." 15. ADDITIONAL INSURED All insurance policies for this project except Worker's Compensation shall be written with the City of Fort Worth and Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. listed as additional insured ." C l-6 L. WAGE RA TES: Section CJ-3 .13 of the General Conditions is deleted and replaced with the following: (a) The contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code, including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these contract documents. (b) The contractor shall, for a period of three (3) years following the date of acceptance of the work, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of each worker employed by the contractor in the construction of the work provided for in this contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. These records shall be open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of Section C-1, L. Right to Audit (Rev . 9/30/02) pertain to this inspection . ( c) The contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require all of its subcontractors to comply with paragraphs (a) and (b) above . (d) With each partial payment estimate or payroll period, whichever is less, an affidavit stating that the contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. The contractor shall post the prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times . M . INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES : Part C -General Conditions, Section C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK, Page C 4-4 (1), revise paragraph C4-4.3 INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES to read as follows: N . Pan C l The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be necessary, and the Contractor· shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the unit prices as established in the contract documents. No allowance will be made for any changes in lost or anticipated profits nor shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract Documents . Variations in quantities of sa nitary sewer pipes in depth categories shall be interpreted herein as applying to the overall quantities of sanitary sewer pipe in each pipe size but not to the various depth categories. LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL CHARGES (Reference C4-4.5c): The Contractor agrees that should any change in the work of extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor Costs to cover overhead and profit: I . Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's ow n forces s hall not exceed 15 %. Cl-7 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor sh a ll not exceed 10%. Contractor shall be reimbursed for direct field overhead when the change requires an extension of the Contract period . Contractor shall not be reimburse d for indirect overhead or indirect costs related to changes to this contract 0 . TESTING COSTS: Section 5-5.12, revise the first sentence to read as follows: P. Q. R. S. Pa rt C l "Where, as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for by the Contractor unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Technical Specifications." LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: Section C6-6. I, delete "or which may be enacted later". After the word "exist" add "at the time of the Contract or may be hereafter exist during the performance of the Contract." BUILDING PERMITS: Paragraph C6-6 .2 Insert the following at the end of the paragraph; . "Contractors are responsible for obtaining construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code inspections with the Code Inspection Department in accordance with the permit requirements and submit copy of updated schedule to the Engineer weekly. Plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Wat er and sewer access fees will be paid by the Water Department. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor." BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND FLAGMEN : 1n Paragraph C6-6.8, replace the word "watchmen" wherever in appears with the word "flagmen". 1n the first paragraph, lines five (5) and six (6), replace "take all such other precaution ary measures" with "take all rea sonable necessary measures ." CONTRACTOR 'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: D e lete entire Paragraph C6- 6. I 2, and replace with the following : "C6-6 .12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify the City ' E ngineer and Architect , and their personnel at the project sit e for the Contractor 's sole negligence . ln addition , the Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend at its own expen se , the Owner, it s office rs , agents, servants, and employees, from and against all claims or s uits for property lo ss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to ari s e of, the w o rk and s ervices to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, e mployees subcontractors, licensee s or invit ees, whether or not any such iniurv, damage or death is caused, in whole or in part, by the negligence o(the Owner, its officers, agents, servants, or employees. Contractor likewi se covenants and agre e s to indemnify and hold ha rmles s Owner from a nd a gain st a ny and all injuri es to the Owner 's officers, agents, serv a nts , a nd empl o yee s, lo ss o r destructi o n of prope rty o f th e Owne r ari s in g form th e pe rformanc e of any o f the te rm s a nd c o nditi o ns o f thi s C o ntra c t, whether or not anv such iniurv or damage is caused, in whole or in C l -8 part, by the negligence or alleged negligence o{the Owner, its officers, agents, servants, or employees. In the event the Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final payment shall not be made until the Contractor either (a) submits to the Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides the Owner with a letter from the Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract." T . STATE SALES TAX 1. 2 . Delete Paragraph C6-6.2 l ST A TE SALES TAX in its entirety. This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Article 20 .04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. All equipment and materials not consumed by or incorporated into the project construction are subject to State Sales Tax under House Bill 11, enacted August 15, 1991. All such taxes shall be included in the various amounts on the Proposal Form. The successful Bidder shall be required to submit a breakdown between costs of labor, consumable material and other construction costs and costs of material incorporated into the project construction prior to execution of this contract. 3. At the time of execution of the Contract Documents by the Contractor, the Contractor shall complete the "Statement of Materials and Other Charges" which identifies the project costs anticipated in the Project into "Materials Incorporated into the Project" and "All Other Charges ". The Contract shall be a "Separated Contract". 4 . The City of Fort Worth will issue appropriate Certificates of Resale to the Contractor. 5 . All Change Orders to the Contract will separate charges for materials and labor and will contain the following statement : "For purposes of complying with Texas Tax Code, the Contractor agrees that the charges for material incorporated into the project in excess of the estimated quantity provided for herein will be no less than the invoice price for such material to the Contractor." U . C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: Delete C8-8.4, Scope of Payment at page C8-8(1) is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following : Pan C l The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furni shing all labor, tools, materials, and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may ari s e or be encountered during the pro s ecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in para graph C5-5 .14) for a ll ri s ks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work , for a ll expen s es incurred by or in consequence of the s us pension or discontinuance of such C l-9 prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the two (2) year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein . V . CS-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND RETAJNAGE: Page CS-8 (2), should be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Pan C l Partial pay estimates shall be submitted by the Contractor or prepared by the City on the 5th day and 20th day of each month that the work is in progress. The estimate shall be proceeded by the City on the I 0th day and 25th day respectively . Estimates will be paid within 25 days following the end of the estimate period, Jess the appropriate retainage as set out below. Partial pay estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work place which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the pay estimate have not been so installed. If such materials are included within a pay estimate, payment shall be based upon 85% of the net voice value thereof. The Contractor will furnish the Engineer such information as may be reasonably requested to aid in the verification or the preparation of the pay estimate. For contracts of less than $400,000 at the time of execution, retainage shall be ten per cent (I 0% ). For contracts of $400,000 or more at the time of execution, retainage shall be five percent (5%). Contractor shall pay subcontractors in accord with the subcontract agreement within five (5) business days after receipt by Contractor of the payment by City. Contractor's failure to make the required payments to subcontractors will authorize the City to withhold future payments from the Contractor until compliance with this paragraph is accomplished. 1t is understood that the partial pay estimates will be approximate only, and all partial pay estimates and payment of same will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of the mistake in any previous estimate. Partial payment by Owner for the amount of work done or of its quality or sufficiency or acceptance of the work done; shall not release the Contractor of any of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any partial estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work in strict accordance with the specifications or other provisions of this contract. C I-IO W. C8-8. l O GENERAL GUARANTY: Delete C8-8. l 0, General Guaranty at page C8-8( 4) is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents, nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of I 00 percent of the amount of the contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. Any reference to any shorter period of time of warranty contained elsewhere within the specifications shall be resolved in favor of this specifications, it being the City's intent that the Contractor guarantee its work for a period of two (2) years following the date of acceptance of the project. ln the Special Instructions to Bidders, TPW contracts place the following in lieu of the existing paragraph 2. X. RlGHT TO AUDIT: Part C -General Conditions, Section C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT, Page C8-8 (5), add the following: Par1 C l C8-8.14 RlGHT TO AUDIT: a . b. Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this contract. Contractor agrees that the City shall have access during normal working hours to all necessary Contractor facilities and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this section. The City shall give contractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. Contractor further agrees to include in all its subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under the subcontract , have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract, and further , that City shall have access during normal working hours to all subcontractor facilities, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this article . City shall give subcontractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. Cl -11 Y . Pa n C l c . Contractor and subcontractor a gree to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the City. The City agrees to reimburse the Contractor for the cost of copies as follow s : I. 50 copies and under -IO cents per page 2 . More than 50 copies -85 cents for the first page plus fifteen cents for each page thereafter. SCHEDULE OF COSTS: Add the following to Section C8-8: C8-8. I 5 SCHEDULE COSTS: Following the completion of all work on the Project and prior to submittal of a request for final payment, the Contractor shall provide a Schedule of Costs to City for approval which lists all equipment systems, structures, building electrical and HV AC systems, overhead and project related costs. The items will be grouped into categories using the Owner's list of category codes which will be provided by the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference. The Schedule of Costs will be used by the City as input to the Capital Assets System, and will not be considered in preparation of modifications to the Contract. Costs associated with the preparation and processing of this schedule of costs shall be subsidiary to the price bid . The Contractor will also provide a projected payment schedule tied to the project schedule and the schedule of values which projects the monthly payments through the end of the Project. The Payment schedule must be submitted along with the first request for payment. This information is necessary to arrange financing of the Project by the City. END OF SECTION C J-12 PARTD City of Fort Worth Northside lll Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank PARTD SPECIAL CONDJTJONS This Part D -Special Conditions is complimentary to Part C -General Conditions and Part Cl - Supplementary Conditions to Part C of the Contract. Anything contained in this Part D that is additive to any provision in Part C-General Conditions and part Cl -Supplementary Conditions to Part C of the Contract are to be read together. Any conflict between Part C -General Conditions and Part CJ -Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and this Part D, Part D shall control. FOR: NORTHSIDE III A VO ND ALE-HASLET ROAD ELEV A TED STORAGE TANK PROJECT NO. P264-607180036833 D-1 GENERAL The order or precedence in case of conflicts or discrepancies between various parts of the Contract Documents subject to the ruling of the Engineer shall generally, but not necessarily, follow the guidelines listed below: I. Plans 2. Contract Documents 3. Special Conditions The following Special Conditions shall be applicable to this project and shall govern over any conflicts with the General Contract Documents under the provisions stated above . The Contractor shall be responsible for defects in this project due to faulty materials and workmanship, or both, for a period of two (2) years from date of final acceptance of this project by the City of Fort Worth and will be required to replace at his expense any part or all of this project which becomes defective due to these causes. Subject to modifications as herein contained , the Fort Worth Water Department's General Contract Documents and General Specifications, with latest revisions , are made a part of the General Contract Documents for this project. The Plans , these Special Contract Documents and the rules, regulations, requirements, instructions, drawings or details referred to by manufacturers name, or identification include therein as specifying, referring or implying product control, performance, quality, or other shall be binding upon the contractor. The specifications and drawings shall be considered cooperative; therefore , work or material called for by one and not shown or mentioned in the other shall be accomplished or furnished in a faithful manner as though required by all. Any Contractor performing any work on Fort Worth water or sanitary sewer facilities must be pre-qualified with the Water Department to perform s uch work in accordance with procedures described in the current Fort Worth Water Department General Specifications, which general specifications shall govern performance of all such work. This contract and project, where applicable, may also be governed by the two following published specifications, except as modified by these Special Provisions: I . ST A NOA RD SPECJFJCA TIO NS FOR STREET AND STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTJON -CJTY OF FORT WORTH 2. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLJC WORKS CONSTRUCTION -NORTH CENTRAL TEXAS Part D I S pec ial C ond11i o ns d oc D-1 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Any conflict between these contract documents and the above 2 publications shall be resolved in favor of these contract documents . A copy of either of these specifications may be purchased at the office oft he Transportation and Public Works Director, I 000 Throckmorton Street, 2nd Floor, Municipal Building, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. The specifications applicable to each pay item are indicated by the call-out for the pay item by the designer. Ifnot shown, then applicable published specifications in either of these documents may be followed at the discretion of the Contractor. General Provisions shall be those of the Fort Worth document rather than Division I of the North Central Texas document. Bidders shall not separate, detach or remove any portion, segment or sheets from the contract document at any time. Failure to bid or fully execute contract without retaining contract documents intact may be grounds for designating bids as "non-responsive" and rejecting bids or voiding contract as appropriate as determined by the City Engineer. D-2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT The work of this project is located at Lot 2, Block I of the Vista Crossroads Addition along Avondale-Haslet Road, east of the intersection of Hwy 287 and Avondale-Haslet Road in Fort Worth, Texas. The proposed 2.0 million gallon elevated storage tank will serve the Northside Ill pressure plane. D-3 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW A. Definitions: I. Certification of coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCCs8 I, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. 2. Duration of the project -includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096)-includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries , and delivery of portable toilets . B. The Contractor shall provide coverage , based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.0 I I ( 44) or all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being warded the contrnct. Pan D I S pcc iJ I Cond111 o ns d oc D-2 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank D. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide the governmental entity: I . A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. F. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. G . The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (I 0) days after the contractor knew or should have known,, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. H. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: I. Provide coverage, based oil proper reporting on classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011 ( 44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 2. P,rovide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 3 . Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a.) A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and b.) A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. Part D l S pec ial Conditi o ns doc D-3 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank 5 . Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 6 . Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within te n (I 0) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project ; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs ( 1 )- (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are provid ing services . 8. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative, criminal, civil penalties or other civil actions. 9. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not rem edy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. J. The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other p~sting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other Texas Worker's Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population . Th e tex t for the notices shall be the following text, without any additional words or changes: "REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSA TJON COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services rel ated to this con struction project mus t be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, haulin g, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or tran s portation or other service re lat ed to the proj ec t , regardless of the identity of their employer or st atus as an employee." Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at (512)440-3789 to receive informati on o n the lega l requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage , or to re port an employer's failure to provide coverage". D-4 PROJECT DESIGNATION SIGNS A project s ign is re quired for thi s proj ec t. 1t shall be in accordance with the attached Fi gure 30 (d ated 9-18-96) presented at the e nd of th e Special Conditions. The Fort Worth symbol s hall be modified to refl ec t the City's current sy mbol. The s igns may b e mo unt ed on s kids or posts . The E ng in ee r shall approve the exac t loca t ions and methods of mountin g . In addition to th e 4' x 8 ' proj ec t s ig n s. project s ign s s h a ll be attached to barricades u se d where manhol e rehabilit ation o r replacement is b e in g conducted. Signs su s pe nd ed from barricading shall be pl aced in s uc h a way th at s ig n s do not interfere with re fl ect iv e paint or co lorin g on th e barricad es. Barricade Pan D I S pec ia l C onditi o ns do c D-4 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank signs shall be in accordance with Figure 30, except that they shall be I ' -0" by 2 '-0" in size. The information box shall have the following information: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Project No. P264-607180036833 For Questions on this Project Call: (817) 392-8214 M-F 7:30 am to 4:30 p.m. or (817) 392-4474 Nights and Weekends Any and all cost for the required materials, labor, and equipment necessary for the furnishing of Project Signs shall be considered as a subsidiary cost of the project and no additional compensation will be allowed . D-5 WAGE RATES The labor classifications and minimum wage rates set forth herein have been predetermined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, in accordance with statutory requirements, as being the prevailing classifications and ratt?s that shall govern on all work performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor on the site of the project covered by these Contract Documents. In no event shall less than the following rates be paid (see attached wage rates). When two or more wage rate scales are shown and wage rates shown in specific classifications are in conflict, the higher wage will be used. D-6 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS The plans show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. However, the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all of these structures on the Plans, or to show them in their exact location . It is mutually agreed that such failure shall not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the locations of and protecting all existing utilities, service lines, or other property exposed by his construction operations. Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the support, protection, relocation, and/or temporary relocation of all utility poles, gas lines, telephone cables, utility services, water mains , sanitary sewer lines, electrical cables, drainage pipes, and all other utilities and structures both above and below ground during construction . The Contractor is liable for all damages done to such existing facilities as a result of his operations and any and all cost incurred for the protection and/or temporary relocation of such facilities are deemed subsidiary work and the cost of same and shall be included in the cost bid pe r linear foot of pipe installed. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED. Where existing utiliti es or service lines are cut, broken or damaged the Contractor shall replace or repair the utilities or se rvi ce lines with the same type of original material and construction, or better, unless otherwise s hown or noted on the plans, at his own cost and expense. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of the damaged utility or service lin e. He shall cooperate with the Owners of all utilities to locate existing undergro und facilities and notify the Engineer of any conflicts in grades and alignment. Any and all perman e nt structures such as parkin g lot surface, fencing, and like structures on either public or pri va te property shall be re placed at no cost to the City by m a terial of equal va lue and quality as that damaged . In case it is n ecessary to change o r move th e property of a ny owner of a public utility , suc h property sh a ll not be m oved o r int e rfe re d with until ord e red to do so by the E n g in eer. T he ri ght is re served to th e owne r of public Pan D I Sprcia l C0nd iti o ns doc D-5 City offon Wonh Nonhside Ill Avondale-H as let Road Elevated Stora ge Tank utilities to enter upon the limits of the project for the purpose of making such changes or repairs of th e ir property that may be made necessary by performance of this contract. The utility lines and conduits shown on the plans are for information only and are not guaranteed by the City of the Engineer to be accurate as to extent, location, and depth; they are shown on the plans as the best information available at the time of de~ign, from the owners of the utilities involved and from evidences found on the ground. D-7 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS In addition to those areas as may be designated on the Drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and locate existing utilities which may affect construction of the facilities. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the total price bid for the project. D-8 SUBSTITUTIONS The specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of quality, which the City believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the material, which has been specified. Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is used, it is understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment bearing the name so used is furnished, it will be approvable, as the particular trade name was used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality acceptable to the City. If a product of any other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof must be obtained before the Contractor procures the proposed substitute . Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is not used in the specifications, this does not necessarily exclude alternative items or material or equipment which may accomplish the intended purpose. However, the Contractor shall have the full responsibility of proving that the proposed substitution is , in fact, equal, and the Engineer, as the representative of the City, shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of substitutions . The provi s ions of this sub-section as related to "substitutions" shall be applicable to all sections of these specifications. D-9 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL/FILL MATERIAL Prior to the di s posin g of any spoil/fill material , the Contractor shall advise the Director of Engineering Department, acting as th e City of Fort Worth's Flood Plain Administrator ("Administrator"), of the locat ion of all sites where the Contractor intends to dispose of such material. Contractor s hall not dispose of such material until the proposed s ites have been determined by the Administrator to meet the re quirements o f the Flood Plain Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth (Ordinance No. I 0056). All dispos al s it e s must be approved by th e Admini strat o r to ensure that filling is not occurring within a floodplain without a permit. A floodplain permit c an be issued upon approval of necessary Engineering studies. No fill permit is required if disposal s ites are not in a floodplain . Approval of the Contractor's disposal sites shall be evidenced by a letter signed by the Administrator stating that the site is not in a known flood plain or by a Flood Plain Fill Pe rmit a uthorizing fill within the flood plain . Any expenses associated with obtaining the fill permit, including any necessary Engineering studies, s hall be at the Contractor's e xpen s e. Jn the e ve nt that th e Contractor di s poses o f s poil/fill m a terial at a s it e w ithout a fill permit or a lett e r from the adminis trat o r a pprov in g th e di s posal s ite , upon notification by the Director of En g in eering D e p a rtm e nt , C o ntractor s ha ll re m ove th e s p o il /fill ma teri a l at it s e xpe n se a nd di s pose of s uch mat e rial s in ac cor~a nc e with the O rdin a nces o f th e C ity a nd thi s sec tion. Pa rt D I Spec ial Co ndi 1io ns doc D-6 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank D-10 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. DESCRIPTION: This item shall consist of temporary soil erosion sediment and water pollution control measures deemed necessary by the Engineer for the duration of the contract. These control measures shall at no time be used as a substitute for the permanent control measures unless otherwise directed by the Engineer and they shall not include measures taken by the CONTRACTOR to control conditions created by his construction operations. The temporary measures shall include dikes, darns, berms, sediment basins, fiber mats,jute netting, temporary seeding, straw mulch, asphalt mulch, plastic liners, rubble liners, baled-hay retards, dikes, slope drains and other devices. B. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: The Engineer has the authority to define erodible earth and the authority to limit the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by preparing right-of-way, clearing and grubbing, the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by excavation, borrow and to direct the CONTRACTOR to provide temporary pollution-control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams, other water courses, lakes, ponds or other areas of water impoundment. Such work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, slope drains and use of temporary mulches, mats, seeding, or other control devices or methods directed by the Engineer as necessary to control soil erosion. Temporary pollution-control measures shall be used to prevent or correct erosion that may develop during construction prior to installation of permanent pollution control features, but are not associated with permanent control features on the project. The Engineer will limit the area of preparing right-of-way, clearing and grubbing, excavation and borrow to be proportional to the CONTRACTOR'S capability and progress in keeping the finish grading, mulching, seeding, and other such permanent pollution-control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule. Should seasonal conditions make such limitations unrealistic, temporary soil-erosion-control measures shall be performed as directed by the Engineer. I. Waste or disposal areas and construction roads shall be located and constructed in a manner that will minimize the amount of sediment entering streams. 2. Frequent fordings of live streams will not be permitted; therefore, temporary bridges or other structures shall be used wherever an appreciable number of stream crossings are necessary. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, mechanized equipment shall not be operated in live streams. 3. When work areas or material sources are located in or adjacent to live streams , such areas shall be separated from the stream by a dike or other barrier to keep sediment from entering a flowing stream. Care shall be taken during the construction and removal of such barriers to minimize the muddying of a stream. 4. All waterways shall be cleared as soon as practicable of false work , piling, debris or other obstructions placed during construction operations that are not a part of the finished work. 5. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, Jakes and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumen , calcium chloride or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or minimize siltation of streams, lakes and reservoirs and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. C. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: All work , materials and equipment necessary to provide temporary erosion control shall be paid as lump sum price as detailed in the drawings and specifications . Part D I S pr ci~I Conditi ons dc,c D-7 C ity o f Fo r1 W o r1h N or1h s id e Ill Avonda le-Has le t R oad Elevated S tora ge Tank D-11 UTILITIES The Contractor shall at his expense provide all utility services, including water, electricity, gas, telephone, etc., as may be required by him and during the construction and testing period. The City may be able to make provisions for connections to the existing utilities provided that adequate service is available at appropriate points within the plant site ; however, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements, furnish materials, and perform all labor and services for connections and metering. Contractor shall be aware that construction of the City of Fort Worth NS IV 24-inch Water Line may not be complete by the beginning of this contract. Provisions should be made to supply water needed for construction from another source until a connection can be made to the 24-inch water line. D-12 SUBSIDIARY WORK Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by Plans, the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal for each bid item. Surface restoration and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. D-13 RIGHT OF ACCESS Representatives of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and City Code Inspectors shall have access to the project wherever and whenever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access. D-14 OSHA STANDARDS All work performed under this contract shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Jt is the res ponsibility of the Contractor to become familiar with the provisions of regulations publi she d by th e OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all of the responsibilities thereunder. Jt is the Contractor's responsibility to see that the project is constructed in accordance with OSHA re gulations and to indemnify and save harmless the City from any penalties resulting form the Contractor's failure to so perform . D-15 TIME OF COMPLETION Th e Own e r desires that all work under this contract be completed , in total, within 505 Calend ar Days. Interim co mpletion dates for various facilities shall be met and are described in Section O I 040. Liquid ated damages will be assessed the Contractor for failure to complete necessary work to meet these interim completion date s . Substanti a l C ompletion of the proj e ct shall be defined as completion of all structures, pipelines, and e quipment having be e n installed , test ed , and commiss ioned with approval by the Owner and Enginee r, a ll owing ope ration o f the 2 .0 million gallon e levated stora ge tank . Substanti a l Completion shall be met within 445 cal e ndar days from notice to proc eed . T he tim e pe ri od be tw ee n Substa nti a l Compl e ti on and Final C ompl eti on sha ll be sch eduled for comple t in g anc ill ary it ems whi c h have no imp act on the o pe rati o n o f th e e leva ted stora ge ta nk , s uch as fini sh grading Pan D I S pecia l Condi li o ns doc D-8 City ofFort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Stora ge Tank and paving and establishment of vegetation. In the event the Contractor fails to meet the Substantial Completion date of the Project, the Owner may withhold money permanently from the Contractor's total compensation at the rate identified in Section C7- 7 .10 of the General Conditions as Liquidated Damages until Substantial Completion is met. In the event the Contractor fails to complete the Project in total within the time set forth above, the Owner may withhold at the rate identified in Section C7-7. l O of the General Conditions as Liquidated Damages, including added expenses for engineering services, inspection, loss of revenue, etc., in connection with the Project. D-16 INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Wherever the words "Directed", "Required", "Permitted", "Designated", "Considered Necessary", "Prescribed", or words of like import are used on the Plans or in the Specifications, it shall be understood that they are intended as Specifications, it shall be understood that they are intended as prerogative of the Owner and/or the Engineer; and, similarly, the words, "Approval", "Acceptable", "Satisfactory", or words of like import, shall mean approval, etc., by the Owner and/or Engineer. Wherever in the Specifications or in the Plans for the work the terms or description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind cannot, because of their nature, be specifically and briefly described and are customarily described in general terms, the Owner and/or Engineer shall be final judge as to whether or not the workmanship so described is being performed in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications the work shall be completed in accordance with his interpretation of the meaning of such words, terms, or clauses. D-17 TERMINATION It is understood and agreed that this contract may be terminated by the City without obligation to the Contractor, in whole or from time to time in part, whenever such termination is determined by the City to be in the best interests of the City . Termination may be effected by delivering to the Contractor or his designated representative a notice of termination, specifying to what extent performance of the work under the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination . After receipt of notice of termination Contractor shall: I . Stop work specified in the notice on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination . 2. Place no further order or subcontract except as necessary to complete work already underway. 3. Terminate all orders and contracts to the extent that they relate to the perfomrnnce of the work terminated by the Notice of Termination . D-18 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION/FINAL INSPECTION Prior to the final inspection being conducted for the project, the contractor shall contact the city inspector in writing when the entire project or a designated portion of the project is substantially complete . The Resident Project Representative, along with appropriate City staff and the City's consultant , shall make an inspection of the substantially complet ed work and prepare and submit to the contractor a list of items needing to be completed or corrected. The contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify the listed deficiencies and notify the owner in writing when all the items have been complet e d or corrected . Pa rt D I Spec ial Co ndi ti on s doc D-9 City of Fort Worth North side Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Payment for substantial completion inspection , as well as final inspection, shall be subsidiary to the project price. Contractor shall still be required to address all other deficiencies, which are discovered at the time of final inspection . Final inspection shall be in conformance with general condition item "C5-5.18 Final Inspection" of PART C-GENERAL CONDITIONS. D-19 FINAL ACCEPTANCE After construction work is satisfactorily completed, the Owner shall make a final inspection of the project. The Owner will advise the Contractor if the project has been satisfactorily completed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and issue a written statement of final acceptance in accordance with Section C8-8.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS. After final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide a two-year guaranty in accordance C8-8. IO GENERAL GUARANTY, of the Supplementary Conditions to the G ~neral Conditions, commencing the date of final acceptance. D-20 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTORS AND CITY It is expected that during various phases of the construction of this Project, other contract work; the Northside III 36-inch Transmission Main , the Northside JV 24-inch Water Line and 15" Sanitary Sewer Project and other surrounding projects will also be in progress within the area. The Contractor shall be required to cooperate to the fullest, each with the other contractors, in coordinating work, eliminating conflicts with work or personnel at all times. In case of conflicts, the Engineer shall determine the responsibility or priority of work and his decisions shall be final. The estimated construction schedules for the other construction contracts are presented in Section 01035 . D-21 INTERPRETATION OF REQUIREMENTS a. Interpretation: Any question as to interpretation of drawings and specifications or any questions arising after examination of premises must be referred to the Engineer in writing. No interpretation nor instructions given verbally by any persons will be considered valid. b. Lack of Understanding: Lack of understanding of Drawings and Specifications or failure to secure information concerning all conditions will not justify any claims, and extra compensation will not be made simply because of Jack of such knowledge. D-22 HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC MATERIALS Insofar as permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor from and against any and all liabilities, los ses, cost, damages and expenses, arising out of use of the materials at the Owners site which are not under the direct control of the Contractor, including, but not limited to, any and all liability resulting form personal injury, including death , property liability, at any time, however caused, due to the presence or release of, or exposure, whether to the person or property injured or otherwise, to any hazardous or toxic substance, provided , however, that the City liability shall be limited to that established in Article 6252-I 9, Texas Revised Code and other applicable State statutes and Constitutional provisions. D-23 AGE In accordance with th e policy ("Policy") of the Exec utive Branch of the Federal Government , Contractor covenants th at neither it nor a ny of it s officers , m embers, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors. while e n gage d in performing thi contract. s hall , in connection with the employment, Par1 D I S pe cial Cond i11 o ns d,K D-10 City of Fort Worth North s ide III Avondale-Has le: Road Elevated Storage Tank advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-24 DISABILITY In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that if any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA 's provision and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above-referenced law concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-25 (NOT USED) D-26 (NOT USED) D-27 INSURANCE Property insurance upon the entire work, including materials not in place at the site to the full insurable value thereof, is required. All Risk Builder's Risk Insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors in the work and shall include, but not be limited to, the perils of fire, lightning, flood, collapse, windstorm, hail, explosion, riot, civil commotion, smoke, aircraft, land vehicles, vandalism and malicious mischief. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall be endorsed to permit occupancy prior to completion of construction and prior to acceptance by the Owner. A copy of the Builder's Risk Policy shall be filed with the Owner and shall include a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation of policy provision. D-28 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Information, data, typical design schemes included on the Drawings and Specifications, Section O 1665 connection with the trench safety system is for general guidance to the prospective bidders (and Contractor) and shall not be construed to instruct the Contractor nor specify to the Contractor the design or method of implementing a trench safety system. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all his activities as set forth in Parag raph C6-6 of the General Conditions. The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and the Engineer from any claim related to trench safety. Insurance coverage shall comply with the se requirements . Pan D I S pecia l Con diti o ns doc D-11 City of Fort Worth North s ide III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank The prospective bidders (and Contractor) shall make such explorations, analyses and other investigations as they deem necessary to inform themselves of the actual conditions to be encountered in performing the work required by the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, information necessary to develop a trench safety program to comply with all requirements of OSHA , federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations. Compliance with these laws, rules and regulations , including, but not limited to, HB 662 and HB 665 as adopted by the 72nd Session of the Texas Legislature, shall rest solely with the Contractor. D-29 PUMPING AND DEW ATERING OPERATIONS Work to be performed may require draining, pumping and dewatering, and certain cleaning operations necessary to complete the work as specified and as indicated on the drawings. It is the intent of these specifications that such draining, pumping and dewatering, and cleaning operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. The existing structures, piping, and valves may leak and the Owner does not guarantee a dry site. The Contractor shall provide all necessary pumping, as required by the excavation work specification, to remove all surface water, groundwater, leakage, and water from other sources from excavations. Payment for Dewatering is considered subsidiary and no extra payment for these services will be allowed . D-30 RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE The General Conditions, Section C-1.19 ENGINEER define various persons who may be designated as the Engineer. For the prosecution of this Contract, the term Engineer shall mean the Resident Project Representative as designated by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department, together with members of the staff of the Resident Project Representative who are assigned to the Project. Any contacts the Contractor may wish to make with any City personnel or consulting engineers, shall be arranged through the Resident Project Representative. The Contractor shall not act upon any requests or instructions he may receive from any City personnel or consulting engineers nor shall he give instructions or directions to such persons without the approval or consent of the Resident Project Representative. D-31 PROJECT SUPERINTENDENTS The Contractor shall keep a competent resident superintendent at the project site at all times during the progress of the work. A resume listing the qualifications and experience record of the proposed re s ident superintendent, as well as references from similar projects shall be submitted to the Owner, prior to the award of contract. This resident superintendent, if found to be acceptable, shall not be removed except under extraordinary circumstances. Qualifications of a proposed replacement shall be submitted when a request is made for the replacement of the superintendent and shall be approved by the Owner prior to withdrawing the Superintendent. During.the construction of the project, the resident superintendent shall demonstrate an ability to properly execute the work outlined in the contract documents in a timely manner and shall consistently produce work of an acceptable quality and in accordance with the contract documents . If the Owner shall have a reasonable objection to the performance of the resident superintendent , the Contractor shall replace the resident superintendent upon written notice from the Owner. The resident superintendent shall be replaced with a s uperintendent acceptable to the Owner. No extension of time will be allowed for delays caused by the replacement of a resident representative . The Contractor shall s ubmit res um es fo r th e E lect ri ca l and In strum e nt a ti o n s uperint e nd e nt s li s tin g qualificati o ns and experience record s prior to th e awa rd o f contract for approval by the Owner. A II Pan D I S pecia l Co nditi on s doc D-12 City of Fort Worth N orth side Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank requirements for assignment and replacement of resident superintendents shall apply equally to Electrical and Instrumentation Superintendents. D-32 RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S OFFICE The Resident Project Representative's Office shall be in accordance with General Conditions C5-5.6 and Specification Section O 1500. D-33 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE The Contractor's Office shall be in accordance with Specification Section 01500. D-34 (NOT USED) D-35 SANITARY FACILITIES FOR WORKMEN As set forth in the General Conditions, Section C6-6.4, the Contractor shall provide all necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of workmen at the project site. The Contractor shall also provide adequate drinking water facilities. The Contractor and his subcontractors and workmen shall not use the existing plant sanitary facilities. D-36 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION OR DEMOBILIZATION Payments for mobilization and/or demobilization shall be included in the lump sum price bid for the elevated storage tank . No extra payments will be made for mobilization, re-mobilization, or demobilization. D-37 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION Prior to the start of any work on the project, Contractor shall meet with the Engineer and develop a construction schedule and sequence of operation. The construction schedule shall be prepared in accordance with Sections 01040 and 01315. D-38 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT The Owner will provide at the site of the work horizontal control in the form of grid reference points and vertical control in the form of bench marks . From the controls established by the Owner, the Contractor shall be re s ponsible for the complete layout of the work and for establishing lines and elevations as needed during construction. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense, labor, including the services of competent perso nnel , equipment, including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, templates, platforms, tools , and materials as may be required for laying out any and all parts of the work. The Engineer will be available for assistance in an advisory capacity. D-39 WARRANTY CERTIFICATES The Manufacturer shall warrant that all equipment furnished by it hereunder complies in all respects with the design and specification of this contract and contains no defect of material or workmanship . In the event of failure o f any part or parts of the equipment during the two years of service following final acceptance , due to d e fects of des ign , materials, or workmanship, the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptl y upon notic e by the Contractor. All re placement parts shall be furni s hed, delivered and in stalled at the ex pen se o f th e Manufacture r. Pan D J S pec ial Conditi o ns doc D-13 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Roa d Elevated Storage Tank All warranty certificates or manufacturer's guarantees, for equipment purchased by the Contractor shall be issued in the name of the City of Fort Worth. The Contractor shall combine all warranty certificates into a single, 3-ring binder and provide the binder to the Owner at completion of the project. The binder shall include a table of contents with labeled, tabbed sections for each piece of equipment. D-40 LIMITS OF EXTRA COMPENSATION FOR DELAYS The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the work , except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material , if any, which is·to be furnished by the City. When such extra compensation is claimed, a written statement thereof shall be presented by the Contractor to the Engineer and if by him found correct shall be approved and referred by him to the City Council for final approval or disapproval; and the action thereon by the City Council shall be final and binding. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the Engineer to stop work, or by the performance of extra work, or by the failure of the City to provide material or necessary instructions for carrying on the work, then such delay will entitle the Contractor to an equivalent extension of time, his application for which shall, however, be subject to the approval of the City Council; and no such extension of time shall release the Contractor or the surety on his Performance Bond from all his obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until the discharge of the Contract. D-41 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS The Contractor shall take photographs of the project alignment prior to construction, monthly during the construction of the project, and after completion of the project. Photographs shall be taken with a quality digital camera with date back capability, with lenses ranging form wide angle to 135mm. Photographs shall be taken at locations designated by the Engineer. Two glossy color 3" x 5" prints shall be provided for each photograph taken . Each print shall be marked on the reverse side to indicate project name, date and time, location, direction of exposure, and a description of what is being photographed. Prints shall be clear and sharp with proper exposure. If prints of adequate quality are not produced from exposures, additional photographs shall be tak e n immediately. Floppy disks with each of the digital photographs stored shall also be provided. The Contractor shall provide no less than twelve ( I 2) photographs of the site prior to construction. Starting one month after the date of the preconstruction photographs, and continuing as long as the work is in progress, twenty-four (24) monthly photographs shall be taken to accurately record the work that has progressed during that period. Photographs are to be submitted with the monthly Partial Pay Request in plastic binders. Contractor shall also produce a preconstruction videotape of the site, including all areas in the vicinity of and to be affected by construction. This videotape s hall be provided to the Owner. D-42 SUBMITT ALS The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall insure that the values, material , equipment, or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. All submittals must be stamped by the Contractor, indicating that they have been checked by the Contractor for compliance with Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor, or contain certifications as required by the Contract Document s . Submittals that do not have the stamp a ppli ed o r includ e th e req uired certifications will be returned to the Contractor without proce ss in g . The Con tract or s ha ll en sure th at th ere is no confl ict with o th e r submitt a ls a nd no tif-Y th e E n g in eer of eac h Pan D I S pe ci a l Conditi o ns d oc D-14 City of Fort Worth North s ide Ill Avondale-Has let R oad Ele v at e d Storage Tank case where the propo sed change may affect the work of another Contractor or Owner. The Contractor shall ensure coordination of submittals among the re lated craft s and Subcontractors. Submittals will not be accepted from Subcontractors or suppliers . The Contractor s ha ll assign a number to each submission provided to the Engineer to allow each submittal to be tracked while processing through the review procedures. Submittals shall be accompanied by the Submittal Transmittal Fonn provided by the Engineer. A separate fonn shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate discrete sections, etc ., for which a submittal is required. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single fonn when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package , or are so functionally related that they should be checked as a unit. Assignment of numbers shall be by means of a letter prefix, a sequence number, and letter suffix to indicate resubmittals . Refer to Section O 1300 for detailed submittal requirements . Applicable Prefixes are : co CMR CTR EIR FO MIS NBC OM PCM PE RFI pp RD SD SCH Change Order Contractor's Modification Request Certified Test Report Equipment Installation Report Field Order Miscellaneous Submittals Notifications by Contractor Operation and Maintenance Manual Proposed Contract Modifications Periodical Estimate for Partial Payment Request For Infonnation Progress Photog raphs R ecord Drawing Shop Drawing Schedule of Progress The sequence numbe r s hall be is s ued in chronol o gical order for each type of submittal. Resubmittals shall be followed by a lett er of the alphabet to indicate the number of times a submittal has been sent to the Engineer for processing . As an e xample, a s ubmittal with the number RD-025 indicates that he submittal is the 25th item of R ecord Data s ubmitted . Correct assignm ent of numbe rs is essential as different submittal typ es are processed in diffe re nt ways . Some submittals rece iv ed do not re quire that any re s ponse b e given for the material. Contractor shall maintain a log of submiss ions to allow the proce ss ing of Contractor's submittals to be monitored . Logs will be reviewed pe ri o dically to d etermine that all submittals are received and processed . Submittal numbers are to be cl e arly noted on each pa ge or sh eet o f the submittal. In addition , each s ubmittal sh a ll h ave a cross -refe renced id e ntific ation number relating to th e s pecific ation that the s ubmittal a ppli es . Th e id e ntification number shall be pe r Secti o n 01300 . Submitta ls s hall be m ark ed to s ho w c lea rl y th e applicable sec ti on s o f the s pec ification and s hee t numbe r of Pa rt D 1 Spec ial Cond11io ns d oc D -15 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank drawings. D-43 RECORD DRAWINGS a_ General: During prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall maintain a complete set of drawings upon which all deviations and changes shall be legibly recorded with actual works done. Deviations and changes shall be marked in red on a I I x I 7 (full scale) set of drawings. b_ Delivery: Record Drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer in good condition upon completion and acceptance of the work and before final payment is made. c . Requirements: Record Drawings shall be required for all work performed as a part of this project. D-44 SHOP DRAWINGS Equipment and material covered in PART E -SPECIFICATIONS shall have Shop Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted in accordance with Sections O 1300 and O I 730; regardless if reference is or is not made to Sections O 1300 or O I 730 within the section of the specification under which the equipment or material is purchased. D-45 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION When necessary, the Contractor shall request additional information, clarification or interpretation of the contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications, he shall identify the conflict and request clarification using the Request for Information (RFI) form provided by the Engineer. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further information. The Engineer will log each request and will review the request. If review of the project information request indicates that a change to the contract documents is required, the Engineer will issue a Proposed Contract Modification as described in Paragraph D-46. D-46 CONTRACTOR MODIFICATION REQUEST/ PROPOSED CONTRACT MODIFICATION Any change in the contract documents that is requested will be initiated by the Contractor issuing a Contractor's Modification Request or by Engineer issuing a Proposed Contract Modifications on the form provided by the Engineer. Proposals will be reviewed by the Owner and if found acceptable will be incorporated in a Change Order in accordance with Section C4 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, or by Field Order in accordance with Paragraph D-50 of the SPECIAL CONDJTIONS. The Contractor's Modification Request shall fully identify and describe the deviations and associated costs, and state the reason the change is requested. Any savings in cost related to the substitution is to be stated in the request for consideration. D-47 RECORD DAT A Record Data shall be submitted to provide information as to the general character, style and manufacturer of the equipment to allow the Owner to adequately identify the materials or equipment incorporated into the project. Record Data shall be provided for all equipment and materials of construction. Record D ata Part D I S pt>c ia l Co nditio ns do c D -16 City of Fort Worth North s id e Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank are not required for items which Shop Drawings and/or Operations and Maintenance manuals are required . Record Data shall be complete to indicate where the material was incorporated into the project, provide schedules of materials and their use, colors, model numbers and other information which would allow this material to be replaced at some future date. Record Data will be received by the Engineer and logged for transmittal to the Owner. Record Data will not be reviewed for comment and no response will be made to the Contractor. D-48 EQUIPMENT INST ALLA TI ON REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the equipment supplier performing the installation check for equipment as required. This report shall certify that 1) the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping, equipment, or anchor bolts, and 4) has been operated under full load conditions and that it is operating satisfactorily. D-49 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR Written notification of the need for testing, observation of work by Engineer, intent to work outside of regular working hours, or the request to shutdown the facilities or make utility connections shall be given to the Engineer by issuance of a Notification By Contractor on a form provided by the Engineer. D-50 ALTERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Paragraph C4-4.4 of the General Conditions shall be modified as follows: By Change Order or Field Order, the Owner reserves the right to make changes in the Contract Documents and in the character or quantities of the work as may be necessary or desirable to insure completion in the most satisfactory manner, provided such changes are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. A Field Order is a written order issued by the Engineer which authorizes minor changes or alterations in the work that do not involve changes in the Contractor Time or Contract Amount. Modifications to the contract can only be authorized by a Change Order or Field Order. Such changes shall not be considered as waiving or invalidating any condition or provision of the Contract Documents . If Contractor believes that a minor change or alternation authorized by Field Order entitles him to an increase in contract amount or contract time, he shall not proceed with the work and shall , within IO days after receiving the Field Order, so advise the Engineer in writing and request that a Change Order be issued in accordance with paragraph C4-4 .5 of the General Conditions. D-51 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES LABELING All electrical materials and equipment to be installed as part of this project shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories , Inc . (UL) or other testing laboratory approved by the City of Fort Worth Electrical Inspection Section . Such labeling shall include electrical equipment provided as part of a mechanical equipment package , such as pumps, blowers , etc . The label shall be provid ed prior to the equipment being shipped to the project site. Pa n D I Spec ia l Co nd iti ons doc D-17 C ity o f Fort Worth Northside Ill Avo ndal e-Haslet Roa d Eleva te d Storage Tank D-52 STORMW ATER POLLUTJON PREVENTION PERMIT: As defined by Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) regulations, a Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction Permit is required for all construction activities that result in the disturbance of one to five acres (Small Construction Activity) or five or more acres of total land (Large Construction Activity). The contractor is defined as an "operator" by state regulations and is required to obtain a permit. Information concerning the permit can be obtained through the Internet at http://www .tnrcc .state .tx .us/permitting/water penn/wwpenn/construct.html. Soil stabilization and structural practices have been selected and designed in accordance with North Central Texas Council of Governments Best Management Practices and Erosion Control Manual for Construction Activities (BMP Manual). This manual can be obtained through the Internet at www.dfwstormwater.com/runoff.html. Not all of the structural controls discussed in the BMP Manual will necessarily apply to this project. Best Management Practices are construction management techniques that, if properly utilized, can minimize the need for physical controls and possible reduce costs. The methods of control shall result in minimum sediment retention of not Jess than 70%. NOTICE OF INTENT (NOi): If the project will result in a total land disturbance equal to or greater than 5 acres, the contractor shall sign at the pre-construction meeting a TCEQ Notice of Intent (NOI) form prepared by the engineer. It serves as a notification to the TCEQ of construction activity as well as a commitment that the contractor understands the requirements of the permit for storm water discharges from construction activities and that measures will be taken to implement and maintain storm water pollution prevention at the site. The NOi shall be submitted to the TCEQ at least 48 hours prior to the contractor moving on site and shall include the required $100 application fee. The NOi shall be mailed to: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Storm Water & General Permits Team; MC-228 P.O. Box 13087 Austin , TX 78711-3087 A copy of the NOi shall be sent to: City of Fort Worth Department of Environmental Management 5000 MLK Freeway Fort Worth, TX 76119 NOTJCE OF TERM INA TJON (NOT): For all sites that qualify as Large Construction Activity, the contractor s hall s ig n, prior to final payment, a TCEQ Notice of Termination (NOT) form prepared by the engineer. It serve s a s a notice that the site is no longer subject to the requirement of the pennit. The NOT should be mailed to : Tex as Commission on Environmental Quality Storm Water & General Permits Team; MC-228 P .O . Box 13087 Austin , TX 78711-3087 STORM WATER POLLUTJON PREVENTJON PLAN (SWPPP): A document consi sting of a n erosion c o ntrol a nd toxic wa s te ma na ge m e nt plan and a narrative defining s ite param e te rs and te chniques to be employed to redu ce th e re lease o f sediment and pollution from the construction s ite . The SWPPP will be pre pare d by· En g in eer. The se lec te d Contractor s h a ll be p rov id e d with thr ee copies of th e SWPPP a ft er Pan D I Special Cond 11 1011 , J oe D -18 City of Fort Worth Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank award of contract, along with unbound copies of all fonns to be submitted to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. LARGE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY -DISTURBED AREA EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 5 ACRES: A Notice of Intent (NOi) form shall be completed and submitted to the TCEQ including payment of the TCEQ required fee. A SWPPP that meets all TCEQ requirements prepared by the Engineer shall be prepared and implemented at least 48 hours before the commencement of construction activities. The SWPPP shall be incorporated into in the contract documents. The contractor shall submit a schedule for implementation of the SWPPP . Deviations from the plan must be submitted to the engineer for approval. The SWPPP is not warranted to meet all the conditions of the pennit since the actual construction activities may vary from those anticipated during the preparation of the SWPPP. Modifications may be required to fully conform to the requirements of the Permit. The contractor must keep a copy of the most current SWPPP at the construction site. Any alterations to the SWPPP proposed by the contractor must be prepared and submitted by the contractor to the engineer for review and approval. A Notice of Termination (NOT) form shall be submitted within 30 days after final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that is the responsibility of the permittee, or, when another permitted operator assumes control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized . SMALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY -DISTURBED AREA EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN ONE ACRE BUT LESS THAN FIVE ACRES: Submission of a NOi form is not required. However, a TCEQ Site Notice form must be completed and posted at the site. A copy of the completed Site Notice must be sent to the City of Fort Worth Department of Environmental Management at the address listed above. A SWPPP, prepared as described above, shall be implemented at least 48 hours before the commencement of construction activities. The SWPPP must include descriptions of control measures necessary to prevent and control soil erosion, sedimentation and water pollution and will be included in the contract documents . The control measures shall be installed and maintained throughout the construction to assure effective and continuous water pollution control. The controls may include, but not be limited to, silt fences, straw bale dikes, rock berms, diversion dikes, interceptor swales, sediment traps and basins, pipe slope drain, inlet protection, stabilized construction entrances, seeding, sodding, mulching, soil retention blankets, or other structural or non-structural stonn water pollution controls. The method of control shall result in a minimum sediment retention of 70% as defined by the NCTCOG "BMP Manual ." Deviations from the proposed control measures must be submitted to the engineer for approval. D-53 INFORMATION CONCERNING CONDITIONS Prospective bidders shall make a careful examination of the entire site of the project and shall make such explorations as may be necessary to determine the subsoil and water conditions to be encountered; improvements and obstructions which may be encountered, especially those to be protected; methods of providing ingress and egress to private as well as public property ; methods of handling traffic during construction and maintenance of the entire project as well as any section thereof; protection of all existing structures both above and below ground; and how the plans fit the proposed project and especially if any discrepancies exist. A copy of the Geotechnical Study: 2 .5 Million Gallon Eleva ted Storage Tank City of Fort Worth Northside Ill, Fort Worth, Texas (Report DG-06-13380) prepared by HVJ Associates, Inc. for the Owner is included in the Appendix. This report is made available for the convenience of the Contractor to establish bidding parameters only. It is expressly understood that neither the Owner nor the Engineer will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by the Contractor. The Contractor is required to have a s eparate geotechnical report performed by an independent third party finn as part of this project as outlined in Section I 32 01. Pa rt D I Spec ial Conditi o ns.doc D-19 City of Fort Worth Northside Jll Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank The accuracy of the information furnished by the Engineer in the plans and specifications as to underground structures and surface structures, foundation conditions, character of soil, position and quality of ground water and subsoil water, etc., are not guaranteed by the Owner. END OF SECTION Part D I S pec ial Conditi o ns d oc D-20 City of Fo n Wo rth Nonhsi de Ill Avond ale-H as let Roa d Elevated S torage T ank CITY OF FORT WORTH HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PREVAILING WAGE RA TE FOR 2000 CLASSIFICATION Asphalt Raker Asphalt Shoveler Batching Plant Weigher Carpenter (Rough) Concrete Finisher-Paving Concrete Finisher Helper (Paving) Concrete Finisher-Structures Flagger Form Builder-Structures Form Setter-Paving & Curbs Form Setter-Structures Laborer-Common Laborer-Utility Mechanic Servicer Pipe Layer Pipe Layer Helper Asphalt Distributor Operator Asphalt Paving Machine Operator Concrete Paving Saw Crane , Clamshell , Backhoe, Derrick, Dragline , Shovel(< 1 1/2 CY) Crane , Clamshell, Backhoe , Derrick, Dragline, Shovel(> 1 1/2 CY) Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY & less) Front End Loader (over 2 1/2 CY) Milling Machine Operator Mixer . Motor Grader Operator (Fine Grade) Motor Grader Operator Pavement Marking Machine Roller , Steel Wheel Plant-Mix Pavements Roller , Steel Wheel Other Flatwheel or Tamping Roller , Pneumatic , Self-Propelled Scraper Traveling Mixer Reinforcing Steel Setter (Paving) Truck Driver-Single Axle (Light) Truck Driver-Tandem Axle Semi-Trailer Truck Driver-Lowboy/Float Truck Driver-Transit Mix Truck Driver-Winch Part D I Specia l Conditions .doc D -2 1 HOURLY RATE $10.32 $9.75 $9 .65 $13.64 $10.16 $9 .70 $13.44 $7 .00 $13.44 $10.25 $9.75 $7 .64 $8 .64 $13 .25 $10 .13 $7 .35 $6 .75 $11.45 $11 .09 $10 .53 $10.00 $11 .52 $9.94 $9.32 $8 .00 $11.00 $12 .31 $13 .75 $11 .00 $9 .88 $12 .12 $8 .02 $10.00 $9 .75 $8 .00 $10.22 $10 .54 $10.63 $9 .80 City of Fort Worth Norths ide Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank CITY OF FORT WORTH BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADE PREVAILING WAGE RA TE FOR 2000 CLASSIFICATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC HELPER ACOUSTIC CEILING INST ALLER ACOUSTIC CEILING INST ALLER HELPER BRICK.LA YER/STONE MASON BRICK.LA YER/STONE MASON HELPER CARPENTER CARPENTER HELPER CONCRETE FINISHER CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER CONCRETE FORM BUILDER CONCRETE FORM BUILDER HELPER DRYWALL TAPER DRYWALL TAPER HELPER ELECTRICIAN JOURNEYMAN ELECTRICIAN HELPER ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ELECTRONJC TECHNJCIAN HELPER FLOOR LA YER (CARPET) FLOOR LA YER (RESILIENT) FLOOR LA YER HELPER GLAZI ER GLAZI E R HELPER INSULATOR IN SULA TOR HELPER LABORER-COMMON LABORER-SKILL ED LATH ER LATH ER HELPER MET AL BUILDING ASSEMBLER MET AL BLDG ASS EMBLER HELPER PAJNT E R PA INTER HELP ER PIPEFITTE R PIPEFITTER HELPER PLASTERER PLASTERER HELPER PLUMBER PLUMBER HELP ER REJNFOR C JNG ST EE L SETTER REJNF O RC JN G ST EE L SE TTE R HELPER Pa n D I S pec ia l Cond iti ons .doc HOURLY RATE $15 .98 $10 .75 $14 .02 $10.88 $17 .21 $10.16 $13 .92 $10.38 $12 .68 $9.73 $11.97 $9.42 $11.33 $8 .00 $17.46 $] 1.30 $12.50 $8 .50 $17 .00 $16 .00 $13 .50 $15 .02 $10 .90 $12.04 $9 .40 $7 .85 $10 .3 5 $14 .00 $11.00 $10 .00 $8.70 $12.83 $8.35 $17 .60 $10 .18 $16 .00 $11.00 $16 .91 $9 .75 $10 .4 0 $9 .18 D-22 CLASSIFICATION ROOFER ROOFER HELPER SHEET MET AL WORKER SHEET MET AL WORKER HELPER SHEETROCK HANGER SHEETROCK HANGER HELPER SPRINKLER SYSTEM JNST ALLER SPRINKLER SYSTEM INST ALLER HELPER STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL HELPER WELDER WELDER HELPER HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERA TORS CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE, DERRICK, DRAGLJNE, SHOVEL FORKLIFT OPERA TOR FOUND A TJON DRJLL OPERA TOR FRONT END LOADER OPERA TOR TRUCK DRIVER HOURLY RATE $11.87 $8.33 $14.45 $9.57 $12.45 $9.64 $16.87 $10 .13 $11.36 $8.80 $14 .70 $11.74 $12.50 $9 .63 $13.00 $11.22 $10 .31 Dark Bronze I •• I l " (BI ue ,_____, l'•l.l" I Your Tflater Funds In Action White -----+ Background ------Dark PROJECT SIGN Figure 30 A 311 Radius Scafe 1" = 1' Blue GENERAL DECISION : TX20030045 0 2 /25/2005 TX45 Date : February 25, 2005 General Decision Number: TX20030045 02/25/2005 Superseded General Decision Number: TX020045 State: Texas Construction Types: Heavy and Highway Counties: Collin, Dallas, Denton , Ellis, Grayson, Johnson, Kaufman, Parker, Rockwall, Tarrant and Wichita Counties in Texas. HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS IN WICHITA COUNTY ONLY. HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS ONLY FOR REMAINING COUNTIES . Modification Number 0 1 2 Publication Date 06/13/2003 01/14/2005 02/25/2005 SUTX2004-004 11/09/2004 Air Tool Operator .............. $ Asphalt Distributor Operator ... $ Asphalt paving machine operator$ Asphalt Raker .................. $ Asphalt Shoveler ............... $ Batching Plant Weigher ......... $ Broom or Sweeper Operator ...... $ Bulldozer ope rator ............. $ Carpenter ...................... $ Concrete Fini s her, Paving ...... $ Concrete Finisher, Structures .. $ Concrete Paving Curbing Machine Operator ............... $ Concrete Paving Finishing Maching Operator ............... $ Concrete Paving Joint Sealer Operator ....................... $ Concrete Pav ing Saw Operator ... $ Concrete Pav ing Spread er Operator ....................... $ Concrete Rubber ................ $ Crane , Clamshell, Backhoe , Derrick , Dragline, S h ov el Operator ....................... $ Electrician .................... $ Fl a gger ........................ $ Fo rm Builde r /Se tt er, S tru c tur es$ Fo rm Se t ter , Paving & Cu rb ..... $ F ounda ti o n Dril l Op e rator , Crawler Mo u nte d ................ $ Rates 10 .06 13.99 12.78 11.01 8.80 14.15 9.88 13. 22 12.80 12.85 13.27 12.00 13.63 12.50 13 .56 14 .50 10.61 14. 12 18.12 8.43 11 . 63 11 . 83 13. 67 Fringes 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0 .00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 Foundation Drill Operator, Truck Mounted .................. $ 16.30 Front End Loader Operator ...... $ 12.62 Laborer, common ................ $ 9.18 Laborer, Utility ............... $ 10.65 Mechanic ....................... $ 16 . 97 Milling Machine Operator, Fine Grade ..................... $ 11.83 Mixer operator ................. $ 11.58 Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grade .......................... $ 15.20 Motor Grader Operator, Rough ... $ 14.50 Oiler .......................... $ 14 . 98 Painter, Structures ............ $ 13.17 Pavement Marking Machine Operator ....................... $ 10. 04 Pipe layer ...................... $ 11. 04 Reinforcing Steel Setter, Paving ......................... $ 14. 86 Reinforcing Steel Setter, Structure ...................... $ 16. 29 Roller Operator, Pneumatic, Self -Propelled ................. $ 11. 07 Roller Operator, Steel Wheel, Flat Wheel/Tamping ............. $ 10.92 Roller Operator, Steel Wheel, Plant Mix Pavement ............. $ 11.28 Scraper Operator ............... $ 11.42 Servicer ....................... $ 12. 32 Slip Form Machine Operator ..... $ 12.33 Spreader Box operator .......... $ 10.92 Tractor operator, Crawler Type .$ 12.60 Tractor operator, Pneumatic .... $ 12.91 Traveling Mixer Operator ....... $ 12.03 Truck driver, lowboy-Float ..... $ 14.93 Truck driver, Single Axle, Heavy .......................... $ 11.47 Truck driver, Single Axle, Light .......................... $ 10. 91 Truck Driver, Tandem Axle, Semi-Trailer ................... $ 11.75 Truck Driver, Transit-Mix ...... $ 12.08 Wagon Drill, Boring Machine, Post Hole Driller Operator ..... $ 14.00 Welder ......................... $ 13. 57 Work Zone Barricade Servicer ... $ 10.09 0 .00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR5 .5 (a) (1) (ii)). In the listing abov e, the "SU" designation means that rates li s t e d und e r th e id e ntifier d o not refl e ct colle c tive l y barga ine d wa ge and fringe benefit rates . Other designations indicat e unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2 .) and 3.) should be followed . With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S . Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2 .) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an int e re s ted party (those affected by the action) can request r ev iew a nd reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (S ee 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to : Wage and Hour Administrator U .S. Department of Labor 2 00 Co n s titution Avenue, N.W. Wa s hington, DC 20210 The requ e st should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party 's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc .) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If th e d e cision of the Administrator is not favorable, an intere s ted p a rty may appeal dir e ctly to the Administrativ e Review Boa rd (formerly the Wage Appeal s Board). Write to : Ad min is t ra tiv e Rev i e w Boa rd U.S. Depar tme nt o f La bor 2 00 Co n s tituti o n Ave n ue , N .W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION PARTE Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL I .01 PIPELINE SECTION 01035 Control of Work Page 1 of3 A . The Contractor shall furnish piping and equipment which will be efficient, appropriate and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress which will insure the completion of the work within the time stipulated in the Agreement. If at any time such pipeline appears to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work required or for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to increase the efficiency, or rate of progress, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of work and rate of progress required. I .02 PRJV ATE LAND A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of City of Fort Worth Property, rights-of- way, or easements, except by written permission of the respective landowner. City of Fort Worth easement documents are included in the Appendix of these documents and the locations of such easements are shown in the drawings . 1.03 PIPE LOCATJONS A. Pipelines, electrical conduits, and other underground utilities shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items where required. 1.04 OPEN EX CAVA TJONS A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for access during construction shall be removed when no longer required . The length or size of excavation will be controlled by the particular surrounding conditions, but shall always be confined to the limits prescribed by the Engineer. lfthe excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic at any point, the Engineer may require special construction procedures, such as limiting the length of the open trench, prohibiting stacking excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain open overnight. B. The Contractor shall take precautions, such as fences and barricades, to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. A II trenches, excavated material, equipment, or other obstacles which could be dangerous to the public shall be well lighted at night. I .05 TEST PJTS A. Test pits for the purpose of locating underground pipelines or structures in advance of the construction shall be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor at the direction of the Engineer. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC SECTION 01035 Control of Work Page 2 of 3 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences , or take other measures for safety satisfactory to the Engineer. B. Detours around construction shall be in conformance with the applicable permit and will be subject to the approval of the Owner and the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured, the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the Owner. C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress . The Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection has been provided. 1 .07 BLASTING A. No blasting shall be allowed unless approved in writing by the City of Fort Worth. 1.08 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission , neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in some other manner acceptable to the Engineer. 1.09 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost , provide for the flow of watermains, sewers, drains and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall immediately cart away and remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure of maintaining existing flow shall be fully discussed wi th the Engineer well in advance of the interruption of any flow. 1.10 COOPERA TJON WITHIN THIS CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall cooperate with Subcontractors or trades, and shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or required. B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by the Contractor and his Subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein or directed by the Engineer. I. 1 1 WORK PERFORMED BY OTHERS A. General I . Others will pe rform work on this Site during times of the Work performed under this Contract. Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01035 Control of Work Page 3 of 3 2. Contractor shall interface and coordinate with Others performing work in accordance with the requirements in Section 01315. Work under this Contract shall be interfaced and connected to Work by Others as noted, especially as set out in this Section. B. Coordination with Other Contractors 1. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors on the premises to facilitate the progress of all projects at or near the site of work. 2. The Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors for connections and testing of facilities where there is an interface between projects . Such coordination shall be performed under the direction of the Engineer. 3. Other projects which the contractor shall coordinate such connections and testing may include the following: a . Northside Ill 36-inch Transmission Main b. Northside TV 24-inch Water Line and 15-inch Sanitary Sewer Refer to Section I 0040 for a description of project work and projected schedules for these construction contracts. 4. If other contracts are not completed by such time that is necessary to facilitate testing, the Engineer will determine if, and for how long, the time for completion of the Work under the Contract should be extended, as provided in Section C7-7 of the General Conditions. 1.12 CLEANUP A. During the course of the work , the Contractor shall keep the site of his operations in as clean and neat a condition as is possible . He shall dispose of all residue resulting from the construction work and, at the conclusion of the work , he shall remove and haul away any surplus excavation, broken pavement, lumber, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse remaining from the construction operations, and shall leave the entire site of the work in a neat and orderly condition. 1.13 PAYMENT A. Payment for the work in this Section will be included as part of the total lump sum or appropriate unit prices stated in the Bid Form. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside IIJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l -SCOPE OF WORK I .OJ GENERAL REQUIRMENTS SECTION 01040 Construction Sequence Page 1 of 3 A. The intent of construction phasing as specified herein is to sufficiently meet projected 2009 maximum day demands through elevated storage, while facilitating coordination between the various parts of the project. All tasks of the construction schedule are necessary to meet maximum day demands, whether described herein or not, are the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The work specified herein and any other work required by the Resident Project Representative, which may interrupt the normal plant operations, shall be accomplished at times that will be convenient to the Owner. The Contractor shall plan to work overtime if needed to complete construction of the project and shall make no claims for extra compensation for overtime work required to conform to these requirements. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Resident Project Representative and plant personnel at least two weeks prior to tying into existing piping which will be out of service for less than one day, and at least four weeks prior to construction requiring shutdown of portions of the plant for extended periods of time greater than one day. C. The Contractor shall also coordinate his work, and the associated construction sequencing and facility shutdowns, with other contractors for the following projects that will be constructed in conjunction with and during the timeframe of this project: 1. Northside III 36-inch Transmission Main 2. Northside IV 24-inch Water Line and 15-inch Sanitary Sewer The planned start of construction and substantial completion dates of these projects, including this project are : Project Northside III 36" Northside IV 24" & 15" Northside IIJ EST Notice to Proceed June 18, 2008 October 22, 2007 February 1, 2008 Substantial Completion Date February 24, 2009 April 19, 2008 April 21, 2009 (445 cal. days) D. In the event that underground piping or utilities are encountered which are not shown on the Drawings, such piping or utilities shall not be disturbed without prior approval of the Engineer. E. All plant operations shall be performed by City of Fort Worth plant personnel, coordinated through the Resident Project Representative by the Contractor. 1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Project Summary is included in Section O JO 10. B . Construction Schedule is included in Section O 1315. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.03 SUBMITTALS SECTION 01040 Construction Sequence Page 2 of 3 A . The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed Schedule for Construction prior to initiation of site construction. The Schedule shall comply with all aspects of the work described herein . B. The Contractor shall update the Schedule as required by Section O 1315. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION 3 .01 SCHEDULE CONSIDERATIONS A. The Northside III 36-inch Contractor shall be responsible for connection to the 24-inch inlet/outlet on the tank site. Tank Contractor will be required to accommodate requests of Northside III 36-inch Transmission Main Contractor to ensure operational connection in a timely manner. I . Mobilization and Construction Startup a. Work associated with the project will require removal of certain existing fences and trees as shown on the drawings. Prior to removal of this fence, the temporary construction fences, construction entrances, as well as other erosion control measures, shall be installed to ensure that the property along the alignment is secure at all times. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for developing his own schedule to meet the completion requirements for satisfactorily maintaining the pressure maintenance requirements within th e NSIII pressure plane. 3 .02 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The Contractor understands and agrees that the time of completion is an essential considerat ion of development of his proposal and that failure to complete the work under this Contract within the allotted time as specified or subsequently adjusted by Change Orders will result in damages to be sustained by the Owner by its inability to deliver potable water to its customers in the North s ide III service area. The Contractor and Owner further agree in applying Liquidated Damages, that such damages cannot be precisely measured or that the ascertainment of actual damages would be unduly difficult after the fact. Therefore, the Contractor and Owner agree in applying Liquidated Damages that for each and every Calendar Day the work any portion thereof, remains uncompleted after the specified times or adjusted times if modified by Change Order, the Contractor shall pay as agreed Liquidated Damages, the amounts specified in Paragraph D-15 of the Special Conditions (Part D). Northside I1l Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01040 Construction Sequence Page 3 of 3 B . In the event the Contractor fails to complete the work items in paragraph 3 .0 I B necessary to meet the desired pressure plane demands within the specified time frames, the Owner may withhold money permanently from the Contractor's total compensation at the rate in Section C7 -7.10 of the General Conditions as Liquidated Damages until these work items are completed, in accordance with D -15 . END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 01200 Project Meetings Page I of3 A. Schedule, attend, and administer as spec ified , preconstruction conference, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents . C. Meetings administered by Owner may be tape recorded . If recorded, tapes will be used to prepare minutes and retained by Owner for future reference. D. Meetings, in addition to those s pecified in this Section, may be held when requested by the Owner, Engineer or Contractor. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Pre-bid conference is included in Information to Bidders . I .03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A preconstruction conference will be held within ten days after award of Contract and before Work is started. The conference will be sc heduled and administered by the Owner. B. The Owner will preside at the conference, prepare the minutes of the meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of the conference. C. Attendance: 1 . Contractor's project manager. 2. Contractor's superintendent. 3. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire to invite or the Owner may request. 4. Resi dent Project Representative 5. Engineer's representatives. 6. Owner's re presentatives . 7 . Others as appropriate. D . Preliminary Agenda: I . Schedule completion dat es and Liquidated Damages. 2. Construction Scheduling, including critical path. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 3 . Designation of responsible personnel. 4 . Authority of Contractor. 5 . Authority of Resident Project Representative and Engineer. 6. Submittals. 7. Procedures for Change Orders, CMRs, PCMs, Field Orders, RFis, etc. 8. Record Drawings 9. Quality control. I 0. Safety Procedures. I I. Temporary construction facilities. 12. Use of City Facilities . 13. Security and Work after Normal Hours. I 4. Measurement and payment. 15. City Administrative Procedures, including M/WBE procedures. 16 . Project Work Summary I 7. Correspondence Routing I 8. Pay Request Procedures 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS SECTION 01200 Project Meetings Page 2 of3 A. Formal project coordination meetings will be held periodically (not more than once weekly, nor less than once monthly). Meetings will be scheduled and administered by Resident Project Representative. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be conducted on an as-needed basis . Such additional meetings shall include, but not be limited to: I. Coordinating plant shutdowns. 2 . Installation of piping and equipment. 3 . Coordination between other construction projects . 4 . Problem Area Resolutions 5 . Equipment approval. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01200 Project Meetings Page 3 of 3 B . The Resident Project Representative will preside at progress meetings, prepare the minutes of the meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each meeting. C. Attendance: Same as preconstruction conference. D . Preliminary Agenda: I . Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2 . Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3 . Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4 . Problems which impede construction schedule . 5 . Review of off-site fabrication , delivery schedules. 6. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other construction contracts. 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule . 8. Revisions to construction schedule. 9. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. I 0. Coordination of schedules. 11. Review submittal schedules. 12. Maintenance of quality standards. 13. Pending changes and substitutions. 14. Review proposed changes for: a . Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Review Record Documents . 16 . Review monthly pay request. 17 . Review status of RFis. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l: GENERAL 1.0 I DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01300 Submittals Page I of 7 A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable to the following work-related submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Mock Ups, Construction Photographs, and Construction or Submittal Schedules. Detailed submittal requirements will be specified in the technical specifications sections. Shop drawings are required to be submitted for the following items prior to installation: • Pipe Fabrication and Layout Drawings • All Valves and Associated Appurtenances and Vaults • Cathodic Protection • Concrete Mix Designs • Erosion Protection • Tank Fabrication and Layout Drawings • Schedules • Contractor's Engineering Calculations • 0 and M Manuals • Coordination Drawings • Electrical • Payment Application • Bonds • Insurance Certifications • Schedule of Values • Trench Safety Plan B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Specification Section, Paragraph, Drawing No. or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of sufficient size for sufficient presentation of data. 1.02 SHOP ORA WlNGS, PRODUCT DAT A, SAMPLES A. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings, as specified in individual work Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to, custom-prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled information, setting diagrams, actual shopwork manufacturing instructions, custom templates, special wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and certifications, as applicable to the Work. 2. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors for approval shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission at the proper time so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials. 3 . The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings regarding measurements, size of members, materials , and details to satisfy himself that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof. 4. All details on shop drawings submitted for approval shall show clearly the relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted for approval. Northside II1 Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 B. Product Data SECTJON 01300 Submittals Page 2 of 7 1. Product data as specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturer's product s pecification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing-in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instruction s and recommended spare-parts listing and printed product warranties, as applicable to the Work. C. Samples 1. Samples specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols and units of work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall review shop drawings , product data and samples, including those by subcontractors, prior to submission to determine and verify the following : 1. Field measurements 2 . Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with the Specifications B . Each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor shall have affixed to it the following Certification Statement including the Contractor's Company name and signed by the person who actually reviewed the submittal. "Certification Statement: By this submittal, 1 hereby represent that 1 have determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and 1 have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings." Shop drawings larger than 8 1/2" x 11" shall be folded to 8 1 /2" x 11 ". Shop drawings and product data sheets shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the above Certification Statement on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package . Provide to the Construction Manager a copy of each submittal transmittal sheet for shop drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal of said drawings, product data and samples to the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall follow the submittal numbering requirements provided in Paragraph D-42 of the Special Conditions. In addition, the Contractor shall utilize an 8-character s ubmittal cross-reference identification numbering system in the following manner: 1. The first five digits s hall be the applicable Specification Section Number. 2 . The next two di g it s s hall be the numbers 01-99 to se qu entially number each initial separate item or drawing submitte d under each s pecific Section number. Northside Jil Avondale-Haslet Road E levated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01300 Submittals Page 3 of7 3 . The las t character shall be a lett er , A-Z, indicating the re s ubmi ss io n of the same Drawing (i .e . A=2nd s ubmi ssio n, B =3 rd submi ss ion , C =4th submission , etc.). A typical s ubmitta l number would be as follows: 03300-08-B 03300 08 = Specification Section for Concrete = The eighth initial su bmittal under this specification section B = The third submission (se cond resubmission) of that particular shop drawing D . Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any devi ations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from his/her re s pon s ibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor and the Engineer will have no respon si bility therefore . F . No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be started nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item . Fabrication performed , mat e rials purchased or on-site construction accomplished which does not conform to approved s hop drawin gs and data shall be at the Contractor's ri s k . The Owner will not be liable for any expense or delay du e to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity. G. Project work, materials , fabrication, and installation shall conform with approved s hop drawings , applicable samples, and product d ata . 1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. M ake submitt a ls promptly in acco rdance with approved sc hedul e, and in s uch seq uence as to cause no d e la y in th e Work or in the work of any other contractor. B . Eac h s ubmitt a l, a ppropriately coded, will be returned within 3 0 calendar days following rece ipt of submittal by the E ngin eer. C. Number of s ubmitta ls required : I. Shop Drawin gs as defined in Paragra ph 1.02 A: Eight copies for mechanical s ubmittals . Seven copies for all other submittals . If Contractor requires more than three copies of Shop Drawings returned , Contractor shall submit more than the number of copies listed above. 2. Product Data as defined in Paragraph 1.02 B: Four copies. 3 . Samples: Submit the number stated in the respective Specification Sections. D. Submittals shall contain: I . The date of s ubmi ssion and the dat es of any previou s submissions. 2 . The Project title and number. 3 . Contracto r identification. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 4 . The names of: a. Contractor b. Supplier c. Manufacturer SECTION 01300 Submittals Page 4 of 7 5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number, page and paragraph(s). 6 . Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 9 . Identification by highlighting of deviations from Contract Documents. I 0. Identification by highlighting of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8-in X 3-in blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps. 1.05 REVIEW OF SHOP ORA WINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING ORA WINGS AND SAMPLES A. The review of shop drawings, data , and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed as: I . permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 2 . relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and . materials; and/or 3 . approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein . B. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner. C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract requirements which Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D . Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes. Code I - Code 2 - Code 3 - "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture . "EXCEPTIONS". This code is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. The Contractor may releas e the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM". This combination of codes is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comm ents IS required by the Contractor. The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture ; howeve r, all Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTJON 01300 Submittals Page 5 of7 November 2007 Code 4 - Code 5 - Code 6 - notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall s pecifically address each omission and nonconforming item th at was noted. Confirmation is to be received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the confirmation . "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT". This combination of codes is assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the package. The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted . Resubmittal is to be received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal. "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract Documents. "COMMENTS A IT ACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached to the returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the Contractor. Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing there has been an attachment of additional data. E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals . On resubmittals, the Contractor shall direct specific attention , in writing on the letter of transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use ofrevision triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Engineer, on previous submissions. Any such revisions which are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer. F. Partial submittals may not be reviewed . The Engineer will be the only judge as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals deemed by the Engineer to be not complete will be returned to the Contractor, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The Engineer may at his/her option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete . G. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven working days prior to release for manufacture. H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer. 1.06 DISTRIBUTlON A. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved product data and samples, where required , to the job site file and elsewhere as directed by the Engineer. Number of copies shall be as directed by the Engineer but shall not exceed the number specified in Paragraph I .04C. 1.07 MOCK UPS A . Mock Up units as specified in individual Sections, include , but are not necessarily limited to , complete units of the standard of acceptance for that type of work to be u s ed on the Project. Re move at the completion of the Work or when directed . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.08 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (P.E.) CERTIFICATION FORM SECTION 01300 Submittals Page 6 of 7 A. If specifically required in other Sections of these Specifications, the Contractor shall submit a P.E. Certification for each item required, in the form attached to this Section, completely filled in and stamped. 1.09 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITT ALS A . Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections, of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. 1 .1 0 REPETITIVE REVIEW A. Submittals for each item will be reviewed no more than twice at the Owner's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense, based on the Engineer's then prevailing rates. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner within 30 Calendar Days for all such fees invoiced to the Owner by the Engineer. B. The need for more than one resubmission or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside ID Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 P .E. CERTIFJCA TJON FORM SECTION 01300 Submittals Page 7 of7 The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a Professional Engineer registered in the State of ____________ and that he/she has been employed by ____________ _ (Name of Contractor) __________________ to design ________________ _ (Insert P .E. Responsibilities) in accordance with Specification Section ---------------------for the (Name of Project) The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the __________ _ (Name of Project) ------------------------' that said design is in conformance with all applicable local, State and Federal codes, rules and regulations, and that his/her signature and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the design . The undersigned hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to the __________ C~ity~o_f~F~o_rt~W_o_rt_h or Owner's representative within seven days following written request therefore by the Owner. P .E. Name Signature Address Place P .E . Stamp Here With Date and Signature Contractor's Nam e Signature Title Addre ss Northside JI] Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 1 of 7 A. A Critical Path Method (CPM) construction schedule shall be used to control the work of this Contract and to provide a definitive basis for determining job progress. The construction schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor. Work shall be performed in compliance with the established CPM schedule and the Contractor and his subcontractors shall be responsible for cooperating fully with the Owner in effectively utilizing the CPM schedule. B . The CPM schedule to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor shall consist of a CPM network ( diagram of activities) and a computer-generated schedule (print-out) as specified. The fonnat shall be the activity-on-node precedence network as indicated on the Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule. C. The Contractor shall utilize PRJMA VERA and PRIMA VISION or equal scheduling program in analyzing the construction schedules. If the Contractor desires to utilize a different scheduling program than PRIMA VERA and PRJMA VISION to prepare its schedules, it must first obtain approval of the Owner. Contractor shall provide one authorized copy of the scheduling software to the Owner. D . Within ten calendar days following written Notice to Proceed, the Contractor is to submit to the Owner for review and approval a Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule covering the first 60 calendar days of work to be performed . E . A Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule shall include: I. Illustrate a feasible CPM schedule for completion of the Work under this Contract within the time specified . 2 . Provide an elementary example of a CPM schedule in the format to be used for the detailed CPM schedule specified . The Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule is not as detailed as the CPM schedule required under this Contract. 3. Establish mandatory milestone dates. Milestones are designated on the Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule with asterisks . F . The Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule is not to be considered binding except for the time required for contract completion and the mandatory milestones. G. The Contractor shall develop his own outline of the Work and prepare his proposed CPM schedule. Contractor shall reference the construction constraints and sequencing issues presented in Section 01040. The computer-based schedule shall be the product of a recognized commercial computer software producer and shall meet all of the requirements specified. 1.02 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS A. The network shall show the order a nd interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the Contractor. The basic concept of a network analysis diagram shall be followed to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities and its completion re strict s the s t art of the following activities. Northside III Avondale-Hasl et Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 2 of 7 B. Detailed n etwork activities shall includ e : construction activities, th e submittal and approval of samples of materials and Shop Drawin gs, the procurement of materials and equipment, fabrication of materials and equipment a nd their d e livery , installation , and t es ting, start-up and training. The Contractor shall break the work into activities with durations no longer than 20 working days each , except as to nonconstruction activities (s uch as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment) and any other activities for which the Owner may approve the showing of longer duration. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the work shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and simplification. C. Separate activities shall be provided for each significant identifiable function in each trade area in each facility. Activities shall show duration and remaining duration . Specific activities which shall be included are: interface work between the Contractor and other contractors, subcontract work, interface work between subcontractors and between the Contractor and subcontractors, leakage tests of tanks and pipelines, electrical connections to each item of equipment, supplier and manufacturer technical assistance, mechanical connections to each item of equipment, tests, concrete finishing, each item of site work , (including restraints on other activities), and utilities, fuels and chemicals. D. Each activity on the network s hall h ave the following indicated on the node representing it. I . Duration and remaining duration for those activities in progress . 2. A five character (or less) code indicative of the party responsibl e for accomplishing the act ivity. 3. A brief description of th e activity. E. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Owner's approval. The detailed network shall be time sca led . In addition to the brief d esc ription , the Contractor s hall submit a separate list of ac tivities containing a d e tailed narrative of the scope o f each ac tivity, including the trades and s ubcontractors involved , the activity duration, and th e cost of each activity as it pertains to th e pay items on the Schedule of Values. The cost for each work activity shall include mobilization , materials, labor, equipment, overhead , and profit. F. To the extent that the network or any revision thereof shows anything not jointly agreed upon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon , it shall not be deemed to have been approved by the Owner. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing work required within any applicable completion date, notwithstanding the review of the n etwork by the Owner. G . E xcept where earlier completions are specified, CPM schedules which show completion of work prior to the Contract completion date may be approved by the Owner, but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for claim for delay against the Owner by the Contractor. The time period between the Contractor's early finish date and the Contract Time shall be s hown as a float activity. Northside ITI Avondale-Has let Road Elevate d Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.03 COMPUTER-GENERA TED SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 3 of7 A. Each computer-generated schedule submittal from the CPM activity network shall include the following tabulations : a li st of activities in numerical order, a list of activity precedences, a schedule sequenced by Early Start Date, and a schedule sequenced by Total Float. Each schedule shall include the following minimum items: 1. Activity numbers 2. Estimated duration 3 . Activity description 4 . Early start date (calendar dated) 5 . Early finish date (calendar dated) 6. Latest start date ( calendar dated) 7. Latest finish date ( calendar dated) 8. Status (whether critical) 9 . Total float and free float. l 0. Total cost of each activity per the approved Schedule of Values . B . In addition , each schedule shall be prefaced with the following summary data: I . Contract name and number 2. Contractor's name 3. Contract duration 4. Contract schedule 5 . The effective or starting date of the schedule (the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed). C. A narrative shall accompany the diagram providing for each activity : I . Activity number 2. Activity description 3. Predecessors 4 . Successors Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 4 of7 D . Advise the Owner of the calendar used for the Schedule. The Calendar should be based on the actual work week anticipated by the Contractor; whether 5, 6 or 7 days a week will be worked . 1.04 INITIAL CONFERENCE A . Within 10 days following the receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to discuss and agree on the proposed standards for the CPM schedule. At this conference the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a preliminary network defining the planned operations during the first 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. The Contractor's general approach for the balance of the Project shall be indicated . Cost of activities expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and approval of the complete network shall be included. 1.05 APPROVED CPM SCHEDULE A. Within 45 days following the receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit two prints of the proposed CPM activity network and a computer-generated schedule to the Owner. Following review by the Owner, the Contractor shall incorporate the Owner's comments into the network and submit five prints and one reproducible of the revised network and two copies of the generated schedule. This final submittal shall be delivered to the Owner within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. B. CPM schedules which contain activities showing negative float or which extend beyond the Contract completion date in the computer-generated schedule will not be approved. C. The Contractor shall participate in the initial review and evaluation of the proposed network diagram and schedule by the Owner. The approved network shall then be the approved CPM schedule to be used by the Contractor for planning, organizing and directing the work, and reporting progress. D. Approval of the CPM activity network by the Owner is advisory only and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for accomplishing the work within the contract completion date. Omissions and errors in the approved CPM schedule shall not excuse performance less than that required by the Contract. Approval by the Owner in no way makes the Owner an insurer of the CPM schedule's success or liable for time or cost overruns flowing from its shortcomings. The Owner hereby disclaims any obligation or liability by reason of approval of the CPM schedule. E . The network shall be submitted on sheets 22 inches x 34 inches, and may be divided into as many separate sheets as required. 1.06 PROGRESS REPORTING A . Progress shall be reported on a monthly basis. The Contractor and Owner shall evaluate the status of the work at the end of each month; to show actual progress and to identify problem areas. Between the I st and the 5th of each month the Contractor shall submit a preliminary updated schedule with narrative using the end of the month as the Data Date. A final schedule update shall be submitted by the 10th day of each month . B. The progress and associated costs shown on the CPM each month shall be used in conjunction with the Schedule of Values in determining the amounts to be paid through the Pay E s timate each month . Activities as they pertain to the pay items of the base bid schedule will be separately totaled for the cost of each activity and value of work in place for this period. Northside II1 Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 5 of 7 C. Partial payment applications will not be processed without an approved monthly schedule update . 1.07 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current CPM schedule and CPM Status Report that delays to the critical path have resulted and the Contract completion date will not be met, or when so directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner. He shall submit to the Owner for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule. I. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate the backlog of work. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work. 3 . Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule. B. lf, when so requested by the Owner, the Contractor should fail to submit a written statement of the steps he intends to take or should fail to take such steps as approved by the Owner, the Owner may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in manpower (trades), equipment, and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday work, etc .) to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule, and the Contractor shall promptly provide such level of effort at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETJON TlME A. lf the Contractor desires to make changes in his method of operating which affect the approved CPM schedule, he shall notify the Owner in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Owner approves these changes, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval, without additional cost to the Owner, all of the affected portions of the CPM network. The CPM schedule shall be adjusted by the Contractor only after prior approval of his proposed changes by the Owner. Adjustments may consist of changing portions of the activity sequence, activity durations, division of approved activities, or other adjustments as may be approved by the Owner. The addition of extraneous, non-working activities and activities which add unapproved restraints to the CPM schedule will not be approved . B. If the completion of any activity, whether or not critical, falls more than 100 percent behind its approved duration, the Contractor shall submit for approval a schedule adjustment showing each such activity divided into two activities reflecting completed versus uncompleted work. C. Shop Drawings which are not approved on the first submittal or within the schedule time, and equipment which do not pass the specified tests shall be immediately rescheduled. D. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract. In the event the Contractor re ques ts an extension of any Contract completion date, he s hall furnish such justification and s upporting evidence as the Owner may deem necessary to determine whether the Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 6 of 7 Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this Contract. The Owner will , after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. Jf the Owner finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any Contract completion date, the Owner's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently approved CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next updating of the schedule. Actual delays in activities which, according to the CPM schedule, do not affect any Contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network will not be the basis for a change therein. E. Each request for change in Contract completion date shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner within 30 days after the beginning of the delay for which a time extension is requested but before the date of final payment under this Contract. No time extension will be granted for requests which are not submitted within the foregoing time limit. I. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule or completion time t o be adjusted by the Owner to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner or its representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments or completion time extensions. Under such conditions, the Owner will direct the Contractor to reschedule the work or Contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions, and the Contractor shall revi se his schedule accordingly. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time extensions beyond the actual completion of unaffected work, in which case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the Owner. Available float time in the CPM schedule may be used by the Owner as well as by the Contractor. F . Float or slack time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date of a chain of activities on the CPM. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the Owner. Contractor's work shall proceed according to early start dates, and the Owner shall have the right to reserve and apportion float time according to the needs of the project. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays, affecting paths of activities containing float time, will not have any affect upon contract completion times, providing that the actual delay does not exceed the float time associated with those activities. 1.09 COORDJNA TJNG SCHEDULES WJTH OTHER CONTRACT SCHEDULES A. Where work is to be performed under this Contract concurrently with or contingent upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the Contractor's CPM Schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. The Contractor shall obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the Owner for the preparation and updating of his CPM schedule and shall make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules . B. In case of interference between the operations of different contractors, the Owner will determine the work priority of each contractor and the sequence of work necessary to expedite the completion of the entire Project. 1n such cases , the decision of the Owner shall be accepted as final. The temporary delay of the Contractor's work due to s uch circumstances shall not be considered as justification for claims for additional compe ns ation . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.10 SCHEDULE OF VALUES SECTION 01315 Progress Schedule and Reports Page 7 of 7 A. The approved CPM schedule shall be the schedule to be used by the Contractor for reporting progress. A separate payment schedule, not tied to the CPM schedule, shall be used for requesting payment of work accomplished. Payment items for the specific activities and values of the individual items shall be approved by the Engineer. B . If the Contractor does not follow his planned schedule or desires to make changes in his method of operating and scheduling, he shall notify the Engineer in writing stating the reasons for the change. Progress payments will be awarded based on amount judged complete in conjunction with the approved activity sequence. Progress payments on work out of sequence will not be allowed unless logic changes are made and approved by the Engineer to the approved CPM schedule. C. The payment request shall include the activities or portions of activities completed during the reporting period and their total value as basis for the Contractor's periodic request for payment. Payment made will be based on the total value of such activities completed or partially completed after verification by the Engineer. The request shall state the percentage of the work actually completed as of the report date. 1.11 PROJECT EXECUTION AND CONTROL REPORTING A. A II change proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer using the "Contract Change Proposal" form to be provided by the Engineer. B . Each day the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer daily construction report information using the "Daily Construction Report" form to be provided by the Engineer. C . Each week, after coordination meetings with subcontractors, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a three (3) week schedule using the form to be provided by the Engineer. This schedule shall identify work scheduled for the current week and projected for two additional weeks. D . If the Owner elects to delete any Jump sum item, the dollar amount to be deleted from the Contract shall be the total amount shown in the Schedule of Values for that item, including overhead and profit. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: SECTION 01500 Construction Facilities and Controls Page 1 of 3 A. Work Included: Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary utilities such as water, electricity, and telephone; 2. Field office for the Contractor's personnel; 3. Sanitary facilities; 4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and canopies; 5. Temporary fencing of the construction site; 6. Project sign; 7 . Security; 8. Water, erosion, sediment, and dust control; 9 . Removal. B. Related Work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 2 . Except that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with requirements of pertinent safety regulations, such equipment normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own portions of the Work are not part of this Section. 3. Permanent installation and hookup of the various utility lines are described in other Sections. C. Work Included: The General Contractor shall provide temporary power, water service, internet, and telephone with a fax to the Field Office. The General Contractor will also be required to provide a space within Field Office for use by the Resident Project Representative as outlined in Section CS-5.6 of the General Conditions. 1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 UTILITIES: A. Water: I. Provide necessary temporary piping and water supply and, upon completion of the Work, remove such temporary facilities. Northside III Avondale-Hasl et Road E levated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2. Provide and pay for wate r used in construction . SECTION 01500 Construction Facilities and Controls Page 2 of 3 3. Contractor shall be aware that construction of the City of F o rt Worth NS IV 24-inch Water Line may not be complete by the beginning of this contract. Provisions should be made to supply water needed for construction from another source until a connection can be made to the 24-inch water line. B. Electricity: 1. Provide necessary temporary wiring and, upon completion of the Work, remove such temporary facility. 2. Provide and pay for electricity used in construction . C. Telephone and Fax: 1. Make necessary arrangements and pay costs for installation and operation of telephone and fax service to the Contractor's office at the site. 2. Make the telephone available to the Engineer for use in connection with the Work. D. Internet: 1. High-speed internet service shall be provided for use by resident project representative. 2.02 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS: A . Contractor's facilities : 1. Provide a field office building and sheds adequate in size and accommodation for Contractor's offices, supply, and storage. 2.03 DEWATERING: A. For the entire duration of the Contract, the Contractor, at his expense, shall keep all parts of the project site, including excavations , free from any accumulation of water, regardless of the source or cause of such water, by adequate trenching and pumping as required . B. Pumping shall include adequate pumps , hose strainers, and other appurtenances, fuel , power, trenching, erosion control facilities, and pumping as required. C . Water shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not endanger public health or cause damage or expense to public or private property, and in accordance with the requirements of any public agencies having jurisdiction . If sewers and streets are used for drainage or the disposal of water during construction , they shall be mainta ined and left satisfactorily clean upon the completion of the work . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.04 ENCLOSURES: SECTION 01500 Construction Facilities and Controls Page 3 of 3 A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the Work in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations. 2.05 TEMPORARY PROTECTION: A . The Contractor or subcontractors shall also be responsible for protecting his work from damage due to the weather. 2.06 TEMPORARY FENCING: A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary 6 foot chain link fence with lockable gate of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the Work by the public . 2.07 PROJECT SIGNS: A . Manufacture one standard job sign as referenced in Section D -Special Conditions. Mount at the job site where directed by the Engineer or as shown in the construction documents. B . Except as otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer, do not permit other signs or advertising on the job site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL: A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the Work. B. Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will permit, or as directed by the Engineer. 3.02 PROTECTION: A . Provide spare safety helmets and enforce their use by Owner, Engineer, their representatives and authorized visitors to the site. END OF SECTION Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL I .OJ SCOPE OF WORK A . This Section outlines the procedure to be followed in closing out the Contract. 1.02 SUBST ANTJAL COMPLETION A. The Substantial Completion dates shall be established as stated in the Contract. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout Page I of 3 A . At the completion of work and immediately prior to final inspection, cleaning of the entire project shall be accomplished according to the following provisions: 1. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment provided under the Contract, including finishes . The cleaning shall leave the structures and site in a complete and finished condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. All Subcontractors shall similarly perform, at the same time, an equivalent thorough cleaning of all work and equipment provided under their contracts. 3 . The Contractor shall remove all temporary structures and all debris, including all dirt, sand, gravel , rubbish and waste material. 4. Should the Contractor not remove rubbish or debris, or not clean the buildings and site as specified above, the Owner reserves the right to have the cleaning done at the expense of the C ontractor. 5 . The Contractor shall mow th e newly planted grassed areas. B . Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturers. D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces. E. Remove grease , dust , dirt , stains , labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so designated to shine finish. F. Repair, patch , and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. G . Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction. H. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets. Broom clean paved surfaces, rake clean other surfac e s of grounds . l. Handl e materials in a controll ed manner with as fe w handlings as possible . Do not drop or throw material s fr o m hei ghts. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 Novembe r 2007 SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout Page 2 of 3 J. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. After final cleaning and restoration and upon written notice from the Contractor that the work is completed, the Engineer will make a preliminary inspection with the Owner and the Contractor present. Upon completion of this preliminary inspection, the Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of any particulars in which this inspection reveals that the work is defective or incomplete . B . Upon receiving written notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately undertake the work required to remedy deficiencies and complete the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. When the Contractor has corrected or completed the items as listed in the Engineer's written notice, he shall inform the Engineer, in writing, that the required work has been completed. Upon receipt of this notice, the Engineer, in the presence of the Owner and the Contractor, will make his final inspection of the project. D. Should the Engineer find all work satisfactory at the time of his inspection, the Contractor will be allowed to make application for final payment. Should the Engineer still find deficiencies in the work, the Engineer will inform the Contractor of the deficiencies and will deny the Contractor's request for final payment until such time as the Contractor has satisfactorily completed the required work. 1.05 FINAL SUBMITT ALS A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all submittals have been made and approved by the Engineer, including, but not limited to, the following : I . Final shop drawings. 2. Project Record Documents 3 . A II interface information. 4. A II Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 5 . All required indices and schedules. 6 . All Manufacturers' Certificates of Proper Installation. 7 . All construction photographs, including those of the completed project. 8 . All State required submittals. 9 . Certificate that all outstanding debts are paid and that there are no liens on the project. 1.06 ACCE SSORY ITEMS Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout Page 3 of 3 A . The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, upon acceptance of the equipment , all special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These special accessory items include, but are not limited to , the specified spare parts, adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment, initial fill -up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks, light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches , valve wrenches, valve keys , handwheels , and other expendable items as required for initial start-up and operation of all equipment. B. The Owner shall provide all process chemicals used in the operation of the plant for purposes of starting up equipment. 1.07 GUARANTEES, BONDS, AND AFFIDAVITS A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds, certificates, licenses, and affidavits required for work or equipment as specified are satisfactorily filed with the Engineer. 1.08 RELEASE OF LIENS OR CLAIMS A. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of release of liens has been submitted to the Owner as required by the General Conditions. 1.09 FINAL PAYMENT A. Final payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Agreement. PART 2: PRODUCTS {NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL I .OJ REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A . Maintain at the site, for the Owner's use, one record copy of: I . Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3 . Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples . 7. Field Test records. 8 . Construction photographs. 9. RFis 10. Submittal Logs 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01300 : Submittals . 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES SECTION 01720 Project Record Documents Page I of2 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction . I . Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2 . Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer. E . As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and the Owner. 1.04 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the Engineer. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.05 RECORDING SECTION 01720 Project Record Documents Page 2 of2 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B . Record information concurrently with construction progress . I. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings -Legibly mark to record actual construction: I. All underground piping with elevations and dimensions. Changes to piping location. Horizontal and vertical locations of pipe fittings, underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 4 . Details not on original contract drawings . 5. Equipment relocations and piping. D. Specifications and Addenda -Legibly mark each Section to record: I. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each Product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 1.06 SUBMITTAL A. At every six month interval a copy of the up to date Record Drawings shall be provided to the Engineer. At Contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date . 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative . PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 1 of 6 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. I. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of specifications. B . Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01300: Submittals. B. Section 01720: Project Record Documents. C. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. 1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products . 2 . Familiar with requirements of this Section . 3 . Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate e ssential data. 4 . Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.04 FORM OF SUBMITT ALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format I . Size: 8 l /2 inches x 11 inches . 2 . Paper: a. 40 pound minimum, white, for typed pages . b. Holes reinforced with plastic, cloth or metal. 3 . Text: Manufacturer's printed data , or neatly typewritten . 4 . Drawin gs: a . Provid e reinforced punched binder tab , bind in with text. Northside III Avondale -Haslet Road E levated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 2 of 6 b. Reduce larger drawin gs and fo ld to size of text pages but not larger than 14 inches x 17 inches. 5 . Provide fly-leaf for each separate product , or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERA TING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTJONS". List: a. Title of Project. b . Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers . 2. When multiple binders are used , correlate the data into related consistent groupings. D. Jf available, an electronic form of the O&M Manual shall be provided. 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL A . Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of re s ponsible pr incipal , address and telephone number. 2 . A list of each product required to be included , indexed to content of the volume . 3. Li st , with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a . Subcontractor or installer. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each. d . Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents . B. Product Data 1. Include only those she ets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2 . Annotate eac h s he et to: a . Clearly identify spec ific product or part in stall ed . b. C lea rl y identify data a ppli cab le to in st a llati o n . c . Delete refe rences to inapplicable information . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 C. Drawings SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 3 of6 1 . Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illu strate : a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems . b. Control and flow diagrams . 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Drawings as maintenance drawings. D. Written text , as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures . 2 . Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure . E. Copy of eac h warranty, bond and service contract issued . I. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel giving: a . Proper procedures in event of failure. b . Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.06 MANUAL FOR MA TERJALS AND FINISHES A. Submit five copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content -For architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data , giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. b . Color and texture designations. c. Information require d for re-ordering special-manufactured products. 2 . In s tructions for care and maintenance. a . Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b . Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance . C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposure products: I . Manufacturer's data, g iving full information on products . a. Applicable sta nd a rd s. b . Chemical composition. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 c. Details of installation. 2 . Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 4 of 6 D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. I .07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit five copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: I. Description of unit and component parts. a . Function , normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d . Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a . Routine operations . b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4 . Servicing and lubrication schedule: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6 . Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a . Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b . Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9 . Each contractor's coordinati o n drawings . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams . SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 5 of 6 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 1 I . List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts .. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests . c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4 . Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures : a. Routine operations. b . Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d . Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions . 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE SECTION 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Page 6 of6 A . Submit five copies of preliminary draft of proposed sample outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals and list of O&M submittals within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. I. The Engineer will review the preliminary draft and return two copies with comments. B. Submit five copies of completed data in final form no later than 30 days following the Engineer's review of the last shop drawing and/or other submittal specified under Section 01300. I . Two copies will be returned with comments to be incorporated into final copies. C. Submit five (5) copies of approved manual in final form directly to the offices of the Engineer within 30 calendar days of product shipment to the project site and preferably within 30 days after the reviewed copy is received . D. Submit six copies of addendum to the operation and maintenance manuals as applicable and certificates within 30 days after substantial completion. I .09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation , adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. The O&M Manual shall be approved prior to commencing training. 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. PART 2: PART3: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside m Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED SECTION 01740 Warranties and Bonds Page I of2 A. Compile specified warranties and bonds, in accordance with the General Condition s. B. Co-execute submittals when so specified. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Instructions to Bidders: Bid Bonds. B. Conditions of the Contract: Performance Bond and Payment Bond. C. Agreement. D . Section O 1700: Contract Closeout. E. Special Conditions: Maintenance Bond. 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers , suppliers, and subcontractors . B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each . C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence . Provide complete information for each item. I . Product or work item. 2 . Firm, with name of principal , address and telephone number. 3 . Scope. 4 . Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5 . Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel : a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b . In s tances which mi ght affect the validity of warranty or bond . 7 . Contract o r, name of res ponsible principal , addre s s a nd tel e phone number. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.04 FORMS OF SUBMJIT ALS A . Prepare in duplicate packets . B. Format : SECTION 01740 Warranties and Bonds Page 2 of2 I. Size 8 I /2 inches x 11 inches, punch sheets for standard 3-post binder. a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. C. Binders : Commercial quality, three-post binder, with durable and cleanable plastic covers and maximum post width of 2 inches. 1.05 WARRANTY SUBMJIT AL REQUIREMENTS A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for two (2) years, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the time of final acceptance by the Owner. B . For certain pieces of equipment, the Owner may require a warranty of more than one year. The requirement for a warranty of more than one year shall be specified in individual sections of the Specifications. PART 2: PART 3: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: SECTION 02100 Site Preparation Page I of 3 A . Work Included : All labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, required to prepare the site for construction operations by removing and disposing of all obstructions from the site and from any designated rights-of-way or easements, where removal of such obstructions in not otherwise indicated. Also included are services associated with clearing, grubbing, and the removal of topsoil and the removal of trees, stumps, roots, bushes, shrubs, miscellaneous stone, concrete, paving, gates, and all rubbish and debris whether above or below ground, except live utility facilities. B . Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications . 2 . Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction is included in Section 02221 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section . B . Remove any existing uncontrolled fill, vegetation and soft or loose soils in all areas designated for building and pavements and perform required undercutting. C. Provide for a soils engineer to be on site providing observation to determine if further remedial work is required . Execute the engineer's instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 .01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01 GEN ERAL A. Prior to commencing this work, all erosion control and tree protection measures required shall be in place and utilities located and protected. Areas within the construction limits as indicated shall be cleared of all obstructions , vegetation, abandoned structures as defined above ; EXCEPT trees o r s hrubs indicated from pre se rvation , which shall be carefully trimmed as directed and shall be prot ec ted from scarring, barking or other injuries during con struction o perations . Exposed end s Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02100 Site Preparation Page 2 of 3 of pruned limbs or scarred bark shall be pruned, trimmed and treated with an approved asphaltic material within 24 hours of the pruning or injury. B. Construction equipment shall not be operated within the drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. Construction materials shall not be stockpiled under the canopies of trees. No excavation or embankment shall be placed within the drip line of trees until tree wells are constructed . 3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect existing utilities indicated or made known. B. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2 . Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, existing trees (including trees identified to be protected as part of easement agreements), and in particular, trees designated as "protected" and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust from becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site . E. Maintain access to the site at all times . 3.03 CLEARING A. Clean out roots I" in diameter and larger to a depth of at least 12" below the existing ground surface or subgrade of new graded surface, whichever is lower. In areas to receive embankment less than 6-inches and areas to be excavated, roots l" in diameter and larger shall be cleaned out to a depth of at least 18-inches below the lower elevation of the embankment, structure or excavation. B. In cut areas where fill is to be placed , the subgrade moisture content and density shall be verified unless intact undisturbed limestone is present in which case density testing is not required. If the density is less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor) or if the moi sture content is below optimum, the subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches . After scarifying moisture shall be adjusted as necessary and the soils shall be Northside IIJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02100 Site Preparation Page 3 of 3 compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum of dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor) at moisture contents that are at or above the Proctor optimum value. C. Do not allow water to collect in or near foundation areas or floor slab areas during or after construction . D. Holes remaining after removal of obstructions, objectionable material, trees, stumps, etc ., shall be backfilled with select embankment material and tamped. E. Protect trees or groups of trees, designated by the Engineer to remain, from damage by all construction operations by erecting suitable barriers, or by other approved means. Clearing operations shall be conducted in a manner to prevent falling trees from damaging trees designated to remain. F. Areas outside the easements or limits of clearing shall be protected form damage and no equipment of materials shall be stored in these areas. G. Soil shall be stockpiled free from brush, trash, large stones and other extraneous material and protected until it is placed, if allowed. Topsoil shall be stockpiled separate from the underlying more clayey, soils. 3.04 DISPOSAL A . General: I. Remove brush, grass, roots, trash, and other material from clearing operations and disposed of away from the site in a legal manner. 2 . Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on the job site . Cleared vegetation shall be removed from the site within 10 working days. 3. Burning will not be allowed as a method of disposal. 4 . No stumps, trees, limbs, or brush shall be buried in any fills or embankments. 3.05 UTILITIES A. Contact all utility companies and agencies 48 hours prior to beginning any clearing. B. Where utility cutting, capping, or plugging is required, perform such work in accordance with requirements of the utility company or governmental agency having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION Northside JJJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I : GENERAL I.OJ DESCRIPTION: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page I of 19 A. Perform the following earth excavation, backfill, fill and grading as indicated or specified : B . Make excavations to accommodate piping, conduits, foundations and other structures. C. Provide materials for backfilling excavations and constructing embankments and fills as indicated and specified . D . Construct embankments of compacted materials. E. Grade surfaces to meet finished grades indicated. F. Immediately notify the Engineer if suspected hazardous materials are encountered and cease operations in that part of work. G . Remove boulders and tree stumps within the excavation limits. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Division I : General Requirements B . Supplementary Conditions C. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG); (2004 Edition) I . Item 201 Erosion , Sediment and Water Pollution Control 2 . Item 203.4 Unclassified Street Excavation 3 . Item 203 .5 Unclassified Channel Excavation 4 . Item 203 .6 Borrow 5 . Item 203.8 Sprinkling for Dust Control 6. Item 301 .6 Geotextiles 7. Item 302 .2 Aggregate s a . Gravel and crushed gravel b . Crushed Stone c .. Fine and Course Aggre gates d . Screened Gravel Northside JII Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 8. Item 701.2 Structural Excavation 1.03 REFERENCES : A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: C33: Specification for Concrete Aggregates. Cl36: Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 2 of 19 0421: Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants. 0422: Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. DI 140: Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75 Fm) Sieve. D 1556: Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 0698: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort. (56,000 ft-lb/ft 3 (600 kN-m/m 3 )). 02167: Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method . 02922: Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. (Shallow Depth). 03017: Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 04318: Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils . 04718: Practice for Correction of Unit Weight and Water Content for Soils Containing Oversized Particles. 04944: Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by the Calcium Carbide Pressure Tester Method. 04959: Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by Direct Heating Method. 05080: Test Method for Rapid Determination of Percent Compaction. B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Regulations contained in Title 29 : Subpart P -Excavati ons , Trenching and Shoring . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.04 DEFINITIONS : SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 3 of 19 A. Percentage of compaction is defined as the ratio of the field dry density, as detennined by ASTM DI 556 to the maximum dry density determined by ASTM D698, multiplied by 100. B. Proof Roll : Compaction with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory steel drum or rubber tire roller. Vibratory plate compactors shall be u se d in small areas where vibratory steel drum or rubber tire roller can not be used. C. Acceptable Material: Material which does not contain organic silt or organic clay, peat, vegetation, wood or roots, stones or rock fragments over 6-inches [15 cm] in diameter, porous biodegradable matter, loose or soft fill, excavated pavement, construction debris, or refuse. Stones or rock fragments shall not exceed 40 percent by weight of the backfill material. D. Unacceptable Materials: Materials, which do not comply with the requirements for acceptable material or which, cannot be compacted to the specified or indicated density. 1.05 SUBMITT ALS: A. Shop Drawings : Submit the following in accordance with Section O 1300 : Submittals: I . Submit an excavation, backfilling, and filling plan at least two weeks prior to start of any earth moving activities. The review will be only for the infonnation of the Owner and third parties for an overall understanding of the project relating to access, maintenance of existing facilities and proper utilization of the site. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and safety of the means, methods and sequencing of construction. The plan shall include, but not be limited to the following items: a. Detailed sequence of work . b . General description of construction methods . c. Numbers, types, and s izes of equipment proposed to perform excavation and compaction . d. Details of dust control measures. e. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavation and/or backfill materials. f. Proposed surplus excavated material off-site disposal areas and required permits. 2 . The following material submittals shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to backfilling and filling for only those materials specified on the plans : a . Screened Gravel: As spec ified in NCTCOG ]tern 2.1 b . Gravel and Crushed Gravel : As specified in NCTCOG Item 2 .1 Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 4 of 19 c . Select Borrow/Select Fill: As specified in NCTCOG Item 2.1 d. Fine and Coarse Aggregates : As specified in NCTCOG Item 2.1 e. Crushed Stone : As specified in NCTCOG Item 2 . 1 f. Rip-rap: As specified in Section 2.01 F of this specification. g . Stone Fill Pad: 467 Stone as specified in ASTM D448 h . Other Acceptable Materials: Laboratory testing results of gradation and moisture- density relationship. Submittal shall include specific location of the source and the date when sample was taken. 3. During Construction, submit written confirmation of fill lift thickness, in-place soil moisture content, and percentage of compaction to the Engineer before placing the next lift or constructing foundations . 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL: A. Excavations shall be performed in the dry, and kept free from water, snow and ice during construction with the exception of the water that is applied for dust control and to aid in the compaction efforts. Bedding and backfill material shall not be placed in water. Water shall not be allowed to rise upon or flow over the bedding and backfill material. B . The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all excavations in a safe manner. All excavation , trenching, and related sheeting, bracing, etc. shall comply with the requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P) and State requirements . Where conflict between OSHA and State regulations exists, the more stringent requirements shall apply. C. The Contractor shall not excavate, construct embankments, or fill until the Engineer has reviewed all the required submittals. D. The Contractor shall prepare excavation, backfilling, and filling schedule and procedures to eliminate possibility of undermining or disturbing foundations of partially and completed structures , pipelines and embankments or existing structures and pipelines. E. The Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory to perform particle size and gradation analyses in accordance with ASTM D422, and to determine compactibility in accordance with ASTM D698 for all the proposed backfill and fill materials, and monitoring field compaction operations. The independent testing laboratory shall have the following qualifications: Be ac credited by the American Associates of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Accreditation Program . Have three (3) ye ars experience in s ampling, testing and analysis of soil and aggrega tes, and monit o rin g field compaction operations. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 Able to provide three (3) references from previous work. F. Field Testing and Inspections: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 5 of 19 By Owners testing laboratory or Contractor's independent testing laboratory which is acceptable to the Engineer, as specified in Paragraph 1.06. lnspections and testing will be paid for by the Owner. Submittal of materials for testing as well as re -testing due to non- compliant work will be paid for by the Contractor. Location of tests mutually acceptable to testing laboratory and the Engineer, the Owner's Representative or as directed by the Engineer. In the event compacted material does not meet specified in-place density, recompact material and retest this area until specified results are obtained at no additional cost to the Owner. Testing laboratory to perform inspection at least once daily to confirm lift thickness and compaction effort for entire fill area. G . Methods of Field Testing: In-Place Density: ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167 , or ASTM D2922 . In-Place Moi sture Content: ASTM D3017, ASTM D4944, or ASTM D4959 . H. Material Testing Frequency: The following testing frequencies are the minimum required for all structural and non-structural fill, grading and embankment. Field In-Place Density and Moisture Content -Screened gravel and crushed stone I . Shall be compacted as specified and indicated. For other backfill and fill materials, minimum test frequency shall be as follows , and no less than one test per: Trenches under structures foundation preparation or roadways subbase : Every 200 lin. ft. per lift Trenche s in areas without structures or roadways : Every 300 Jin . ft . per alternate lift . Paved Roadways: Every 200 lin . ft . per lift . Paved Areas: 2 ,000 sq. ft. per lift . Under Structure: I 00 sq. ft . per lift. Around Structures : 500 sq. ft . per lift. Embankment Fills : I 0,000 sq . ft. per lift . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 6 of 19 Moisture Density -One per source, except for screened gravel and crushed stone. Repe at the moisture density test for every 200 cubic yard of material use, and whenever visual inspection indicates a change in material gradation as determined by the Engineer. Gradation Analysis -A minimum of one per source and for each moisture density test and whenever visual inspection indicates a change in material gradation. Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index -Minimum of one test per 200 cubic yard of soil for use as fill material and whenever classification of material is in doubt as determined by the Engineer. I. Construction Tolerances: Construct finished surfaces to plus or minus I inch of the elevations indicated . Grade cut and fill areas to plus or minus 0.20 foot of the grades indicated. Complete embankment edges to plus or minus 6 inches of the slope lines indicated. Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus 0.1 O', or minus 0.1 O', and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of service, other construction, and for inspection. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with adequate survey information to verify compliance with above tolerances . J . Cut pavement with a saw or pneumatic tools to prevent damage to remaining pavement without extra compensation . Where pavement is removed in large pieces, dispose of pieces before proceeding with excavation. K. Pipes, drains, and other utilities may exist in certain locations not indicated on drawings. No attempt has been made to show all services. Completeness or accuracy of information given is not guaranteed . L. Dig test pits are considered as incidental to the normal excavation as indicated and s pecified in this Section, at no additional compensation. M . Carefully support and protect from damage, ex1stmg pipes, poles, wires, fences, curbings, property line markers, and other structures, which the Engineer determines must be preserved in place without being temporarily or permanently relocated. Should such items be damaged, restore without compensation therefore, to at least as good condition as that in which they were found immediately before the work was begun. N . Restore exi sting pro perty or s tructure s as promptly a s practicable. 0 . If material unac c eptable for found ation (in the opinion of the Engineer) is found at or below the Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 7 of 19 grade to which excavation would normally be carried in accordance with the drawings and/or specifications, remove such material to the required width and depth as directed by the Engineer and replace it with screened gravel, select borrow, or concrete. P. Do not remove excavation materials from the site of the work or dispose of except as permitted by the Owner. Q. Haul away and dispose of surplus excavated materials at NO additional cost to the Owner. Any required permits or other disposal requirements are the responsibility of the Contractor. R . During progress of work, conduct earth-moving operations and maintain work site so as to minimize the creation and dispersion of dust. Apply water to aid in dust control as specified in NCTCOG Item 4. I or by other methods that are acceptable to the Engineer. Furnish and spread calcium chloride if the Engineer or Owner decides that it is necessary for more effective dust control. S. Provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings where required for accommodation of travel, and to provide access to private property during construction, and remove said structures thereafter. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS: A. Site Information : Any data , which has or may be provided on subsurface conditions, is not intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil strata. It is expressly understood that neither the Owner nor the Engineer will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data is made available for convenience of Contractor. I . Contractor may make additional test borings and other exploratory operations at no cost to Owner, provided he obtains the Owner's permission prior to performing these operations. C. Contractor is to verify existing site grading within 30 days of contract date. Discrepancies are to be brought to the Engineer's attention in writing during that period. Any and all site grading discrepancies found after that date will be the total responsibility of the general contractor. D . Existing Utilities : Contractor shall locate all existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Use only acceptable materials from excavations or borrows . B . Provide screened gravel, fine aggregate , select borrow , and crushed stone as specified m NCTCOG It e m 2 . I . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 C. Provide Fine Aggregate conforming to ASTM C33 . D . Provide Number 467 stone conforming to ASTM D448 . SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 8 of 19 E. Provide erosion/sedimentation control devices as indicated and in accordance with NCTCOG Item 2.23 . F. Provide rip-rap material meeting the following gradation : Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 6 in. [15.2 cm] 2 in. [5.1 cm] No.4 No. 200 100 20-65 10-35 0 -5 G. Provide geotextile fabric as indicated , meeting the following requirements and conforming to NCTCOG Item 2 .23: Average Roll Minimum Value Physical Properties Grab Strength (ASTM D-4632) Grab Elongation (ASTM D-4632) (%) Mullen Burst Strength (ASTM D-3786) (psi) Permeability-k (cm/sec) (ASTM D-4491) AOS (095 ) mm (ASTM D-4751) Trapezoid Tear Strength (ASTM D-4533) (lbs .) Puncture Resistance (ASTM D-4833) (lbs .) UV Resistance -% Strength Retained (ASTM D-4355) (Weakest Principle Direction) 200 60 320 100 0.3 60 80 70 H . The Geotextile material shall be a non-woven fabric consisting of filaments or yams of polyester or polypropylene . I. The Geotextile shall be provided in rolls with protective covering to protect the fabric from mud, dirt, dust, and debris . The fabric shall be free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical properties . Each roll of fabric in the shipment shall have a number of symbol identifying that production run . J. A competent laboratory shall be maintained by the producer of the fabric at the point of manufacture to provide quality control in accordance with ASTM testing procedures. The laboratory shall maintain records of its quality control results and provide a manufacturer's certificate to the owner prior to shipment. The certificate shall include the following : Name of Manufacturer Chemical Composition Product Description Statement of compliance to specification requirements Northside III Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.02 EQUIPMENT: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 9 of 19 A. The compaction equipment shall be selected by the Contractor, and shall be capable of consistently achieving the specified compaction requirements . PART 3-EXECUTION 3 .01 SITE MAINTENANCE: A. Roadway and Site Leveling: Grade roadway and site as to maintain them in a level unrutted condition and to eliminate puddling of surface and subsurface water. 3.02 EXCAVATJON : A. General : 1. Execution of any earth excavation shall not commence until all the submittals are reviewed by the Engineer and all Engineer's comments satisfactorily addressed. 2 . Carry out program of excavation and excavation support systems to eliminate possibility of undermining or disturbing foundations of existing structures or of work previously completed under this contract. 3. Excavate to widths that give suitable room for building structures or laying and jointing p1pm g. 4 . Do not plow, scrape or dig by machinery near to finished subgrade in a manner that would result in disturbance of subgrade. 5 . Excavate to lines and grades indicated in an orderly and continuous program. 6. Establish limits of excavation to allow adequate working space for installing forms and for safety of personnel. 7. Excavate to elevations indicated, or deeper, as directed by the Engineer, to remove unacceptable bottom material. 8. Place excavated material at the approved stockpile locations and in no case closer than 3 feet [90 cm] from edge of excavations to discourage a cave-in or bank slides. 9. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage . 10. Locate and retain soil mat e rials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 11 . Regard small, le s s than one-half (0 .5) cubic yard [0 .38 cubic meter], bould e rs, rock Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 10 of 19 fragments, and concrete encountered during excavation as a normal part of in-place s oils and not included for payment as rock. 12. Unsuitable excavation and suitable excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall be known as "waste" and shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the project, associated rights-of-way, etc. 13 . Payment will not be allowed for excavation of any material which is used for purposes other than those designated, except as provided in the specifications. 14. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner, and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation . R e pair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 15 Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, during occupied hours , except when permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided . a. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Engineer, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. 16. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. 17. Use of Explosives : The use of explosive is not permitted. 18. Apply final seeding to all disturbed areas , as specified m Section 02910: Seeding Disturbed Areas. B. Structural Excavation : 1. Perform all structural excavation in accordance with NCTCOG Item 7.1 . Where discrepancies exist between the following paragraphs and Item 7.1, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 2 . Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered . Structural excavation shall include the furnishing of all materials and equipment ; the construction or installation of all facilities which may be necessary to perform the excavations and place and compact the backfill; and the subsequent removal of such facilities , except where they are required or permitted by the plans or specifications to remain in place. 3 . Unauthorized excavation consi sts of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimen s ions without specific approval or direction of the En g ineer. Unauthorized excavation, a s well as remedial work resulting from the unauth o rized excavation, shall be at Contractor's expense . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 11 of 19 November 2007 a . Under footings, foundation bases , or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation . Soil bearing shall be verified by a registered geotechnical engineer. b. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classifications, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 4. Additional Excavation: a. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify the Engineer so that he may observe the conditions. b . When unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Engineer. c. When footing concrete or masonry is to rest upon rock, the rock shall be removed to a depth sufficient to expose sound rock . The rock shall be roughly leveled off or cut to approximate horizontal and vertical steps, and shall be roughened. Seams in the rock shall be grouted under pressure or treated as the Engineer may direct and the cost thereof will be included for payment in the quantities for the unit of the structure for which the excavation is made . When footing concrete or masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation and final removal of the foundation material to grade shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is placed. Except when over-excavation is directed by the Engineer, excavation below grade shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense with the same class of concrete specified for the structure and at the time the concrete for the structure is being placed . d . For all single and multiple box culverts, pipe culverts, and pipe arch culverts, where the soil encountered at established footing grade is a quick sand, muck, or similar unstable material , the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the plans : (1) All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of two (2) feet below bottom of culvert for culverts two (2) feet to four ( 4) feet in height , and to a depth equal to the height of culvert for culverts less than two (2) feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one (I) foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. The Engineer will determine the necessary over excavation for culverts larger than four ( 4) feet in height. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth for compaction as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted if necessary, and compacted by rolling or tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. Soil that is considered to be of sufficient st a bility to s ustain properly the adjacent sections of the roadway embankment will be considered a suitable foundation material for the culvert. (2) When the material encountered at footing grade of a culvert 1s found to be Northside JI] Avondale-Hasl e t Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 12 of 19 Nove mber 2007 partially rock , or incompressible material, and partially a soil or material that is compressible, but otherwise satisfactory for the foundation, the incompress ible material shall be removed for a depth of six (6) inches below the footing Grade and backfilled with a material similar to the compressible foundation u sed fo r the re st of the structure. (3) When the material encountered at footing grade of a bridge bent or pier is found to be partially of rock or incompressible material, and partially of a compressible mat e rial, the foundation shall not be placed until the Engineer has authorized such changes as are found necessary. (4) Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. 5. Excavation for Concrete Slab on Grade: Remove the existing soils to a depth of 3 feet below the proposed finished floor elevation and within five feet horizontally of the sl a b or as specified on the plans . Recompact backfill material as specified in Section 3. 15. C. Unclassified Channel Excavation: 1. Perform all channel excavation m accordance with NCTCOG Item 3 .5. Where discrepancies exist between the following paragraphs and Item 3.5, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 2. Contractor is responsible for securing all required regulatory permits should construction occur near or in existing drainage ways. 3 . All e xc av ation of channels shall be perform ed in accordance with the lines , grades , and s ections indicated on the plans or as approved by the Engineer. 4. Where excavation to grades established in the field would terminate in unstable soil, the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the unstable soil and backfill to the required grade with suitable material compacted in an approved manner to the required density. 5 . All acceptable materials removed from the excavation shall be used , insofar as practicable for fill material or, in the formation of "Embankments", or shall be otherwise utilized or sati sfactorily di s posed of as indicated on the plans, or as directed, at no expense t o the Owner. 6. During construction , the channel shall be kept drained , insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. 7 . Prior to fin a l grading , at minimum, the upper s ix ( 6) inches of the exposed soil should be scarified ; moi sture conditioned at optimum to five (5) percentage points above optimum moi sture cont e nt , and compacted to at lea st 95% of the maximum dry de n s ity (per A STM D698 ). Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 D. Unclassified Street Excavation: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 13 of 19 1. Perform all street and roadway excavation in accordance with NCTCOG Item 3.3. Where discrepancies exist between the following paragraphs and Item 3.3, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 2. All excavation shall be in accordance with the lines , grades, and typical sections as s hown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or established by the Engineer, the street excavation will be made to the subgrade of the street or paving project and the finished grade of parkways. a . Where excavation to grades established in the field would terminate in unstable soil, the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the unstable soil and backfill to the required grade with suitable material compacted in an approved manner to the required density. b. Where excavation to grade established in the field terminates in loose or solid rock, the Contractor may be required to extend the depth of excavation six (6) inches and backfill with select mate rial compacted in an approved manner to the required density. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, the select material may be obtained from any point within the project limits where suitable backfill material is available . c. The Contractor shall conduct his operation in such a manner that adequate measurements may be taken before any backfill , as required above, is placed . 3. Provisions for Drainage: If it is necessary in the prosecution of the work to interrupt the natural drainage of the surface, or the flow of artificial drains, the Contractor shall provide temporary drainage facilities that will prevent damage to public or private interests, and shall restore the original drains as soon as the work will permit. The Contractor shall be held liable for all damages which may result from neglect to provide for either natural or artificial drainage which his work may have interrupted. 4. Excess Excavation: Unsuitable street excavation and suitable street excavation in excess of that needed for construction s hall be disposed of at the Contractor's expense as directed by the Engineer. ln general, suitable excess excavation from paving projects will be used in the construction of parkways, widening of embankments, flattening of slopes, etc ., but if necessary to waste any material , it shall be disposed of, at the Contractor's expense, in such a manner as to present a ne a t appearance and to not obstruct proper drainage or cause injury to any street improvements or abutting property. E . Borrow Excavation: 1 . Construction Methods: a. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used , insofar as practicable, in the formation of "Embankments", or shall othenvise be utili zed as indicated on the plans or as directed, and the completed work s hall conform to the established a lignment , grades, and cross-section. During construction, the borrow Northside JJI Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 14 of 19 sources shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat and workmanlike manner. b. Payment will not be allowed for excavation for any material which is used for purposes other than those designated, except as provided in the governing specifications. c. The site of the borrow operations shall be left in a suitable and sightly condition, such as to provide proper drainage. Where indicated on the plans, the sides and/or ends of borrow pits shall be sloped to the dimensions indicated on the plans. 2 . Selection of Materials: Where shown on the plans, selected materials will be utilized in the formation of backfill, embankment or to improve the paving sub-grades, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable material may be selected, removed separately, and deposited within the limits and at the elevations required . Acceptable borrow material when tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the requirements indicated on the plans. 3.03 SEPARATJON OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS FOR REUSE: A . Remove only existing pavement that is necessary for prosecution of work . B. Carefully remove loam and topsoil from excavated areas. Store separately for further use or furnish equivalent loam and topsoil as directed . C. Carefully remove acceptable material from excavated areas and store separately for further use as backfill material. 3 .04 EXCAVATION NEAR EXISTING STRUCTURES: A. Discontinue digging by machinery when excavation approaches pipes, conduits, or other underground structures . Continue excavation by use of hand tools. Jnclude such manual excavation in work to be done when incidental to normal excavation and under items involving normal excavation . B . Excavate test pits when determination of exact location of pipe or other underground structure is necessary for doing work properly. 3 .05 REMOVAL OF SUB SURF ACE OBSTRUCTIONS: A . Remove indicated subsurface structures and related obstructions to extent shown. B . Promptly notify the Engineer when any unexpected subsurface facilities are encountered during excavation such as utility lines and appurtenances, walls and foundations. 3.06 REUSE AND DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS: A. Reuse surplus acceptable excavated materials for backfill ; deposit neatly and grade so as to make or widen fills , flatten s ide slopes, or fill depression s; or leg a lly di s pose off-site; all as directed or Northside l1I Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 permitted and without additional compensation. 3.07 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 15 of 19 A. Remove loam and topsoil, loose vegetable matter, stumps and large roots from areas upon which embankments will be built or material will be placed for grading. Shape subgrade as indicated on drawings, and prepare by forking, furrowing, or plowing so that the first layer of new material placed thereon will be well bonded to it. B. As directed by the Engineer, overexcavate unacceptable materials below the foundation subgrade . Backfill the overexcavation with compacted screened gravel or crushed stone wrapped with nonwoven geotextile fabric. In no case shall the screened gravel be placed directly on the exposed subgrade prior to placing the geotextile fabric. C. Proof roll the foundation subgrade prior to backfilling and filling operation, or placing foundation concrete . 3.08 PROTECTION AND CARE OF PROPERTY : A. Cut all branches, limbs , and roots smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. Neatly trim, cut the injured portions and cover with an application of grafting wax or tree healing paint as directed. B. Protect cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants which might be injured by the Contractor's operations by suitable means or dig up and temporarily replant and maintain. After construction operations have been substantially completed, replant in original positions and care for until growth is reestablished. If cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants are injured to such a degree as to effect their growth or diminish in their beauty or usefulness , replace by items of equal kind and quality existing at the start of the work. C. Do not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other power-operated equipment on paved surfaces when their treads or wheels of which are so shaped as to cut or otherwise damage such surfaces. D. Restore surfaces damaged by the Contractor's operations to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found immediately before work commenced. Use suitable materials and methods for such restoration. E. Protect structures, utilities , sidewalks, pavements , and other facilities from damages caused by se ttlement, lateral movement , undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork ope rations . 3.09 BACKFILLING-GENERAL: A . Do not place frozen materials in backfill or place backfill upon frozen material. Remove previously frozen material or treat before new backfill is placed. B. Do not place, spread, roll or compact fill material during unfavorable weather conditions. If interrupted by heavy rain or other unfavorable conditions, do not resume until ascertaining that Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 16 of 19 the moisture content and density of the previously placed soil are as specified . C . Do not use puddling, ponding or flooding as a means of compaction. 3.10 MATERIAL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS: A. Select Borrow, and Fine Aggregate: Dump and spread in layers not to exceed 8-in. [20 cm] uncompacted thickness. Compact, fill and backfill under all streets, roadways and structures to not less than _95 percent (per ASTM 0698). B. Screened Gravel and Crushed Stone: Dump and spread in layers not to exceed 8-in . [20 cm] uncompacted thickness. Compact using self-propelled vibratory steel drum or rubber tire rollers with a minimum of 4 passes in directions perpendicular to one another in open areas . In small areas, use manually operated vibratory plate compactors with a minimum of 4 passes . C. Bank-run Gravel and Acceptable materials for use as non-structural fill: Dump and spread in layers not to exceed 12-in. [30 cm] uncompacted thickness. Compact to not less than 90 percent (per A TMD 0698) unless otherwise indicated. D. Backfilling and filling operation shall be suspended in areas where tests are being made until tests are completed and the testing laboratory has advised the Engineer that adequate densities are obtained. E. Geotextile Fabric: The geotextile shall be placed with overlaps of a minimum of 36 inches. The backfill shall be back dumped on the fabric and spread in a uniform lift maintaining the design aggregate thickness at all times. Construction vehicles will not be allowed to traffic directly on the fabric. 3.1 I STRUCTURAL FILL AND BACKFILL UNDER STRUCTURES: A. Compact fill and backfill under structures and pavements with screened gravel , crushed stone, select borrow, or fine aggregate as specified and indicated. 3 .12 NON-STRUCTURAL BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES: A. Use acceptable materials for non-structural backfill around structures and compacted as specified and indicated . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 17 of 19 B. Conduct hydraulic testing as soon as practicable after structures are constructed and other necessary work has been done. Start backfilling promptly after completion of tests . C. Deposit material evenly around structure to avoid unequal soil pressure. D. Do not place backfill against or on structures until they have attained sufficient strength to support the loads (including construction loads) to which they will be subjected, without distortion, cracking, or other damage. 3.13 MATERIAL FOR FILLING AND EMBANKMENTS: A. Use acceptable materials for filling and building embankments unless otherwise indicated. 3 .14 PLACING AND COMP ACTING EMBANKMENT MATERIAL: A. Compact fill material as specified and indicated. B. Perform fill operation in an orderly and systematic manner using equipment in proper sequence to meet the specified compaction requirements. C. Place fill on surfaces which are free of unacceptable materials. D . Begin filling in lowest section of work area. Grade surface of fill approximately horizontal but provide with sufficient longitudinal and transverse slope to allow for runoff of surface water from every point. E. Conduct filling so that no obstruction to drainage from other sections of fill area is created at any time. F. Install temporary dewatering sumps m low areas during filling operation where excessive amounts of rain runoff collect. G. Compact uniformly throughout. Keep surfaces of fill reasonably smooth and free from humps and hollows that would prevent proper and uniform compaction. Do not permit hauling equipment to follow a single track on the same layer but direct equipment to spread out to prevent overcompaction in localized areas . Take care in obtaining thorough compaction at edges of fill. H . Slightly slope surface of fill to ensure drainage during periods of wet weather. Do not place fill while rain is falling or after a rainstorm until the Engineer considers conditions satisfactory. During such periods and upon suspension of filling operations for any period in excess of I 2 hours, roll smooth the surface of fill using a smooth wheel static roller to prevent excessive absorption of rainfall and surface moisture. Prior to resuming compaction operations, remove muddy material off surf ace to expose firm, compacted material, as determined by the Engineer. 1. When fill is placed against an earlier fill or against in-situ material under and around structures, including around piping beneath structures or embankments, slope junction between two sections of fill , 1 vertical to 1.5 horizontal. Bench edge of existing fill 24-in . [60 cm] to form a serrated edge of compact stable material against which to place the new fill. Ensure that rolling extends Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 over junction between fills. SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 18 of 19 J . When fill is placed directly upon another older fill, clean surface thoroughly of debris and remove any loose material. Then proof roll the entire old surface. K. After spreading each loose lift to the required thickness and adjusting its moisture content as necessary, roll with sufficient number of passes to obtain the required compaction . One pa s s is defined as the required number of successive trips that by means of sufficient overlap will insure complete coverage and uniform compaction of an entire lift . Do not make additional passes until previous pass has been completed. L. ln case material of any fill sinks and weaves under roller or under hauling units and other equipment, required degree of compaction is not being obtained. Reduce the moisture content. If such sinking and weaving produces surface cracks, suspend operations on that part of the embankment until it becomes sufficiently stabilized. Ideal condition in fill is that attained when the entire fill below the surface being rolled is so firm and hard as to show only the slightest weaving and deflection as roller passes. Spread out rolling operations over the maximum practicable area to minimize condition of sinking and weaving. M. If because of defective workmanship, compaction obtained over any area is Jess than that required, remedy condition at no cost to Owner. If additional rolling or other means fail to produce satisfactory results, remove material in that area down to a level of satisfactory density. Perform removal , replacement, and rerolling without additional compensation. 3.15 COMPACTION CONTROL OF BACKFILL, FILL, AND EMBANKMENT: A. Compact to density specified and indicated for various types of material. Control moisture content of material being placed as specified. I. For all expansive, low-permeability earth fill zones and for re-worked fill beneath structures and streets, compact to required density at a moisture content between optimum and four ( 4) percentage points wet of optimum (as determined by ASTM D698). 2 . For non-expansive earth fill zones and general earth fill zones, compact to the required density at a moisture content between two (2) percentage points below to four ( 4) percentage points above optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698. B . The soil-testing laboratory shall provide inspection during filling or backfilling operations to ensure compaction of screened gravel or crushed stone and record compaction equipment in use. C. Moisture control may be required either at the stockpile areas, pits, or on embankment or ba c kfill. Increase moisture content when material is too dry by sprinkling or other means of wetting uniformly. Reduce moisture content when material is too wet by using ditches , pumps, drainage wells, or other devices and by exposing the greatest possible area to sun and air in conjunction with harrowing, plowing, and spreading of material or any other effective methods. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 3.16 ALLOWANCE FOR SHRJNKAGE: SECTION 02200 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading Page 19 of 19 A. Build embankments or backfill to a height above finished grade that will , in the opinion of the Engineer, allow for the shrinkage or consolidation of material. Initially, provide at all points, an excess of at least one percent of total height of backfill measured from stripped surface to top of finished surface. B . Supply specified materials and build up low places as directed, without additional cost if embankment or backfilling settles so as to be below the indicated level for proposed finished surface at any time before final acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA no. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Page J of 6 A. Furnish all labor, materials , equipment and incidentals necessary to perform all trenching for pipelines and appurtenances, including drainage, bedding, filling, backfilling, disposal of surplus material, and restoration of trench surfaces and easements. B. Excavation shall be extended to the width and depth shown on the Drawings or as specified and shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and appurtenances. C. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports and remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm , dry, and in all respects acceptable. If conditions warrant, the Contractor may be ordered to deposit gravel for pipe bedding, or gravel refill for excavation below grade, directly on the bottom of the trench immediately after excavation has reached the proper depth and before the bottom of the trench has become softened or disturbed by any cause whatever. The length of open trench shall be related closely to the rate of pipe laying . All excavation shall be made in open trenches. D. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, bracing, etc ., shall comply with the requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P), and H .B . 1569 of the 71 st Regular Legislative Session . E . Wherever compaction requirements are ref erred to herein it shall ref er to Standard Proctor Density as determined by ASTM D 698. F. Prior to the start of work the Contractor is required to submit his/her proposed method of backfilling and compaction to the Engineer for review. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Sedimentation and erosion control is included in Section 02270 . B . Seeding is included in Section 02936. C. Trench s afety requirements are included in Section D-28. D. Site/Right-of-Way Preparation is covered in Section 02100 . 1.03 SUBMJTTALS A . Submittals shall be in accordance with Section O 1300 . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL A . Quality A ss urance and Control shall be in accordance with Secti o n 02200 . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA no. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Page 2 of 6 A. Trench excavation shall include material of every description and of whatever substances encountered, regardless of the methods or equipment required to remove the material. Pavement shall be cut with a saw, wheel or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating. B. The Contractor shall strip and stockpile topsoil from grassed areas crossed by trenches . At the Contractor's option, topsoil may be otherwise disposed of and replaced, when required, with approved topsoil of equal quality. C. While excavating and backfilling is in progress, traffic shall be maintained, and all utilities and other property protected as provided in the Agreement. D. Trenches shall be excavated to the depth indicated on the Drawings and in widths sufficient for laying the pipe, bracing and for pumping and drainage facilities. The bottom of the excavations shall be firm and dry and in all respects acceptable to the Engineer. Trench width shall be practical minimum, but not Jess than 12-inches nor more than indicated on the Drawings. E. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below, the designated subgrade, provided that material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick", or otherwise unsatisfactory as a result of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods shall be removed and replaced by gravel fill as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense . F. Clay and organic silt soils are particularly susceptible to disturbance due to construction operations. When excavation is to end in such soils, the Contractor shall use smooth-edge bucket to excavate the last one foot of depth . G. Where pipe is to be laid in gravel bedding, the trench may be excavated by machinery to the normal depth of the trench provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed . 3.02 DISPOSAL OF MATERJALS A. Refer to Item D-9 in the special conditions for disposal of materials. 3.03 SHEETING AND BRACING A. Furni sh , put in place and maintain sheeting and bracing required by Federal, State or local safety requirements to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground which could endanger personnel , damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures . lf the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of the Contractor. Compliance with such ord e r Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA no. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Page 3 of 6 shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and rammed . B. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of trenches, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall be in conformity with the design and certification of this shall be provided by the Professional Engineer. C. When moveable trench bracing such as trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are used to support the sides of the trench, care shall be taken in placing and moving the boxes or supporting bracing to prevent movement of the pipe, or disturbance of the pipe bedding and the gravel backfill. I. When installing rigid pipe (R.C., D.1 ., V.C., etc), any portion of the box extending below mid diameter shall be raised above this point prior to moving the box ahead to install the next pipe . This is to prevent the separation of installed pipe joints due to movement of the box . 2. When installing flexible pipe (Steel, PVC, etc.) trench boxes , moveable sheeting, shoring or plates shall not be allowed to extend below mid-diameter of the pipe . As trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are moved, gravel backfill shall be placed to fill any voids created and the gravel backfill shall be recompacted to provide uniform side support for the pipe. D. The Contractor will be permitted to use steel sheeting in lieu of wood sheeting for the entire job wherever the use of sheeting is necessary. The cost for use of sheeting shall be included in the bid items for trench safety and shall include full compensation for driving, bracing and later removal of sheeting. E . All sheeting and bracing shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to endanger the construction of other structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. All voids left after withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with gravel backfill by ramming with tools especially adapted to that purpose, or otherwise as directed . 3.04 TEST PITS A . The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise location of new work. B . Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired information has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition for travel until resurfaced as specified. 3 .05 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERJNG A . The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all incidental work required to in stall and maintain the drainage sy s tem he proposes for handling groundwater or surface water encountered . A Dewatering Plan shall be submitted outlining how suffici e nt groundwater will be removed. Dewatering Plan shall be performed by and sealed by a licensed engineer in the State Northside III Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA no. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Page 4 of 6 of Texas. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, material s, and equipment employed. B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly remove and dispose of all water entering trenches and excavations. The subgrade shall be maintained acceptably dry, to a level of 5 feet below the bottom of the trench, until the facilities to be built therein are completed . Piezometers shall be provided at appropriate locations for verification of dewatering depth. All drainage related work shall be performed without damage to the trench, pavement, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities and without damage to public or private property. C. The pipe or concrete shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after being placed. Water shall not flow over new concrete within four days after placement, or as designated on the plans. D . In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on facilities until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours . The Contractor shall prevent flotation of the pipe by promptly placing backfill. 3.06 EXCAVATJON BELOW GRADE AND REFILL A. Whatever the nature of unstable material encountered or the groundwater conditions, trench drainage shall be complete and effective . B . Jf the contractor excavates below grade through error or for his own convenience, or through failure to properly dewater the trench, or disturbs the subgrade before dewatering is sufficient ly complete, he may be directed by the Engineer to excavate below grade as set forth in the following paragraph , in which case the work of excavating below grade and furnishing and placing the refill shall be performed at his own expense . C . lf the material at the level of trench bottom consists of fine sand, sand and silt or soft earth which may work into the gravel backfill notwithstanding effective drainage, the subgrade material shall be removed to the extent directed and the excavation refilled with a 6-inch to 12-inch layer of crushed stone No. 467, or as approved by the Engineer, to form a filter layer preserving the voids in the gravel bed of the pipe. The composition and gradation of gravel shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placement. Gravel backfill shall then be placed in 6-inch layers thoroughly compacted up to the normal grade of the pipe. D. Geotextile filter fabric shall be installed in specified locations . Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 400 or 402 , Carthage Mill Carthage 15% of 30%, SJGeoSolutions Geotechs 111 F, or approved equa l. Geotextile materials must be woven and posses percent open areas on the order of 10% or greater. 3.07 EMBEDMENT A. Embedment for water lines shall be as shown on the Drawings, Crushed Stone No. 467, or Fine Cru shed Stone (Aggregate Grade 8 per NCTCOG 504 .2) depending upon location . B . The initial layer of e mb e dment placed to receive the pipe shall be brought to the grade and dimensions indic ated on the Drawings , and the pipe shall be placed thereon and brought to grade Northside III Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA no . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction P age 5 of 6 by tamping, or by removal of the slight excess amount of embedment under the pipe . Adjustments to grade shall be made by scraping away or filling with embedment material. Wedging or blocking up of pipe will not be permitted . Each pipe section shall have a uniform bearing on the embedment for the full length of the pipe, except immediately at the joint. All embedment shall extend the full width of the trench bottom . Embedment shall remain dewatered , in accordance with Section 3 .05, until all backfilling is complete. C . After the pipe has been laid, jointed and inspected , embedment material shall be brought up in mechanically tamped layers not exceeding eight inches in thickness of loose fill, approximately equal on each side of the pipe, to 12 inches above the top of pipe. Compaction shall be 90 percent of Standard Proctor density for embedment material below the top of pipe. For the 12 inches of embedment above the top of pipe, compaction shall be 85 percent of Standard Proctor density. 3 .08 BACKFILLING A. As soon as practicable after the initial bedding has been placed and the pipe has been laid and jointed, backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. Bedding, as specified for the type of pipe installed, shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Paragraph 3 .07 above . B. The remainder of the trench shall be filled with native material in accordance with Sections# 1-2 Backfill and E2-2 Excavation and Backfill of the General Contract Documents and Specifications, except as modified herein, or select fill or granular fill material. Laye rs shall not exceed 8-in in loose mea s ure compacted to 90 percent Standard Proctor density at optimum moisture content +/-4%. The backfill shall be mounded 6-in above the existing grade, or as directed. Where a grass, loam or gravel surface exists prior to excavation, it shall be removed , conserved and replaced to the full original depth as part of the work under the pipe items . 1n some areas it may be necessary to remove excess material during the clean-up proce ss, so that the ground may be restored to its original level and condition. C. Where the pipes are laid in paved areas or designated future paved areas, the remainder of the trench above the embedment shall be backfilled with select fill or granular fill material in layers not to exceed 8-in loose measure and compacted at optimum moisture content(+/-3%) to 95 percent Standard Proctor density. The top 18-inches below subgrade level shall be compacted at optimum moisture content(+/-3 %) to 100 percent of Standard Proctor density. D. To prevent longitudinal movement of the pipe, dumping backfill material into the trench and then spreading will not be permitted until the bedding material has been placed and compacted to a level I-ft over the pipe. E. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe . Each layer of backfill material shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling, tamping, or vibrating with mechanical compacting equipment or hand tamping. If rolling is employed, it shall be by use of a suitable roller or tractor, bein g careful to fill throughout the full width of the trench . Northside lil Avondale-Haslet Road E levated Storage Tank KHA no . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Page 6 o f 6 F. Compaction shall be by use of hand or pneumatic tamping with tools weighing at least 20 lbs . The material being spread and compacted shall be placed in layers not over 8-in loose thick. If necessary, sprinkling shall be employed in conjunction with rolling or ramming. G. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, fragments of ledge and boulders smaller than 4-in may be used in trench backfill providing that the quantity, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not excessive. Rock fragments shall not be placed until the pipe has at least 2-ft of cover. Small stones and rocks shall be placed in thin layers alternating with earth to insure that all voids are completely filled. Fill shall not be dropped into the trench in a manner to endanger the pipe. If rock fragments are placed in the backfill material , it will be the Contractor's responsibility to prove to the Engineer that the specified compaction is occurring. If the Engineer's opinion is that the compaction is not achieved , then the Contractor shall remove material that contains rock fragments and replace it with suitable material. H. Bituminous paving shall not be placed in backfill unless specifically permitted, in which case it shall be broken up as directed. Frozen material shall not be used under any circumstances. I. Water jetting will not be accepted as a means of consolidating/compacting backfill. J . All road surfaces shall be broomed and hose-cleaned immediately after backfilling. Dust control measures shall be employed at all times. K. Dewatering, per Section 3 .05, shall be maintained until backfill is complete . 3.09 RESTORING TRENCH SURFACE A . Where the trench occurs adjacent to paved areas, road shoulders, sidewalks, or in cross-country areas, the Contractor shall thoroughly consolidate the backfill and shall maintain the surface a s the work progresses. If settlement takes place, he shall immediately deposit additional backfill to restore the level of the ground . B. In paved areas, the edge of the existing pavement to be removed shall be cut along straight lines, and the pavement replaced as indicated on the Drawings. C . The surface of any driveway, or any other area , which is disturbed by the trench excavation and which is not a part of the paved road shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition at least equal to that existing before work began . D . In sections where the pipeline passes through grassed areas, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove and replace the sod, or shall loam and reseed the surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer. E ND OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 2270 Sedimentation and Erosion Control Page I of 3 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform all installation, maintenance , removal and area cleanup related to sedimentation control work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein . The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to; installation of temporary access ways and staging areas, silt fences, sediment protection at storm drain inlets, sediment removal and disposal, device maintenance, removal or temporary devices, temporary mulching, erosion control blankets and final cleanup. 1.02 RELATED WORK A . Seeding is included in Section 02936. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A . Within IO days after award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, technical product literature for all commercial products to be used for sedimentation and erosion control. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely installation of all sedimentation control devices necessary to prevent the movement of sediment from the construction site to off-site areas or into the stream system via surface runoff or underground drainage systems. Measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings necessary to prevent the movement of sediment off-site shall be installed , maintained, removed, and cleaned up at the expense of the Contractor. No additional charges to the Owner will be considered. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Crushed stone for stabilized construction entrances shall be 3" x 5" Hard Stone. B. Silt Fence I . Posts shall be painted or galvanized steel Tee posts a minimum of 5 feet in length, with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot with self-fastening tabs and a 5-in by 4-in (nominal) steel anchor plate at bottom . Posts and anchor plates shall conform to ASTM A 702. 2. Welded wire fabric shall be 2-in by 4-in mesh of 12 gauge by 12 gauge steel wire . 3 . Silt fence fabric s hall be a woven, polypropylene, ultraviolet resistant material such as Mirafi 1 OOX as manufactured by Mirafi , Inc ., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 2270 Sedimentation and Erosion Control Page 2 of 3 4. Tie wires for securing silt fence fabric to wire mesh shall be light gauge metal clips (hog rings), or 1/32-in diameter soft aluminum wire . 5 . Pre-fabricated commercial silt fence may be substituted for built-in-field fence . Pre- fabricated silt fence shall be "Envirofence" as manufactured by Mirafi Inc ., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal. C. Erosion control blanket shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The erosion control blanket shall be AMXCO Curlex Blanket as manufactured by American Excelsior Company, Arlington, TX or equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Silt Fence 1. Silt fences shall be positioned as indicated on the Drawings and as necessary to prevent off site movement of sediment produced by construction activities as directed by the Engineer. 2 . Dig trench approximately 6-in wide and 6-in deep along proposed fence lines . 3. Drive metal-stakes, 5 feet on center (maximum) at back edge of trenches . Stakes shall be driven 2 feet (minimum) into ground. 4 . Hand 2 by 4 woven wire mesh on posts, setting bottom of wire in bottom of trench. Secure wire to posts with self-fastening tabs. 5. Hang filter fabric on wire carrying to bottom of trench with about 12-in of fabric laid across bottom of trench. Stretch fabric fairly taut along fence length and secure with tie wires 12-in O.C. both ways. The silt fence shall be a minimum of 24 inches high . 6. Backfill trench with excavated material and tamp . 7 . Install pre-fabricated silt fence according to manufacturer's instructions . B. Erosion control blankets shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer in accordance with the manufacturer 's instructions . The area to be covered shall be properly prepared, fertilized and seeded before the blanket is applied. When the blanket is unrolled , the netting shall be on top of the fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area . The blankets shall be applied in the direction of water flow and stapled. Side overlaps shall be 4-in minimum. The staples shall be made of wire, 0.091-inch in diameter or greater, "U" shaped with legs 10-inches in length and 12-inch crown . The staples shall be driven vertically into the ground, spaced approximately two linear feet apart on each side with one row in the center alternately spaced between each side row. Adjoining blankets shall be overlapped and shall utili ze a common row of staples to attach. Northside IIJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 3 .02 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS A . Inspections SECTION 2270 Sedimentation and Erosion Control Page 3 of3 I . Contractor shall make a visual inspection of all sedimentation control devices once per week and promptly after every rainstorm. If such inspection reveals that additional measures are needed to prevent movement of sediment to offsite areas, Contractor shall promptly install additional devices as needed . Sediment controls in need of maintenance shall be repaired promptly. B. Device Maintenance I. Silt Fences a . Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of the fabric. b . Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-ft minimum overlap . c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the fence is filtering all runoff directed to the fence. 3 .03 · REMOVAL AND FINAL CLEANUP A. Once the site has been fully stabilized against erosion, remove sediment control devices and all accumulated silt. Di spose of silt and waste materials in proper manner. Regrade all areas disturbed during this process and stabilize against erosion with surfacing materials as specified and as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page I of 10 November 2007 PART l -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to in stall bar-wrapped concrete cylinder pipe and fittings, and specials, including connections and appurtenances as shown on the drawings and specified herein . B . Provisions for future cathodic protection shall be provided such as welding, installation of bonding clips, or other method approved by the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer: Finished pipe shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, fittings , lining, coating) shall be performed at one ( 1) location . B . Factory Testing: 1. The OWNER reserves the option to have an independent t esting laboratory , at the OWNER's expense, inspect pipe and fittings at the pipe manufacturer's plant. The OWNER's testing laboratory and ENGINEER shall have free access to the manufacturer's plant. The pipe manufacturer s hall notify the OWNER, in writing, at least two (2) weeks ahead of pipe fabrication as to start of fabrication and fabricating schedule so that the OWNER can advise the manufacturer as to OWNER's decision regarding tests to be performed by an ind ependent te sting laboratory. In event the OWNER elects to retain an ind ependent testing laboratory to make m at erial tests and weld te sts , it is the intent that the tes ts be limited to one ( 1) spot testing of each category unless the tests do n o t show compliance with the standard . If these tests do not show compliance, the OWNER reserves the right to have the laboratory make additional test s and observations . 2. The OWNER may require the manufacturer to furnish mill test certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, steel plate , and cement. The manufacturer shall p~rform the tests described in A WW A C303, for all pipe, fittings, and specials, except that the following absorption te st shall supe r sede the requirements of the applicable portion of A WW A C303. 3 . Absorption Test. A water absorption test shall be performed on samples of cured mortar coating taken from each working shift. The mortar coating samples s hall have been cured in the same manner as the pipe . A test value shall consist of the average of a minimum of three samples taken from the same working shift. The test method shall be in accordance with ASTM C497, Method A. The average absorption value for any test shall not exceed 9 percent and no individual sa mple shall h ave a n absorption exceeding 11 percent. Tests for each working sh ift s hall be performed on a daily basis until co nform ance to the absorption requirements ha s been establi shed by IO consecutive pa ssi n g te st results , at which time testing Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type November 2007 Page 2 of IO may be performed on a weekly basis for each working shift . Daily testing shall be resumed for each working shift with failing absorption test results and shall be maintained until conformance to the absorption requirements is re-established by 10 consecutive passing test results. 4. The cost of all tests specified are subsidiary to the cost of the pipe and will not be paid for separately. C. Manufacturer's Technician for pipe installation: During the construction period, the Pipe Manufacturer shall furnish the services of a factory trained, qualified, job experienced technician to advise and instruct as necessary in pipe laying and pipe jointing. The technician shall assist and advise the Contractor in his pipe laying operations and shall instruct construction personnel in proper joint assembly and joint inspection procedures. The technician is not required to be on-site full time; however, the technician shall be regularly on-site during the first two weeks of pipe laying and thereafter as requested by the Engineer, Owner, or Contractor. 1 .03 SUBMITT ALS Submittals shall be m accordance with the Special Conditions and shall include the following : A. Prior to the fabrication of the pipe, submit Record Data of fabrication and laying drawings to the OWNER for review of general conformance to contract documents. Record Data shall include a complete description of the pipe offered, including cuts, tabulated layout , design calculations, joint re straint and thrust calculations , and pertinent design data. Record Data shall reference stationing on the plan profile sheets and shall incorporate changes necessary to avoid conflicts with ex isting utilities and structures. Details for the design and fabrication of all fittings and s pecials and provisions for thrust shall be included . Submittal shall be sealed by a Licensed Professional ENGINEER in the State of Texas. B. Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and specials, and other product s and materials furnished , comply with this specification . lf reque sted by the OWNER, the manufacturer shall submit certified reports of all testing required by A WW A C303 . l .04 STANDARDS Except as modified or supplemented herein, pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standard specifications, latest edition. A . A WWA C303 "Concrete Pressure Pipe -Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type" B . A WW A M9 Manual: "Concrete Pressure Pipe" Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 3 of 10 November 2007 C. ASTM A33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" D. ASTM A635 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled , Structural Quality" E. ASTM Cl44 "Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar" F. ASTM C 150 "Specification for Portland Cement" G. ASTM C497 "Methods of Testing Concrete Pipe" H . NCTCOG Item 2.12.S(a) through (d) and (h) 1.05 DELNERY AND STORAGE A. Packing: 1. The pipe shall be prepared for shipment to afford maximum protection from normal hazard of transportation and allow pipe to reach project site in an undamaged condition . Pipe damaged in shipment shall not be delivered to the project site unless such damaged pipe is properly repaired. 2. After the completed pipe and fittings have been removed from the final cure at the manufacturing plant , the pipe lining shall be protected from drying by means of plastic end covers banded to the pipe ends. Covers shall be maintained over the pipe ends at all times until ready to be placed in the trench . Moi sture shall be maintained inside the pipe by periodic addition of water as necessary . 3. Pipes shall be carefully s upported during shipment and storage. Each length of pipe , fitting , or special shall be internally supported and braced with stulls to maintain a true circular shape. Internal supports shall consist of timber or steel stulls firmly wedged and secured so that the stulls remain in place during handling. Pipe shall be rotated so that one ( l) of the stulls is vertical during storage, shipment and installation. At a minimum, stulls shall be placed at each end, each quarter point, and center. Stulls shall not be removed from pipe until backfill operations are complete (excluding final cleanup), unless it can be demonstrated to the OWNER's satisfaction that removal of the stulls will not adversely affect the pipe installation. Pipe, fittings, and specials shall be se parated so that they do not bear against each other in transit. Store pipe on padded skids, sand or dirt berms, tires, or other suitable means to protect the pipe from damage . 4. In addition, deliver, handle , and store pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to protect coating systems. B. Marking for Identification: Each joint of pipe and each fitting shall have plainly marked on one end the class for which it is designed , the date of manufacturer, and the identification number that ma tche s s ho p drawing records. The top centerline s hall be marked on all spec ials . Northside I1l Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 4 of 10 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Cement for use m concrete and mortar shall be Type I or II Portland Cement. B. Aggregates: Aggregates for concrete lining and coating shall conform to ASTM C- 33 . C. Sand: Sand used for inside and outside joints shall be of silica base, conforming to ASTM C-144. D . Special Coating: Pipe to be installed in casing shall have two built-up mortar rings, each approximately 2 feet long and slightly higher than the pipe bell, to prevent the pipe from being supported by the pipe bell . Built-up mortar rings are to be applied at the quarter points of the pipe section . E. Bushes, Couplings and Plugs: Where outlets or taps are threaded, furnish and install brass reducing bushings in larger steel half couplings for the outlet size indicated. Threaded plugs shall be brass. 2 .02 MIXES ; CEMENT MORTAR Cement mortar used for pouring joints shall consist of one (I) part Portland Cement to two (2) parts clean , fine , sharp silica sand, mixed with water. No manufactured sand shall be permitted. Exterior joint mortar shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream. Interior joint mortar shall be mixed with as little water as possible so that the mortar is very stiff, but workable . Cement shall be ASTM CJ 50, Type I or Type ll. Sand shall conform to ASTM Cl44. Cement mortar used for patching shall be mixed as per cement mortar for inside joints. 2 .03 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A . Pipe: I . General : Pipe, bends, and special fittings shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of A WW A C303 and A WW A M9, and the special requirements of this specification. Pipe shall be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation Standard 61 for use with potable water. 2 . Pipe De s ign Criteria: Sizes and pressure classes (working pressure) shall be as specified. For the purposes of pipe design , working pressure plus transient pressure s hall be as indicated below . Fittings, specials and connections shall be of the same or greater pressure class as the associated pipe . Pipe and fittings s hall be clearly m arked with the pressure class and piece number to permit easy identificati o n in the field . Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 5 of I 0 November 2007 design pressure class specified . Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in A WW A C303 and A WW A Manual M9 for trench construction, using the following parameters: a. Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pcf b . Live Load = AASHTO H-20 truck for unpaved conditions c. Trench Depth = As indicated d. Coefficient Ku' = 0. I 50 e. Trench Width (Bd) as indicated f. Bedding Conditions = As indicated g. Pressure Class = 150 psi min. working pressure h. Surge Allowance = I 00 psi minimum, where: Total Pressure (including surge)= 150 psi+ 100 psi= 250 psi. 1. Deflection Lag Factor= 1.0 J. Soil Reaction Modulus, E' < 1,000 Trench depths indicated shall be verified after ex1stmg utilities are located. Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. 3 . Provisions for Thrust: a. Thrusts at bends, tees, plugs, or other fittings shall be resisted by restrained joints. Thrust at bends adjacent to casing pipe shall be restrained by welding joints through casing and for a sufficient distance each side of casing. The distance for thrust restraint shown on the plans is the minimum restraint and does not relieve the manufacturer from calculating the restraint needs as specified herein. In no case shall the restrained distance be less than indicated on the plans. If the manufacturer calculates the need for additional restraint, no additional compensation will be allowed . No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for the welded length of pipe within the casing, unless casing is filled with grout. b. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each side of the bend , tee, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust restraint, design pressure shall be I .5 times pressure class (working pressure), or equal to the test pressure, or working pressure plus the surge allowance, whichever is greater. Restrained joints shall consist of welded joints. In areas where restrained joints are used for thrust restraint , the pipe shall have adequate cylinder thickness to transmit the thrust forces . c. The length of pipe with welded joints to resist thrust forces shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with A WW A Manual M9 and the following: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 6 of 10 November 2007 1. The weight of earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe. 11. Soil density = I IO pcf (maximum value to be used). 111. Coefficient of friction = 0.40 (maximum value to be used). The above applies to unsaturated soil conditions. In loca tions where ground water is encountered, the soil density shall be reduced to its buoyant weight for the backfill below the water table, and the coefficient of friction shall be reduced to 0 .25 . d . Thrust collars will only be permitted for temporary plugs. Thrust collars may not be used for any other application, unless approved in writing by the ENGINEER. 4. Inside Diameter: The inside diameter, of the cement mortar lining shall be the Nominal diameter specified. B. Joint Wrappers: Similar and equal to those manufactured by Mar-Mac Manufacturing Company. C. Insulated Connections: Insulated connection shall be in accordance with Section 15640 included in the Appendix. Where insulated connections are indicated, furnish dielectric insulation gaskets, sleeves, and plastic washers as indicated . Insulating flange kits a re to be installed on all flanged outlets of the main line pipe and on both flan ges of each main line valve. D. Flexible Joint Couplings: Dresser Style 38, Smith-Blair Style 411, or approved equal. E. Pipe Ends: The standard pipe end shall include steel joint ring and a continuous solid rubber ring gasket as per A WW A Manual M-9. F. Flanges: Flanges shall conform to A WWA C207 with laying dimensions and drilling in accordance with ANSI B I 6.1, Class 125. Flanges shall be Flange Class E with a minimum working pressure of 275 psi for areas designated with 225 ps i test pressure. ]n no case shall the working or test pressure of the pipe exceed the working pressure of the flange . Drilling shall match class of valves or appurtenances which are attached . Nuts and bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade B . Nuts and bolts shall conform to AWWAC207. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01 Installation A. General: I. In stall pipe, fittings , spec ia ls, and appurtenances as s pecified h erei n , as specified in A WWA Manual M9 , and in accordance with th e pipe manufacturer's Northside JI] Avondale-Ha s let R o ad Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 7 of 10 November 2007 recommendations. 2 . Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated. B. Pipe Handling: 1. Haul and distribute pipe, fittings at the project site. Handle piping with care to avoid damage . Before lowering into the trench , inspect each joint of pipe, and reject or repair any damaged pipe . 2. Keep the pipe clean during and after the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, animals, and trash, and at the close of each operating day, effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap with vents. C. Pipe Jointing: 1. General: a . Thoroughly clean the bell and spigot rings before laying each joint of pipe by bru shing and wiping. If any damage to the protective coating on the metal has occurred, repair the damage before laying the pipe . Lubricate the gasket and the inside surface of the bell with an approved lubricant (flax soap) which will facilitate the telescoping of the joint. Tightly fit together sections of pipe and exercise care to secure true alignment and grade . When a joint of pipe is being laid, place the gasket on the spigot ring and enter the spigot end of the pipe into the bell of the adjoining pipe and force into position . The inside joint space between ends of the pipe sections shall have an opening within the tolerances as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No "blocking up" of pipe or joints will be permitted, and if the pipe is not uniformly supported or the joint not made up properly, remove the joint and properly prepare the trench. After joining, check the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge. If the gasket is out of position , disassemble the joint and repeat the joint laying procedure. b. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding . For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside the pipe . 2 . Exterior Joints: Make the exterior joint by placing a joint wrapper around the pipe and secure in place with two (2) metal straps. The wrapper shall be 9" inches wide for pipe 36" and larger, and 7" wide for smaller pipe, hemmed on each side . The wrapper shall be fiberglass reinforced or burlap cloth , with lengths encircling the pipe, leaving enough opening between ends to allow the mortar to be poured inside the wrapper into the joint. Fill the joint with mortar from one side in one (I) continuous operation until the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the filling of the joint, pat or manipulate the sides of the wrapper to settle the mortar and expel any entrapped air. Leave wrappers in plac e undi sturbed until the mortar has set-up . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 8 of 10 November 2007 3 . Interior Joints: Upon completion of backfilling of the pipe trench, fill the inside joint recess with a stiff cement mortar. Prior to placing of mortar, clean out dirt or trash which has collected in the joint, and moisten the concrete surfaces of the joint space by spraying or brushing with a wet brush. Ram or pack the stiff mortar into the joint space and take extreme care to insure that no voids remain in the joint space. After the joint has been filled, level the surfaces of the joint mortar with the interior surfaces of the pipe with a steel trowel so that the surface is smooth . Interior joints of pipe smaller than 21" shall have the bottom of the bell buttered with mortar, prior to inserting the spigot, such that when the spigot is pushed into position it will extrude surplus mortar from the joint. The surplus mortar shall be struck off flush with the inside of the pipe by pulling a filled burlap bag or an inflated ball through the pipe with a rope. 4 . Welded Joints: a. Weld joints in accordance with the A WW A Manual M9. Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation for welders and for Owner's representative to observe welds. Unless otherwise specified, welds shall be full circle fillet welds. b. Adequate prov1s1ons for reducing temperature stresses shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. c. After the pipe have been joined and properly aligned and prior to the start of the welding procedure, the spigot and bell shall be made essentially concentric by shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around the periphery of the joint. In no case shall the clearance tolerance be permitted to accumulate. d. Furnish labor, equipment, tools and supplies, including shielded type welding rod. Protect welding rod from any deterioration prior to its use. If any portion of a box or carton is damaged, reject the entire box or carton. e. In all hand welding, the metal shall be deposited in successive layers. For hand welds, not more than 1/8" of metal shall be deposited in each pass. Each pass except the final one, whether in butt or fillet welds, shall be thoroughly bobbed or peened to relieve shrinkage stresses and to remove dirt, slag, or flux before the succeeding bead is applied . Each pass shall be thoroughly fused into the plates at each side of the welding groove or fillet and shall not be permitted to pile up in the center of the weld. Undercutting along the side shall not be permitted. f. Welds shall be free from pin holes, non-metallic inclusions, air pockets , undercutting and/or any other defects. g. If the ends of the pipe are laminated, split or damaged to the extent that satisfactory welding contact cannot be obtained, remove the pipe from the line . Northside JII Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page 9 of JO November 2007 h. Furnish each welder employed with a steel stencil for marking the welds, so that the work of each welder may be identified . Have each welder stencil the pipe adjacent to the weld with the stencil assigned to him. In the event any welder leaves the job, his stencil shall be voided and not duplicated if another welder is employed. 1. Use only competent, skilled and qualified workmen . Each welder employed by the Contractor shall be required to satisfactorily pass a welding test in accordance with A WW A C206 before being allowed to weld on the line. J. After each welder has qualified in the preliminary tests referred to above, inspections shall be made of joints in the line. Any welder making defective welds shall not be allowed to continue to weld. k. Dye penetrant tests in accordance with ASTM El 65, or magnetic particle test shall be performed by the Contractor under the supervision and inspection of the Owner's Representative or an independent testing laboratory, on all full welded joints. Welds that are defective will be replaced or repaired, whichever is deemed necessary by the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense . I. If the Contractor disagrees with the Engineer's interpretation of welding tests, test sections may be cut from the joint for physical testing . The Contractor shall bear the expense of repairing the joint, regardless of the results of physical testing. The procedure for repairing the joint shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding. D . Protection of Exposed Metal: I . Protect exposed ferrous metal by a minimum of one (I") inch coating of cement mortar as previously s pecified for inside joints unless otherwise specified. Exposed large flat surfaces such as flanges, bolts, caulked joints, threaded outlets, closures, etc., shall have coating reinforced with galvanized wire mesh. 2. Thoroughly clean and wet the surface receiving a cement mortar coating with water just prior to placing the cement mortar coating. After placing, take care to prevent cement mortar from drying out too rapidly by covering with damp earth or burlap. Cement mortar coating shall not be applied during freezing weather. E . Patching: I . Excessive field-patching of lining or coating shall not be permitted. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed I 00 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12". In general, there shall not be more than one patch on either the lining or the coating of any one joint of pipe. 2. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe , make patch with cement mortar as previously s pecified for interior joints. Do not in stall patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the OWNER . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 SECTION 02612 Concrete Pressure Pipe Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type Page IO of 10 November 2007 Promptly remove rejected pipe from the site . 3 .02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests 1. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for carrying out a pressure test on the pipelines. The procedures and method for carrying out the pressure tests shall be approved by the Engineer. 2 . Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, bulkheads, etc., as required in conjunction with testing portions of the pipe. Furnish test pumps, gauges, meters and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the tests. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests shall conform with A WW A M9 . 3. All pipelines shall be subjected to hydrostatic pressure as indicated in 2 .03.A.2 at the lowest points of the section being tested and this pressure maintained for at least one hour. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with A WW A C600. 4. Lines which fail to meet the requirements of the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are met. Defective materials, pipes, valves, and accessories shall be removed and replaced. 5 . The Owner will supply at no cost to the Contractor a maximum quantity of water for testing purposes equal to 110 percent of the volume of the pipeline. The Contractor shall furni sh and install the necessary connections which may be required to transport the water to the pipe being tested. Additional water required will be provided at the Owner's standard rates for the volume required. END OF SECTlON Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1 .01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page I of7 Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required and install buried ductile iron pipe and fittings complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein . 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Finished pipe shall be the product of one (I) manufacturer. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, fittings, lining, coating) shall be performed at one (1) location . B. Reference Standards: 1) ANSI/AWWA Cl 04/A21.4 -American National Standard for cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for water. 2) ANSI/AWWA Cl 05/A21 .5 -American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement. 3) ANSI/AWWA Cl 1 O/A21.l O -American National Standard for Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings , 3-inch through 48 inches for water and other liquids . 4) ANSI/AWWA Cl l l /A21 .l l -American National Standard for Rubber-Gask et Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings . 5) ANSI/AWWA CJ 15 /A21 .15 ,7 American National Standard for Flanged Du ctile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 6) ANSI/ A WWA Cl 50/ A21.50 ,8 American National Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe . 7) ANSI/AWWA Cl 5 l/A21.51 ,9 American National Standard for the Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids . 8) ANSI/AWWA Cl 53/A21.53, "Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings For Water Service" 9) ANSI/AWWA C600,l l Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances . I 0) AWWA M-41 Ductile-Iro n Pipe and Fittings. 1 .03 SUB MITT ALS Submittals s hall be in accordance with the Special Specification s and shall include the followin g : Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 2 of 7 November 2007 A .. Prior to the fabrication of the pipe, submit Record Data of fabrication and laying drawings to the Owner for review of general conformance to contract documents. Record Data shall include a complete description of the pipe offered, including cuts, tabulated layout, design calculations, thrust calculations, and pertinent design data. Record Data shall incorporate any changes necessary to avoid conflicts with existing utilities and structures. The laying schedule shall show pipe class, class coding, station limits and transition stations for various pipe classes. Details for the design and fabrication of all fittings and specials and provisions for thrust shall be included. Submittal shall be sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. B . Submittal for painting exterior pipe to include recommendation for preparation, application and storage. C. Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with this specification . If requested by the OWNER, the manufacturer shall submit certified reports of all testing. 1.04 DELNERY AND STORAGE A . Delivery and Storage shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE : A . Pipe shall be in accordance with NCTCOG 2.12 .8, AWWA Cl 10,AWWA Cl 11, AWWA Cl 15 , AWWA Cl 50, and AWWA Cl 51 . All pipe shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. B . Flexible Restrained Push on Joints (FRPJ) shall be U .S. Pipe -TR-Flex, American -Flex- Ring, or approved equal. C. All pipe shall be cement mortar coated in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Cl 04 . D. All buried pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with A WWA C 105 . E . As a minimum standard , the following pressure classes shall apply : Diameter Pipe (inch) 3 " through 12 " 14 " -20" 24 " 30" -64 " Min. Pressure Class (PSI) 350 psi 250 psi 250 psi 250 psi F. Engineer shall verify that pressure class specified meets the minimum design requirements co ntained within the se provisions. When requested , pipe design calculations shall be Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 Nove mber 2007 SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 3 of 7 submitted to the City. Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/ A WWA C 150/ A2 l .50 for a minimum 150 psi ( or project requirements, whichever is greater) rated working pressure plus a 100 psi surge allowance; a 2 to 1 factor of safety on the sum of the working pressure plus surge pressure; Type 4 laying condition, and a minimum depth of cover of 12 feet. Type 4 laying conditions are as defined in ANSI/ AWWA CJ 50/A21 .5 0 . G. Mechanical thrust restraint may be done only for make-up pieces where push on joints are not applicable . Retainer glands shall be Series 1100 Megalugs by EBAA Iron for ductile iron pipe mechanical joints, Series 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Glands by EBAA Iron for PVC pipe mechanical joints, and Series 1500 Ductile Iron Retainers for PVC pipe push-on joints. H. Ductile iron pipe shall have nominal lay lengths of 18 or 20 feet. Dimensions and tolerances of each nominal pipe size shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CJ 5 l/A2 l. I. Pipe markings shall meet the minimum requirements of ANSI/AWWA Cl 5 l/A2 l, latest revision . Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: 1) "DJ " or "DUCTILE" shall be cast or metal stamped on each pipe 2) Weight , pressure class, and nominal thickness of each pipe 3) Year and country pipe was cast 4) Manufacturer's mark J. Iron u sed in the manufacture of pipe for these specifications shall have : I) Minimum tensile strength -60 ,000 psi 2) Minimum yield strength -42,000 psi 3) Minimum elongation -10% 2 .02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JOINTS: A . General -Comply with ANSI/AWWA Cll l/A21.l l, latest revision. 1) Push-On Joints 2) Mechanical Joints 3) Restrained Joints 4) Flan ge dJoints -AWWAC115/A2 1.15 , ANSJB16.1,Class 125 B . All rubber joint gaskets utilized on ductile-iron pipe shall be in conformance with ANSI/AWWA Cl 11/A21.11 , latest revision . C. Bolts and Nuts: Bolts and nuts for mechanical joints or flanged ends shall be of a high strength corrosion resistant low-carbon steel in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Cl 1 J/A21. I I, ANSI/AWWA Cl I 5/A2 I . I 5, and ASTM A307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts." For mechanical joint s, bolts and nuts shall be coated with a ceramic-filled, baked on fluorocarbon resin . Coated bolts a nd nuts shall be prepared "near white" or "white" when coated to manufacturer's recommended thickness by a certified applicator. Coating shall be of Xylan® as manufactured by Northside IJI Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 4 of 7 Whitford Corporation , or approved equal. Coating shall conform to the performance requirements of ASTM B 117 , "Salt Spray Test" and shall include, if required , a certificate of conformance . 2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE COATINGS : A . All ductile iron pipe shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil thick, on the pipe exterior, unless otherwise specified. B. Pipes shall have an interior cement mortar lining applied in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI 04/ A2 l .04, or latest revision. C. Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work shall not receive the standard asphaltic coat on the outside surfaces, but shall be shop-coated with rust inhibitive primer. Primer shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils and be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 . D . All buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased, unless otherwise specified. Encasement for buried pipe shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD) polyethylene or 4 mil high density cross-laminated (J-IDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to AWWA Cl 05/A21.5 . Polyethylene film must be marked as follows: 1) Manufacturer 's name or trademark 2) Year of manufacturer 3) ANSI/AWWA Cl05/A21.5 4) Minimum film thickness and material type 5) Applicable range of nominal diameter size(s). 6) Warning-Corro s ion Protection-Repair Any Damage E . For gravity sewer applications, all ductile iron pipe shall have an approved corrosion resistant coating applied to the interior. Interior coating shall be pre-approved by Fort Worth Water Department Standard Product Committee for application in wastewater environment. Coating shall be Protecto 401 or approved equal. 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE FITTINGS: A . Joints : Fittings shall have flanged, mechanical, restrained , push-on joints or any combination of these. Joints must be manufactured in accordance with the above referenced standards . Unless specified otherwise on the plans or in the project specifications, fittings will be provided for installation as follows : B. Pres sure Rating: Unless specified otherwise, the rated working press ures for fittings are as follow s: Northside Jll Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings (AWWA Cl 53/A2 l .53) Nominal Size (in) Pressure Rating (PSI) 3" -24" 350 PSI 30" -48" 250 PSI 54" -64 " 250 PSI Ductile-Iron Full Body Fittings (AWWA Cl IO/A21.IO) Nominal Size (in) Pressure Rating (PSI) 3" -24" 350 PSI 30" -48 " 250 PSI SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 5 of 7 C. Dimensions and Thickness: Fittings and joints shall conform to the thickness and dimensions shown in the various standards referenced under Section 1.02.B . D . Flange: Unless specified otherwise, the bolt circle and the bolt-holes shall match those of ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 . All screwed-on flanges shall be ductile iron . Field fabrication of flanges shall be prohibited , unless approved otherwise. E. Gland : Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Restraining devices shall be of ductile iron . Dimensions of the gland shall be such that it can be used with the standardized joint bell and tee-head bolts conforming to ANSI/AWWA Cl 53/A2 l.53 . F. Bolts and Nuts: Bolts and nuts for mechanical joints or flanged ends shall be of a high strength corros ion resistant low-alloy steel in accordance with ANSI/ A WWA C 111/A21.11 and ASTM A307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts". For mechanical joints, the bolts and nuts shall be coated with a ceramic-filled, baked on fluoroc arbon resin. Coated bolts and nuts s hall be prepared "near white" or "white" when coated to manufacturer's recommended thickness by a certified applicator. Coating shall be Xylan®, as manufactured by Whitford Corporation, or approved equal. Coating shall conform to the performance requirements of ASTM B 117, "Salt Spray Test " and shall include , if required , a certificate of conformance . G. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, gaskets, glands, bolt s , and nuts shall be furnished with mechanical joints, and gaskets and lubricant shall be furni shed with push-on joints; all in sufficient quantity for assembly of each joint. H . Outside Coating: All ductile fittings shall have an a sphaltic or fu s ion bonded epoxy coating. Asphaltic coatings shall be a minimum of I mil thickness , on the pipe exterior, unless otherwise specified. Fusion bonded exterior coatings shall comply with ANSI/AWWA Cl 16/A21 .16, shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils, and be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 . I. Interior Lining : All ductile iron fittings are to be furnished with a cement-mortar lining of standard thickness as defined in referenced ANSI/AWWA Cl 04 /A2 I .4 and given a seal coat of asphaltic material , unless otherwise specified . Fusion bonded interior coatings shall comply with ANSI/AWWA Cl l 6/A21. l 6, shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils, and be certified in acc o rd a nce with ANSI/NSF 61 . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 6 of 7 J. Polyethylene Encasement: All ductile iron fittings shall be polyethylene encased, unless othenvise specified. Encasement for buried fittings shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD) polyethylene or 4 mil high density cross-laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming toAWWA Cl05/A2l.5. Polyethylene film must be marked as follows: ' l) Manufacturer's name or trademark 2) Year of manufacturer 3) ANSVAWWA Cl05/A21.5 4) Minimum film thickness and material type 5) Applicable range of nominal diameter size(s). 6) Warning -Corrosion Protection -Repair Any Damage K. Marking: Fitting marking shall meet the requirements of ANSVAWWA Cl IO/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA Cl53/A21 .53 shall have distinctively cast on them the following information: l) C-153 or C-110, depending on which type of fitting provided. 2) Pressure Rating 3) Nominal diameter of openings 4) Manufacturer's identification 5) Country where cast 6) Number of degrees or fraction of the circle on all bends 7) Letters "DI" or "DUCTTI...E'' cast on them. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Install, pipe, fittings, and appurtenances as special in accordance with A WWA M4 I and AWWA C600 . B. All pipe shall be mechanically restrained at fittings and within the calculated restraint areas, or as shown on the drawings. C. Polyethylene encasement shall be installed in accordance with AWWA Cl 05 and AWWA M4 I, Method A or B . Method C will not be allowed. D. Where indicated, paint shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/AWWA C 151 / A2 l .5 l . Each pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi for a duration of at least IO seconds. F. The manufacturer shall take adequate measures during pipe production to assure compliance with ANSl/AWWA Cl 5 l/A2 l.5 I by performing quality-control tests and maintaining results to those te st s as outlined in section 5, "Verification " of that standard. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02615 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Page 7 of 7 G. The City of Fort Worth may, at its own cost, subject random lengths of pipe for testing by an independent laboratory for compliance with this specification . Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be grounds for rejecting the entire order. H . The Contractor shall, upon request by City, furnish manufacturer's certified test reports that indicate that each run of pipe furnished has met specifications, that all inspections have been made, and that all tests have been performed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Cl 5 l/A21.5 l . I. The Contractor shall , upon request by City, furnish manufacturer 's certified test reports stating that all fittings furnished meet the requirements of applicable Standards and Specifications. Test reports must be provided to the Engineer before construction commences. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page I of22 Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install cement mortar lined and either mortar coated or polyurethane coated steel pipe, fittings, and specials as specified and as required for the proper installation and function of the pipe. Provisions for future cathodic protection shall be provided such as welding, installation of bonding clips, or other method approved by the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Experience Requirements l. Pipe shall be the product of one manufacturer which has had not less than five (5) years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the particular type and size indicated, or which has demonstrated an experience record that is satisfactory to the Engineer and Owner. The acceptability of this experience record will be thoroughly investigated by the Engineer, and will be sole discretion of the Engineer and Owner. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, fittings, lining, coating) shall be performed at one (I) location unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. The lining shall be shop applied spun cement mortar lining. The manufacturer shall be certified under S.P.F .A. or I.S.O. quality certification program for steel pipe and accessory manufacturing. B. Owner Testing and Inspection a. Pipe may be subject to inspection by an independent testing laboratory, which laboratory shall be selected and retained by the Owner. Representatives of the laboratory or the Engineer shall have access to the work whenever it is in preparation or progress , and the Pipe Manufacturer shall provide proper facilities for access and for inspection . The Pipe Manufacturer shall notify the Owner in writing, a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to the pipe fabrication so that the Owner may advise the Manufacturer as to the Owner's decision regarding tests to be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Material, fabricated parts , and pipe , which are discovered to be defective, or which do not conform to the requirements of this specification shall be subject to rejection at any time prior to Owner's final acceptance of the product. b . The inspection and testing by the independent testing laboratory anticipates that production of pipe shall be done over a normal period of time and without "slow downs" or other abnormal delays . In the event that an abnormal production time is required , and the Owner is required to pay excessive costs for inspection, then the Contractor shall be required to reimburse the Owner for such laboratory costs over and above those which would have been incurred under a normal schedule of production as determined by the Engineer. C. Factory Testing The Manufacturer shall perform all tests as required by the applicable A WW A standards and as li s ted herein. I . Cement Mortar Lining Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 2 of22 November 2007 Shop-applied cement mortar linings shall be tested in accordance with A WWA C205 . 2. Polyurethane Coating a. General: The polyurethane coating shall be tested in accordance with A WWA C222 . b . Thickness: The thickness of the coating shall be tested in accordance with SSPC PA2 . The coating system applied to the pipe shall be tested for holidays according to the procedures outlined in NACE RPOI 88 using a wet sponge holiday tester or a high voltage spark tester ( operating at I 00 volts per mil), for the dry film thickness specified of 35 mil. c . Adhesion Testing: 1. Polyurethane coatings or linings shall have an adhesion to steel of 1,500 pounds per square inch, minimum. 11. Polyurethane coating adhesion to steel substrates shall be tested using pneumatic pull off equipment, such as HATE Model l 08 or Delfesko Positest, in accordance with ASTM D454 l and A WW A C222, except as modified in this section. 111. Adhesion testing records shall include pipe identification, surface tested (interior or exterior), surface temperature, coating thickness, tensile force applied , mode of fa ilure, and percentage of substrate failure relative of dolly surface . 1v. Dollies or adhesion testing shall be glued to the coating surface and allowed to cure for a minimum of 12 hours. Because of high cohesive strength, polyurethane coatings s hall be scored around the dolly prior to conducting the adhesion test. v. Failure shall be by adhesive and cohesive failure only. Adhesive failure is defined as separation of the coating from the steel substrate. Cohesive failure is defined as failure within the coating, resulting in coating remaining both on the steel substrate and dolly . v1. Partial substrate and glue failure will be retested if the substrate failure is less than 50 percent relative of the dolly surface area and the applied tension was less than the specified adhesion . Pipes that have partial adhesion will be rejected as a substrate adhesion failure . vii . Glue failures in excess of the minimum required tensile adhesion would be accepted as meeting the specified adhesion requirements . viii.Adhesion tests will be conducted on polyurethane pipe coating and lining independently (where applicable) and will be accepted or rejected independently of the other. 1x . Repair patches on the polyurethane coating shall be randomly selected for adhesion testing in a manner as described herein and at the discretion of the coating inspector conducting the adhesion tests . Adhesion of repairs shall be as specified for the type of repair. 3. Hydrostatic Press ure Testin g Northside l1J Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 3 of22 November 2007 a. Each joint of pipe shall be hydrostatically tested prior to application of lining or coating. The internal test pressure shall be that which results in a fiber stress equal to 75% of the minimum yield strength of the steel used. Each joint of pipe tested shall be completely watertight under maximum test pressure. As a part of testing equipment, the Pipe Manufacturer shall maintain a recording pressure gauge, reference number of pipe tested, etc. The pipe shall be numbered in order that this information can be recorded. b . Fittings shall be fabricated from hydrostatically tested pipe. Fittings shall be tested by hydrostatic test, air test, magnetic particle test, or dye penetrant test. Air test shall be made by applying air to the welds under 10 pounds per square inch pressure and checking for leaks around and through welds with a soap solution. 4 . Charpy V-Notch Test -NOT USED 5. Mill Certification The Owner will require the Manufacturer to furnish mill test certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, steel plate, and cement. The Manufacturer shall perform the tests described in A WW A C- 200, for all pipe, fittings, and specials. 6 . Absorption Test for Mortar Coating Absorption test: A water absorption test shall be performed on samples of cured mortar coating taken from each working shift. The mortar coating samples shall have been cured in the same manner as the pipe . A test value shall consist of the average of a minimum of three samples taken from the same working shift . The test method shall be in accordance with ASTM C497, Method A. The average absorption value for any test shall not exceed 9 percent and no individual sample shall have an absorption exceeding 11 percent. 7 . Strength Test for Mortar Coating Strength of Coating: Tests shall be made of cured mortar coating for the purpose of qualifying the mortar coating machine and the mortar mix design . One inch (I") cubes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-109. The equivalent cylinder compressive strength of the mortar (0 .74 times the cube strength) shall be not less than 5,500 psi in 28 days. D . Manufacturer 's Technician for Pipe Installation I. During the construction period, the Pipe Manufacturer shall furnish the services of a factory trained, qualified, job experienced technician to advise and instruct as necessary in pipe laying and pipe jointing. The technician shall assist and advise the Contractor in his pipe laying operations and shall instruct construction personnel in proper joint assembly and joint inspection procedures. The technician is not required to be on-site full time; however, the technician shall be regularly on-site during the first two weeks of pipe laying and thereafter as requested by the Engineer, Owner, or Contractor. 2. The pipe manufacturer shall provide services of polyurethane coating manufacturer's repre s entative and a representative from the heat shrink joint manufacturer for a period of not less than I week at Northside JI] Avondale-Hasl et Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 4 of 22 November 2007 beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor and Owner regarding installation , including but not limited to, handling and storage, cleaning and inspecting, coating repairs, field applied coating, heat shrink installation procedures and general construction methods and how they may affect pipe coating. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be required to return if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the polyurethane coating or the Contractor's construction methods do not comply with contract specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Cost for the Manufacturer's Representatives to return to the site shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 SUBMJTT ALS A. Submittals shall include: 1. Prior to the fabrication of the pipe, submit fabrication and laying shop drawings to the Engineer. Submittal shall be sealed by a licensed Profession Engineer in the State of Texas. Drawings shall include a schematic location-profile and a tabulated layout schedule, both of which shall be appropriately referenced to the stationing of the proposed pipeline as shown on the plan-profile sheets . Drawings shall be based on the plans and specifications and shall incorporate changes necessary to avoid conflicts with existing utilities and structures. Drawings shall also include full details of reinforcement , and dimensions for pipe and fittings . Details for the design and fabrication of all fittings and specials and provisions for thrust restraint shall be included . Where welded joints are required, drawings shall include proposed welding requirements and provisions for thermal stress control. 2. Prior to shipment of the pipe, the Pipe Manufacturer shall submit the following: a. A Certificate of Adequacy of Design stating that the pipe to be furnished complies with A WW A C200, A WW A C205, A WW A C210, A WW A C222, and these specifications. b . Copies of results of factory hydrostatic tests shall be provided to the Engineer. c . Mill certificates, including chemical and physical test results for each heat of steel. d . Polyurethane coating manufacturer's and heat shrink sleeve catalog sheets and technical information. e . A Certified Test Report from the polyurethane coating manufacturer indicating that the coatings were applied in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with this s pecification . f. Certified test reports for welder certification for factory and field welds. g. Certified test reports for cement mortar tests. h . Certified test reports for steel cylinder tests and cement mortar tests. 1.04 ST ANDA RDS Except a s modified or s upplemented herein, the steel pipe, coatings, fittings, and specials shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standard specifications, latest edition: Northside IlI Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 5 of22 November 2007 ANSI/NSF AWWA C200 AWWA C205 AWWA C206 AWWA C207 AWWA C208 AWWA C210 AWWA C216 AWWA C222 AWWA C602 AWWAMll ASTM C33 ASTM C35 ASTM Cl50 ASTM El65 SSPC-SP-1 SSPC-SP-10 SSPC-PA2 SSPC-PA SSPC-PS ASTM Dl6 ASTM 522 Standard 61 "Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger" "Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe 4 Inches and Larger -Shop-Applied." "Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe" "Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Sizes 4 Inches thru 144 Inches" "Dimensions for Steel Water Pipe Fittings" "Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines" "Heat Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines" "Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines and Fittings" "Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines -4 In . and Larger -In-Place" Manual: "Steel Pipe -A Guide for Design and Installation" "Specifications for Concrete Aggregates" "Specifications for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster" "Specifications for Portland Cement" "Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method" Steel Structures Painting Council -Solvent Cleaning Steel Structures Painting Council -Near-White Blast Cleaning Steel Structures Painting Council -Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Mag netic Gages Steel Structures Painting Council -A Guide to Safety /Guide 3 in Paint Application Steel Structures Painting Council -A Guide for /Guide 17 Selecting Urethane Painting Systems "Paint, Varnish , Lacquer, and Rel ated Products" "Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings" I .05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A . Packing I . The pipe shall be prepared for shipment to afford maximum protection from normal hazard of transportation and allow pipe to reach project s ite in an undamaged condition. Pipe damaged in shipment s hall not be delivered to the project site unle s s such damaged pipe is properly repaired. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 6 of22 2. After the completed pipe and fit1in gs have b ee n removed from the fina l cure at the manufacturing plant, the pipe lining s hall be protected from drying by means of plastic end covers banded to the pipe ends. Covers s h a ll be maintained over th e pipe ends at all times until ready to be in sta lled. Moi sture s hall be maint ai ned in s id e the pipe b y periodic addition of water as necessary . 3. Pipes shall be carefully supported during shipment and storage. Pipe, fit1ings , and specials shall be separated so that they do not bear against each other, and the whole load shall be securely fastened to prevent movement in transit. Ship pipe on padded bunks with tie-down straps approximately over stulling . Store pipe on padded skids, sand or dirt berms, tires, or other suitable means to protect the pipe from damage. Each end of eac h length of pipe, fitting, or special and the middle of each pipe joint shall be internally supported and braced with stulls to maintain a true circular shape. Internal stulls shall consist of timber or steel firmly wedged and secured so that stulls remain in place during storage, shipment, and installation . Pipe shall be rotated so that one stull remains vertical during storage, shipment and installati o n . At a minimum, stulls shall be placed at each end, each quarter point and center. Stulls shall not be re moved until backfill operations are complete (excluding final clean up), unless it can be demon strated to the owner's satisfaction that removal of stulls will not adversely affect pipe installation. 4. Deliver , handle , and s tore pipe in accordance with the Manufacture r's recommendations to protect coating sys tem s. B. Marking for Identificati o n Each joint of pipe and each fit1ing s ha ll have plainly m arked on one end, the class for which it is designated , the date o f manu fac turer, and the identification number. The top centerlines shall be marked on all s pecial s. C . Point of Delivery lt is desired that pipe b e hauled direct from pipe pl a nt to the proj ect site and strung along pipe line route, thus avoiding rehandling of pipe and the possibility of damage thereto. Where fully loaded truck and trailer cannot operate a long the pipeline route , pipe may be unloaded at access points along the route , and brought to the trench s ide by approved method s; h owever, the Contractor shall be res pon s ible that pipe is undamaged at th e time of layin g. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Polyurethane Coating Polyureth ane Coating shall meet th e requirements of A WWA C-222. Use a Coating Standard ASTM DJ 6 , Type V system which is a 2-package polyisocyanate , polyol-cured urethane coating. The components are mixed in I : 1 ratio at time of application. The components shall have balanc ed viscosities in their liquid state and shall not require agitation during use. The plant-applied coating shall be a se lf primin g, plural component, I 00 perc ent so lids, non-extended polyurethane , s uitable for burial o r immersion and s hall be CORROPIPE II OMNI as manufactured by Madi son Chemical Indu stri es Inc ., DURASHJELD 2 10 as manufactured by LifeLa st, Inc., or equal Futura Coatin gs . The Northside m Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 7 of22 coating manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the production of this type coating. The cured coating shall have the following properties : I . Conversion to Solids by Volume: 97 percent plus or minus 3 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance : Minus 40 degrees F and plus 150 degrees F. 3 . Minimum Adhesion: 1500 psi, when applied to steel pipe which has been blasted to comply with SSPC-SPJO . 4. Cure Time: For handling in 1 minute at 120 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F . 5. Maximum Specific Gravities : Polyisocyanate resin , 1 .20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Impact Resi stance: 80 inch-pounds using ]-inch diameter steel ball. 7 . Minimum Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. 8 . Hardness: 55 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 9 . Flexibility Re s istance: ASTM D522 using ] -inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days . Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified above. 10. Dry Film Thickness: 35 mils B . Exterior Polyurethane Coating for Specials, Fittings, Repair and Connections The shop -a pplied and fi e ld -a pplied coating shall be CORROPIPE-Il OMNI, and GP Il (E) Touch-Up, res pe ctiv e ly , as m anufactured by Madi son Chemical Industries or approved equal. The shop-applied and fi eld -a pplied coating s hall have the properties specified in paragraph B .1.a. Mix and apply po lyurethane coatings in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. C. Cement for Mortar Linings Cement mortar linings shall be shop-applied for pipe sizes 96-inch and smaller. Shop-applied cement mortar linings shall conform to the requirements of A WW A C205 with the following modifications : Sand used for cement mortar shall be silica sand ASTM C33. Curing of the linings shall conform to the requirements of A WW A C205 . D . Cement for Mortar Coating The out si de mortar coating s hall be shop applied, and shall be in accordance with A WWA C205 . Pipe to be laid in casing shall have two built-up rings of mortar each approximately 2' long and s lightly high er than the pipe bell to prevent pipe bell to prevent pipe being supported by the bell. Rings shall have a minimum thickness of 2". Rings shall be at the quarter po ints of the pipe section . Mortar coating reinforcing s hall be e lectric a lly continuous with the steel cylinder. E. Flange Nut s and Bolts Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 Nuts and bolts shall conform to A WW A C207 . F. Steel SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 8 of22 Steel shall meet the requirements of A WW A C200 and shall be of continuous casting. Steel shall be homogeneous and shall be suitable for field welding, fully kilned and fine austenitic grain size. G . Bend Fittings All bend fittings shall be long radius to permit easy passage of pipeline pigs. H. Threaded Outlets Where outlets or taps are threaded , furnish and install brass bushings for the outlet size indicated. I. Outlets for Weld Leads The Contractor may use outlets for access for weld leads. Outlets shall be welded after use . Outlet configuration shall be approved by the Engineer. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar for Interior Joints Mortar shall be one part cement to two parts sand. Cement shall be ASTM C 150, Type J or Jl. Sand shall be of sharp silica base. No manufactured sand shall be permitted. Sand shall conform to ASTM Cl 44 . Exterior joint mortar shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream. Interior joint mortar shall be mixed with as little water as possible so that the mortar is very stiff, but workable . Water for cement mortar shall be treated and suitable for drinking water. B. Mortar for Pipe Patching for Shop-Applied Cement Mortar Lining Mortar for patching shall be as per interior joints. C. Bonding Agent Bonding agent for cement mortar lining patching shall be Probond Epoxy Bonding Agent ET-I 50, parts A and B; Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, or approved equal. 2 .03 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Pipe I. Pipe Design a. Steel pipe shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in conformance with A WW A C200, A WW A Manual MI I , and with the criteria specified herein. Sizes and pressure classes (working pressure) shall be as s hown below . For the purpose of pipe design , the transient pressure plus working pre ssure s hall as indicated below . Fit1ings , specials , and connections ' Northside lJl Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 9 of22 November 2007 s hall be designed for the s ame pressures as the adjacent pipe. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and the design pressure in accordance with A WW A Manual M-11; using the following parameters: 1. Unit Weight of Fill (W) = l 30pcf 11. Live Load = AASHTO HS 20 111. Live Load = Cooper £80 at Railroads 1v. Trench Depth= As Indicated plus 10-feet if on UPRR property v. Deflection Lag Factor -(D1) = 1.0 v1. Coefficient K = 0 .10 vii . Maximum Calculated Deflection -Dx = 3% (Polyurethane Coated Steel Pipe) viii.Maximum Calculated Deflection -Dx = 2% (Mortar Coated Steel Pipe) 1x . Soil Reaction Modulus -(£') < 1,000 x. Working Pressure = 150 psi x1. Te st Press ure = 225 ps i xii. Surge Allowance = I 00 psi minimum, where: Total Pressure (including surge)= 150 psi+ l 00 ps i = 250 ps i. b. The fittings and specials shall be designed in accordance with A WW A C-208 and A WW A Manual M-11 except that crotch plates shall be used for outlet reinforcement for all Pressure Diameter Values , PDV , greater than 6,000. c. Where the pipe requires additional external support to achieve the specified maximum deflection , the Contractor and pipe supplier will be required to furnish alternate methods for pipe embedment. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor by the Owner where thi s method is required. d. Trench depths indicated shall be verified after existing utilities are located. Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth . In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows . 2 . Provisions for Thru st a . Thrust at bends, tees, or other fittings shall be resisted by restrained joints. Thrust at bends adjacent to ca s ing s hall be restrained by welding joints through the casing and a sufficient di stance each s ide of the casing. No thrust restraint contribution s hall be allowed for pipe in casing unle s s the annular space in the casing is filled with grout. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 10 of22 November 2007 b . Restrained joints shall be used a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust which develops at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purposes of thrust restraint, design pressure shall be 1.5 times the working pressure class . Restrained joints shall consist of welded joints. c . Thrust restraint design shall be the complete responsibility of the pipe manufacturer. The length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust forces shall be determined by the Pipe Manufacturer in accordance with A WW A Manual M-11 and the following: 1. The Weight of Earth shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe. 11. Soil Density= 110 pcf (maximum value to be used). iii. Coefficient of Friction= 0.20 (maximum value to be used for polyurethane coated steel pipe). 1v. The above applies to unsaturated soil conditions. In locations where ground water is encountered, the soil density shall be reduced to its buoyant weight for all backfill below the water table, and the coefficient of friction shall be reduced to 0. 15 for polyurethane coated steel pipe. v. For horizontal bends, the length of pipe to be restrained shall be calculated as follows: Fort-,. less than 60° L = P A sin (t-,./2) f(We + Wp + Ww) For t-,. greater than 60° L = p A (1 -cos M f(We + Wp + Ww) L = Length of pipe to be restrained P = 1.5 times working pressure A = Cross sectional area of pipe steel cylinder I.D. t-,. = Deflection angle We= Weight of earth Wp = Weight of pipe Ww = Weight of water f = Coefficient of friction 3. Inside Diameter The inside diameter, including the cement-mortar lining, shall be a minimum of the nominal diameter of the pipe specified, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page I J of22 November 2007 4. Wall Thickness The minimum pipe wall steel thickness shall be as designed , but not less than 0 .2 5" or pipe D/240, whichever is greater for pipe and fittings, with no minus tolerance. Where indicated on the plans, pipe and fittings shall have thicker steel pipe wall. The minimum steel wall thickness shall also be such that the fiber stress shall not exceed 50% of the minimum yield strength of the steel for working pressure and shall not exceed 75% of the minimum yield s trength of the steel at the maximum pressure (including transient pressure), nor the following, at the specified working pressure . Pipe Type Polyurethane Coated Steel Mortar Coated Steel Maximum Stress at Working Pressure 23,000 psi 18,000 psi Pipe which is placed in casing or tunnel shall have a minimum pipe wall steel thickness of 0.25" or pipe 0 .D./144, whichever is greater. Pipe, fittings, and specials shall be designed such that the maximum stresses in the pipe due to thrust loading will not exceed 18,000 psi nor 50% of the steel yield strength at the thrust design pressure(] .5 times working pressure). 5. Seams Except for mill-type pipe, the piping shall be made fr o m steel plat es rolled into cylinders or sections thereof with the longitudinal and girth seams butt welded or s hall be s pirally formed and butt welded. There shall be not more than two (2) longitudinal seam s. Girth seams s hall be butt welded and shall not be spaced closer than 6' except in specials and fittin gs. 6. Joint Length Maximum joint length shall not exceed 50'. Maximum joint length of steel pipe installed in casing shall not exceed 25'. No randoms will be permitted for straight runs of pipe . B . Joint Wrappers for Mortar Coated Steel Pipe Mortar Coating is not allowed for this project. C. Heat Shrink Sleeves for Polyurethane Coated Steel Pipe Heat shrink sleeves shall meet A WW A C2 l 6 , as manufactured by Canusa, Rachem or approved equal. D . Joint Bonds, Insulated Connections, and Flange Gaskets Joint Bonds, Insulated Connection , and Flange Gaskets s hall be in accordance with Section 15640 in the Appendix . E . Bend Fittings Northside lil Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061 OJ 8038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 12 of22 Nov ember 2007 All bend fittings shall be long radius to permit passage of pipeline pigs. F . Pipe Ends Pipe ends shall be lap welded slip joints, butt strap joint, flanged joint, or flexible coupled joint. Pipe ends shall be welded or harnessed where indicated and as necessary to resist thrust forces. I . Rubber Gasket and Joint Rubber gasket joints are not allowed for this project. 2 . Lap Welded Slip Joint a. Lap welded slip joint shall be provided in all locations for pipe larger than 60" and where joints are welded for thrust restraint. Ends of pipe, fittings, and specials for field welded joints shall be prepared with one ( 1) end expanded in order to receive a plain end making a bell and plain end type of joint. Clearance behveen the surfaces of lap joints shall not exceed I /8" at any point around the periphery. b. In addition to the provisions for a minimum lap of 1-1/2" as specified in A WWA C-200, the depth of bell shall be such as to provide for a minimum distance of 1" between the weld and the nearest tangent of the bell radius when welds are to be located on the inside of the pipe. c. Lap welded slip joints may be welded from the inside for pipe diameters 42" and larger. Lap welded slip joints may be welded on the inside or outside for pipe diameters smaller than 42". 3 . For Fittings with Flanges Flanged joints shall be provided at connections to valves and where indicated. Ends to be fitted with slip-on flanges shall have the longitudinal or spiral welds ground flush to accommodate the type of flanges provided . Pipe flanges and welding of flanges to steel pipe shall conform to the requirements of A WW A C207 and A WW A C206. Pipe flanges shall be of rated pressure equal to or greater than the adjacent pipe class. Flanges shall match the fittings or appurtenances which are to be attached. Flanges shall be Class E with 275 psi working pressure in accordance with A WWA C207 and in accordance with ANSI/ ASME B 16.1 Class 125 for areas designated with a 225 test pressure . 4. Flexible Couplings Flexible couplings shall be provided where specified. Ends to be joined by flexible couplings shall be of the plain end type, prepared as stipulated in A WWA C200. In addition, the welds on ends to be joined by couplings shall be ground flush to permit slipping the coupling in at least one ( 1) direction to clear the pipe joint. Harness bolts and lugs shall comply with A WW A Manual M 1 I. 5. But1 Strap Closure Joints Where necessary to make closure to pipe previously laid, closure joints shall be installed using butt strap joints in accordance with A WW A C206 and applicable provi s ions of this specification . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 06J 018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 13 of22 November 2007 G. Factory-Applied exterior Polyurethane Coatings 1. Applicator Qualifications: a. Equipment will be certified by the coating manufacturer to meet the requirements for material mixing, temperature control, application rate , and ratio control for multi-part coatings. b. Equipment not meeting the written requirements of the coating manufacturer shall be rejected for coating application until repairs or replacement of the equipment is made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. c. Personnel responsible for the application of the coating system shall have certification of attendance at the coating manufacturer's training class within the last three years . The certified applicator shall be present during all coating application work and shall have responsibility for controlling all aspects of the coating application. 2 . Surface Preparation a. Visible oil , grease, dirt, and contamination shall be removed in accordance with SSPC-SPI, solvent cleaning. b . Surface imperfections such as metal slivers, burrs, weld splatter, gouges, or delaminations in the metal shall be removed by filing or grinding prior to abrasive surface preparation . c . In cold weather or when moisture collects on the pipe and the temperature of the pipe is less than 45 degrees, preheat pipe to a temperature between 45 and 90 degrees and 5 degrees above dew point. d . Pipe shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting with a mixture of steel grit and shot to produce the surface preparation cleanliness as specified. Recycled abrasive shall be cleaned of debris and spent abrasive in an air wash separator. e . Grit and shot abrasive mixture and gradation shall be adequate to achieve a sharp angular surface profile of the minimum depth specified. f. Protect prepared pipe from humidity, moisture, and rain . Keep pipe clean, dry, and free of flash rust. All flash rust, imperfections, or contamination on cleaned pipe surface shall be removed by reblasting prior to primer application. g . Priming and coating of pipe shall be completed in a continuous operation the same day as surface preparation . h. Wire wheel or blast exterior surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SPl O; to a near-white metal blast cleaning with a 3.0 MJL angular profile in bare steel. 3 . Equipment: Two-component , 1 : l mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. 4 . Temperature : Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature . The tempe rature of the s urface shall not be Jess than 60 degrees F during application. Northside Il1 Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 14 of 22 5 . Humidity : Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet requirements of 2 .01 A ifrelative humidity exceed s 80 percent. 6 . Resin : Do not thin or mix resins; use as received . Store resins at a temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. 7. Application : Applicator shall be approved by the coating manufacturer and conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations . Apply directly to pipe to achieve a total (DFT) dry film thickness of35 mils. Multiple-pass, one coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. The main line pipe shall have a cutback at time of application so that there is approximately 3-inches of bare steel on either side of the location of the future weld. The cutback area shall be sandblasted in the shop to facilitate easier field surface preparation . The exterior bare steel area of the pipe shall be adequately protected during pipe handling and shipment. 8 . Recoating: Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush-blast or thoroughly sand the surface . Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry , high pressure compressed air. 9 . Curing: Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure, per manufacturer's recommendations . PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A . General I . Install steel pipe, fittings, specials, and appurtenances as specified and required for the proper functioning of the completed pipe line . Install pipe, fittings, and specials in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and A WW A Manual M-11. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grade indicated. Just before each joint of polyurethane coated steel pipe is lowered into the ditch it is to be inspected and tested for holidays. All damaged areas and holidays are to be repaired before the pipe is lowered into the trench . 2. The requirements of the plans and specifications govern for the excavation and backfilling of trenches for laying steel pipe, fittings, and specials . Place and consolidate embedment and backfill prior to removing pipe stulls. Use immersion vibration or other approved method to consolidate embedment material. Maximum allowable pipe deflection is limited to 2% for mortar coated steel pipe and 3% for polyurethane coated steel pipe. 3 . Keep the pipe clean during the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt , animals, and trash , and at the close of each operating day , effectively seal the open end of the pipe against the entrance of water using a gas keted night cap. Do not lay pipe in water. 4 . In s tall bo nds at all pipe joints, other than welded joints or in s ulated joints . B . Pipe Handlin g Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 15 of 22 Pipe shall be handled at all times with a minimum of two wide non-abrasive slings, belts or other equipment designed to prevent damage to the coating or lining. The equipment shall be kept in such repair that its continued u se is not injurious to the coating. The spacing of pipe supports required to handle the pipe shall be adequate to prevent cracking or damage to the lining or coating. C. Line Up and Bends 1. Line up pipe for joining so as to prevent damage thereto. Thoroughly clean the bell and spigot ends of each joint of pipe of foreign matter, rust and scale before placing spigot into bell. 2. Where abrupt changes in grade and direction occur, the Contractor shall employ special shop fabricated fittings for the purpose. Field cutting the ends of the steel pipe to accomplish angular changes in grade or direction of the line shall not be permitted. D. Pipe Laying -Rubber Gasket Joints Rubber Gasket joints are not allowed for this project. E. Pipe Laying -Welding Joints 1. Weld joints in accordance with the A WWA C206 for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation for welders and for Owner's representative to observe welds. Unless otherwise specified, welds shall be full circle fillet welds. Welding shall be completed after application of field applied joint coating. 2 . Adequate provision s for reducing temperature stresses shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3. After the pipe have been joined and properly aligned and prior to the start of the welding procedure, the spigot and bell shall be made essentially concentric by shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around the periphery of the joint. ln no case shall the clearance tol era nce be permitted to accumulate. 4 . Before welding, thoroughly clean pipe ends. Weld pipe by machine or by the manual shielded electric arc process. Welding shall be performed so as not to damage lining or coating. Cover the polyurethane coating as necessary to protect from welding. 5 . Furnish labor, equipment, tools and supplies, including shi e lded type welding rod. Protect welding rod from any deterioration prior to its use . If any portion of a box or carton is damaged, reject the entire box or carton. 6 . 1n all hand welding, the metal shall be deposited in successive layers. For hand welds, not more than 1 /8" of metal shall be deposited in each pass . Each pass except the final one, whether in butt or fillet welds, shall be thoroughly bobbed or peened to relieve shrinkage stresses and to remove dirt , slag, or flux before the succeeding bead is applied . Each pass shall be thoroughly fused into the plates at each side of the welding groove or fillet and shall not be permitted to pile up in the center of the weld . Undercutting along the side shall not be permitted. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 16 of 22 7 . Welds shall be free from pin hol es, non-metallic inclusions, ai r pockets, und e rcutting and/or any other defects. 8. If the ends of the pipe are laminated , split or damaged to the ex tent that satisfactory welding contact cannot be obtained, remove the pipe from the line. 9. Furnish each welder employed with a steel stencil for marking the welds, so that the work of each welder may be identified. Have each welder stencil the pipe adjacent to the weld with the stencil assigned to him. In the event any welder leaves the job, his stencil shall be voided and not duplicated if another welder is employed. 10. Use only competent, skilled and qualified workmen. Each welder employed by the Contractor shall be required to satisfactorily pass a welding test in accordance with A WWA C206 before being allowed to weld on the line. 11. After each welder has qualified in the preliminary tests referred to above, inspections shall be made of joints in the line . Any welder making defective welds shall not be allowed to continue to weld. 12. Dye penetrant tests in accordance with ASTM E 165 , or magnetic particle test in accordance with A WWA C206 and se t forth in ANSI/A WS D.1 .1. shall be performed by the Contractor under the supervision and inspection of the Owner's Representative or an independent testing laboratory, on all full welded joints. Welds that are defective will be replaced or repaired, whichever is deemed necessary by the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. 13. If the Contractor disagrees with the Engineer's interpretation of welding tests , test sections may be cut from the joint for physical testing. The Contractor s hall bear the expense of repairing the joint, regardless of the results of physical testing. The procedure for repairing the joint shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding. F . Inside Joint Grouting for Pipe with Plant-Applied Mortar Lining Upon completion of backfilling of the pipe trench, fill the inside joint recess with a stiff cement mortar. Prior to placing of mortar, clean out dirt or trash which has collected in the joint, and moisten the concrete surfaces of the joint space by spraying or brushing with a wet brush . Where the mortar joint opening is one inch or wider, such as where trimmed spigots are required, apply a bonding agent to mortar and steel surface prior to placing joint mortar. Ram or pack the stiff mortar into the joint space and take extreme care to ensure that no voids remain in the joint space. After the joint has bee n filled, level the surfaces of the joint mortar with the interior surfaces of the pipe with a steel trowel so that the surface is smooth. Interior joints of pipe 24" and smaller shall have the bell buttered with mortar, prior to inserting the spigot, such that when the spigot is pushed into position it will extrude surplus mortar from the joint. The surplus mortar shall be struck off flush with the inside of the pipe by pulling a filled burlap bag or inflated ball through the pipe with a rope . G. Exterior Gasket Joint Protection for Polyurethane Coated Steel Pipe 1. General Buried pipe joints sha ll be field coated after pipe assembly in accordance with A WWA C2 l 6, using Heat Shrink Sleeves . Width of h ea t shrink s le eve shall be suffici en t to overlap the polyurethane Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 17 of 22 November 2007 coating by a minimum of 3-inches . Overlapping of two or more heat shrink sleeves to achieve the necessary width will not be permitted. 2 . Heat Shrink Sleeves a. Primer: Provide as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. b . Filler Mastic: Mastic filler shall be provided for all bell and spigot and coupling type joints. Size and type shall be as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer for type of pipe and joint. c. Joint Coating: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with a mastic sealant, 85-mils total thickness, suitable for pipeline operating temperature, sleeve material recovery as recommended by the manufacturer. High recovery sleeves shall be provided for bell and spigot and coupling style joints with a minimum of SO-percent recovery. Sleeve length shall provide a minimum of3-inches overlap onto intact pipe coating on each side of the joint. Width to take into consideration shrinkage of the sleeve due to installation and joint profile. d . Manufacturers: Canusa, or approved equal. 3. Installation a . Clean pipe surface and adjacent coating of all mud, oil, grease, rust, and other foreign contaminates with a wire brush in accordance with SSPC-SP2 , Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC- SP3 , Power Tool Cleaning. Remove oil or grease contamination by solvent wiping the pipe and adjacent coating in accordance with SSPC-SP I, Solvent cleaning. Clean the full circumference of the pipe and a minimum of 6-inches onto the existing coating. b. Remove all loose or damaged pipe coating at joint and either repair the coating as specified herein or increase the length of the joint coating, where reasonable and practical. c . Complete joint bonding of pipe joints before application of joint coating. d. Joint bonds shall be low profile bonds and all gaps and crevices around the bonds shall be filled with mastic sealant. e . Store sleeves in shipping box until use is required. Keep dry and sheltered from exposure to direct sunlight. Store off the ground or concrete floors and maintain at a temperature between 60 °F and I 00°F as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. f. Metal surface shall be free of all dirt, dust, and flash rusting prior to sleeve application. g. Preheat pipe uniformly to I 40°F to I 60 °F or as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. Monitor pipe temperature using a surface temperature gauge, infrared thermometer, or color changing crayons . Protect preheated pipe from rain, snow, frost, or moisture with tenting or s hields and do not permit the joint to cool. h . Prime joint with specified primer and fill all cracks , crevices, and gaps with mastic filler in accordance with the manufacturer 's recommendations for the full circumfere nce of the pipe. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTJON 02617 Steel Pipe Page 18 of 22 November 2007 1. Apply heat shrink sleeve when it is at a minimum temperature or 60oF and while maintaining the pipe temperature above the preheat temperature specified . Apply sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and center the sleeve over the joint to provide a minimum of 3- inches overlay onto the existing pipe coating. J. Apply heat to the sleeve using either propane fire infrared heaters or wrap around heaters. Hold flame a minimum of 6-inches from the sleeve surface. Periodically roll the coating on the pipe surface. Heat from the center of the sleeve to the outer edge until properly seated, then begin in the opposite direction. Monitor sleeve for color change, where appropriate, or with appropriate temperature gauges. k. Completed joint sleeve shall be fully bonded to the pipe and existing coating surface, without void·s , mastic beading shall be visible along the full circumference of the sleeve, and there shall be no wrinkling or excessive bums on the sleeves. Sleeves which do not meet these requirements shall be removed and the joint recoated as directed by the Engineer. Minor repairs may be repaired using heat shrink sleeve repair kits. I. Allow the sleeve to cool before moving, handling, or backfilling. In hot climates, provide shading from direct sunlight. Water quenching will be allowed on ly when permitted by the sleeve manufacturer. H. Protective Welded Joints Coating System for Polyurethane Coated Steel Pipe I. General a. Application of protective coating at the pipe joints will be as follows : apply a three layer joint coating system consisting of a factory applied 35 mil polyurethane coating, a field applied 60 mil by 6-inch wide strip of CANU SA HCO Wrapid Tape heat resistant tape at the location of the welding, and a field applied 110 mil (full recovered thickness) by 18-inch wide CANUSA Aqua Wrap high shrink heat shrinkable joint sleeve. After the heat shrinkable joint sleeve is installed, the Contractor my backfill the trench, and then weld the joint. b. The Contractor is responsible for his operations so that they do not damage the factory applied coating system . c. When applying the three layer joint coating system for post welding the joints, the Contractor must show that his operation will not damage the joint coating system to the Engineer's satisfaction. The Contractor will be required to fully uncover a maximum of 10 joints, selected at random by the Engineer or Owner to visually inspect and test the joint after welding. Any damage must be repaired. If the Contractor's welding procedure damages the three layer joint coating system, the Contractor, at the direction of the Engineer, will be required to modify his welding procedure. 2 . Joint Coating (3 Layer) a. Apply three Layer Joint Coating System before Welding the Joint b . Pipe Manufacturing and Heat Tape -A 35 mil thickness polyurethane coating shall be applied over e ntire length of pipe. The Contractor shall field apply 60 mil thick by 6-inich wide strip of Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 19 of22 November 2007 CANUSA HCO Wrapid Tape heat resi s tant tape to the exterior bell end of the pipe , centered on the location of the welding, over a 35 mil factory applied polyurethane coating. c. Surface Preparation and In s tallation for Heat Shrinkable Joint Sleeve 1. Clean pipe surface and adjacent coating of all mud , oil, grease, rust, and other foreign contaminates with a wire brush in accordance with SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning. Remove oil or grease contamination by solvent wiping the pipe and adjacent coating in accordance with SSPC-SP I, Solvent cleaning. Clean the full circumference of the pipe and a minimum of 6-inches onto the existing coating. 11. Remove all loose or damaged pipe coating at joint and either repair the coating as specified herein or increase the length of the joint coating, where reasonable and practical. 111. Complete joint bonding of pipe joints before application of joint coating. 1v. Joint bonds shall be low profile bonds and all gaps and crevices around the bonds shall be filled with mastic sealant. v. Store sleeves in shipping box until use is required. Keep dry and sheltered from exposure to direct sunlight. Store off the ground or concrete floors and maintain at a temperature between 60°F and I 00°F as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. v1. Metal surface shall be free of all dirt , dust, and flash rusting prior to sleeve application . vii . Preheat pipe uniformly to I 40 °F to I 60°F or as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. Monitor pipe temperature us ing a surface temperature gauge , infrared thermometer, or color changing crayons. Protect preheated pipe from rain , snow, frost, or moisture with tentin g or shields and do not permit the joint to cool. viii. Prime joint with specified primer and fill all cracks , crevices, and gaps with mastic filler in accordance with the manufacturer 's recommendations for the full circumference of the pipe . 1x. Apply heat shrink sleeve when it is at a minimum temperature or 60°F and while maintaining the pipe temperature above the preheat temperature specified. Apply sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer 's instructions and center the sleeve over the joint to provide a minimum of 3-inches overlay onto the existing pipe coating. x . Apply heat to the sleeve using either propane fire infrared heaters or wrap around heaters. Hold flame a minimum of 6-inches from the sleeve surface. Periodically roll the coating on the pipe surface. Heat from the center of the sleeve to the outer edge until properly seated, then begin in the opposite direction. Monitor sleeve for color change, where appropriate, or with appropriate temperature gauges . x1. Completed joint sleeve s hall be fully b o nded to the pipe and existing coating surface, without voids, ma s tic beading shall be vi s ible along the full circumference of the sleeve, and there s hall be no wrinkling or excessive bums on the s leeves. Sleeves which do not Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 20 of22 November 2007 meet these requirements shall be removed and the joint recoated as directed by the Engineer. Minor repairs may be repaired using heat shrink sleeve repair kits. xii. Allow the sleeve to cool before moving, handling, or backfilling. In hot climates, provide shading from direct sunlight. Water quenching will be allowed only when permitted by the sleeve manufacturer. d. Inspection, Testing, and Repairs Holiday testing shall be performed using a wet sponge holiday tester at each joint after field application of heat shrinkable joint sleeve. If any holidays or cuts are detected, the sleeve shall be repaired using CANUSA Repair Patch Kit (CRPK) or approved equal. The damaged area shall be covered with a minimum of 50 mm overlap around the damaged area. I. Protection of Buried Metal Buried ferrous metal such as bolts and flanges which cannot be protected with factory or field -applied polyurethane coatings or heat shrink sleeves shall be coated with two wraps of wax tape and encased in flowable fill. J. Repair and Field Touchup of Polyurethane Coating I. Apply Madison GP JI (E) Touchup Polyurethane Coating or equal Futura Coating for repair and field touch-up of polyurethane coating. 2. Repair Procedure -Holidays: a. Remove all traces of oil , grease, dust, dirt, etc. b. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper ( 40 grit). c . Apply a 35 mil coat ofrepair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing or rolling in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations . d . Retest for Holiday . 3. Repair Procedure -Field Cuts or Large Damage: a. If in the opinion of the Owner, or Owner's representative, that the polyurethane coating is excessively damaged . The pipe segment will be rejected until the coating system is removed and replaced so that the system is in a like-new condition. b. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating . c. Remove all traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, etc. d. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper ( 40 grit). Feather edges and include ov erlap of 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 2 I of22 November 2007 e . Apply a 35 mil coat ofrepair material described above, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Work repair material into scratched surface by bru shing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least I inch of roughed area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. f. Test repairs for Holidays . K . Exterior Joint Protection for Mortar Coated Steel Pipe Make the exterior joint by placing a joint wrapper around the pipe and secure in place with two (2) metal straps . The wrapper shall be 9" wide for pipe 36" and larger, and 7" wide for smaller pipe, hemmed on each side. The wrapper shall be fiberglass reinforced or burlap cloth , with lengths encircling the pipe, leaving enough opening between ends to allow the mortar to be poured inside the wrapper into the joint. Fill the joint with mortar from one side in one ( 1) continuous operation until the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the filling of the joint, pat or manipulate the sides of the wrapper to settle the mortar and expel any entrapped air. Leave wrappers in place undi sturbed until mortar has set-up. L. Patch of Mortar Coating I. Have the Pipe Manufacturer repair any joint of pipe that has exterior coating cracks large r than 0.005 " (a hairline) by using an approved method . If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the pipe is not suitable for repair, reject, plainly mark, and remove the pipe from the project site . 2. Remove, rep lace or reject any disbanded coating. Apply bonding agent to patch area. Excessive field-patching of coating shall not be permitted . Patching will not be allowed where area to be repaired exceeds 100 square inches or has dimensions grater than 12 ". In general, there s hall not be more than one patch on either the lining or coating on any one joint of pipe. A patch larger than I 00 square inches or 12 " in greatest dimension shall not be accepted. Adequately cure patches. M. Patch of Lining (Plant or Field) 1. Repair cracks larger than 1/16". Pipes with disbonded linings will be rejected. Excessive patching of lining s hall not be permitted . Apply bonding agent to patch area. Patching of lining shall be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimension greater than 12". In general, there shall be not more than one (I) patch in the linin g of a ny joint of pipe . 2 . Wherever necessary to patch the pipe, make the patch with the mortar indic ated . Do no t in stall patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and unl ess a pproved by the Engineer. N. Quality Control of Field Applied Polyurethane Coating I . Surface Preparation: Visually inspect surface preparation to ensure cleanlin ess and dryness requirements have been met. Use Testex tape on at least l joint/day to ensure th at adequate profile is bein g achieved . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02617 Steel Pipe Page 22 of22 November 2007 2. Visual: Visually inspect cured coating to ensure that the coating is completely cured with no blisters, "sticky" or "gooey" areas. Also check to ensure that the coating completely covers the steel and existing coating. 3 . Thickness : Use a magnetic dry film thickness gauge on cured coating to ensure adequate thickness has been achieved according to SSPC PA2. 4. Adhesion: Perform the following procedure on a minimum of I joint per day: a . Select area to test that has cured for at least I hour for fast setting coatings. b. Make small "X" cut through the coating down to the steel with a sharp knife. c. Each arm of the "X" should be approximately I" long. d. With the point of the knife, attempt to remove the coating at the center of the "X" by sliding/poking the knife point under the coating . e . Reject if coating is removed easily in large sections (>2 in2). Note that some qualitative judgment is necessary and that the longer the coating has cured, the greater the adhesion. f. Repair area with GP Il (E) Touchup (or similar material) 5 . Holiday Testing: Holiday testing shall be performed using a wet sponge holiday tester at each joint no sooner than one hour after field application of polyurethane coating. 6 . Inspection at Welding Joints: When applying the three layer joint coating system for post welding the joints, the Contractor must show that his operation will not damage the joint coating system to the Engineer's satisfaction. The Contractor will be required to fully uncover a maximum of I 0 joints, selected at random by the Engineer or Owner to visually inspect and test the joint after welding. Any damage must be repaired. If the Contractor's welding procedure damages the three layer joint coating system, the Contractor, at the direction of the Engineer, will be required to modify his welding procedure. 3 .02 HYDROSTATIC TEST A. Perform a hydrostatic test in accordance per City of Fort Worth Standards. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK : SECTION 02641 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Page I of3 A . Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into operation resilient seated gate valves and actuator as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. References: I. American Water Works Association (A WW A) AWWAC509 Resilient seated gate valve for water supply service. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTMA48 ASTM Al26 ASTMA436 ASTMA536 Gray Iron Castings Gray Iron Castings for Valves , Flanges, and Pipe Fittings Austenitic Gray Iron Castings Ductile Iron Castings. B . Unit Responsibility and Coordination : The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this section to be furnished by the valve manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all valve components including the actuator. Any component of each complete unit not provided by the valve manufacturer shall be de signe d, fabricated, testing, and installed by factory-authorized representatives experienced in the design and manufacture of the valve equipment. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work . 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS : The equipment to be provided under this section shall be suitable for installation and operation either inside vault structure or directly buried for a gate valve . 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A . Submittals required after award of contract and prior to installation: 1. Technical bulletins and brochures on resilient seated gate valves. B . Submittals required prior to final walk through: 1. Operation and Mainte nance Manual. I .05 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS: Northside JlJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02641 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Page 2 of 3 A. Furnish one set of special tools required for the proper servicing of all equipment supplied under these Specifications, packed in a suitable steel tool chest with a lock . 1.06 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: A . All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. C . The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E. Storage and Protection: Take special care to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, preventing any deformation. 1.07 WARRANTY: A. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Acceptance . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES: A. Resilient seated gate valves 4" through 36" shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of A WWA C509 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this specification. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NSF Standard 61. All valve materials for components in contact with potable water shall be resistant to chloramines. B. Valve body shall be ductile iron per ASTM A536. Flanged ends shall be furnished in accordance with ANSVAWWA CI 15/A21.15 . Standard Flanged Drilling. Mechanical Joints shall be furnished with outlets which conform to ANSVAWWA Cl l l/A21.l l mechanical joint requirements . C. The di sc shall be constructed of ductile iron fully encapsulated m rubber. No iron shall be ex po sed o n the di sc. Northside 1II Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 Nov e mber 2007 SECTION 02641 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Page 3 of 3 D . Hex head bolt, and hex nut shall be Steel ASTM A307 Gr. B, Zinc Plate per ASTM B633, SC3 for non -buried service (4" through 12" valves). Hex head bolt and hex nut shall be 304 or 316 Stainless Steel for buried service (all sizes) and for valves 16-inch through 30-inch (non-buried service). E. T-Bolts shall be high strength low alloy Cor-Ten or approved equal. F . Resilient seated gate valves shall be US Pipe, Clow, American Flow Control, Mueller, or equal for size 4" through 36". Valves 16 " and larger shall be contained within a vault as shown on the plans. G . Gate valves in buried service shall be provided with polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWACIOS. H . Resilient seated gate valves for buried service shall be furnished with a square 2" operating nut . The valve box shall be Mueller H-10360 or Engineer approved equal. I. In all non-buried service, handwheel operators shall be furnished , unless otherwise specified . J . Re s ilient seated gate valves s hall be non-rising stem type unless otherwise specified. K . Resilient seated gate valves used as part of Air Release Valve assembly shall be non-rising stem with enclo sed miter gearing and a fusion bonded epoxy body. L. All re silient seated gate valves shall be provided to open in clockwise direction . PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01. INSTALLATION: A . All re s ilient seated gate valves shall be installed m accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings . END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02642 AWWA Butterfly Valve Page I of 5 PART 1 -GENERAL I.OJ SCOPE OF WORK : A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into operation, A WWA butterfly valves for buried and plant applications as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES : A. American Water Works Association (A WWA). AWWAA-C504 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings. ASTM A 126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. ASTM A436 Austtenitic Gray lron Casting. ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Casings. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRJPTION A. The arrangement shown on the drawings is based upon the be st information available to the Engineer at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions to any specific equipment unless otherwise shown or specified. Therefore, it may be anticipated that the structural supports, foundations, and connected piping shown, in part of in whole, may have to be changed in order to accommodate the equipment furni shed. No additional payment will be made for such changes. All necessary calcu lations and drawings for any related redesign sha ll be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to beginning the work. B. The valve shall be designed to operate with the following working conditions without damage to the valve and without leakage across the street. Valve Application Min. Max. Non-Normal Flow Maximum Test Service Description Acceptable Shock Line Range Flow Pressure Valve Class Pressure (gpm) (gpm) 24" Water Line l50B 150 psi 1,0 00-7 ,000 15 ,000 150 psi Tank Pedestal 16" Water Line l50B 150 psi 1,000-3,000 8,500 150 psi Tank Pedestal and NSN Valve Vault C. The Butterfly valves sha ll operate satisfactorily over the complete operating range shown. The eq uipment to be provided under this section s hall be s uitable for installation and operation at e levati ons for about 850 feet above sea level weather-protected structure s and in buried service . Outside ambient temperatures range betwee n O and 110 degrees. F, and Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02642 AWWA Butterfly Valve Page 2 of 5 reported water temperatures vary between 50 and J 05 degrees F. Relat ive humidity is expected to range between 5 and 100 percent. 4 . QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The valve shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of Butterfly valves having similar service and size. The valves covered by the specifications are intended to be standard equipment of that has proven ability. The following manufacturers and models are acceptable. Manufacturer Valmatic B . All other valves will be considered a substitution, and will be required to submit a substitution request. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of any substitution requested . If the substitution request is found to be unacceptable by the Engineer then the contractor shall provide the listed equipment at no additional expense to the owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays as a result of a substitution request. C. The listing above does not imply that the valve or the manufacturer's standard product is acceptable. The successful manufacturer will be required to conform to all specifications. D. Unit Responsibility and Coordination: 1. The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this section to be furnished by the valve manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all unit components including but not limited to the valve, actuator and extension stems . 2. Any component of each complete unit not provided by the valve manufacturer shall be designed, fabricated, tested , and installed by factory-authorized representatives experienced in the design and manufacture of the equipment. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals required after award of contract and prior to shipping. I . Technical bulletins and brochures on butterfly valves. 2. Certification of compliance with the specifications. B . Submittals required prior to final walk through: I. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS: A. None Required . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.07 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: SECTION 02642 AWWA Butterny Valve Page 3 of 5 A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B . All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site . C. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E . Storage and Protection: Take special care to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun , or exposed to extremes in temperature, preventing any deformation. 1.08 WARRANTY: A . The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period , it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 20 .1 16" and 24" BUTTERFLY VALVES: A . Butterfly valves shall be in general conformance the latest revision of A WWA Standard C504 butterfly valves and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this specification as well as City of Fort Worth material specification EI-30. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NSF Standard 61 . B. Valve bodies shall be of ductile iron per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 or fabricated steel ASTM A36. Flange end valves shall be of the short body design with Class I 25 Standard flanged ends faced and drilled per ANSI B 16.1 standard for cast iron flanges. Flanges shall be designed for the test pressure of the valve. Mechanical joint end valves shall meet the requirements of A WWA Cl 11/ANSI 21.1 I. Flanged ends shall be provided unless otherwise specified. C. Discs shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 Grade or fabricated steel ASTM A36. Disc and shaft connection shall be made with tapered pins of either monel or stainless steel. D. Valve shaft shall be type 304 stainless steel or equal. Valve s ha ft seal s s hall be s elf- compensating V-type packing with a minimum of 4 sealing rings . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 02642 AWWA Butterfly Valve Page 4 ofS November 2007 E. The seat shall be a Buna-N for water and shall be molded in and bonded to the disc. Seats on Disc : Resilient seats shall be located on the valve disc and shall provide a 360 degree continuous, uninterrupted seating surface. Seats shall be mechanically retained with a stainless steel retaining ring and stainless steel cap screws which shall pass through both the resilient seat and the retaining ring. The resilient seat's mating surface shall be to a 360 degree continuous uninterrupted stainless steel body seat ring. Resilient seats shall be field adjustable and replaceable. F. Valve shaft bearings shall be non-metallic and permanently lubricated . G. Unless otherwise specified, exterior and interior metallic surfaces of each valve shall be shop painted per the latest revision of A WWA C504. H . Painting and Coatings: All surfaces of the valve shall be clean, dry and free from grease before applying paint or coating. The valve interior and exterior surfaces, except for the seating surfaces, shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard coating or as specified by contract. All internal exposed surfaces that are susceptible to corrosion shall be coated with a Polymide cured, rust inhibiting epoxy. Surfaces to be coated shall be prepared and sand-blasted per Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC-SP- 10-638 No. 10. Final coating thickness shall be 16 mils minimum. All surfaces shall be inspected for proper dry film thickness using a magnetic dry film thickness gauge. Tests for invisible holidays shall be conducted using a low voltage, wet sponge holiday or leak detector. I. Testing : Each valve shall be shop tested for leaks in the closed position with the valve horizontal. The upper surface of the valve disc shall be visible and covered with a pool of water at O psi pressure. Air pressure, equivalent to the design rating of the valve, shall be applied to the lower face of the disc for at least five minutes with no indication of leakage (i.e. bubbles in the water pool) during the test period. The valve body shall be hydrostatically tested at twice the rated pressure for ten minutes with the valve in the slightly open position. During this test, there shall be no leakage or seeping through the valve body, weld or valve trunnions. 2 .02 MANUAL ACTUATORS: A. Valves shall be provided with manual actuators unless otherwise specified or indicated on the plans . B . Valves shall be opened by turning the actuator clockwise and close counter clockwise. C. Manual actuators shall be fully greased, packed and have stops in the open and closed position . The actuator shall have a mechanical stop which will withstand an input torque of 450 ft. lbs . again s t the stop. The actuator shall have a built in packing leak bypass to eliminate possible packing leakage into the actuator housing. D. Butterfly valves for buried service shall be furnished with a 2" operating nut. The actuator shall be placed in a vault as indicated on the plans and have extension to the top of the vault. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 E . A position indicator shall be provided. F. Actuator shall be worm-gear type, as follows: SECTION 02642 AWWA Butterfly Valve Pag e 5 o f 5 I) Worm gear manual operator shall comply fully with AWWA C-504, latest edition . 2) Worm gear drive sleeve and worm shaft shall be of solid, one-piece design; bolted segments or pinned worms will not be acceptable . Drive sleeve shall include an integral spline to accept a removable bottom-entry spline bushing for valve shaft connection . 3) If required for torque purposes, spur gear reducers may be provided for increased torque outputs and to reduce handwheel diameter. 4) Worm gear operator shall include handwheel with maximum 80# rim pull. 5) Materials of Construction : Housing: Drive sleeve: Worm : Bearings: Finish : Fasteners : Ductile Iron Bronze Alloy steel with splined input drive connection Heavy duty tapered roller bearings Thermostatically Applied Polyester Powdercoat Stainless steel 6) Manual gears shall be capable of being field retrofit with an electric motor operator in the future without major modifications . With spur gear removed , splined worm gear input shaft and motor adapter flange shall be easily added to accept a multi-tum "torque-only" electric valve actuator. Supplier shall include the Number of Turns required to complete on Open-to-Close stroke in the Equipment Submittal. 7) Worm gear operators shall be EIM Type WO for non-buried applications or Type WB for direct-buried application s or Engineer pre-Approved Equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All butterfly valves shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings . B . Installation and adjustment shall be checked and approved by a manufacturer 's factory representative. After acceptance, the representative s hall address a letter to the Engineer outlining all installation and start up procedures. The letter shall include statement that the valves are installed per the manufacturer 's recommendations . The manufacturer or his qualified representative shall conduct training ses s ion for the Owner 's p~I in __ th e operation and maint e nance of the valve . END OF SE CTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL I .OJ SCOPE OF WORK: SECTION 02644 Expansion Joints and Couplings Page I of 3 A . Furnish all labor, materials , equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into service expansion joints and couplings, as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. References : ASTM A283 -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel ASTM A285 -Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength AWWA 219-Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe ANSI/NSF Standard 61 -Drinking Water System Components 1.03 SUBMITTALS : A . Submittals required after award of contract and prior to installation: I . Technical bulletins and brochures on expansion joints and couplings . 1.04 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: A . All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B . All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site . C . Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corros10n. D . Storage and Protection: Take special care to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, preventing any deformation . 1.05 WARRANTY: A . The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Acceptance. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS SECTION 02644 Expansion Joints and Couplings Page 2 of 3 A . Expansion joints shall meet or exceed the following design criteria: 1. Working pressure= 150 psi 2. Test pressure= 225 psi 3. Coating requirement= fusion bonded epoxy powder coating, or equal 4. Expansion length shall range from 5 to I 0-inches 5. Slip pipe shall be stainless steel B . Expansion joint installed on elevated storage tank inlet/outlet pipe shall be single end Smith-Blair series 611 or approved equal. Joint diameter shall be the same as adjoining pipe shown on p lans . C . The expansion joint shall be tied to the line and supported as shown on the plans. D . Provide slip pipe, limit rods, gland bolts, washers and nuts and install according to the manufacturer's recommendations . E . Fusion bonded epoxy coatings, or approved equal are required where specified. Final coatings shall be field applied as required by the painting specifications . 2.02 STEEL COUPLINGS A . Bolted steel couplings shall meet or exceed the following design criteria: 1. Working pressure= 150 psi 2 . Test pressure= 225 psi 3. Coating requirement= fusion bonded epoxy powder coating, or equal 4 . Sleeve length= 14-inches (unless specified) 5. Steel couplings shall be manufactured by Smith-Blair B . Provide control rods, control rod plates, washers and bolts and install according to the plans and manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor studs are not allowed for restraint. C. Apply paint to steel couplings as required for adjoining pipe . D. Fusion bonded epoxy coatings, or approved equal are required where specified. Final c oatings shall be field applied as required by the painting specifications . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.03 FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS SECTION 02644 Expansion Joints and Couplings Page 3 of 3 A. Flange coupling adapters shall meet or exceed the following design criteria: 1. Working pressure = I 50 psi 2. Test pressure = 225 psi 3. Coating requirement = fusion bonded epoxy powder coating with an average thickness of I 2 mils 4. Bolts and nuts shall be type 304 stainless steel 5. Gaskets shall be Grade 30 standard 6. Body shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 7. Flanges shall be AWWA C207 class D, ANSI Bl 6.1 class 125 drilling B. Flange coupling adapters shall be Smith-Blair Series 913 or approved equal. C. Fusion bonded epoxy coatings, or approved equal are required where specified. Final coatings shall be field applied as required by the painting specifications. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01. All expansion joints and couplings shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as s hown on the drawings . 3.02. Testing: All expansion joints and couplings shall be pressure tested as a part of the pipe . END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: SECTION 02653 Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flow Meter Page 1 of 4 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into operation, Transit-Time Ultrasonic flow meters as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A . The meter shall consist of: I. Acoustic Transducers 2. Interconnecting Cable 3. Remote Microprocessor Based Electronic Transmitter 4. Fabricated windowed spool piece B. The arrangement shown on the drawings is based upon the best information available to the Engineer at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions of any specific equipment unless otherwise shown or specified. Therefore, it may be anticipated that the structural supports, foundations and connected piping shown, in part or in whole, may have to be changed in order to accommodate the equipment furnished. No additional payment will be made for such changes . All necessary calculations and drawings for any related redesign shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to beginning the work . C. The valve shall be designed to operate with the following working conditions. Normal Flow Range Maximum Flow Range Operating Pressure Test Pressure 300 gpm -3,000 gpm 8 ,500 gpm 30 psi-100 psi 150 psi D. The meter shall operate satisfactorily over the complete operating range shown. The equipment to be provided under this section shall be suitable for installation and operation at elevations about 844 feet above sea level inside a vault and in buried service. Outside ambient temperatures range between 10 and 110 de g rees F, and reported water temperatures vary between 50 and 115 degrees F relative humidity is expected to range between 5 and 100 percent. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The meter shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of Transit- Time Ultrasonic Flow Meters having similar service and size. The meter covered by the specifications is intended to be standard equipment that has proven ability. The following manufacturers and models are acceptable: Manufacturer 1. Endress + Hauser 93C Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02653 Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flow Meter Page 2 of 4 B. All other meters will be considered a substitution , and will be subject to the requirements specified in Section D-8 and D-42. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of any substitution requested. If the substitution request is found to be unacceptable by the Engineer then the contractor shall provide the listed equipment at no additional expense to the owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays as a result of a substitution request. C. The listing above does not imply that the pump or the manufacturer's standard product is acceptable . The successful manufacture will be required to conform to all specifications. D. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY AND COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this section to be furnished by the meter manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all unit components. Any component of each complete unit not provided by the meter manufacturer shall be designed, fabricated, tested, and installed by factory-authorized representatives experienced in the design and manufacture of the equipment. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of work. 1.04 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS: A. Furnish one set of special tools required for the proper servicing of all equipment supplied under these Specifications, packed in a suitable steel tool chest with a lock . 1.05 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site . C. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. D . Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E. Storage and Protection: Take special care to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, preventing any deformation. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period , it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Acceptance . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 Windowed Spool Piece: SECTION 02653 Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flow Meter Page 3 of 4 A. The spool piece shall be fabricated from epoxy coated carbon steel B. The spool piece shall have an inside diameter as shown on plans, and be 30-inches long face to face. C. The spool piece shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 . All interior coating shall be NFS 61 approved. D . Spool flanges shall be ANSI B16.l Class 125 drilling. E. Design shall incorporate externally mounted sensors that are factory mounted . The sensors shall also be field replaceable without removing spool piece or dewatering the line. 2.02 TRANSMITTER REQUIREMENTS: The transmitter shall contain all the circuitry necessary to produce a 4-20 mA DC signal linear with the flow rate. The transmitter shall be capable of measuring and totalizing forward and reverse flow. It shall be microprocessor controlled. The microprocessor shall be of a single chip design using 512 bytes of EEPROM, and 512 bytes of RAM. The transmitter shall be housed in a foam-molded polycarbonate enclosure suitable for wall/panel mounting, rated NEMA 4X. The display on enclosure will be a 24-character, 2-line alphanumeric LDC clearly indicating instantaneous flow rate and totalized flow information with the engineering units and multiplier as specified . The transmitter shall utilize menu-driven sequencing of the internal functions from the front panel switches without the need or use of external equipment. -RATE INDICATION -TOTALIZATION -ON-LINE METER STATUS -SELF-TEST -METER IDENTIFICATION AND TAG NUMBER -4-20 mA ZERO ADJUSTMENT -FLOW DAMPING -METER RESCALE -METER RECALIBRATION Meter output shall be an isolated 4-20 mA DC signal linearly proportional to flow rate operating into a maximum of l 000 ohms. The power requirements for the meter shall be a maximum of 5 watts operation on 117 VAC 50/60 Hz. It shall be capable of operating on 12 VDC continuous or battery back up. The temperature range for the transmitter shall be from (32° to 140° F) or (0° to 60° C). The transmitter shall be equipped with a serial communication port capable of interactive communication with hand-held microcomputers or mainframe machines operating in a Modbus format. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02653 Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flow Meter Page 4 of 4 The flowmeter shall measure, indicate and totalize the flow within the following parameters: Accuracy +/-1 % of actual flow above 0.1 fps velocity. Linearity of the units shall be+/-0.5%. Repeatability to within +/-0 .25%. Sensitivity of+/-0.005 ft./sec. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION: A . All flow meters shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. B. The meter shall be calibrated in the field based on the flows specified above . Installation and adjustment shall be checked and approved by a manufacturer's factory representative. After acceptance, the representative shall address a letter to the Engineer outlining all installation and start up procedures. The letter shall include a statement that the valves are installed per the manufact urer's recommendations. The manufacturer or his qualified representative shall conduct a training session for the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the meters and provide O & M manuals. The factory representative shall be provided on site for start up. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: SECTION 02831 Chain Link Fencing Page I of3 Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-I Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of chain link fences is indicated on drawings. The fence shall be 8'-0" high above grade. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Provide chain link fences and gates as complete units controlled by a single source including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, and installation instructions for metal fencing, fabric , gates and accessories. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Dimensions indicated for pipe, roll-formed, and H-sections are outside dimensions, exclusive of coatings . B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Galvanized Steel Fencing and Fabric: Allied Fence, Inc. American Fence Corp. Anchor Fence, Inc. 2.02 STEEL FABRIC: A. Fabric: No. 9 ga. (0 .148" + 0 .005") size steel wires, 2" mesh, with both top and bottom selvages twisted and barged. Furni s h one-piece fabric widths. B. Fabric Finish : Galvanized , ASTM A 392 , Class I , with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq .ft. of s urface. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.03 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES: SECTION 02831 Chain Link Fencing Page 2 of 3 A. Steel Framework, General : Galvanized steel , ASTM A 120 or A 123, with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq .ft . of surface. B. Fittings and Accessories : Galvanized, ASTM A 153, with zinc weights per Table I. C. End, Comer and Pull Posts: 2.875" OD steel pipe, 5.79 lbs. per Jin.ft. D. Line Posts: Space IO' o .c. maximum, unless otherwise indicated: 2.375 11 OD steel pipe, 3 .65 lbs. per Jin.ft. E . Tension Wires: 7-gage, coated coil spring wire, metal and finish to match fabric. Locate at bottom. F. Post Tops: Provide weathertight closure cap with loop to receive toprail; one cap for each post. G. Stretcher Bars: One-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross-section of3/l 6 11 x 3/4 11 • Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each comer and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post. H. Stretcher Bar Bands: Space not over I 5 11 o .c., to secure stretcher bars to end , comer, pull, and gate posts. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed , unless otherwise permitted. B. Excavation : Drill or hand excavate (using post hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undistributed or compacted soil. 1. If not indicated on drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameters as recommended by fence manufacturer, but not Jess than 4 times largest cross-section dimension of post. 2 . Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 11 lower than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 3611 below finish grade surface . C. Setting Posts : Center and align posts in holes 3 11 above bottom of excavation . I . Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation . Check each post for vertical and top alignment , and hold in position during placement and finishing op e rations . Northside IIl Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 Novembe r 2007 SECTION 02831 Chain Link Fencing Page 3 of 3 2 . Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2" above grade and trowel to a crown to shed water. D. Top Rails : 1.66" OD steel pipe, 2.27 lb/ft. J . Run rail continuously through post caps, bending to radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. E. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. F. Tension Wire : Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 ga. galvanized steel hog rings spaced 24" o.c. G. Fabric: Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wire. Install fabric on outside or the security side of fence , and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released . H. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15" o .c . I. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached , clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Tie fabric to line posts, with wire ties spaced 12" o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces, with wire ties spaced 24" o .c . Tie fabric to tension wire, with hog rings spaced 24" o.c. J. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. K. Mow Strip: Provide a 24" x 4" concrete mow strip which shall be flush with the propose d grade. Concrete shall be a 3000 psi mix. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA. No. 061018038 SECTION 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Page I of 5 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTJON OF WORK INCLUDED IN THlS SECTION: A. Fine Grading B. Soil Preparation C. Seeding D. Maintenance E. Warranty 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. CONTRACTOR to follow standards set forth in the following references : I . American Standard for Nursery Stock publi s hed by American Association of Nurserymen; October 27, 1980 , Edition. 2. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature; 1942 Edition of Standardized Plant N a mes . 3. United States Department of the Army Corps of Engineers -Nationwide Permit 12 associated with this project as ACOE Project No . 200400594 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality , May 2003, Erosion Control Best Management Practices. 1.04 SUBMITT ALS: A. CONTRACTOR shall submit for inspection the following items: I. Receipts for all fertilizer, grass seed, sod, and erosion control blanket. 2. Technical Sheet on erosion control blanket. 3. Manufacturer's Recommendation for in stallation of Erosion Control Blanket. 1.05 WARRANTY : Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA. No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Page 2 of 5 A . Provide a uniform stand of grass by watering, mowing, and maintaining lawn areas until final acceptance. Re-seed seeded areas which fail to provide a uniform stand of grass, reseed with specified materials until all affected areas are accepted by the ENGINEER. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FERTILIZER : A. Fertilizer shall be a commercial product, uniform in composition, free flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer shall be 10-20-10 or approved equal. 2.02 SEEDING: A. Seed: Fresh, clean and new crop seed mixture . I . General. All seed used must carry a Texas Testing Seed label showing purity and germination , name, type of seed, and that the seed meets all requirements of the Texas Seed Law . Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each tag shall be within nine (9) months of time of delivery to the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags or containers. A sample of each variety of seed shall be furni shed for analysis and testing when directed by the Engineer. The s pecified see d shall equal or exceed the following percentages of Purity and germination: Common Name Purity Germination Common B e rmuda Grass 95% 90% Annual Rye Grass Tall Fescue Western Wheatgrass Buffalo Grass Varieties Top Gun Cody 95% 95% 95% 90% 95% 90% 95% 90% 95% 90% URBAN AREA WARM-SEASON SEEDING RA TE (lbs.); Pure Live Seed (PLS) Dates Feb I to May I Mixture for Clay or Tight Soils Mixture for (Eastern Sections) Bermudagrass 40 Buffalograss 60 Total : 100 (Western Sections) Buffalograss 80 Bermudagrass 20 Total: 100 Sandy Soils (All Sections) Bermudagrass 60 Buffalograss 40 Total: 100 Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA .No .061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Page 3 of 5 TEMPORARY COOL-SEASON SEEDING RATE; (lb.) Pure Live Seed (PLS) Dates (All Sections) Aug 15 Tall Fescue to May 1 2 .03 WATER: W estem Wheat grass Annual Rye Total: 50 50 50 JOO A. Free of substance harmful to plant growth . Hoses, pumps, sprinklers or other methods of transportation furni s hed by CONTRACTOR. 2 .04 EROSION CONTROL NET A. Erosion control net shall be North American Green SC I 50BN , or approved equal. 2 .05 TOPSOIL A. General Topsoil: 1. Furnish from stockpiled on-s ite material. Jf an insufficient quantity exists, furnish from off site sources in quantities s ufficient to complete the requirements specified. 2. Natural, friable, fertile soil , characteristic of productive soil on-site, reasonably free of stones, clay lumps, roots and other foreign matter. 3 . Proposed topsoil material shall be subject to approval by the ENGINEER. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FINJSH GRi\.DING A. The Contractor shall spread the topsoil and shall inspect the site to assure that grades are within 0 .15 feet of finish grade prior to initiating work. B . Finished Grades: Shall be understood to be final spot grades and contours indicated on the contract drawings. Where final spot grades or new contours are not indicated, finished grades shall be uniformly level or sloping between points for which elevations are given or contours are shown. C. Tops and Bottoms of All Slopes: Round tops and bottoms of slopes and drainage swale s. Adjust and warp slopes , at intersections of cuts and fills , to flow into each o ther or into the existing Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA . No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Page 4 of 5 natural ground surface without noticeable break. Cuts and fills shall have a maximum slope of 3' horizontally to l' vertically, unless otherwise shown on the contract drawings. The finished surface of all lawn areas after planting shall not be less than 1/4 11 below or more than 3/4 11 below the finished grade of all walks or other surface areas. D . Fine Grading Areas: Bring the grade of areas to receive turf to a uniform, level slope, as determined by the use of surveying instruments, by discing, harrowing and other methods approved by the Owner. When establishing finish grades, remove and dispose of all clods, hard lumps, rocks, roots, litter and other foreign matter not passing through the teeth of a hand iron rake . Tractor drawn raking equipment that compacts lawn areas will not be allowed. Where lawns are intended to drain across pavements, the uphill grade shall be flush with the pavement; the downhill grade shall be 1/2 11 to 3/4 11 below the pavement grade. E. Settlement: Maintain ground surfaces to the finish grades shown on the contract drawings, and deposit whatever additional topsoil that may be required to correct any settlement or erosion that occurs prior to the date of issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance. The surface upon which additional topsoil is to be deposited shall be raked or otherwise satisfactorily prepared to ensure a proper bond. Fill hollows that develop from settling, to the finished elevations, with approved topsoil. Finished lawn areas shall be left sufficiently high to meet all paved areas and catch basins after settlement. 3.02 SEEDING OF DISTURBED AREAS: A. Seeding Limits: All areas disturbed by construction operations . B . Responsibility: The CONTRACTOR shall utilize all such measures as may be necessary, including, but not limited to, protective fencing, sod , or erosion control netting to produce a finished continuous blanket of turf over all areas designated to receive turf. C. Fertilizer: No fertilizer shall be applied prior to seeding. D. Seeding Operations: 1. Dry Seeding a. Seed immediately after preparation of bed. b . Seed indicated areas, within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits, disturbed as a result of construction operations. c. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed 5 miles per hour velocity. d . Apply seed evenly by sowing equal quantities in two directions, at right angles to each other. e . Sow grass seed at specified rate . f. After seeding, lightly rake or drag surface of soil to incorporate seed into top 1 /8" of soil. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA . No. 061018038 November 2007 Roll with light lawn roller. 3.03 EROSION CONTROL NET A. Install erosion control net per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 LAWN AND MAINTENANCE : SECTION 02936 Seeding of Disturbed Areas Page 5 of 5 A. Maintain seeded areas until revegetation has been accepted by the OWNER. B. Maintain seeded lawn areas, including watering, spot weeding, mowing, applications of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides and reseeding until a full, uniform stand of grass free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects is achieved and accepted by the ENGINEER. C. Water regularly to maintain adequate surface soil moisture for proper seed germination . Continue watering until acceptance. D. Repair, reseed, and reblanket all areas that are washed out, eroded, or do not catch . E. Fertilize with organic fertilizer after germination, but prior to first mowing and acceptance. 3 .05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: A . Inspection to determine final acceptance of seeded will be made by the ENGINEER upon CONTRACTOR's request. Provide notification at least IO working days before requested inspection date . I. Seeded areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been completed and a healthy, uniform, close stand of the specified grass is established, free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects. 2. In areas requested to be inspected, no areas shall have bare spots or unacceptable cover totaling more than 10 square feet, with 85% total coverage over the entire project. 3. If above requirements cannot be achieved prior to final acceptance, Contractor may be required to hydroseed site in lieu of dry seeding . END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: SECTION 08110 Steel Doors And Frames Page 1 of 5 Provisions established within the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division I - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hollow metal doors and frames . B. Related Sections: I. Section 08710 -Finish hardware: Hardware locations. 2. Section 09900 -Painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): I. ASTM A 366 -Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): I. NFPA 80-1983 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 2 . NFPA 252, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies C. Steel Door Institute (SDI): I. SDI-I 00 -Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2. SDI-I 05 -Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 3. SDI-I 07 -Hardware for Steel Doors (Reinforcement -Application). D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Building Materials List January 1990 2 . UL I OB -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies E. Door Hardware Institute (DHJ): I. ihe Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. 1.04 SUBMITT ALS A. Shop Drawings : Submit in accordance with Section O 1300 -Submittals. Include door sizes, constriction, frame types, wall anchors and accessories required for installation . I.OS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable local building codes for fire rated re quirements of metal door/metal frame and wood door/metal frame assemblies. B . Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 2 52 or UL 1 OB. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 08110 Steel Doors And Frames Page 2 of 5 A. Standard: Provide steel doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute SDI-I 00 and as herein specified. B. Labeled Construction: Doors and frames required by schedule to be labeled shall be manufactured in accordance with specifications and procedures for doors and frames tested and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Metal UL classification markers shall be attached to these doors and frames. C. Conform to requirements of SDI-I 00 . D. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to UL I OB for fire rated class indicated or scheduled . E. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Deliver metal doors and frames to the project site with no dents or open seams and store upright in a protected dry area . Provide packaging and wrapping to protect hollow metal items. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A . Provide steel doors and frames as manufactured by one of the following: Ceco Corp., Door Div. Curries Mfg., Inc. Fenestra Corp . Mesker Industries, Inc. Republic Builders Products Corp. Steelcraft by American-Standard 2.02 MATERIALS A . Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 366, commercial quality, leveled , cold-rolled steel free of scale and other surface defects . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.03 FABRICATION SECTION 08110 Steel Doors And Frames Page 3 of 5 A. Flush Steel Doors: Full flush type of welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. I. Face sheets of 18 gage steel reinforced, stiffened and sound-deadened by laminating to small cell impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the door or by formed steel vertical stiffeners spaced 6" o.c. and attached to face sheets by spot welds and with the spaces between stiffeners filled with inorganic blanket insulation material. 2. Continuous vertical interlockingjoints on lock and hinge edges with seams continuously welded, filled and dressed smooth. Bevel vertical edges. 3. Top and bottom edges closed with continuous recessed steel channels spot welded to both faces. Top edge of exterior doors sealed flush with closing channel to exclude water. 4. Fixed glass moldings welded to security side of door. Loose moldings of 20 gage steel fastened with countersunk flat head screws. Fabricate steps to receive vinyl gaskets. 5. Overlapping steel astragals for pairs of labeled doors as required by manufacturer to meet codes. 6 . Louvers : Provide factory installed, inverted "V" or "Y" sight proof type fixed louvers. Louver blades shall be 18 gage and frame shall be I 8 gage welded construction. B. Steel Frames: Combination buck, frame and trim type of 16 gage steel for interior frames and 14 gage steel for exterior frames. Provide frames with face width , throat opening, back bend and jamb depth as per dimensions shown. I. Brake-form to profile free of warp, buckles and fractures with comers square and sharp. Form stop integral with frame except where detailed otherwise. Dress sheared edges straight and smooth. 2. Close comer joints tight with trim faces mitered and continuously welded. Dress exposed welds flush and smooth . 3. Fabricate frames for large openings in knocked-down sections for field assembly with butt joints and internal reinforcing sleeves. Knocked-down frame assemblies shall be trial assembled in the shop . 4. Loose glazing stops shall be 16 gage steel, mitered comers, fastened with countersunk flathead screws. Fabricate stops to receive vinyl gaskets. 5. Weld 14 gage steel floor anchors inside each jamb with two holes each anchor for floor anchor bolts . 6. Furnish frames with steel spreader temporarily fastened to the feet of both jambs for rigidity during shipping and handling. 7 . For each jamb in masonry construction provide 3 or more 16 gage adjustable jamb anchors of the T-strap type s paced not more than 30" apart. Furnish yoke type Underwriters anchors for labeled door openings only. 8. For each jamb in steel stud construction provide 4 or more 18 gage drywall type jamb anchors. Weld anchors inside each jamb and wire or bolt to the studs. C. Shop Fini s h : After fabrication, doors and frames shall be degreased , phosphatized and factory painted inside and out with a rust inhibitive synthetic primer. Apply mineral filler to e liminate weld scars and other blemishes. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 08110 Steel Doors And Frames Page 4 of 5 D. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. E . Reinforce frames wider than 48" with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top . F. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. G. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. H . Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. I. Fabricate frames for masonry wall coursing with 2" head member. 2.04 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Prepare doors and door frames for hardware. Mortising, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping shall be done at the factory for mortised hardware. Reinforcement shall be provided for surface-applied hardware, and the drilling and tapping for this hardware shall be done in the field. Provide plaster guards for hinge and strike reinforcements and cutouts on frames. B. Reinforcement plates in doors and frames for hardware shall be 7 gage for hinges and 12 gage for all other hardware . C . Punch for and install rubber silencers on all interior hollow metal door frames. Furnish 3 silencers for each single door and 2 silencers for each pair of doors. Set out and adjust strikes to provide clearance for the silencers. Omit silencers on exterior door frames. 2.05 CLEARANCES A. Doors shall have pre-fit clearances of: I. At Head and Lock Stile: 1 /8". 2. AtHingeStile: 1/16". 3. At Door Sill: a. Without Threshold : I /8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering . b . With Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1/8". B. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Door; Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 " in 2" in lock edge. 2 .06 ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. B . Anchors : three per jamb, typically, of type to suit supportive construction . Northside JII Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. SECTION 08110 Steel Doors And Frames Page 5 of 5 B. Verify surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Engineer of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with SCI-105 . B. Install doors in accordance with DHI. C. Install fire-rated frames and place fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. D . Coordinate with masonry and wallboard construction for anchor placement. E . Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. F. Install doors accurately in frames, maintaining specified clearances. G. Setting Frames : 1. Check frames for rack, twist and out-of-square , and correct. 2 . Set frames accurately to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and square . 3. Anchor frames securely to adjacent construction . Anchor to floor at each jamb with two bolts to prevent twist. 4. Leave spreader bars in place until frames have been permanently built into the walls. 5. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80 . H . Hanging Doors: I . Fit and hang the doors to maintain specified door clearances . Metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 2. Doors shall operate smoothly and quietly after adjustment. 3. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80. 3.03 TOLERANCES A . Maximum Diagonal Distortion: I /8" measured with straight edge, corner to corner. END OF SECTION Northside ]JI Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l -GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors Page I of3 A . Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into construction for installation of units . Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices . B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units. C . Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a 22 lbs. per sq. ft. wind loading pressure, acting inward and outward. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide operating instructions and maintenance information. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section O 1300. Submit drawings for special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide overhead coiling doors as manufactured by one of the following: a . The Cookson Co. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc . c. Mahon Door Corp. d. Overhead Door Corp. e. J .G Wilson Corp. f. Raynor Garage Doors g . Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. 2 .02 CURTAIN MATERIALS IAND CONSTRUCTION A . Door Curtain: Fabricate of interlocking slats of continuous length for width of door without splices . Fabricate of structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A, with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525, and phosphate tre ated before fabrication. a. Insulation : Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces. B. Endlocks : Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with ga lv a nize d rivets. Provide lock s on alternate curtain slats . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors Page 2 of3 C. Wind locks: Malleable-iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high- strength nylon , as required to comply with wind load. D. Bottom bar shall consist of 2 galvanized steel angles, each not Jess than l" x l" x 1 /8" thick, with replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather seal. Equip bottom bar with sensor edge. E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build-up units with minimum 3/16" thick steel sections, galvanized after fabrication. F. Weather Seals : Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping. At door heads, use 1/8" thick continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jairibs, use 1/8" thick continuous strip secured to interior and to exterior side of jamb guides. G . Locking : Provide manufacturer's standard slide bolt, designed to receive padlock. 2 .03 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings . Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel : Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distortion of slats and limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03" per ft. of span under full load. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel he lical torsion springs . Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft . C. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design , either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. D. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Provide closed ends and intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. Fabricate hoods of 24 gage minimum hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525. Phosphate treat before fabrication . 2 .04 PAINTING A. Shop clean and prime ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except fraying and lubricated surfaces, with door manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 2 .05 DOOR OPERATORS A. Door shall be provided with manual operating mechanism with pulley system as recommended by door manufacturer. Northside Ill Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION SECTION 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors Page 3 of 3 A. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb, and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations . B . Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, and twist of distortion . END OF SECTION Northside IIJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank. KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 08710 Finish Hardware Page I of4 A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division I - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hardware to fully equip doors throughout the project. 1.03 REFERENCES A . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): I. NFPA 80-1983 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. B . Texas Civil Statutes: I . Article 9102, Texas Revised Civil Statutes, The Elimination of Architectural Barriers, Effective June 21, 1989 . C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): I. Building Materials List January 1992 . 1.04 SUBMITT ALS A .. Hardware Schedule: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01300 -SUMBITTALS. Hardware schedule shall be in the vertical format as outlined by the Door and Hardware Institute . Schedule items required for the entire project. Include a picture or catalog cut of each item and list the finish. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for closers. B. Templates: Upon receipt ofreviewed hardware schedule, provide one copy ofreviewed schedule with templates to each fabricator of doors and frames and other work effected by the hardware. C. Accessibility Standards: Submit a letter verifying that the hardware submitted is in conformance with Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes, Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act of Texas. I.OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Departures from Scheduled Designations: Only those products listed will be accepted. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ACCEPTED. Manufacturers listed as being acceptable must still meet the conditions of this specification . B . Underwriter's Laboratories Requirements: Hardware for opening classes as requiring a UL label in the door sc hedu le , or by code, shall be furnished and installed to meet the applicable requirements of Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank. KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 08710 Finish Hardware Page 2 of4 NFPA 80. Hardware for fire doors shall be UL listed for usage with types and sizes of fire doors specified and scheduled. C. Provide the services of a qualified representative from the exit device manufacturer to be present at the project site to oversee the installation of exit devices on a pair of entrance doors. Upon acceptance, this installation shall set the standard for all exit device installations. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material shall be delivered to project site in a timely manner as not to impede job progress. Factory drop shipments will not be accepted. Material must be marked with manufacturer's name, number, finish, door number and hardware set number. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Door closers shall carry a published ten-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and operation. B. Door Push and Pull Bars shall carry a published two-year factory warranty against defects in material and workmanship. C . Exit devices shall carry a published three-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and operation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Butts and Hinges: 1 . Furnish butts and hinges with flat button tips. 2. Provide hinges from one manufacturer. 3. The following are acceptable manufacturers: Hager Hinge Co. Lawrence Brothers McKinney Mfg. H. Soss & Co. Stanley Hardware, Division of The Stanley Works 4. Furnish hinges in size, weight and finishes listed in hardware set. Where scheduled as BB, provide ball bearing hinges. Oil-impregnated porous metal bearing hinges are not acceptable. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank . KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 B. Door Stops: 1. Floor Stops: a. Floor stops shall be solid cast brass or bronze. SECTION 08710 Finish Hardware Page 3 of 4 b. Furnish and install floor stops with machine screws and expansion shield. c. As conditions require, provide necessary carpet risers. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: C. Fasteners: Accent Div. Hager Hinge Co. Baldwin Hardware Corp. Brookline by Yale Security, Inc. H.B. Ives Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc . Trimco Builders Hardware 1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use. 2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with toggle bolts, expansion shields, sex bolts, and other anchors, appropriate for the material to which the hardware is to be applied and according to the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer. 3 . Fasteners shall be packaged with hardware. 4. Provide fasteners of the same material and finish as the hardware. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A . Fit and install hardware on doors in confonnance with the following hardware schedule. Hardware shall be installed by tradesmen skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. I. Provide properly sized and accurately located mortises and drilled holes for hardware on wood doors, using appropriate jigs, templates and power equipment. 2 . Meta! frames shall be drilled and tapped accurately . 3. Fit hardware accurately, remove until painter's finish is applied and then replace and adjust. 4. Ensure that operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or excessive clearance. 5 . Position and install the various hardware item s on doors to agree with the locations specified in SECTION 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES , or as may be specifically detailed. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank. KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 08710 Finish Hardware Page 4 of 4 6. Keep knobs and pulls covered with heavy cloth or plastic wraps until final acceptance of the project. Upon completion, leave hardware clean, undamaged and in proper working order. 3.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Locate hardware for doors as follows, unless specifically detailed otherwise: Locks and Latches Hinges 40" ( +/-1 ") floor to centerline of strike. Manufacturer's standard locations . 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and clean the operating hardware at each door. Lubricate parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer (graphite type, if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. This schedule is intended to include hardware required. Verify doors shown and scheduled on the drawings with doors listed in this schedule. In the event of omissions in the schedule, furnish hardware of the kind, quantity, and quality scheduled for similar locations . Hardware for a complete installation is required, whether specifically mentioned herein or not. B. Lock cores shall be keyed to match Owner's existing keys. C. Designations in hardware schedule are taken from the following manufacturers: Hager (H) Corbin Russwin (CR) Yale Security, Inc . (Y) D . Hardware Set No. 1: Exterior Door 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Floor Stop ML2224** 2300BC 259F (CR) (Y) (H) ** The lockset and hardware for the exterior door must be able to accommodate future magnetic card readers. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: SECTION 09900 Painting Page 1 of 8 A . Provisions established within the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A . Section includes: On-the-job painting and finishing. 1. Included: Paint and finish the following materials, fittings and equipment items which are exposed to view inside and outside . a. Iron and steel b. Concrete masonry units c. Interior concrete ceiling and beam surfaces d. Interior concrete floors e . Gypsum board f. Interior caulked joints g . Bare and insulation covered piping and ductwork, conduit, hangers, grilles and registers, and primed metal surfaces and factory-finished surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Not Included: No painting is required on the following: a. Factory-finished metal lockers and finished light fixtures b. Architectural aluminum and stainless steel c . Galvanized metal d . Acoustic panel ceilings e. Pre-finished cabinets 3. Contractor shall examine the drawings for mechanical and electrical work , and all materials installed throughout the building which require painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications. B . Related Sections: 1.03 REFERENCES A . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 16 -Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish , Lacquer and Related Products . 2. ASTM D 2016 -Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 3. ASTM D 4258 -Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 4. ASTM D 4262 -Test method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces . 5 . ASTM D 4263 -Test method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by The Plastic Sheet Method . B . NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)-Industrial maintenance Painting. C. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. D. PDCA (Paintin g and Decorating C o ntractors o f America) -Painting -Architectural Spe cification s Manual. Northside IIJ Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 E . SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) -Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SECTION 09900 Painting Page 2 of 8 A. For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not considered finished, occupied areas and there will be no painting therein except for doors and frames and as may be specifically scheduled in article paint schedule. I. Mechanical chases 2. Spaces above suspended ceilings 3. Under-floor crawl spaces I.OS SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01300-Submittals. Submit two 8 l/2"x]] "samples of each paint color. Samples shall be on heavy cardboard and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used on the project. B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, submit a complete schedule of the materials to be substituted. This schedule, in triplicate, shall be in the same form as the paint schedule included in this section, and shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name and type for each surface to be finished. C. Close-out Schedule : Upon completion of work, furnish a full schedule of paint types and colors actually used and formulas for each to the Owner. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer : Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and fmish products with 3 years experience . B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer 's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers . D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as final coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits . E. Do not paint over code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or equipment identification , performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE ,AND HANDLING SECTION 09900 Painting Page 3 of 8 A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Storage: Contractor shall designate a specific space at the project site for storing and mixing materials. Protect this space and repair all damage resulting from use. Do not store kerosene nor gasoline in this space. Remove oily rags at the end of each day's work . 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building at not Jess than 60° F during painting and finishing . B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 65° F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer 's instructions . C. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints: 45 ° F for interiors; 50° F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D . Minimum application temperature for varnish and finishes: 65° F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E . Provide lighting level of 80 ft.-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface . F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain , fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions . Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified during application and drying periods of 24 hours between coats and 72 hours after final coat. G. Protection : provide sufficient drop cloths to fully protect adjacent finished work. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A . Extra Materials: Upon completion of the work, deliver to project site 2 gallons of each type and color of paint applied to interior and exterior surfaces. Provide formula for custom match colors . Northside IJl Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paint as manufactured by one of the following: The Sherwin-Williams Co. Tnemec Co. SECTION 09900 Painting Page 4 of 8 B . Materials described are based on the specifications of the above listed manufacturers, and are given to designate the quality of materials required. Materials of best quality grade are representative of the standard of quality required . Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a first line, best- grade product will not be acceptable . C. Colors: The Owner will select colors . Regardless of which brand of paint is selected for use, the Contractor shall intermix and blend as required to obtain an exact match to each color on the color schedule. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A . Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work . Report to Engineer any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum wallboard : 12 percent 2. Interior located wood : 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016. D. Test shop-applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition . B . Wash galvanized metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove residual grease and oil. C. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on st ee l buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before paintin g. D . Sand woodwork s urfac es s mooth be for e primin g . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 F. Putty nail holes after the prime coat. SECTION 09900 Painting Page 5 of8 G Remove hardware and accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not to be finish-painted or provide adequate surface-applied protection for these items in place. H. Un-coated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned . Spot prime paint after repairs . I. Shop primed steel surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. J. Surface preparation of Existing Concrete Flooring (Acid Etching): I. Remove all surface contamination (ASTM D4258). 2 . Wet surface with clean water. 3. Apply a I 0-15% Muriatic Acid or 50% Phosphoric Acid solution at the rate of one gallon per 75 square feet. 4 . Scrub with a stiff brush. 5. Allow sufficient time for scrubbing until bubbling stops . 6. If no bubbling occurs, the surface is contaminated with grease, oil or a concrete treatment which is interfering with proper etching. Remove the contamination with a suitable cleaner (ASTM D4258) and then etch the surface. 7. Rinse the surface three times . Remove the acid/water mixture after each rinse. 8 . Surface should have a texture similar to medium grit sandpaper. 9 . It may be necessary to repeat this step several times if a suitable texture is not achieved with one etching. Bring the pH (ASTM D 4262) of the surface to neutral with a 3% solution of trisodium phosphate or similar alkali cleaner and flush with clean water to achieve a sound, clean surface . I 0 . Allow surface to dry and check for moisture (ASTM D 4263) 3.03 APPLICATION A . Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Mix and apply paint materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Spread materials evenly, flow smoothly, and bru sh out without sags or runs. B . Provide fini s h coats which are compatible with primer paints u sed . Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where re quired . C. When undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, apply additional coats until paint film is ofuniforrn color and sheen. D . Finis h the in s ides of wood cabinets, including backs of cabinet doors, as scheduled for the fronts and ends . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09900 Painting Page 6 of 8 E. Between coats, sand enamel and lacquer finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth , even finish . Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer. F. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color in the finish. Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an even result in the finish coat. G Exposed ductwork, piping and conduit in finished, occupied areas shall be painted the same col o r as the wall or ceiling against which it is installed, unless otherwise noted. H . Apply the finish coat on gypsum board, plaster and concrete surfaces with rollers . I. On concrete masonry unit wall surfaces without a block filler, apply the first coat of paint with a s pray gun. J . Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts , such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts. K. Do not paint over code-required labels such as Underwriter's Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 3.04 TOUCH UP AND CLEAN A. Touching Up: On completion, carefully touch up all holidays, marred and damaged spots , and work over all surfaces that have been repaired by other trades. B. Cleaning: Remove spilled, splashed and splattered paint from all surfaces. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. C. Reinstall the items removed under the provisions of paragraph above. 3.05 V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE A . Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O .C. content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to meet such requirements . 3.06 RE-PAINTING A . Locations and Extent : The re-painting of existing surfaces shall be as follows: I . Painted wall, door and frame surfaces which have been reworked , cut into or patched, whether specifically designated on the drawings or not. Re-painting shall include all openings in exi sting walls. 2 . Entire rooms/areas , as designated on the drawings . B . Colors: Match existing co lors of co rre s ponding s urfac e s e xcept wh e re new colors are schedul e d . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 C. Preparation: SECTION 09900 Painting Page 7 of 8 l. Clean surfaces to remove dust and dirt. Remove oil, grease, was and other contaminants which would inhibit paint bond. At ceiling grid to be re-painted, remove grease or oil with paint thinner. 2. Remove rust and loose and flaking paint by scraping and sanding. 3. Sand hard, glossy painted surfaces and ceiling grid to be painted, until dull or treat with surface conditioner to promote adhesion of new coat of paint. 4. Prime bare areas with suitable primer in conformance with the above paint schedule for new work. D. Painting: Generally, apply one coat of finish paint over old and new surfaces, using the same materials scheduled in the above paint schedule for like new surfaces. E . Verification: Verify the extent of re-painting work at the building and make due allowance for cutting and patching required for installation of mechanical and electrical work. 3.07 PAINT SCHEDULE A. The products listed below represent top of the line products of each manufacturer. These products are not presented as being equivalent, as there are too many variables to match each product across the board. Manufacturer's designations are: SW The Sherwin-Williams Co. TN Tnemec Co. B . Interior Metal I . Steel door frames , borrowed light frames, louvers and vision panel frames in doors, hollow metal doors , sound retardant doors and ladders. l primer coat SW Kromik Metal Primer E4 IN I TN Series 20 -1255 Beige Pota-Pox 2 finish coats SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox 2 . Other exposed iron and steel I primer coat SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50 W 1 TN Series 20 -I 255 Beige Pota-Pox I finish coat TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 3 . Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment l finish coat SW Jndustrial Enamel, Series B54 TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox 4. Fire extinguisher cabinets , including door and frame inside and outside. I fini s h coat Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SW Tile Clad II Epoxy, Series B62 TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox C. Exterior Metal SECTION 09900 Painting Page 8 of 8 1. Non-galvanized steel door frames, hollow metal doors, pipe handrails, railings, lintels, gates, and ladders. 1 primer coat SW Kromik Metal Primer E41Nl TN Series 20 -1255 Beige Pota-Pox 2 finish coats SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox 2. Steel pipe, conduit, hangers, supports and brackets. 1 primer coat GL Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer No. 5205 Series SW Galvite Paint, B50 W3 TN Series 20 -1255 Beige Pota-Pox 1 finish coats SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 TN Series 20 -Pota-Pox or FC20 Pota-Pox END OF SECTION Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page I of 11 General provisions of contract, including General and Special Conditions, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK This item will consist of repair and preparation of surfaces to be painted, application of complete interior paint system and exterior paint and overcoat paint systems, paint system materials and disinfection of surfaces which contact potable water. 1.03 REFERENCES A. STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL'S Steel Structures Painting Manual and specifications contained within shall be referred to as SSPC. B. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION Standards shall be referred to as A WW A. C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR THE TESTING OF MATERIALS standards and specifications shall be referred to as ASTM. D. U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY shall be referred to as EPA. E. NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CORROSION ENGIN EERS shall be referred to as NACE. F. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE Standards shall be referred to as ANSI standards. G. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS shall be designated as CFR. H. TEXAS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE shall be designated as TAC. I. OSHA J . CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY ACT, PART 1303 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Interior surfaces include the underside of the roof plate, girders, rafters, columns, pipes, floor, appurtenances (including ladders), wall, inner surface, and the tank overflow and influent structures. B. Exterior surfaces include the outside of the tank, and appurtenances (including ladders). 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 2 of 11 A . Surface Preparation : Contractor will be required to prepare each tank for painting. Contractor shall prepare all surfaces for painting in accordance with the SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual except as amended herein. The finished quality of the interior surface preparation within the tank shall conform to SSPC -SPl 0, "Near White Blast Cleaning." The finished quality of the exterior surfaces shall conform to SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". All surfaces other than those inside the tank bowl shall be considered exterior surfaces. B. All paint shall conform to current state and federal regulations applicable to Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's). C. The Contractor shall control emissions from abrasive blasting in accordance with 30 TAC, Rule 111 .135 or Rule 111 .137. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Environmental Controls: If the Contractor chooses to use humidity and temperature controls, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a written plan describing environmental humidity and temperature climate controls for the tank interior. Submittal shall include equipment type, size, and power requirements. This submittal shall be for informational purposes only. Review of this submittal shall not constitute approval of the proposed method nor place any responsibility for the same upon the Engineer. B. Shrouding: Contractors shall submit to the engineer a written plan describing the type and performance of the proposed shrouding method. Performance data shall include time required to raise and lower shroud and containment efficiency. This submittal shall be for informational purposes only. Review of this submittal shall not constitute approval of the proposed method nor place any responsibility for the same upon the Engineer. An engineer licensed in the state of Texas must seal the shrouding plan . C. Blast Cleaning: Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a written plan describing the materials and methods proposed for use in blast cleaning. A separate submittal shall be made for each method proposed . D. Paint: Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material to be used. In addition, Contractor shall submit color samples for review of color and texture. All paint, primers and paint thinners, including primer for shop primed components, shall be from the same approved manufacturer. E. Paint Substitutions: As part of the proof of equality, the Engineer may require at the cost of the Contractor certified reports from a nationally known reputable and independent testing laboratory conducting comparative tests as directed by the Engineer between the product specified and the requested substitution. Two comparative tests shall have been made within two years prior to award of contract. F. Welding Certification: Welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance withAWWADlOO. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 3 of 11 G . TCEO Notification : Contractor shall satisfy the requirements as set forth in 30 TAC, Rule 111.135 prior to blasting. 1.07 DEUVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . All materials shall be brought to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer, and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer on the job. B. Paint shall be stored in a secured area in compliance with paint manufacturer 's recommendation. C. The Contractor shaHuse one convenient location for keeping all materials and doing all mixing, etc . Oily rags and waste shall be frequently removed, and under no circumstances shall they be allowed to accumulate. D . All empty paint containers shall remain on the job site until such time as painting is complete and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer on the job. Storage and disposal of empty paint containers must comply with TCEQ regulations. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL CONDITIONS A . Exterior Coatings -All coating systems shall be applied with strict compliance to the manufacturer 's recommendations. A manufacturer 's representative shall be made available for interpretation of a pplication requirements. The manufacturer's representative shall visit the job site weekly to verify proper application. B . No paint shall be applied when the surrounding air temperature, as measured in the shade , is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. No paint shall be applied when it can be anticipated that the temperature will drop below 40 degrees Fahrenheit within 18 hours after the application of the paint. No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit or within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the dew point, whichever is greater. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces , and shall not be applied in rain , snow, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Dew or moisture condensation should be anticipated, and, if such conditions are prevalent, painting shall be delayed until surfaces are dry . Paint shall not be applied to surfaces that are hot enough to cause blistering or pinholing of the film . C . If the paint manufacturer's requirements are more stringent, the Contractor shall follow them instead . D . During periods of inclement weather or to achieve the conditions stated above , painting may be continued by enclosing the surface with temporary shelters and applying artificial heat or dehumidification equipment. 1.09 WARRANTY A paint manufacturer's representative shall be made available for an in spection annually for two years from the date of final acceptance of the project by the Owner at no cost to the Owner. The maintenance and /or warranty period stipulated within the contract documents s hall rema in in force . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 4 of 11 A . Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service and establish a standard of quality. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be submitted on written approval of the Engineer. Refer to Part 1.06 .F for other requirements. B. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each product giving name, product number, generic type, descriptive information, solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test reports showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products specified herein . In addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in which each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. C. All materials used for both interior and exterior coating systems shall be from one manufacturer. 2 .02 MATERIAL PREP A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's latest printed instructions. B. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's recommended shelf life. C. Do not use mixed materials beyond manufacturer's recommended pot life. 2 .03 TANK INTERIOR COATING SYSTEM A. Surface Preparation Prior to Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Weld flux and spatter shall be removed by power tool cleaning. Sharp projections shall be ground to smooth contour. All welds shall be ground to a smooth contour as per NA CE Standard RPO 17 8 and herein. B. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SPI O Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. Anchor profile shall meet the paint manufacturer's recommendations as per ASTM D 4417, Method C or NACE Standard RP0287 . C. Coating System: Interior Coatings must be certified ANSI/NSF Std. 61 approved for potable water storage. The First Coat of primer may be shop applied. 1. Sherwin Williams First Coat/Shop Prime Coat: Corothane I Galvpac Two Zinc Primer, 3-4 mils dry film thickness Stripe Coat: Corothane I Galvpac Two Zinc Primer, 3-4 mils dry film thickness Second Coat: Dura-Plate UHS Ultra High Solids Epoxy, 12-15 mils dry film thickness Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 2. Tnemec SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 5 of 11 First Coat/Shop Prime Coat: Series 91 H20 Hydro-Zinc, 2.5-3.5 mils dry film thickness Stripe Coat: Series 91 H20 Hydro-Zinc, 2.5-3.5 mils dry film thickness Second Coat: Series 141 WH03 Pota Pox 80, 12-15 mils dry film thickness D. Stripe Coat: After applying the first coat and prior to applying the second coat, all weld seams must be brushed with a coat or primer. The primer shall be of the same series and manufacturer used for the first coat; however, the color shall be in contrast with the first coat. Thin the primer and apply according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 TANK EXTERIOR COATING SYSTEMS A. Surface Preparation Prior to Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Weld flux and spatter shall be removed by power tool cleaning. Sharp projections shall be ground to a smooth contour. All welds shall be ground to a smooth contour as per NACE Standard RPOl 78 and herein . B. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Anchor profile shall meet the paint manufacturer's recommendations per ASTM D 4417, Method C or NACE Standard RP0287. C. Coating System: Colors are to be selected by the owner. The First Coat of primer may be shop applied . 1. Sherwin Williams First Coat/Shop PrimeCoat: Corothane I Galvpac Two Zinc Primer, 3-4 mils dry film thickness Stripe Coat: Corothane I Galvpac Two Zinc Primer, 3-4 mils dry film thickness Second Coat: Macropoxy 646 FC, 5-6 mils dry film thickness Third Coat: Poly-Ion 1900 Polyester Polyurethane, 2-3 mils dry film thickness Logo : FluoroKem -Fluoropolymer Urethane , 2-3 mils dry film thickness 2. Tnemec First Coat/Shop Prime Coat: Series 91 H20 Hydro-Zinc, 2.5-3 .5 mils dry film thickness Stripe Coat: Series 91 H20 Hydro-Zinc, 2 .5-3 .5 mils dry film thickness Second Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II, 3-5 mils dry film thickness Third Coat: Series 1074U Endura-Shield, 2-4 mils dry film thickness Logo : Series 700 Hydroflon , 2-3 mils dry film thickness Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 6 of 11 D . Stripe Coat: After applying the first coat and prior to applying the second coat, all weld seams must be brushed with a coat or primer. The primer shall be of the same series and manufacturer used for the first coat; however, the color shall be in contrast with the first coat. Thin the primer and apply according to the manufacturer's recommendations. E . Epoxy Seam Sealants: Tnemec 63-1500. 2 .05 EQUIPMENT Agitator: The Contractor shall provide a suitable mechanical agitator and shall agitate all paint until proper dispersion of materials is secured. All paint ingredients shall be in a satisfactory dispersed condition at the time of application . Use equipment that conforms to the paint manufacturer's requirements. 2 .06 MATERIALS A. Blast Cleaning Abrasives: Blasting shall be done with an abrasive material of non-silica composition. This abrasive material shall be clean, dry, and free of clay particles and other extraneous matter and shall include a dust emission reducer, "Dustnet" or approved equal. The Owner's representative must approve the abrasive material before blasting is begun. B. Compressed Air used for blasting shall be free of detrimental amounts of water and oil. Adequate traps and separators shall be provided at the compressor. C. If wet abrasive blasting is used, a Rust Inhibitor compatible with the coating systems shall be included in water for wet blasting . PART 3-EXECUTION The Contractor and all workers employed by Contractor shall conduct all operations in a clean and sanitary manner and in conformance with all aspects of the General Conditions. Contractor shall at all times provide dust and overspray controls for blasting and painting operations. 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. All surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations and as a minimum shall be cleaned free of all old paint, rust, corrosion , mill scale, oil and grease. During the cleaning or other operations inside the structure, all interior controls, floats , cathodic wiring, etc., to remain must be removed, and a cover shall be provided over the entrance of all pipes to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipes . B. After the surfaces have been cleaned to the specified SSPC standard, they shall be inspected by the Owner for any required structural repairs, and these areas shall be so marked as to enable repairs to be made. Such repairs will include, but are not limited to, leaks at riveted or welded seams, the interior ladder and controls. Such places shall include, but not limited to , the structural roof supports, and bolt Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 7 of 11 connections. Epoxy seal sealer shall be used to seal all cracks and crevices which are not I 00% sealed against moist_ure intrusion. C . Spot Cleaning: All rust, peeled or cracked paint, overspray, runs, sags and non-adherent paint shall be removed. A II exposed edges of the remaining paint shall be feathered, and spot cleaning shall be conducted in a manner to minimize damage to sound material. All foreign matter shall be removed from seams, pickets, joints and the bottom of the columns and plates. D. In the case of new construction, the Contractor has the following option: the surface preparation may be done by acid treatment, and primer immediately following, or the surface preparation may be done by blast cleaning and primer immediately following. The cleaning and priming shall be done in the shop. All paint, primers and paint thinners, including primer for shop primed components, shall be from the same approved manufacturer. E. All surfaces to be painted shall receive a final brush blast immediately before applying the initial coating. The time limit between final blasting and initial coating shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in no case shall this time period exceed two hours. 3.02 REPAIRS A. Seam Welding: All other corrosion shall be repaired and all seams rewelded as necessary to prevent future leaks and to protect the integrity of the coating system. B. Surface Grinding: The Contractor shall grind and round all sharp edges created as a result of structural repairs or other work related to this contract. C. Weld Grinding: All welds shall be continuous, ground to a curve and free of porosity, pockets, high spots, rough projections and ripples to provide a coatable surface. All welds shall be blended smoothly into plate surface. All weld slag, splatter and flux shall be removed. Grinding of welds shall comply with condition "E" of NACE Standard RPO] 78 . D. Weld Splatter: All areas containing existing weld splatter shall be ground down providing a smooth coatable surface. 3 .03 APPLICATION A. Ventilation: The Contractor must provide adequate reverse chimney effect forced air ventilation while painting or coating the interior surfaces of a tank. The ventilation shall be adequate to remove fumes, prevent the possibility of an accumulation of volatile gases, protect workers and prevent damage to the tank. The Contractor shall be held financially responsible for all damage to the tank caused by inadequate ventilation. B . Mixing: Splitting paint kits and mixing of partial kits is not allowed. Mix only whole kits and discard any leftover paint. Mixing of all coatings must be perfonned in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations . Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 8 of 11 C. General Application : All paint and finishing materials shall be applied by skilled workmen and shall be brushed or sprayed in even, thorough coats without runs, crazing, sags or other blemishes. All coats, regardless of material , shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats . Full drying time as recommended by the manufacturer of the particular paint involved shall be allowed between coats. All products shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations included DFT, curing time, etc. Painting systems shall be applied by one or more of the following described methods. However, spray application will not be permitted for exterior surfaces unless the Contractor contains overspray by a method acceptable to the Engineer. Application equipment shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations for each coating. D . Brush Application: Only top quality hog hair or synthetic bristle brushes shall be used. All paint shall be applied so as to form a uniform film of a thickness which is consistent with the specified coverage for the paint being used. Sufficient cross brushing shall be used to insure filling of all surface irregularities and complete coverage . Particular care shall be used in painting corners and other restricted places to obtain unifofl!l application. All final brushing strokes shall be made in the same direction and toward the previously applied paint. E. Roller Application: Rollers used for applying coatings shall be of the highest quality and must be kept as clean as possible at all times. Any coating rolled on must form a uniform film and must give the same end results as a brushed on coat. Rolling shall be supplemented by brushing in areas where rolling could not give complete coverage, such as corners, edges, welds, crevices, bolts, rivets or other irregular surfaces . F. Spray Application : When paint is applied by spraying, the air gun used shall be adjustable for regulation of the air and paint mixture. The equipment shall have a suitable water q;ap to remove moisture present in the compressed air. Paint pots shall be equipped with a hand agitator to keep the paint well mixed. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each day's work . The width of the spray shall be not less than twelve (12) inches , or more than eighteen (18) inches. The pressure shall be suitable for type of paint used . Frequent checks shall be made to insure maintenance of correct spreading rate; care shall be taken to see that edges, corners, and bolt heads are completely covered , and that there has been no bridging over the film . Airless spray application is acceptable with prior approval of the Engineer. G. Cleanup: At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean off all paint spots, oil and stains from surfaces and leave the entire project in a satisfactory condition. Special attention shall be given to the tank foundation in that it shall be protected at all times from paint splatter. Any overlapping of the paint onto the concrete shall be cleaned by grinding or other methods as approved by the Engineer. 3 .04 DISINFECTION Prior to placing the tank in service, the structure shall be thoroughly disinfected by spray application of a chlorine and water solution as described in the most current version of A WW A Specification C652 , Section 4.2 -Chlorination Method 2. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 3 .05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 9 of 11 A. General : All work and materials supplied under this specification shall be subject to inspection by the Owner or its representative . All parts of the work shall be accessible to the inspector. The Contractor shall correct such work or replace such material if found defective. Such inspection will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing qualified labor and materials in strict accordance with the specifications. B . Threshold Inspections: At certain stages in the project the Contractor will not be allowed to proceed until a thorough inspection has been performed by the Owner's representative and the Owner's representative has approved the work up to that point. The following threshold inspections will be required: Surface Preparation and Repair Completion: After all repairs have been made and surfaces prepared in accordance with these specifications and the coating manufacturer's instructions . The project site or area to be painted (interior or exterior of tank) shall be cleaned and ready for coating operations to begin . Completion of Each Coat: After each prime coat application and touch up; when the tank is ready to receive the following coat. All shop applied primer must be inspected by the Owner's Representative prior to transportation from the place of manufacture. If the place of manufacture is a distance greater than I 00 miles from the City of Fort Worth, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of transportation and lodging for the Owner's Representative associated with inspection of the prime coat. Substantial Completion: When all work and clean up is completed and prior to contractor moving equipment and work force off the job. The Contractor will notify the Owner 48 hours in advance of needing threshold inspection. Prior to scheduling the inspection , the Contractor shall have sufficiently reviewed his work and believe it to be ready for threshold inspection. The cost of additional threshold inspections required because work was not approved at the original threshold inspection will be borne by the Contractor. The threshold inspections will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish qualified labor and materials in accordance with the specifications . C. Quality Control Log : The Contractor shall maintain a quality control program to include a daily log and at a minimum the following quality control checks : I. Compressed air blotter test performed at start of day and every four hours. 2 . Surface preparation visual checks using SSPC VIS 1-89. 3 . Surface profile checks periodically using Testex Replica Tape . 4 . Wet film thickness , periodically as coating is applied using an approved gauge. 5 . Dry film thickness , daily and periodically as coating dries, using an Elcometer Thickness gauge or equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page IO of 11 6 . Holidays , daily and periodically as needed using an approved low voltage holiday detector. 7. Environmental condition , minimum of twice daily, once prior to beginning work and again every four hours during painting operations : a. Ambient temperature. b . Dew point and relative humidity using a sling Psychrometer and U.S. Weather Bureau Psychometric Charts. c. Steel surface temperatures on at least two opposite sides of tank using surface sensing thermometers. d. Wind speed and direction . The Contractor's daily log shall be kept on site at all times and be made available for review by the Owner or Owner's representative on demand. A copy of the daily log shall be faxed to the project inspector at the end of each day work is performed . The daily log shall include as a minimum the following information : 1. Date. 2. Name of Contractor. 3. Project Name. 4. Person's Name who Makes Log Entry . 5. Specific Progress Areas of tank blasted Repairs made including location Coatings applied and location Touch Up work and location 6. Environmental conditions as listed in Paragraph 3.05.C.7., and the time readings were taken. 7. Locations and results of all quality control checks . 8. Product manufacturer and batch numbers of coatings used that day. 9. Problems encountered and action taken as a result. D. Testing Equipment: The Contractor shall furnish an approved type dry mil gauge apparatus to measure the dry film thickness . The Elcometer Thickness Gauge or equal shall be furnished to the Owner for his use . The Contractor shall also furnish to the Owner, for his use, holiday detector Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting Page 11 of 11 devices. Holiday detector devices shall be approved low-voltage type . All of the above inspection gauges shall be furnished and on the job before the Owner will permit painting operations to proceed and shall remain on the job until its completion and acceptance. The Contractor or his representative shall instruct the Owner on the proper use, care and calibration of all such gauges. The above-required testing gauges and calibration materials shall be furnished to Owner and are returnable to the Contractor upon completion of the job. The cost of furnishing all of the above required gauges to the Owner for his use shall be subsidiary to this bid item . E. Bacteriological Testing: Following disinfection, the tank shall be filled and sampled by the Contractor for bacteriological testing, prior to being put into service. The testing shall be as described in A WW A Specification C652, Section 4.4 -Bacteriological Sampling and Testing. Results of the test shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Final decision upon the suitability of the disinfection procedure shall rest with the Engineer. Should repeat of the disinfection procedure be required, additional cost of disinfection, testing and water to fill the tank shall be borne by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 11260 Chlorine Analyzer Page 1 of 3 A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a chlorine analyzer as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment and material to be furnished under this Contract shall be free from defects. 1.03 REFERENCES A . The following references apply: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Quality Control (ASQC). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 5 . American Water Works Association (A WWA). 6. The Chlorine Institute (Cl). 7 . Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 8. International Standards Organization (ISO). 9 . Nationa l Electrical Code (NEC). 10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 11. National Fire Code (NFC). 12. National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH). 13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 14 . Standard Fire Code (SFC). 15 . Uniform Fire Code (UFC). 16 . Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Regulations : Texas Administrative Code Title 30 , Chapter 290 Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.04 SUBMITTALS SECTION 11260 Chlorine Analyzer Page 2 of 3 A. Submittals shall be as specified in the General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Section 01300. B. Submit the following: I. Sufficient infonnation to show that the equipment meets this specification. 2. Electrical wiring diagrams as required for the installation. 3. Documentation demonstrating that the gas feeder manufacturer is certified to the international quality standards ISO 900 I for design , assembly and manufacture. 4. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets are not acceptable. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery, storage and handling of products in accordance with the manufacturer 's recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment shall fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Final Acceptance. 1.07 SYSTEM START-UP A. The chlorination equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified field engineer to check installation, start-up and instruct operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CHLORINE ANALYZER A. Chlorine Residual Analyzer shall be a Prominent Dulcometer DMT series and shall be packaged by Macaulay Controls . Contact Ann Li pert at 972-769-1226. Startup services shall be provided by the manufacturers representative. B. The chlorine analyzer shall have a 4-20mA output for SCADA interface . C. Analyzer shall have a detection range of O to 5 mg/L free or total residual chlorine. D. Analyzer shall be provided with a pressure regulator on sample inlet. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION SECTION 11260 Chlorine Analyzer Page 3 of 3 A. Chlorine analyzer shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. Installation and adjustment shall be checked and approved by a manufacturer's factory representative. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL I .01 SCOPE OF WORK : SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page I of 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to completely install and put into operation , butterfly control valve as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE : A. Unit Responsibility and Coordination: The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this section to be furnished by the valve manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all valve components including the actuator. Any component of each complete unit . not provided by the valve manufacturer shall be designed , fabricated , tested , and installed by factory- authorized representatives experienced in the design and manufacture of the valve equipment. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work. B . Design Requirements: Upstream Maximum Pressure Downstream Minimum Pressure Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate 24-inch 75 psi 55 psi Re: 02642 Re: 02642 Val ve shall operate in the above conditions without damage to the valve 16-inch 85 psi 30 psi Re:02642 Re: 02642 Unit shall be designed to receive 4-20 mA signal from a flow meter and modulate to control flow based on a remote user setting. I .03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: The equipment to be provided under this section shall be suitable for installation and operation in potable water systems . I .04 SUBMITTAL S: A . Submittals required after award of contract and prior to installation: I . Technical bulletins and brochures . 2 . Electrical diagram . B . Submittals required prior to final walk through: I. Operation and M a intenance Manual. Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elev ated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 1.05 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS : SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 2 of 9 A . A factory representative of all major component manufacturers, who has complete knowled ge of proper operation and maintenance, shall be provided for one day to instruct representatives of the Owner on proper operation and maintenance. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment during instruction sessions, additional sessions shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. B. Prior to scheduling instructions, submit outline of instructions to Engineer for approval. C. Operating and maintenance manual shall be explained during these instructions. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS: A . Furnish one set of special tools required for the proper servicing of all equipment supplied under these Specifications, packed in a suitable steel tool chest with a lock. 1.07 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the s ite . C. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges , strongly built and securely bolted thereto. D . Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion . 1.08 WARRANTY: A . The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. Warranty shall be for a period of two years and begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 .01 BUTTERFLY CONTROL VALVE : A. See Section 02642 -Butterfly Valves . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 3 of 9 2.02 QUARTER-TURN OR MULTI-TURN ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATOR: A . General: The actuator shall be manufactured by EIM Controls, Inc ., Rotork eontrols, lne. RotorkControls, Inc., or pre-approved equal. This specification requires the use of only non-intrusive design electric actuators. Electric actuator shall include the 460 VAC / 3 PH/ 60 Hz electric motor, integral Y<i-tum worm gear, reduction gearing, valve stem drive nut/bushing, position limit switches, mechanical overload torque switches, ductile iron gear case, local pushbutton control station, close-coupled circuit breaker disconnect and automatic de-clutchable handwheel. B. Actuator Sizing: The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure. The safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage I 0% below nominal. The operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 120 seconds. C. Ambient Temperature: The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from minus 22° F (- 300 C) to plus 158° F ( + 70° C). D. Motor: Electric motors shall be specifically designed for designed for valve actuator service, and shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated. The eRelosure shall meet NEl\4A 4 (weatherproof), }tEMA €i (temporlll)' submergenee, €i ft. head for 30 miRutes) and }mMA 7 (explosion proof) as standard. The enclosure shall meet NEMA 4 (w eatherproof and, NEMA 6 (temporary submergence, 6 ft. head for 30 minutes).Motor shall be capable of operation under maximum specified loads when the voltage to the motor is+/-I 0% of the nominal voltage . Motor shall have Class F insulation with thermal overload sensors imbedded in the motor windings. Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows: 1. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve. 2. A thermostat imbedded in the windings to protect against overheating shall sense motor temperature. E. Limit 8witehes: Limit switehes shall be geared to the driYe meehanism and in step with actual ya}ye position at all times, whether operation is by power or manual mode . 8witehes shall be aetivated by a rotor type design . Contaets shall be silver and have a rating of 10 amps at 120 VAC , a minimum of(3) no. and Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 4 of 9 November 2007 (3) }LC. co0tacts shall be proYided fur each direction of tra•,rel pl1:1s two intermediate contacts . The limit switch gear mechaHism shall be e0closed to preYeHt eHtraHce of fureigH matter or 1Nire e0tangleme11t. Use of cams or screws to set s•witches or desig0s requiri0g battery back 1:1p methods to e0s1:1re positioH co0trol iH the eYeflt of a power fail1:1re, are u0acceptable. F. Gearing: Motor speed reduction shall be by means of a gear train consisting of hardened steel spur gears and self-locking worm and wonn gear set. The wonn shall be heat treated alloy steel and have wonn thread surface rolled or ground. The wonn gear shall be bronze. Non-metallic gears in the power train are not acceptable. All gearing and shafting shall be supported on anti-friction bearings. All thrust components shall be supported by use of tapered roller bearings. All geari0g a0d beari0gs shall be grease lubricated aHd suitable fur year ro1:10d service based OH preYaili0g ambie11t temperature co0ditio0s. G. Hand Operation: A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar means; the drive being restored to power automatically by starting the motor. The hand/auto selection lever should be padlockable in both "Hand" and "Auto" positions. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is Jocked in "Hand" without damage to the drive train. Handwheel or handcrank rim pull shall NOT exceed 80 pounds. The handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive, and any gearing should be such as to permit emergency manual operation in a reasonable time. Clockwise operation of the handwheel shall give opening movement of the valve per City of Fort Worth standards, unless otherwise stated in the job specification. For safety purposes, it shall be possible to disengage the electric drive with the declutch lever. This disengagement and any subsequent reengagement shall not cause any damage to the valve or operator -even with the motor running. H. Drive Bushing: I. The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Normally the drive bush shall be positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings, when housed in a separate thrust base, should be of the sealed-for-life type. Remote Valve Position/Actuator Status Indication : Four co0tacts shall be proYided which can be selected to indicate a0y positioH of the YalYe with each co0tact selectable as 0ormally opeH or 0ormally closed. Eight contacts, independently set, shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve with each contact selectable as Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 5 of 9 normally open or normally closed. The contacts shall be rated at SA , 120V AC, 30V DC. Current source 4-20 mA output transmitter shall provide constant valve position feedback. Gearbox visual indicator only is not acceptable. J. Local Position Indication: The display shall be able to be rotated in 90-degree increments in order to provide easy viewing regardless of actuator mounting position. K. Integral Starter and Transformer: The reversing starter, control transformer, and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator, suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation buildup. For ON/OFF service, this starter shall be a solid-state type suitable for 60 starts per hour not to exceed a rate of 600 starts per hour and of a rating appropriate to the motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of the incoming three phases. The primary and secondary windings shall have short circuit and overload protection. It shall have the necessary tappings and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions: 1. 24V DC output, or alternate 11 OV AC output, where required for remote controls 2. Supply for all the internal electrical circuits L. Integral Push Buttons and Selector: Integral to the actuator shall be local controls for Open, Close, and Stop, and a local/remote selector switch padlockable in any one of the following three positions: I. Local Control Only 2. Off (No Electrical Operation) 3. Remote Control plus Local Stop Only. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control. The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed without the necessity of stopping the actuator. M. Modulating Service Controls Modulating service controls shall be pro:·,rided with up to 1200 starts per hour with positioning accuracy to-../ 1.0%, and shall include the following: Modulating service controls shall be provided with up to 1200 starts per hour with positioning accuracy to +/-0.25 %, and shall include th e followin g: Comparative Circuit shall be a solid-state plug-in PC board to accept a 4-20 mA input control signal from a position controller and have zero, span and deadband adjustments. The circuit shall provide, as standard, a 4-20 mA output signal for remote position indications. Both input and output signals shall Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 6 of 9 be optieally isolated . The eim:1it shall iBelude a jumper seleetable setting to RemaiB lH Last PositioB or Close OB Loss OB eoHtrol sigaal. Reversing Contactor Control voltage shall be 120 volts, 50 or 60 Hz. N.O. Seal-in contacts for momentary contact pushbutton control and N .C.contacts for electrical interlock shall be supplied. When specified, additional contacts (I N .O. and I N.C. for open and close coils) shall be supplied. The contactor shall be both electrically and mechanically interlocked. It shall be completely wired as an assembly and plug connected to the modular package. Control Power Transformer assembly shall provide 115, 18 and 12 VAC. It shall be epoxy impregnated and encapsulated to prevent moisture incursion and shall be completely wired as an assembly and plug connected to the modular package. Each actuator shall be supplied with open-stop-close pushbuttons furnished integrally mounted. Pushbuttons shall be double o-ring sealed and include a protective silicone boot. Seal material shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet light. When integrally mounted pushbuttons are specified, the design shall permit operation of the buttons when the electrical enclosure cover is open. The actuator shall include two (2) long life high intensity LED type pilot lights to indicate open, closed and intermediate valve position (both lights on). Red shall indicate valve open and green shall indicate valve closed. The actuator shall include a 3-position selector switch, for local (hand)-off-remote (auto) control. The selector switch shall be padlockable in any position. N. Monitoring and Diagnostics Facilities: Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows: Monitor (availability) relay, having one change-over contact, the relay being energized from the control transformer only when the Local/Off/Remote selector is in the "Remote" position and thermostat is not "tripped" to indicate that the actuator is available for remote (control room) operation . Where required, it shall be possible to provide indication of thermostat trip and "Remote" selected as discreet signals . 0. Wiring and Terminals: Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and three-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a minimum of three threaded cable entries . When required , a forth cable entry shall be provided. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator shall be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acc eptable . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. I -Page 7 of 9 Control logic circuit boards and relay boards must be mounted on plastic mounts to comply with double insulated standards. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided and attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: 1. Serial Number 2 . External Voltage Values 3 . Wiring Diagram Number 4 . Terminal Layout This must be suitable for the contractor to inscribe cable core identification beside terminal numbers. P. Enclosure: Actuator shall be designed for non-intrusive start up I commissioning Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 6. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be stainless steel. Q. Startup Kit: Each actuator shall be supplied with a startup kit comprising installation instruction, electrical wiring diagram, and sufficient spare cover screws and seals to make good any site losses during the commissioning period . R. Performance Test Certificate: Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free-of- charge. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load and the following parameters should be recorded: 1. Current at maximum torque setting 2. Torque at maximum torque setting 3. Flash Test Voltage 4. Actuator Output Speed or Operating Time In addition , the test certificate should record details of specification, such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, and wiring diagram code number. S. Warranty and Spare Parts: Each actuator shall be warranted for a period of 60 months from date of shipment. This warranty shall be held in effect regardless of precommissioning conditions in a typical indoor or outdoor environment Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 8 of 9 as long as the actuator is not abused or disassembled . This warranty shall not require the use of special storage procedures (such as the use of indoor storage, plastic bags, desiccants, and the energizat ion of heater(s) in order to be maintained . The successful bidder to allow for actuator rebuild or repair shall inventory a complete compliment of spare parts. All spares shall be available to plant personnel within 72 hours ofrequest as not to delay plant operations. T. Actuator Mounting and Service: Electric motor operators shall be provided by the local Representative. Cycle test to be witnessed by the Engineer, Contractor and Owner's Representative prior to delivery to jobsite if requested. Actuator for 24" valve to be direct-mounted using carbon steel bracket and coupling with black powder coat finish. Actuator for 16" valve to be floorstand mounted above grade with stem extension to 2" A WWA operating nut. Floorstand and stem extension to be fabricated from carbon steel with nylon powdercoat on floorstand. Powdercoat finish shall be UV resistant. Fallow all manufacturers' instructions for storage, installation and field wiring actuator at jobsite. Local manufacturers' Representative shall provide start-up service on each actuator after installation and field wiring is complete. VALVE SCHEDULE TAG# QTY SIZE TYPE Actuator CYCLE TIME TBD 1 24" AWWA Y..-turn 120 sec. BFV TBD 1 16" AWWA Multi-turn 120 sec. BFV PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION : A. All flow control valves shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. B. Installation and adjustment shall be checked and approved by a manufacturer's factory representative . After acceptance, the representative shall address a letter to the Engineer outlining all installation and start up procedures. The letter shall include a statement that the valves are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. The manufacturer or his qualified representative shall conduct training session for the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the valve. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 END OF SECTION SECTION 11296 Flow Control Valve and Actuator Addendum No. 1 -Page 9 of 9 Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page I of26 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Work Included This section includes the design, construction, testing, and comm1ss10ning of a Composite elevated tank and related work including foundations, painting, electrical, mechanical and appurtenances . B. Related Documents Drawings and the general provisions of this document, including General Conditions, Special Provisions, and other Division I Sections apply to work in this section . C . Related Sections Section 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting 1.02 REFERENCES: The latest version of the following Specifications, Codes and Standards are referenced in this section. ACI 117 ACI 304 ACI 305 ACI 306 ACI 318 ACI 347 AISC S335 ANSI Bl6.5 ANSI ASCE 7 API 650 ' ASTM A 123 ASTMA240 ASTM A285 ASTM A 774 ASTM A 778 AWWA Dl00 AWWAD102 AWWA C652 FAA 70/7460-lH NACE RP0178 NFPA NEC NFPA 780 NSF 61 OSHA 29CFR SSPC VIS-89 TCEQ Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete Hot Weather Concreting Cold Weather Concreting Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete Guide to Formwork for Concrete Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel Welded Stainless Steel Fittings Welded Stainless Steel Tubular Products Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities Obstruction Marking and Lighting National Association of Corrosion Engineers National Electric Code Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems Standard for Drinking Water System Components Part 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 2 of26 November 2007 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Elevated Tank B. C. The Composite elevated tank shall consist of the following: foundation, reinforced concrete support structure and a welded steel water tank. The support structure shall extend vertically from the foundation as a circular concrete wall . A domed concrete slab shall be provided as structural support for the steel tank within the perimeter of the wall . A reinforced concrete ring beam shall be provided to connect the steel tank, concrete dome and concrete support wall. The elevated tank shall be in accordance with the dimensions and details required by these specifications and drawings. Operating Parameters Minimum capacity within operating range 2,000,000 gallon Maximum operating range 35.00 ft Elevation -overflow/top capacity level 950.00 ft -bottom capacity level 915 .00 ft -grade slab 853.00 ft -final ground 852 .50 ft Inlet / Outlet Pipe Diameter 24 m . Overflow Pipe Diameter 18 m . Maximum fill and drain rate 15,000 gpm General Design I. Design Standards -The structural design of the elevated storage tank shall conform to the following design standards except as modified or clarified by this section. Foundations and Support Structure Steel Tank ACI 318 and ASCE 7 AWWADIOO 2 . Design Parameters -The applicable design parameters are: Earthquake Zone Design Wind Speed Design Snow Load ZoneO 100 25 mph psf D. Design Loads Design loads shall be m accordance with ASCE 7-02 for Category IV (essential facility) structure. 1 . Dead load shall be the estimated weight of all permanent construction . 2. Water load shall be the weight of water when the tank is filled to overflow. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 3. Roof live load in addition to snow load: none. SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 3 of26 4. Roof snow load shall be the larger of 15 psf. or the snow load determined in accordance with ASCE 7. Ground snow load shall be determined from Figure 7-1 in ASCE 7. 5. Wind loads shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 for wind exposure category C, and basic wind speed of90 mph . (see Figure 6-1 in ASCE 7) 6 . Horizontal and vertical seismic loads shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 and the Site Class as determined in the soil investigation report. a. Importance factor I= 1.50 . b. Response Modification Coefficient R = 3 .0 E. Combination of Loads The effect of combination of loads shall be considered in accordance with the following. 1.40 + l.6F + 1.6(L+S) 1.20 + l.2F + L + 0 .5S + 1.6W 1.20 + l.2F + L + E <t.9D + 1.6W 0.9D+F+E D = Effect of dead load. F = Effect of water load . E Effect of horizontal and vertical seismic load . L = Effect of interior or roof live load . s = Effect of roof snow load. w = Effect of wind load. F. The Contractor will provide a geotechnical report performed by an independent third party firm . The investigation described in Paragraph 1.07B herein is to establish bidding parameters only . The Contractor's foundation design should be based on the results of his independent geotechnical recommendation. The independent firm 's investigation shall, at a minimum , include the following: A minimum of 3-test holes Maximum allowable bearing pressure Settlement Uplift potential Foundation recommendation The geotechnical report shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. If the Contractor's geotechnical report yields results which vary from the original geotechnical report included in the bidding documents, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing within 3 working days . In no case shall the design include allowable bearing pressure that is Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 4 of26 greater than the original report. In the case of substantial variation in the reports, the Engineer will direct the Contractor in procedures to coordinate results. 1.04 SUBMITT ALS: Unless otherwise specified, submit copies of all required submittals in accordance with Specification 01300, each stamped and approved by the Contractor. Submittals not stamped and approved by the Contractor will be returned and not reviewed. A. Construction Drawings Provide elevation, plan and sectional view drawings of the foundation, support structure, tank and all appurtenant equipment and accessories . Show the location, dimensions, tolerances, material specifications and finish requirements. The submission shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Foundation details shall include excavation, soil protection and backfill requirements, all m accordance with the geotechnical report. Reinforced concrete details shall include construction joints, openings and inserts. Reinforcement shall be clearly indicated on the structural drawings and identified by mark numbers that are used on the fabrication schedule. Location, spacing and splice dimensions shall be shown. Placement and fabrication details shall conform to ACI 318. Steel tank details shall include components, fabrications, weld joints and a layout showing all primary and secondary shop and field welds. B . Design Data Provide a table showing capacity of the tank in gallons at all levels in one-foot increments. Provide a summary of the design for the foundation, support structure, tank and other components. Include the design basis, loads and load combinations and results that show conformance with specifications and referenced codes and standards. The submission shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Provide a finite element analysis that accurately models the intersecting elements of the interface region . The interface region includes those portions of the concrete support structure and steel tank affected by the transfer of forces from the tank cone and the tank floor to the concrete support wall. The analysis shall provide results including the shear, moment, and compression or tension caused by the intersecting elements in the interface region . C. Construction Procedures Provide design, detail drawings and procedures for the support structure forming system. Details shall include location of form and construction joints, rustications and ties. Procedures shall include form removal criteria and minimum elapsed time for adjacent concrete placement. Provide shop and field weld procedures for all structural joints on the steel tank. The subm ission Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 5 of26 shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. D . Product Data Provide a separate concrete mix design for each specified concrete compressive strength indicated on the drawings . Include acceptable ranges for concrete slump testing, calculations and test reports for trial batches. Provide technical data and color samples of all coating products . Provide fabrication details and manufacturers descriptive information for appurtenant equipment and accessories. These include, but are not limited to: Piping, Valves and Fittings Ladders, Walkways and Railings Cathodic Protection Electrical Telemetry Site Improvements Tank Nameplate Doors and Hatches E. Reports/Certification Provide documentation of all tests, inspections and certifications required by this section. These include, but are not limited to: Geotechnical Report performed by Contractor Concrete Test Reports Weld Test Reports and Radiographs Steel Mill Certificates Painting Inspection Reports Hydrostatic Test Reports Manufacturers Certificates and Field Reports Welder Qualifications Density Reports for Backfill .. G . Operation/Maintenance Provide six (6) manuals that include operating instructions and maintenance procedures for the elevated tank and all applicable appurtenant equipment, mechanical components and accessories. Include tank information; dimensioned drawings, piping diagrams and design data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualification of Manufacturer The work described in this section shall be performed by an experienced Contractor that has met the prequalification requirements set forth in the Special Instructions to Bidders . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 B . Regulatory Requirements SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 6 of26 The standards, specifications, procedures, codes and regulations of the entities referenced m Paragraph 1.02 shall be observed and followed as applicable and as specified. The elevated tank shall be designed and constructed in compliance with the governing building code and with other applicable federal, state and local regulations . Personnel safety equipment shall be provided in accordance with OSHA requirements and manufacturers documentation . 1.06 DELIVERY , STORAGE & HANDLING: A . Handling and Shipping The Contractor shall handle materials and fabricated components in a manner that will protect them from damage . Allow painted materials adequate cure time prior to stacking or shippin g. B. Storage and Protection Protect delivered materials and equipment from damage. Store in well-drained areas and provide blocking to minimize contact with the ground. Repair any surfaces that show evidence of deterioration or contamination. All appurtenances shall be stored in accordance w ith the manufacturers ' recommendation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS : A . Permits and Easements Permits , licenses, and easements required for permanent structures, changes in existing facilities or advancement of the construction as specified , shall be secured and paid for by the Owner prior to the start of construction . These include building permits, airspace authority approva l, site access easements, highway crossing permits, etc . Licenses or permits of a temporary nature required by specific trades shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Existing Conditions A geotechnical in v estigation has been carried out at the site. The foundation recommendations are included in the report prepared by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing an additional geotechnical investigation as described in Paragraph 1.03.F herein . C . Acce ss Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 7 of26 The Contractor shall provide an all-weather access from public roads to the tank site for construction equipment and City maintenance vehicles . D. Working Conditions 1. Safety and Health -The Contractor shall comply with safe working practices and all health and safety regulations of OSHA, state and local health regulatory agencies and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Provide protective and lifesaving equipment for persons working at the site. 2. Times for Work -Times for work shall comply with local, state and federal regulations and laws, as well as the General Conditions . 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Schedule The Contractor shall provide a schedule in accordance with Section 01040. The Contractor shall provide a bar chart showing the anticipated schedule for design , submittals, site work and the major components of construction including foundation , support structure and steel tank. In addition, show tank painting , electrical installation and other significant activities. Update the schedule monthly, or as requested by Owner and Engineer .. B. Notification The Contractor shall provide notification of the intent to start work at least seven days prior to commencing each major phase of work. The Contractor shall provide a schedule or notification of the time and day for each concrete pour. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any change in schedule or cancellation. C. Certifications Provide certification from the engineer of record that the elevated tank has been designed m accordance with the requirements of the specification . Provide certification that the project has been constructed m accordance with the contract documents , specifications and approved submittals. Provide certification that testing and inspection requirements of 3 .07 have been performed and the results comply with the requirements of the specification. 1.09 GUARANTEES The Contractor shall guarantee the structure, appurtenant equipment and accessories provided under this section against defective design, workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of final completion in the contract Maintenance Bond . If notified within this period , the Contractor shall repair any defects at no cost to the Owner. Defects caused by Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 damaging service conditions are not covered . SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 8 of26 All guarantees for materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Reinforced Concrete Concrete materials and reinforcement shall comply with ACI 318 , except as modified in this section. B. Steel Tank Steel tank components, including steel plates, sheets, structural shapes and filler metals shall be in accordance with A WW A DI 00, Section 2, "Materials." C. Piping and Fittings All materials to come in contact with potable water shall be tested in accordance with NSF 61. Piping and fittings shall conform to: Steel Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Ductile Iron Fittings Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Type PVC Pipe 2.02 CONCRETE FOUNDATION: AWWA C200 AWWA CI50 & CI51 AWWA Cl 10 AWWA C303 A WW A C900/C905 The concrete foundation shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318. Minimum specified compressive strength shall be as required by design, but not less than 4000 psi at 28 days . The service load reinforcement tension stress shall not exceed 30,000 psi under dead plus water load unless flexural cracking is otherwise controlled in accordance with ACI 318. 2 .03 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE (PEDESTAL): The cast-in-place concrete support structure shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 . The specified compressive strength of concrete shall be as required by design , but not less than 4,000 psi at 28 days. The maximum specified compressive strength of concrete for the wall and dome shall be 5,000 and 4,000 psi respectively. Minimum concrete cover to reinforcement shall be per ACI318, Section 7.7.1. A. Support Wall Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 9 of26 Support wall shall be reinforced concrete with a minimum thickness of 8 inches exclusive of any rustication or architectural relief. Wall thickness shall be provided such that the average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water is limited to 25% of specified compressive strength, but not greater than 1000 psi. A minimum total wall reinforcement of 0.15% vertically and 0 .20% horizontally shall be distributed approximately equally to each face. B. Tank Floor Tank floor shall be a reinforced concrete dome not less than 8 inches thick. The average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water shall not exceed 15% of the specified compressive strength, nor greater than 550 psi. Minimum total reinforcement in orthogonal directions shall be 0.40% distributed approximately equally to each face. Additional reinforcement shall be provided as required for stress caused by edge restraint effects. C. Openings The effects of openings in the wall shall be considered in the design . Not less than 60% of the interrupted reinforcement in each direction shall be placed each side of the opening. Reinforcement shall extend past the opening not less than half the transverse opening dimension. Openings wider than 3 ft. 6 in. shall be subjected to a rigorous analysis taking into account the stress concentrations and diminished lateral support that exist in the vicinity of such openings. Each side of the opening shall be designed as a column in accordance with ACI 318. Openings 8 ft. 0 in. or wider used for vehicle access shall be strengthened against vehicle impact and local buckling by means of an internal buttress located on each side of the opening. The buttress shall consist of a thickened, reinforced concrete wall section that is integrally formed and placed with the support wall. The buttress section shall be not less than 3 ft. 0 in. wide and 6 in. thicker than the nominal wall dimension. 2.04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE/ STEEL TANK INTERFACE: A. Interface Region The interface region includes those portions of the concrete support structure and steel tank affected by the transfer of forces from the tank cone and the tank floor to the concrete support wall. This includes a ring beam and connection details. The Contractor shall provide evidence that a thorough review of the interface region has been performed. Finite element and finite difference analyses are the required methods for examining such local stresses in detail. The geometry of the interface shall provide for positive drainage and not allow either condensate or precipitation to accumulate at the top of the concrete wall or ring beam. B. RingBeam The ring beam shall be reinforced concrete with a nominal width and height of at least two times Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page IO of 26 the support wall thickness . Minimum radial and circumferential reinforcement shall be 0.25%. For direct tension, reinforcement shall be provided such that the average service load stress in tension reinforcement due to the weight of the structure and stored water does not exceed 12 ,750 psi. Ring beam design shall consider unbalanced forces from the steel tank cone and concrete dome, load conditions varying with water level, eccentricity of loads resulting from design geometry, and allowance for variations due to construction imperfection and tolerance. 2.05 STEEL TANK: A . General The steel tank shall be all welded construction and shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of A WWA DlOO. The required capacity and dimensions of the tank are noted on the drawings and in this section of the specifications. All exposed lap joints shall be fully seal welded on both sides . Drip rings shall be provided on the top and bottom of the tank shell. B . Plate Thickness All members shall be designed to safely withstand the maximum stress to which they may be subjected during erection and operation. The minimum thickness of any steel plate in contact with water shall be 1/4 in., except that plate used as a membrane over the structural concrete floor shall have a minimum thickness of 3/16 in . C . Roof Details The roof of the steel tank shall be conical or dome-shaped. For a conical shape, the roof shall contain a slope ranging from 8: I to 12: I. The intersection of the vertical wall plate and the roof shall be configured with a 2 '-6" high by I' -6 " wide transition knuckle . A flat domed roof with a 2' -6" pressed knuckle transition is also acceptable. All structural members supporting the roof of the steel tank shall be flat bar or sealed square tubular sections . Support beams shall be seal welded to the underside of the roof plate along the entire length of the beam. 2 .06 APPURTENANCES AND ACCESSORIES : A. General Accessories shall comply with the mm1mum requirements of the Specifications, Codes and Standards listed in 1.02, current applicable safety regulations, and the operating requirements of the structure. B. Ladder Access Ladders shall be provided from the slab on grade inside the base of the support wall to the upper Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 11 of 26 walkway platform located below the tank floor. The tank floor manhole shall be provided with ladder access from the upper platform. A ladder shall extend from the upper platform through the access tube interior to the roof. A ladder mounted on the access tube exterior shall be provided for access to the tank interior, extending from the roof manhole to the tank floor. Ladders that terminate at platforms or landings shall extend a minimum of 48 in. beyond the platform elevations. A safety extension shall be provided at the top of the ladder under hatch(s). The safety extension shall be a Ladder Up Safety Post as manufactured by Bilco or Engineer's approved equal. The post shall extend 42-inches above the top of the ladder and be constructed of hot dip galvanized steel. Mounting hardware shall be galvanized . Ladders located in the concrete support structure and access tube interior shall be galvanized steel. Tank interior ladders shall be coated in accordance with the tank interior coating system. Ladder side rails shall be a minimum 3/8-in. by 2 in. with a 16 in. clear spacing. Rungs shall be minimum 3/4-in . diameter, spaced at 12 in. centers and plug welded into holes drilled in the side rails. Tank interior ladders shall be provided with I-in . diameter rungs and 1/2 in. x 2-in. side rails and shall be fully seal welded. Rungs shall be skid resistant. All ladder widths shall be a minimum of 16-inches. ' Ladder shall be secured to the adjacent structure by brackets located at intervals not exceeding I 0 ft. Brackets shall be of sufficient length to provide a minimum distance of 7 in . from the center of rung to the nearest permanent object behind the ladder. Ladder brackets located on the access tube exterior shall be reinforced at the access tube shell so that potential ice damage is confined to the ladder and bracket and not the access tube shell. C. Safe Climbing Device High strength aluminum , rigid rail safe climbing devices shall be provided on all ladders. Pole or cable devices will not be accepted . Rails shall be center mounted and extend from 3 ft. above the ladder bottom to the top of the ladder section. Mounting brackets, fasteners and splice bars shall be provided as required for a rigid installation . Three trolleys with snap hooks shall be provided that are designed to be operated with the aluminum rail. A safety body harness with front and side rings shall be supplied for each trolley. Safe climbing system shall be North SAF-T-CLIMB 80704 as approved by the Owner. A caution sign shall be provided at the lowest point of access to the ladder requiring safe climbing devices. The sign shall read "CAUTION-Safety Equipment Required when Climbing Ladder". The sign shall be secured to the wall. D . Intermediate Platforms and Ladder Cages Provide intermediate offset platforms on the support wall ladder at maximum 20 ft. intervals and at light locations . Also provide receptacle outlets at light locations on separate circu ·t than . light -- fixture . Platforms shall be a minimum 3 ft . X 5 ft. and provided with handrails, ·dca1t?Jt n~ ~o ~itG .,.d t,J'in,., } 2?:~~'ii'1ii~~·1 ~all, c: •• v ,.S lll.:,., H. '.§{~ {¥~, i~l Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 12 of 26 plates in accordance with OSHA requirements. Grating shall be used for the walking surfaces. All components shall be galvanized steel , aluminum , or stainless steel. Provide galvanized cages on support wall ladders between landings . E . Upper Platform A 4 ft . wide upper walkway platform shall be located at the top of the support wall to provide access from the support wall ladder to the roof access ladder located on the interior of the access tube and to the inlet, outlet, and overflow piping as shown in the plans. Platforms shall be provided with handrails, midrails and toe plates in accordance with OSHA requirements. Grating shall be used for the walking surface. All components shall be galvanized steel. A fixed lanyard shall be provided at platforms to provide fall prevention . F . Support Wall Doors I . Personnel door and associated finish hardware shall be in accordance with Sections 08110 and 08710 . Door locks shall incorporate a security system to assure that keys used during construction will not open doors after occupancy. All locks shall be keyed in accordance wi t h the Owner 's requirements. Quantity and location of personnel door(s) shall be as shown on the drawings. 2 . Overhead door shall be in accordance with Section 08330. Install exterior safety posts to protect the door opening. Size , quantity and location of vehicle door(s) shall be as shown on the drawings . G . Tank Openings 1. Floor -Provide a 30-in. diameter manhole through the tank floor. The manho~e shall open into the tank and be operable from a ladder located on the upper platform and shall be designed to withstand the pressure of the tank contents without leakage. The manhole assembly shall include a stainless steel handwheel operator and threaded components. 2. Roof -Provide two 36-in. wide square access hatches on the roof of the tank . One hatch shall allow egress from the access tube to the roof. The second hatch, located adjacent to the first, shall allow access to the interior of the tank via the ladder mounted on the exterior of the access tube. The opening shall have a minimum 4-in. curb. Provide aluminum covers with a 2 in . down turned edge, stainless steel hardware , hold open arm, and a locking mechanism. Material shall be minimum 3/16-inches thick ASTM A36 or Engineer's approved equal. Minimum opening shall be 2-foot 8-inches square. Hatch to be Biko E-4AL , or Engineer's approved equal. G. Access Tube Provide a minimum 60-in . diameter centrally located access tube through the steel tank to provide Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 13 of26 access to the tank roof from the upper walkway platform. The access tube shall incorporate a 2 in. by 2 in. channel to collect condensation that may form on the interior surface. A flexible% in . PVC hose complete with backflow preventer shall drain the channel to the overflow pipe . H. Roof Railing/ Antenna Support A 42-in. high roof guardrail shall be provided to enclose all centrally located roof accessories. Guardrail shall be a minimum of 24 ft . in diameter. The guardrail shall be designed for additional loads associated with the attachment of eight future antennas. No antennas have been identified for placement at this time. Provide a 4-in. kickplate and coat guardrail per the tank exterior system. I. Communication and Antenna Cable Provisions Provide the following for future communication and antenna cable routing. This work includes the following : I. A bundle of six 6" Schedule 40 PVC conduits complete with long radius (min 24") 90 degree bend and end caps as shown on the drawings. Size and location of the wall opening shall allow the conduit to terminate as close to the support wall as possible. This grouping of conduits shall serve as the pedestal entry location suitable for a single provider and is typical of four locations. 2. Provide an interior rigging rail suitable for rolling trolleys at the top of the support wall accessible from the upper platform. 3. Provide industry standard 35" Jong pre punched "Z" bracket at 5 ft vertical spacing directly above the co.nduit entry locations at the base of the support wall to a point 100 ft above grade. Provide similar brackets in vertical position at 5 ft centers around the perimeter of the support wall . J. Antenna Conduit Slot and Feed Thru Plate Provide antenna conduit slots and feed thru plates for future wireless security communication conduit as shown in the plans. The number and orientation of the conduit feed-thru plates shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall submit structural shop drawings for both appurtenances. K . Rigging Access Provide a 24.-in. x 36-in. opening at the top of the support wall. This opening shall be accessible from a platform and shall provide access to the exterior rigging rail located at the tank/support wall intersection. The access opening shall be provided with a hinged stainless steel cover or a removable vent in accordance with 2.05.M.2. A minimum 24-in. diameter opening shall be provided on the tank roof to provide access to the Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 14 of26 tank interior rigging rails. This access opening may be combined with a pressure/vacuum relief mechanism . L. Painters Rails Provide permanently installed painter rails suitable for rolling trolleys at the interior of the tank at the wall/roof and access tube/roof connections. Provide an exterior painters rail at the base of the tank adjacent to the support structure. M. Piping 1. Inlet/Outlet Pipe -Provide an inlet/outlet pipe that extends from the base of the support structure to the tank floor elevation. Provide a minimum of 6-in. high removable silt stop where the inlet and outlet pipes enter the tank.. The bottom capacity level of the tank's operating range shall be at or above the elevation of the top of the silt stop. Pipe material within the support structure shall be Schedule 1 OS Type 304L stainless steel. Pipe material below the grade slab shall be flanged cement lined ductile iron suitably retrained to prevent movement. The inlet and outlet pipes shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Suitable stainless steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank floor at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. The inlet and outlet pipes shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any diffe rential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipes. The required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipes . 2. Overflow Pipe -The top of the overflow shall be located within the tank at the overflow elevation. It shall run vertically beside the central access tube and extend through the tank floor, at which point it shall turn 90° and run under the tank floor to the support wall. This horizontal run shall be sloped to drain . The pipe shall then turn 90° and run vertically beside the support wall to grade. A base elbow shall direct the overflow through the support wall, where the pipe shall be terminated with a flap valve and a concrete splash pad. The flap valve shall open under an unseating head of 0.5-ft min. to 5 ft maximum. Pipe material within the support structure shall be Type 304L (minimum 11 gauge) stainless steel. If the top of overflow is located above top capacity level, the tank shall be designed for the additional capacity provided by the difference. The entrance to the overflow pipe shall be designed for the maximum inlet flow rate specified in 1.03B. The design shall be based on the water level cresting within 6 in . above the overflow elevation. A conical weir shall be provided if the entrance capacity of the overflow pipe diameter is not adequate. A vortex prevention device shall be used . The overflow shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Suitable galvanized steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 15 of 26 floor at intervals not exceeding 20 ft. The overflow and weir section within the tank shall be supported by the central access tube. The overflow pipe shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any differential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipe . A layout with sufficient upper offset to accommodate differential movement is acceptable . If this method is not applicable, the required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipe. 3 . Inlet / Outlet and Overflow Piping Connection Provide a 8 in. lateral pipe with gate valve with hand wheel that connects the inlet and overflow near grade to provide a means of draining the tank . 4. Stainless Steel Requirements -Pipe and fittings shall be Type 304L stainless steel fabricated from material meeting the requirements of ASTM A-240 . Fabrication, inspection, testing, marking and certification of pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A-778 and A-774 respectively. All fitting less than 18-inches shall be smooth flow. Fittings larger than 18-inches may be of five section miter construction. Backing flanges shall be in accordance with ASTM A285-C drilled to ANSI B 16 .5 Class 150. Pipe, fittings and welds shall be cleaned and passivated . Pipe, fittings and flange thickness shall be in accordance with the manufacturers certified pressure rating for the applicable service pressures. The design pressure rating shall be 150 psi minimum except for overflow piping. Dielectric flanged fittings (isolation kits) shall be provided between any connections of stainless steel and steel or ductile iron. 5. Floor Drain -floor drains shall be installed on the ground floor as shown in the plans. Floor Drains shall drain to gravel pit minimum of 20 feet from base of tank. 6 . Tank Drain - a tank drain shall be provided to completely drain the tank contents if the inlet/outlet pipe does not intersect the low point of the tank. A four inch drain pipe located at the low point of the tank bowl floor shall be fitted with a threaded plug and tee handle. Flexible stainless steel piping shall connect and drain to the overflow pipe. N . Ventilation 1 . Tank Ventilation -Two (2) tank vents shall be provided, one located centrally on the tank roof above the maximum weir crest elevation, and the other as shown on the Plans. Vents shall consist of stainless steel or aluminum components, including a support frame, screened area and cap. The support shall be fastened to a flanged opening in the tank roof. The vent cap shall be provided with sufficient overhang to prevent the entrance of wind driven debris and precipitation . A minimum of 4 in . shall be provided between the roof surface and the vent cap . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 16 of 26 Each tank vent shall have an intake and relief capacity sized to prevent excessive pressure differential during the maximum flow rate of water, either entering or leaving the tank . The overflow pipe will not be considered as a vent. The maximum flow rate of water entering the tank is specified in l .03B. The maximum flow rate of water exiting the tank shall be calculated assuming a break in the inlet/outlet at grade when the tank is full. The vent shall be provided with an insect screen . Vent capacity shall be determined based on open area provided by the screen . In addition to the tank vent, a pressure/vacuum relief mechanism shall be provided that will operate in the event of vent failure . The mechanism shall be designed to return automatically to its original position after operation . The pressure/vacuum relief mechanism shall be located on the tank roof above the maximum weir crest elevation, and it may be incorporated in the vent assembly. 2. Support Structure Ventilation -Ventilation within the support structure shall comply with the governing building code requirements, based on occupancy classification. As a minimum, one louvered vent shall be provided at the top of the support wall. This vent shall be accessible from the upper platform and may also be designed to provide access to the exterior rigging rails located at the tank/support wall intersection. Vents shall be accessible from the interior ladders , platforms or floors provided. Vents shall be stainless steel or aluminum and provided with a removable insect screen. 0. Interior Floors 1. Slab on Grade -Provide a minimum 6 in . thick, 3500 psi concrete floor slab in the base of the support structure . The slab shall be supported on select fill or constructed as a structural slab and shall have minimum #4 reinforcing steel at 12 in. centers each way. If supported on granular fill, a minimum 6-inch thick layer of granular material shall be provided on top of the proposed subgrade prior to tank floor construction, to a tolerance of +O, -1/2 inch of the bottom of the floor and footing elevation. The granular material shall extend I-foot beyond the footing. The granular material shall be a well graded crushed rock with I 00% passing I" and not more than 8% passing No. 200 U .S. sieve. Provide 1/2 in. expansion joint between floor slab and support wall and at pipes and supports that extend through the floor. Place cap strip and sealant over the expansion joint. Provide I % in. deep sawed contraction joints at 12 ' maximum centers. The slab shall be sloped at 0.5% toward the overhead door for drainage . P. Level Monitoring I . General -Provide three (3) 3/4 in. couplings welded to the inlet pipe 5 ft. above grade . Each coupling shall be provided with a stainless steel nipple and an isolation gate valve . 2 . Pressure Gauge -Provide two (2) pressure gauges in accordance with ASME B40. l Grade 2A. The dial shall be 4 1/2 in. diameter with black markings on wh ite background. Pressure range is 0-100 psi and 0-230 feet of water, calibrated at intervals of two feet , or less. Install gauges on each side of inlet control valve, four feet above the finished floor. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 Q. Lightning Protection SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 17 of26 Refer to Section 16455 for general lightning protection . Lightning protection for obstruction lights shall consist of an air terminal mounted on the support and formed to fit around the fixture. The 1/2 inch diameter copper air terminal shall extend a minimum of 10 inches above the light fixture and shall connect to a copper conductor that terminates in a bonding plate secured to the tank roof. R. Nameplate Provide a bronze tank nameplate with raised lettering on the exterior of the pedestal near the personnel door. The lettering width shall be a minimum of 1/.i in . The Contractor shall submit a layout of the nameplate for approval. The following information shall be displayed on the nameplate: City of Fort Worth, Texas 2.0 Million Gallon Elevated Tank Year Tank Dimensions Including: Tank Diameter & Head Range Height to Overflow/Elevation Pedestal Diameter M.S.L. Contractor 's Name Consultant's Name S . Antenna Provisions Provide antenna cable hangers at 10 ft. intervals adjacent to the access ladder. Cable hanger consists of a 1/.i in . x 4 in. x 12-in. plate secured horizontally with a I-in. spacer. Provide 4 pc . 4 in. diameter couplings with brass plug through the tank roof plate covering the access tube . Couplings shall be seal welded and located such that threaded conduit or weatherheads for antenna cable may be attached. Provide a minimum of ten (10) pick-hole penetrations near the top of the pedestal for antenna conduit spaced evenly around pedestal. T. Obstruction Lighting Obstruction lighting shall be provided in accordance with FAA standards. The obstruction light shall be centrally located on the roof of the tank above all permanent installations . It shall be a steady burning, dual fixture type with a lamp-out relay switch . The fixture shall be weather sealed, corrosion resistant with aluminum base and housing. Red globes with 116-watt clear traffic signal lamps rated at 8000 hour life shall be provided. A pilot light located near the electrical panel shall be provided to indicate when the primary bulb has failed. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 U. Hoist Assembly SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 18 o f26 A Hoist Assembly shall be provided with a pulley system and rope which can be used to hoist materials from the tank floor to the upper walkway platform. 2.07 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING Electrical and Lighting shall be provided in accordance with Division 16 and the drawings. All work shall be performed and all materials shall be provided in accordance with national Electric Code and governing electrical, safety and inspection codes, regulations and ordinances. 2.08 PEDESTAL INTERIOR FINISHES, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING Interior finishes, mechanical , and plumbing for the tank pedestal shall be provided in accordance with the drawings and other specifications in these Contract Documents. 2 .09 STEEL TANK PAINTING The paint system schedules of Section 09910 Steel Water Storage Tank Painting shall apply to all exp9sed interior and exterior surfaces of the steel tank including steel accessories and appurtenances. Galvanized, stainless steel and concrete surfaces are not coated . Colors and location of the logo shall be selected by the Owner. 2 .10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A . Tests Review mill test certifications of all steel plate, structural components and reinforcement to ensure compliance with specification requirements . B. Inspections Provide inspection of shop fabricated components in accordance with A WW A D 100 . PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Foundation Excavation The foundation bearing surface and excavation shall be inspected by a representative of the geotechnical engineer prior to foundation construction. Verification of the applicable design and construction recommendations are required . The geotechnical engineer shall be retained by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. After verification of the foundation bearing surface, provide a 2-inch thick concrete working slab with in the lower excavation limits. Grade the site to prevent runoff from entering the excavation . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 B. Environmental Conditions SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 19 of26 Prior to performing any work, verify the expected temperature, humidity and weather conditions are within the specified limitations for executing the work. C. Elevated Tank Components After completion of each major component and prior to proceeding with the next stage of construction, verify that tolerance inspections and material quality control tests conform to the requirements of 3 .07. 3.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION: A. Reinforcement Fabrication, placement, development and splicing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 117. B. Formwork Formwork design, installation and removal shall comply with the minimum requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 117 and with the applicable requirements of ACI 347 . Forming systems shall be designed with the provision of ties and bracing such that concrete components conform to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment and elevation without leakage of mortar. Formwork systems shall be designed to safely support all loading conditions. Embedded items shall be properly positioned and secured. Form surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign materials and coated with a release agent prior to placing reinforcement. C. Concrete Concrete proportioning, production , placement, quality control and curing procedures shall comply with ACI 318 and ACI 117. Concrete shall satisfy the specific structural , durability and architectural requirements of the completed components . 1. Proportioning -The proportions of materials for concrete shall be established to provide adequate workability and proper consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into the forms and around reinforcement without excessive segregation or bleeding . Unless otherwise specified , concrete without high range water reducer shall be proportioned to produce concrete slumps at the point of placement between 2 and 4 in. If high range water reducer is used, concrete slump prior to addition shall be 3 to 4 in. The slump, after addition of high range water reducer, shall be a maximum of 7 in. Air shall be entrained to provide concrete with 3.5% to 6.5% air content. 2. Production -Concrete that arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, may have water added within the limits of the maximum permissible water-cement ratio. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 20 of26 Maximum slump shall not be exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing time required. For concrete with site- administered high range water reducer, the preplasticized minimum slump requirement shall be attained as permissible by addition of water and mixing prior to the addition of the water reducer . 3. Placement -Prior to concrete placement, all snow, ice, water or other foreign material shall be removed from the spaces that the concrete will occupy. Concrete shall be deposited in its final position in accordance with ACI 318. Drop chutes shall be used in walls and columns to prevent free-fall of the concrete and to allow the concrete to be placed through the cage of reinforcing steel without form splatter. These shall be moved at short intervals to prevent stacking of concrete. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly worked into the corners of forms and around the reinforcement and embedded items to eliminate all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall be the largest practical size that can be used in the work and they shall be operated by competent workmen. D. Weather Concrete shall not be placed during precipitation or extreme temperatures unless protection is provided. During cold weather the recommendations of ACI 306 shall be followed. During hot weather the recommendations of ACI 305 shall be followed. 3.03 FOUNDATION: A . Excavation Depth of excavation shall be based on the foundation type recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer. Grade the site to prevent runoff from entering the excavation. B . Concrete Construction For shallow foundations, reinforcement placed adjacent to a concrete working slab shall have a 2 m. mm1mum cover, and shall be supported by precast concrete block, metal or plastic bar supports. The sides of foundations shall be formed using any suitable system conforming to ACI 318. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces. Forms shall be provided on top sloping surfaces steeper than 2.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Straight form panels may be used to form circular foundation shapes. The minimum design radius shall be maintained at all sections . C . Finish Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 21 of26 Formed surfaces shall have a smooth form finish when exposed and a rough form finish when not exposed. Unformed surfaces shall have a troweled finish when exposed and floated finish when not exposed. D. Backfill Backfill foundation in lifts not to exceed 6 in. in depth to the grade established on the plans. Compact each lift to 95% standard proctor density per ASTM D698. Place compacted backfill evenly all around the tank. Compaction by ponding or jetting is not acceptable . Excavated material meeting site grading specifications may be used to complete site grading. Remove and dispose of all undesirable or excess materials . 3.04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE: A. Architectural Concrete Construction The exposed exterior surface of the concrete support wall is designated architectural concrete. The concrete and formwork requirements of this section shall be strictly enforced to ensure concrete of the highest practicable structural and architectural standards . Concrete proportioning, placing, and finishing shall be in accordance with the ACI 301, Chapter 18, except as modified by this Section. Formwork design, installation and removal shall comply with the mm1mum requirements of ACI 318, ACI 117 and the applicable requirements of ACI 347, except as modified by this Section. Attention shall be given to ensure the same concrete design mix is used throughout the support wall. The proportion, type and source of cement and aggregates shall not be changed. Uniform moisture content and placing consistency shall be maintained. Place all wall concrete vertically and directly inside the reinforcement cage with drop chutes to prevent form splatter and surface finish variation. Placement methods that introduce concrete horizontally through wall reinforcement are prohibited. Vertical pour rate shall be a minimum of 15 feet per hour. Support wall reinforcement shall be installed with plastic supports. Maximum spacmg of supports for welded wire fabric shall be 5 ft. centers, horizontal and vertically. Forming systems shall be designed with the provision of ties and bracing such that concrete components conform to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment and elevation. Embedded items shall be properly positioned and secured. Form surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of concrete residue and coated with a release agent prior to placing reinforcement. Do not allow excessive release agent to accumulate on the form . Steel forms shall be coated with a non staining, rust preventative form oil or otherwise protected. Rust stained steel formwork shall not be used. The forming system for the pedestal wall shall be fully engineered and detailed with procedures to meet the increased demands of architectural concrete . The support wall shall be constructed Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 22 of26 with a jump form process using form segments prefabricated to match the wall curvature. Conerete poMr height shall ee a minimMm of e ft . and a ma>,iml:lm of 10 ft. Form panels shall extend the full height of the concrete pour using only vertical panel joints. Form system shall be designed to lap and be secured to the previous wall pour. The space between the form and the previous pour shall be sealed to prevent grout leakage. Wall forms shall incorporate a positive means of adjustment to maintain dimensional tolerances specified. Wall forms shall be adjusted for vertical plumb and circularity and locked into position with through wall form ties prior to concrete placement. Panels shall be designed for lateral pressures associated with full height plastic concrete head, and support and bracing shall be provided for construction related impact loads and wind loads. Working platforms that allow safe access for inspection and concrete placement shall be provided. Form facing material shall be metal, or plywood faced with p lastic or fiberglass. The form system shall incorporate a uniform pattern of vertical and horizontal rustications to provide architectural relief to the exterior wall surface. Rustication strips shall be sealed to the form face to eliminate the grout leakage that results in broken corners, color variations and rock pockets. Broken edges and chamfers will not be accepted. All construction joints and panel joints shall be located in rustications. Vertical panel joints shall be sealed using closures, which combine with the form pattern to prevent grout leakage and panel joint lines. All joints shall be grout tight. The vertical and horizontal rustications shall be proportioned and combined to impart a symmetrical architectural pattern to the completed structure. Form t ies shall be located in a uniform pattern. No architectural form treatment is required on the interior surface. Support wall concreting shall incorporate segmented placement procedures . Temporary vertical bulkheads shall divide the wall pour into segments corresponding to a single batch (truckload) of concrete . The bulkheads shall be located at rustications, braced rigid and tight to maintain vertical alignment under concrete load without grout leakage . Wall segment concrete shall be placed continuously to full form height from a single load . Placement from multiple batches is not permitted. Temporary bulkheads shall not be removed until adjacent concrete is placed. Support wall concreting operations shall occur a maximum of once per day . Multiple form movements and concrete placements within a day are not permitted. Wall forms shall not be disturbed or removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to prevent forming operations or environmental loads from causing surface damage or excessive stress. Form removal shall be based on early age concrete strength testing. The min imum concrete strength shall be established by the Contractor, based on an analysis of stress at critical stages throughout the forming and concrete operations. Early age concrete testing shall be in accordance with ACI 228.IR-89 . Pull Out testing in accordance with ASTM C 900-99, Maturity Method testing in accordance with ASTM C 1074-93, or field cured cylinders compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 172 are the acceptable methods to determine early concrete strength. The formwork system for the domed structural floor shall be designed to support all construction loads . Adequate shoring and bracing shall be provided to transfer loads without appreciable movements. Form surfaces shall be steel, plastic or fiberglass coated material. Shoring and forms for the structural dome slab shall remain in place until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry the floor weight without damaging deflections . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 23 of26 Concrete surfaces shall be protected in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 306 until the component attains 35% of the specified compressive strength . At this time , protection may be removed subject to the allowable temperature differential. A reasonable temperature differential shall be defined , based on component thickness and restraint conditions B . Finish Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior and exterior support wall. Tie holes shall be plugged using grout on the interior and manufactured plugs on the exterior which match the color of the cured concrete as closely as possible. Provide a light sandblast to the expo sed exterior concrete support wall surface. Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior dome slab . The unformed surface shall have a floated finish . No tie holes , defects voids larger than 3/8-in. diameter or fins shall be visible on the interior or exterior of the concrete support structure, as viewed from grade. All concrete surfaces shall be cleaned as required to remove surface contamination. C . Dimensional Tolerances Support structure concrete construction shall conform to the following : Variation in thickness: wall ............................................. -3 .0% to +5 .0% dome ........................................... -6 .0% to + 10% Support wall variation from plumb : in any 5 feet of height... ............. .3 /8 inch in any 50 feet of height.. ............. I inch maximum in total height ............ 2 inches Support wall diameter variation .............. 0.4% not to exceed ............................. .3 inches Dome floor radius variation ................... .1 .0% Level alignment variation: from specified elevation ............. 1 inch from horizontal plane ................. l/2 inch Offset between adjacent pieces of formwork : exterior exposed surfaces .......... .1/8 inch interior exposed surfaces ............ 1/4 inch D. Mock Up Panel A mock up panel shall be constructed using the proposed form work, concrete and placement methods. Minimum size will be 4 ft . wide by 7 ft . high. This panel shall be agreed upon by the Owner, Contractor and Engineer as the reference standard with which to judge surface quality , appearance and uniformity of texture and color. Revi ew and acceptanc e of formed concrete surface must be made immediatel y upon form Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 24 of26 removal. Succeeding pours shall not be place until the most recent wall pour has been stripped and the form surface approved. The Contractor shall be responsible to inform the Engineer and Owner as to the pour schedule . The Engineer shall not delay the Contractor by lack of attendance. Concrete with surface defects exceeding limitations specified herein or not meeting the standard represented by the mock-up panel shall be repaired to meet that standard, or removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 3.05 STEEL TANK: A. Welding Welding procedures and general welding requirements shall be in accordance with A WWA D100, Section 8, "Welding". No structural welding is permitted to any steel embedded in hardened concrete, unless the weld is at least 2 ft. from the embedment interface. Grinding of weld contour shall approximate Condition "D" of NACE Standard RPO! 78 . B . Fabrication Layout , cutting, forming, edge preparation and workmanship for steel tank components and fabrications shall be in accordance with A WW A DI 00, Section 9, "Shop Fabrication". C. Tank Erection Steel tank erection procedures and general requirements shall be in accordance with A WW A D 100, Section I 0, "Erection". D. Tolerances Steel tank tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of A WW A D 100 and API 650, Section 5 .5. Steel cone shall be constructed to the following tolerance. The deviation from the theoretical conical surface shall not exceed 0 .032-VRT , when measured in the radial direction over length 4°'1RT, where R is the radius normal to the plate surface at the point of consideration, and Tis the plate thickness. E . Grouting The interface between the steel tank floor plate and the supporting structural concrete slab shall be constructed with a minimum I in. void . Subsequent to testing, the void shall be filled with a flowable grout mix. 3.06 STEEL TANK PAINTING: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 A . Surface Preparation SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 25 of26 The surface preparation and paint application requirements of Section 09910 shall apply to all exposed interior and exterior surfaces of the steel tank including steel accessories and appurtenances. Galvanized surfaces are not included. Shop cleaning and priming of steel is acceptable per the conditions of Section 09910 . 3 .07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Concrete Testing and Inspection The evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall be in accordance with Section 5 .6 of ACI 318 and ACI 117, except as modified in this section. Tests for slump and air content shall be made for each truck to check for conformance with paragraph 3 .02C . Measurements shall be taken prior to the addition of site administered high range water reducer and prior to depositing the concrete . No concrete shall be placed if slump and air content have not been measured or do not meet the requirements . Samples for strength tests shall be taken for each individual concrete placement. Provide at least one sample for each l 00 cubic yards of concrete . Three cylinders shall be made from each sample required . A 7-day compressive strength test shall be used to supplement the 28 day tests. Slump, air and compressive cylinder testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Owner and retained by the Contractor. The support .wall radius, plumb and thickness shall be verified for each concrete lift at 45 degree intervals. An inspection report certified by the tank designer shall be provided at project completion . B . Steel Tank Testing & Inspection Inspection procedures for the steel tank shall be as required by A WW A D 100, Section 11, "Inspection". Radiographic inspection of full penetration butt-welded joints shall be made by an independent inspection company approved by the Owner and retained by the Contractor. Erection tolerance of the steel cone in the radial direction shall be measured. Provide field measurements at 30 degree intervals . Weld joints of plate over the structural concrete floor shall be tested for leaks by vacuum box / soap solution testing, or equivalent method prior to grouting. C. Tank Painting Inspection and Testing Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress, including explosion proof Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 13201 Composite Elevated Water Storage Tank Page 26 of26 lights and electrical equipment. Temporary ladders and scaffolding shall conform to applicable safety requirements. They shall be erected to facil itate inspection and moved by the Contractor as required. Inspection and testing shall generally be in accordance with A WW A D 102. The Contractor shall provide inspection devices in good working condition for measurement of dry film thickness of coatings. Contractor shall also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test the accuracy of dry film thickness measurement device. A nondestructive holiday detector shall be used for inspecting the interior coating below the overflow level. All holidays shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations and retested . No holidays or other irregularities shall be permitted in the final coating. 3.08 CLEANING: A. Site The project site shall be kept in a clean and safe condition at all times. The Contractor shall remove all construction equipment and debris at project completion . B. Tank Disinfection The proposed chlorination method shall be communicated to the owner 's representative prior to disinfection . The Owner shall be notified a minimum of three weeks in advance of proposed date of commencing tank disinfection. Water and sufficient pressure for flushing, cleaning, initial testing and disinfection shall be supplied by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. However, Contractor shall be aware that after tank disinfection , the water used for disinfection may not be able to be placed into the water system and may need to be de-chlorinat ed and discharged from the tank . Any costs associating with de-chlorinated and discharged from the tank will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Disinfection shall be performed after interior coatings have been applied and allowed to thoroughly cure . All solvent vapors shall be completely removed by suction-type exhaust fans and blowers . The complete interior shall be washed down and flushed out. Following disinfection, the tank shall be filled and sampled by the Contractor for bacteriological testing, prior to being put into service. The testing shall be as described in A WW A Specification C652, latest edition, Section 4.4 -Bacteriological Sampling and Testing. Results of the test shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Final decision of the suitability of the dis infection procedure shall rest with the Engineer. Should repeat of the disinfection procedure be required, additional cost of disinfection , testing and water to fill the tank shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART l. -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Include the following: 1 . Domestic cold water piping. 2. Waste, drain, and vent piping. 3. Miscellaneous devices and equipment. B . On-site: Make connections to the on-site utilities listed below. 1. Water. 2 . Sanitary Sewer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15400 Plumbing Page 1 of 6 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of this type, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with Work similar to that required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with the National Electric Code, NFPA 70, as applicable to wiring and other electrical construction of the unit. D. UL Compliance: Provide components with UL listing and labeling when there 1s an applicable UL category. E . Comply with the minimum standards prescribed in requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the following codes and standards : 1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Standards . 2 . International Plumbing Code. 3 . Other codes, ordinances, and laws applicable to the place of the Work. I .03 SUB MITT AL A. Submit list of and Product Data for products incorporated into the Work. B . Submit Shop Drawings of the Following: 1 . Sump Pumps . C. Include manufacturer's instructions for each product with submittal. PART 2. -PRODUCTS 2 .01 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM A. Lea d-Fr ee Product s: Northside IJI Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 15400 Plumbing Page 2 of 6 I . Provide materials, products, and fabrications that comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements and recommendations regarding lead content and contribution of lead to potable water, that have no lead or lead alloys in contact with potable water, and that do not contribute to or cause lead in potable water. 2 . Solder: Lead free, ASTM B32 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn96 tin-silver solder. 3. Flux : Containing not more than 0 .2 percent lead, meeting NSF 61. B. Piping, Interior to 5' Outside: 1. Copper: a. Straight water tube, Kor L, ASTM B88 or B543. b. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings, ANSI Bl 6.22. 2. Where Indicated on Drawings to be Below, in, or Through Slab-On-Grade: a. Copper, coiled water tube, K or L, ASTM B88. b . Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings, ANSI Bl 6.22 . c . Pipe 1.5" or Smaller, in or Under Slabs-on-Fill: Continuous, without joints or fittings. d . Pipe 2" or Larger, in or Under Slabs-on-Fill: Brazed joints. C. Hose Connections: I. General : Provide hose connections with ANSI-AS SE 1011 hose connection vacuum breaker. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jonespec, Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn. FPWH (Wall non-freeze, lockable): Non-freeze, vacuum breaker, 3/4" hose bib, 3/4" supply connection, hinged locking cover, bronze box and cover; Smith 5509, Josam 71000. D. Back Flow Preventer (BFP) 1 . BFP Back-Pressure Relief, High Hazard: Reduced pressure principle with check valve assembly with intermediate relief valve for high hazard cross connections; ASSE No. 1013, A WW A C506, two isolating ball valves, built-in strainer, ball valve test cocks, suitable for horizontal or vertical installation as indicated on the Drawings; Watts No. 909 series. 2 .02 DRAINAGE PRODUCTS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Jonespec, Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn. B . Cleanouts : ANSI Al 12 .36.2M. I . FCO General Areas : Leveleze floor cleanout, galvanized cast iron body, spigot or no-hub connection with internal threaded bronze cleanout plug, adjustable ABS housing having a secured scoriated satin nikaloy cover and round top; Josam 56010-22-31. 2 . DGCO (Double grade cleanouts): Cast iron clean-out, double flanged housing, scoriated cast iron cover with lifting device, gasket sealed bronze plug, vandal proof screws, set in 18" square by 5-1/2" thick cast-in-place concrete block, set flush with finished grade, see detail on drawings; Josam 58860 . C. Floor Drains: ANS] Al 12.21.lM. 1. Provide with two-piece body, flashing collars with seepage openings, auxiliary inlet tap for trap primer when indicated , deep-seal P-trap; size indicated on the Drawings. 2 . Floor Drain Schedule. FDJ Floor Drain: Type "A" adjustable strainer top, buff-polished nickel-bronze alloy top, gal vanize d ca st iron parts, vandal-proof and secured ; Josam 30000-6A-l 7-92 . Northside JII Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 06 I 018038 November 2007 D. Indirect Drain Fittings (Open sight): SECTION 15400 Plumbing Page 3 of 6 I. AGI Air Gap : 1/4" to I" inlet, 3/4" to 1-1 /2" outlet, galvani zed cast iron , air gap minimum of 1/2 times the inlet diam eter or I", whichever is greater ; Josam 88900-40. 2.03 DRAIN , WASTE, AND VENT (DWV, within building to 5 feet outside) A . Below Grade or Below Slab on Carton Form: Use one of the following . I. Extra heavy hub and spigot, ASTM A 74 ; rubber gaskets, ASTM C564 . 2. Service or extra heavy hub-and-spigot ASTM A 74; rubber gaskets, ASTM C564. 3 . Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) pipe ASTM B306; fittings, cast bronze solder-joint, ANSI B 16.23 or wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder-joint, ANSI B16 .29; solder, ASTM-70, 50A. 4 . Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665; solvent cement ASTM D2564 . B. Above Grade: U se one of the following. I . No hub, Ca s t Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301 , ANSI Group 022, for pipe, fittings, and gaskets . 2 . Extra heavy hub and spigot, ASTM A 74; rubber gaskets, ASTM C564 . 3 . Service or extra heavy hub-and-spigot ASTM A 74 ; rubber gaskets, ASTM C564. 4 . Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) pipe ASTM B306; fittings, cast bronze solder-joint, ANSI Bl6.23 or wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder-joint, ANSI B16.29; solder, ASTM-70, 50A. C. Vent : I. Any of the above . 2 . Steel , schedule 40 galvanized steel, ASTM Al20 ; cast-iron threaded drainage fittings, ANSI B16 .12. D. Drain (]ndirect): I. Copper: Drainage tube (DWV) pipe ASTM B306; fittings , cast bronze solder-joint, ANSI B 16 .23 or wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder-joint, ANSI B 16 .29; solder, ASTM-70, 50A. 2. Steel: Galvanized , Schedule 40, ASTM Al20; galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings, 150 lbs ., ANSI B16.4. 2 .04 SUMP PUMP A. Sump pump shall be Hydromatic SW33 submersible pump or equal, as approved by the Owner. 2 .05 RELATED PRODUCTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. See the following Sections for related products : I. Valves: Section: VAL YES. 2 . Foundations, Hangers and Supports : Section: FOUNDATJONS, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS. 3 . lnsulation : Section : MECHANICAL INSULATJON . 4 . Sleeves : Section: BASJC MATERJALS AND METHODS, MECHANJCAL. 5 . Access Doors : Section : BASJC MATERJALS AND METHODS , MECHANICAL. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 3. -EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATJON SECTION 15400 Plumbing Page 4 of 6 A. Complete structural, mechanical, and electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and with the Drawings. Fasten each item of equipment and piping securely to the building structure. B. Do not fasten piping or conduit to any removable panel on equipment. C. Install equipment and associated piping and other connections in a manner to prevent conduction of sound to the framing and structural elements of the building. D. Provide necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing systems indicated fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections. E . Provide necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing systems indicated fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections and which are to be furnished by the Owner or are specified in other sections of these documents. F . Provide fittings and appurtenances for complete, operating piping systems. G . Complete the start-up procedures recommended by the manufacturer. H. See also Section : PJPING SYSTEMS . 3.02 JOINING TO EXJSTJNG SYSTEMS AND DJSSJMJLAR MA TERJALS A. General: Provide appropriate adapters recommended by the manufacturers of the various materials; install as recommended by the manufacturers of the various materials. B. Connections to Existing Piping: Where new Work connects to existing systems, match the material of the existing system except as prohibited by the Local Authority or job conditions cause the material to be in non-compliance with manufacturer's requirements . C. Point of Connection : l. Determine horizontal and vertical location of connecting point before proceeding with the installation. 2. Notify the Architect-Engineer before proceeding if there is discrepancy between indicated and determined location. D . Slope of Drainage Systems: 1. Determine available slope between building systems and point of connection for discharge of building drain and of storm drain system. 2. Notify the Architect-En g ineer before proceeding if there is discrepancy between indicated and available slope . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 3.03 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING (AJl Buried piping) SECTION 15400 Plumbing Page 5 of6 A. Beneath Slabs: Excavate carefully; do not destroy effect of capillary barri er , membrane, or spec ia l fills. 3.04 WASTE, DRAIN , VENT, AND SEWER PIPING A. Slope: Comply with Code requirements. B . In Trench: 1. Excavate at point of origin and point of connection to existing system and at in-trench high point of the new system . 2. Determine actual elevations of each. 3 . Set grade using laser equipment designed for that purpose or obtain services of registered public surveyor to set batter boards on maximum 20 foot spacing to establish grade of trench bottom for the actual elevations encountered. 4. If the slope indicated on the Drawings cannot be obtained, notify the Architect-Engineer before proceeding with the remainder of the excavation. 3.05 ROOF AND DECK PENETRATIONS A. Vent Pipes Through Roof (VTRs): I. Extend VTRs 12" above top of roof. 2. See Section: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, MECHANICAL. 3 . Do not locate within code-prohibited distance of outside air intakes and operable windows . 4. Offset VTRs in the attic so that they are minimum of 20 feet from outside air intakes . 5 . See also Section : BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS , MECHANICAL . B . Other pipes passing through roof or waterproof deck : See Section: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOPS, MECHANICAL. 3 .06 FLOOR DRAINS A. Follow drain and membrane system manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for install ation of drains in waterproofing m embranes. 3 .07 STARTUP AND TESTING A . Piping Testing: I. Water Piping: 100 psi hydrostatic pressure; four hours. 2. Wast e, Drain, and Vent Piping: Plug openings and fill with water to the topmo st vent opening; 24 hours. B. Lead Testing. I . After final sterilization and flu s hing, test water at sink a nd other fixtures and fittings from which water for human consumption may be obtained for lead content. Submit report of tes t results in parts per billion (ppb ). 2 . If lead content exceeds 20 ppb, flush system or implement other remedies or submit test re sults that indicate th e ppb to be no higher than th a t of the water where the proj ec t water service joins to the ex isting Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 water source . C. Put systems into operation. D . Test equipment performance. E. Adjust equipment for correct capacities. 3 .08 WATER SYSTEM STERILIZATION A. Initial Sterilization: SECTJON 15400 Plumbing Page 6 of 6 I. After completion of work on the water lines, thoroughly sterilize as prescribed by A WW A Standard C60 I or as specified herein. 2. After pressure tests have been . made and before introducing the chlorinating material, thoroughly flush the lines to be sterilized with water until entrained dirt, oil, mud , and other pollutants are removed . 3 . Place the chlorinating material directly into the lines to be sterilized in an amount to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million (ppm). 4. Retain the treated water in the line for the longer of: time required to destroy non-spore-forming bacteria, or for 24 hours. 5 . Open and shut valves on the system being tested several times during the contact period . 6. After acceptable sterilization, flush the system with potable water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 0. I ppm . B. Maintained Sterile Condition . I . Take several samples of water from several points m the system daily and test for bacterial contamination. 2 . Repeat sterilization and sampling until tests indicate absence of bacteria for at least two full days. END OF SECTION Northside J11 Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART J. -GENERAL 1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Include the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 2. Setting plumbing fixtures . 3. Supplies, stops, wastes, other trim. 1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15440 Plumbing Fixtures Page I of 3 A. Standards: Comply with the minimum standards prescribed in requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc . Standards . 2 . International Plumbing Code. 3. Other codes, ordinances, and laws applicable to the place of the Work. B . Acceptable Fitting Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucets. 2. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc . 3. Speakman. C. Acceptable Stainless Steel Fixture Manufacturers : 1. Elkay. 2. Just. 3. Republic . 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data for all items incorporated into the Work. PART 2. -PRODUCTS 2 .01 FIXTURES A. Lead-Free Products: 1. Provide materials, products, and fabrications that comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements and recommendations regarding lead content and contribution of lead to potable water, that have no lead or lead alloys in contact with potable water, and that do not contribute to or cause lead in potable water. 2. Solder : Lead free, ASTM B32 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn96 tin-s ilv er solder, and flux containing not more than 0 .2 percent lead . 3 . See also Section : PLUMBING regarding lead-free requirements . B . General: I. Provide fixtures, brass, trim, stops, supplies, wastes, traps, and other accessori es in a manner to provide a comple te installation. Northside III Avondale-Ha s let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 15440 Plumbing Fixtures Pa ge 2 of 3 2 . Coordinate the elements of each fixture such that the prope r model of the style indicated is provided, properly selecting drillings , fittings , and other elements and accessories. 3 . Provide complet ely install ed fixture a ssembli es that comply with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Notify the Architect-Engineer of conflict s between this a nd other requirements of the Contract Documents . 4 . Notify Architect-Engineer of conflicts. C. Fixtures : New, of current manufacture and of the best of their respective kinds, free of blemishes, waves, kiln marks and discoloration ; all fixture surfaces in contact with walls, floors, and other building surfaces, truly flat. D. Exposed metal associated with fixtures including pipe, traps , nuts, bolts , washers, etc: stainless steel or chromium plated brass . E. Nuts exposed to direct view: Capnuts (closed top) type leaving no screw threads exposed . 2 .02 TRIM, WASTE, OTHER FIXTURE ACCESSORIES A General: Provide for fixtures as specifi ed below unless indicated oth erwise elsewhere. B . Sink Trim: 1. Trim: Chromium plat ed brass angle supply with 1/2" od x 12" flexible riser, 3/8" ips x 1/2" od loose key stop, wrought escutcheon; chromium plate all metal parts ; McGuire 167 LK. 2 .03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A Pl Service Sink (I compartment skullery, left drainboard) 1. Fixture : F a bricate in accordance with NSF St andard 2 , of stainless steel, 14 gage, type 304, single compartment sink, 1 -30x24xl4 inch (762x610x356 mm) compartment , single 24" (610mm) left side dra inboard5 .5 inches (1410mm) overall width, 27 inches (686mm) front-to-rear; Elkay Weldbilt WNSF- 8130-L. 2. Fittings (one required): Back mount, single handle , 14" (356mm) swing spout, renewable cartridge containing all moving parts , aerator, lever handles , integral stop arms; chromium plate all metal parts; T&S B-231 . 3 . Trim: Anneal ed vertical tube, cast brass c.p . trap , four 16 gage (1.6mm) 1-5 /8" (41mm) stainless tubular legs with fully enclosed gussets and corrosion resistant adjustable bullet feet; LK-251. 4 . Waste : Bronze body twist-handle waste fitting with connected over-flow, flat stainless strainer, 1-1 /2" (38mm) od brass tailpiece . Continuous brass drain connection with 1-1/2" (38mm) inl et, 1-1/2" (38mm) outlet . One 1-1 /2" (38mm) cast brass ground joint swivel p-trap with threaded cleanout plug, brass 1-1/2" (38mm) nipple with cast setscrew escutcheon ; chromium plate all metal parts; Elkay LK-86- RT 1-1 /2" (38mm) waste fittings with overflow, LK-53 continuous drain. PART 3. -EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A Provide competent for eman or supervi sor for th e install a ti on of the equipment and to counsel other trades in r ega rd to conn ecti ons a nd in st a ll ation . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 15440 Plumbing Fixtures Page 3 of 3 B. Install fixtures, fittings, trim, and other appurtenances in accordance with Manufacturer's recommenda- tions . C. Secure fixtures, fittings, trim, and other appurtenances in a manner to prevent rotation, movement, or other displacement relative to each other and relative to the building substrate . D. Anchor supply piping with "U" bolts and a steel angle at wall penetrations to prevent pipe movement. E . Install equipment level and square in proper planes with other elements of the Work, securely anchored in place. F. Grout plumbing fixtures at walls and floors with fine tile grout. G . Test operation of project, provide full instructions, and demonstrate to the Owner's designated representative the proper methods of care, operations, and maintenance of the equipment. H . Protect fixtures and equipment during construction; cover fixtures as required for proper protection during construction and clean fixtures for substantial completion . END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART I-GENERAL 1.0 I GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 1 of 8 A . The General Conditions and Requirements , Special Provisions, are hereby made a part of this Section . B. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications under this Section shall be made a part of the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications of other sections of this contract, as well as supplements issued thereto, information to bidders and pertinent documents issued by the Owner's Representative are a part of these Drawings and Specifications and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above documents will be on file at the office of the Owner's representative and shall be examined by all the bidders. Failure to examine all documents shall not relieve the responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation. C. Furnish all work , labor , tools, superintendence, material, equipment and operations necessary to provide for a complete and workable electrical system as defined by the Contract Documents. D. Be responsible for visiting the site and checking the existing conditions. Ascertain the conditions to be met for installing the work and adjust bid accordingly. E. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that upon completion of the electrical work, the entire system shall be in a finished , workable condition. F. All work that may be called for in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings, or, all work that may be shown on the Drawings but not called for in the Specifications, shall be performed by the Contractor as if described in both. Should work be required which is not set forth in either document , but which work is nevertheless required for fulfilling of the intent thereof, then the Contractor shall perform all work as fully as if it were specifically set forth in the Contract Documents . G . The definition of terms used throughout the Contract Documents shall be as specified by the following agencies: 1. Underwriters Laboratories 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 3 . American National Standards Institute 4. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 5. National Electrical Code 6. National Fire Protection Association Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 2 of 8 H . The use of the terms "as (or where) indicated", "as (or where) shown", "as (or where) specified", or "as (or where) scheduled" shall be taken to mean that the reference is made to the Contract Documents, either on the Drawings or in the Specifications, or both documents . I. The use of the words "furnish", "provide", or "install" shall be taken to mean that the item or facility is to be both furnished and installed under Division 16, unless stated to the contrary that the item or facility is to be either furnished under another Division or under another Contract, furnished under this Division and installed under another Division or under another Contract, or furnished and installed under another Division or under another Contract. 1.02 PERMITS AND CODES A. Secure all permits, licenses, and inspection as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and contract requirements bearing on the work. B . The minimum requirements of the electrical system installation shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code , as well as state and local codes. C. Codes and ordinances having jurisdiction and specified codes shall serve as minimum requirements, but, if the Contract Documents indicate requirements which are in excess of those minimum requirements, then the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be followed. Should there be any conflicts between the Contract Documents and codes, or any ordinances, report these with bid. D. Refer to the specification Section "Electric Utility Service" for additional requirements for the electrical service. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARDS A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be new, free from defects, and they shall conform to the following standards where these organizations have set standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 3 . American National Standards Association (ANSI) 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) B . All material and equipment of the same class shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, unless specified to the contrary. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 3 of 8 C. All products shall bear UL labels where standards have been set for listing. All other products shall be UL labeled. Motor control centers, switchboards , and switchgear shall have UL labels by the manufacturer. Custom panels, modified motor starters, control panels, and instrument panels and the like shall be manufactured by a fabricator approved as a UL508A shop and shall bear a UL 508A (UL Industrial Control Panel) label. D. When the Contractor provides a product for this project he shall be bound by the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and he shall agree to warrant and to be liable for the merchantability and fitness of his product to the applications to which his product is applied under the Contract Documents . 2.02 SHOP ORA WINGS AND SUBMITT ALS A. Shop drawings and submittals shall comply with the conditions set forth in the Civil Sections and as specified herein. B. Shop drawings shall be taken to mean detailed drawings with dimensions , schedules, weights , capacities, installation details and pertinent information that will be needed to describe the material or equipment in detail. C. Submittals shall be taken to mean catalog cuts , general descriptive information , catalog numbers and manufacturer's name. D . Submit for review all shop drawings and submittals as hereinbefore called for. E. Review of submittals or shop drawings shall not remove the responsibility for furnishing materials or equipment or proper dimensions, quantity and quality , nor will such review remove the responsibility for error in the shop drawings or submittals. F. Failure to process submittals or shop drawings on any item and/or items specified shall make the Contractor responsible for the suitability for the item and/or items , even though the item and/or items installed appear to comply with the Contract Documents. G . Assume all costs and liabilities which may result from the ordering of any material or equipment prior to the review of the shop drawings or submittals , and no work shall be done until the shop drawings or submittals have been reviewed. In case of correction or rejection , resubmit until such time as they are accepted by the Owner's Representative, and such procedures will not be cause for delay. H. Submittals and shop drawings shall be compiled from the manufacturer's latest product data . Should there be any conflicts between this data and the Contract Documents, report this information for each submittal and/or shop drawing. I. Shop drawings and submittals will be returned and unch e cked if the specific items proposed are not clearly marked , or if the General Contractor's approval stamp is omitted. Northside ll1 Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 4 of 8 J . When requested , furnish samples of materials for acceptance review . If a sample has been reviewed and accepted , then that item of material or equipment installed on the job shall be equal to the sample ; if it is found that the installed item is not equal, then replace all such items with the accepted sample equivalent. 2 .03 ACCEPTANCE AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. All manufacturers named are a basis as a standard of quality and substitutions of any equal product will be considered for acceptance. The judgement of equality of product substitution shall be made by the Engineer. B . Substitutions after award of Contract shall be made only within sixty (60) days after the not ice to proceed. Furnish all required supporting data. The submittal of substitutions for review shall not be cause for time extensions . C. Where substitutions are offered, the substituted product shall meet the product performance as set forth in the specified manufacturer's current catalog literature , as well as meeting the details of the Contract Documents. D. The details on the drawings and the requirements of the Specifications are based on the first listed material or equipment. If any other than the first listed material or equipment is furnished, then assume responsibility for the correct function, operation, and accommodation of the substituted item . In the event of misfits or changes in work required, either in this section or other sections of the Contract, or in both, bear all costs in connection with all changes arising out of the use of other than the first listed item specified. E. Substitutions of products under other sections may occur. Make necessary adjustments and additions to work under Division 16 to accommodate those substitutions . Such adjustments and additions shall be performed in compliance with Division 16 Specifications at no additional charge. F. Energy efficiency of each item of power consuming equipment shall be considered one of the standards for evaluation . PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A . Cutting and patching required under this section shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. Cutting lines shall be uniform and smooth . B . Use concrete saws for large cuts in concrete and use core drills for small round cuts in conc rete . C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintel or other structural support to protect the remaining masonry . Adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent damage to masonry. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 06f018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 5 of 8 D. Where large openings are cut through metal surfaces, attach metal angle around the opening. E . Patch concrete openings that are to be filled with nonshrinking cementing compound. Finish concrete patching shall be troweled smooth and shall be uniform with surrounding surfaces . 3.02 WATERPROOFING Provide waterproof flashing for each penetration of exterior walls and roofs. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Except where specifically noted or shown, the locations and elevations of equipment are approximate and are subject to small revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Locations changed substantially from that shown on the drawings shall be confirmed with the Engineer in advance of construction . B . Where equipment is being furnished under another Division, request from Engineer an accepted drawing that will show exact dimensions of required locations or connections. Install the required facilities to the exact requirements of the accepted drawings . C. All work shall be done in the best and most workmanlike manner by qualified , careful electricians who are skilled in their trade. The standards of work required throughout shall be of the first class only . D. Unless shown in detail, the Drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily give exact details as to elevations and routing of raceways, nor do they show all offsets and fittings; nevertheless, install the raceway system to conform to the structural and mechanical conditions of the construction . E . Holes for raceway penetration into sheet metal cabinets and boxes shall be accurately made with an approved tool. Cutting openings with a torch or other device that produces a jagged, rough cut will not be acceptable. F . Cabling inside equipment shall be carefully routed, trained and laced. Cables so placed that they obstruct equipment devices will not be acceptable . G. Equipment shall be set level and plumb . Supporting devices installed shall be set and so braced that equipment is held in a rigid, tight-fitting manner. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 3.04 EQUIPMENT PROTECTJON SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 6 of 8 A . Provide suitable protection for all equipment, work and property against damage during construction. B . Assume full responsibility for material and equipment stored at the site. C. Conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation and made watertight. All outlet boxes and cabinets shall be kept free of concrete , plaster, dirt and debris. D. Equipment shall be covered and tightly sealed against entrance of dust, dirt and moisture. E. All dry-type transformers prior to energization shall be protected against moisture and dirt absorption by a suitable covering. Also, maintain heat inside the covering by means of 100 watt minimum lamps. F . Interiors of and motor control centers shall be kept clean and dry prior to energization. Maintain heat inside each unit with one (I) 100 watt lamp located at bottom of each vertical section or energize section space heaters. 3 .05 COOPERATJON WITH WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A . Cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of their work. Allow all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installation of their work and the storage of their materials. B. The work under this section shall follow the general building construction closely. Set all pipe sleeves, inserts, etc., and see that openings for chases, pipes, etc ., are provided before concre te is placed or masonry installed . C. Work with other trades in determining exact locations of outlets , conduits , fixtures, and pieces of equipment to avoid interference with lines as required to maintain proper installation of other work. D. Make such progress in work that will not delay the work of other trades. Schedule the work so that completion dates as established by the Engineer are met. Furnish sufficient labor or work overtime to accomplish these requirements if directed to do so. 3.06 INSTALLATJON OF WORK UNDER ANOTHER DIVJSION A . Verify the electrical capacities of all motors and electrical equipment furnished under other sections , or furnished by the Owner, and request wiring information from the Engineer if wiring requirements are different from that specified under this Section. Do not make rough-ins until equipment verification has been received . B . Install all motors , controllers , terminal boxes , pilot devices, and miscellaneous items of electrical equipment that are not integrally mounted with the equipment furnished under other divi s ions . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 7 of 8 All such equipment shall be securely mounted and adequately supported m a neat and workmanlike manner. 3.07 CHANGE ORDERS A. In the event change orders are prepared, they shall each be itemized as to quantities in addition to labor, materials , and overhead. B. Pricing of change orders shall be done in compliance with the latest edition of "Means Electrical Cost Data" and pricing shall not exceed values tabulated therein. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all temporary labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all exposed equipment. Upon completion of work , clean equipment and the entire installation so as to present a first class job suitable for occupancy. No loose parts or scraps of equipment shall be left on the premises . B . Equipment paint scars shall be repaired with paint kits supplied by the equipment manufacturer or with an approved paint. C. Clean interiors of each item of electrical equipment. At completion of work all equipment interiors shall be free from dust, dirt and debris . 3.09 TESTS A . Test all systems furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective work. Make all necessary adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the system. B. Make all circuit breaker and protective relay adjustments and settings . C. Make the following minimum tests and checks prior to energizing the electrical equipment: 1. Check all wire and cable terminations for tightness. 2. Test all wiring as specified in 16120. 3. Test grounding system as specified in Section 16450. 4. Set all transformer taps as required to obtain the proper secondary voltage . 5 . Carefully check all interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system to ascertain that the system will function properly as indicated by schematics, wiring diagrams or as specified herein. 6 . Mechanical inspection of all low voltage circuit breakers, disconnect starters , control equipment , etc . for proper operation. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions Page 8 of 8 7. Provide all instruments and equipment required for the above tests. 3 .10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. At the start and during the progress of the job, keep one separate set of blue-line prints for making construction notes and mark-ups. B. Show conduit routing and wiring runs as constructed and identify each . C. Record all deviations from the Contract Documents. D . Submit set of marked-up drawings for review. The final payment will not be made unti l the review is complete. 3 .11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A . Six (6) weeks prior to the completion of the project, compile an Operations and Maintenance Manual on each item of equipment. These manuals shall include detailed instructions and maintenance as well as spare parts lists . B . Submit copies for review as hereinbefore specified. C. Preliminary Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be included with the initial shipments. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16110 Raceways Page I of 8 A. This section . shall include raceways, enclosures, supporting devices ancillary fittings and appurtenances . Furnish and install the complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Raceway is a broad-scope term that shall be defined by the National Electrical Code under Article 100. 1.02 APPLICATIONS A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, or otherwise specified, all underground and in-slab conduit raceways shall be of the following type: 1. Except as otherwise specified, all power and control underground conduit runs shall be made with schedule 40 PVC. Bends to grade shall be made with plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. 2. All instrumentation underground conduit runs shall be made with plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. B. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, or otherwise specified, all above grade conduit raceways shall be of the following type: I. Indoor exposed power and control conduit shall be rigid aluminum conduit. Instrumentation, signal , and communication conduit shall be rigid steel conduit. 2. Outdoor exposed power, control, and instrumentation , signal, and communication conduit shall be rigid steel conduit, except where areas are denoted as corrosive or NEMA 4X. In those area furnish plastic coated rigid steel conduit, fittings, and boxes. 3. Conduit concealed in masonry shall be with plastic coated rigid steel. 1.03 SUBMITT ALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Process catalog submittals for the following: I. Rigid Metallic Aluminum Conduit 2. Plastic Jacketed Rigid Steel Conduit 3. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit 4. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit 5. Liquid-tight Fittings 6 . Conduit Bushings 7. Conduit Bodies 8 . Conduit Sealing Fittings 9 . Expansion-Deflection Fittings I 0. Expansion Fittings 1 I . Cast Metal Boxes I 2 . Tape Products Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 Nov ember 2007 13. Wiring Devices 14. Supporting Devices 15. Labels 16 . Grounding Devices 17. Foam Sealant 1.04 SAMPLES A. Process samples for the following : SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 2 of 8 1. Plastic coated rigid metallic steel conduit (12" long with coupling for 3/4"C) 2. Liquid tight flex (12" long with box connector for 3/4" C.) B. Submit samples along with submittals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Rigid metallic aluminum conduit shall be manufactured of 6063 alloy, T-1 temper, with no more than 0.02% copper content. All conduit couplings shall be threaded aluminum . All such conduit shall be listed with UL and comply with UL-6 and ANSI C80.5. Aluminum conduit sha ll be Easco, Indalex, or equal. B. Rigid metallic steel conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized inside and outside and over thread s . All such conduit shall comply with U.L. Standard UL-6, Federal Specification WWC-581-D, ANSI C80. l , and NEMA RN 1-1980. Furnish Wheatland, Allied or equal. C. Plastic coated rigid steel conduit shall consist of rigid steel body that complies with above specifications for rigid metallic steel conduit, plus conduit shall have 40 mil thick heat-fused PVC over outside and 2 mil coat of fully catalyzed phenolic inside. The inside coat shall hav e the chemical resistance of the outer coating and shall not dissolve in lacquer thinner. All couplings shall be equipped with PVC sleeves that extend one pipe diameter or 2", whichever is less, beyond the end of the coupling. All plastic coated conduit shall conform to NEMA Standard #RNl (Type A) and such conduit shall be Robroy "Plastibond Red", or equal. D. Non-metallic rigid conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Such conduit shall be UL listed for 90 degrees C and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL-651 standards. Furnish Carlon , Sedco, or equal. Furnish manufacturer's approved solvent for joining couplings. E. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall consist of hot-dipped galvanized, flexible interlocking steel core with thermoplastic cover, integral copper ground wire (through 1-1/4" trade size) and shall be Anamet Anaconda seatite "UA", Electra-flex Liquatite "LA" or equal. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A . NEMA 4 lockouts for rigid metallic conduit shall consist of galvanized steel body with neoprene sealing ring. Furnish Crouse-Hinds, T &B, or equal. B. NEMA 1 lockouts for rigid metallic conduits shall be galvanized steel for use with galva nized steel conduit and hardened aluminum for use with aluminum conduit. Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 3 of 8 C. Conduit field-applied hubs for sheet metal enclosures shall be aluminum body with recessed neoprene sealing ring, threaded NPT insert, and shall be, T &B 3 70 AL series, or equal products by OZ/Gedney. D. Conduit hubs for non-metallic enclosures shall be fiberglass polyester reinforced with galvanized steel core, complete with locknut and grounding bushing . All such hubs shall be Crouse-Hinds Type NHU, or equal. E. Rigid metallic conduit chase nipples, split couplings, slip fittings, unions, reducers, and enlargers, shall be hot-dip or mechanically galvanized malleable iron. F . Rigid metallic conduit short els and long els shall be hot-dip galvanized malleable iron with NPT threaded hubs and male ends. Throats shall be smooth and free from burrs. All such fittings shall be OZ/Gedney Type "9" Series, Appleton, or equal. G. Rigid metallic conduit split couplings shall have threaded body with split tightening shelves with neoprene sandwich. Furnish malleable iron mechanically galvanized body. Such fittings shall be OZ type "SSP", or equal. H. Rigid metallic conduit grounding bushings shall be aluminum body with threaded hub, bakelite insulated throat, and tin-plated copper ground lug. Furnish OZ/Gedney type ABLG, or equal. I. Liquid-tight flexible conduit fittings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel body with internal locking ring and ground cone plus external ground wire fitting. Furnish straight or angle connectors as required . All such connectors shall be OZ/Gedney 4Q series, or equal. J. Rigid metallic conduit expansion/deflection fittings shall consist of galvanized malleable iron hubs with heat-fused epoxy coating, flexible neoprene joining sleeve banded to hubs with stainless steel bands , and with internal bonding jumper and guide cones . Furnish Crouse-Hinds type "XD" or equal. K. Rigid metallic conduit expansion fittings shall consist of metallic barrel joined to hubs at each end . One hub shall be threaded to barrel and other hub shall have slip fit to allow up to four ( 4") inches of conduit lateral movement. Provide external bonding jumper for each expansion joint. Furnish Crouse-Hinds type "XJ", OZ Type "AX", or equal. L. Conduit waterstops for sealing inside of conduit runs shall consist of aluminum pressure discs with sandwiched neoprene seal and with 316 stainless steel hardware. Furnish OZ/Gedney type "CS" series products, as indicated. 2 .03 CONDUIT BODIES AND BOXES A . Conduit bodies such as "C", "LB", "T" and the like pulling fittings shall be zinc coated with malleable iron or aluminum (material shall match conduit). Covers for damp and/or wet location use shall be gasketed cast metal with "wedge-nut" clamps. Covers for dry locations shall be cast aluminum and hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. All covers shall be equipped with clamp type clevises . Furnish Crouse-Hinds Form 7, or Appleton Form "FM7" products . B. Conduit bodies for use in corrosive areas shall be as specifi ed above but shall have 40 mil plastic coated PVC jacket and 2 mil interior coating as specified for plastic coated ri g id steel conduit. Furnish Robroy Plasti-bond Red fittings or equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 4 of 8 C. Conduit bodies such as "GUA'', "GUAT", "GUAL", and the like pulling/splicing fittings shall be cast aluminum with threaded cast aluminum covers. All such conduit bodies shall be Killark "GE" series, or equal products by Crouse-Hinds or Appleton. D. Cast metal outlet boxes, pullboxes, and junction boxes whose volume is smaller than 100 cubic inches, and cast metal device boxes, shall be sand-cast, copper-free aluminum or zinc coated sand-cast malleable iron. All boxes shall have threaded hubs. Furnish Crouse-Hinds "FD" style condulets, Appleton "FD" style Unilets , or equal. E. Covers for cast metal boxes shall be gasketed cast metal covers with 316 stainless steel sc rews and shall be suitable for use in wet or damp locations. 2 .04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A . Pullboxes and junction boxes whose volume is Jess than I 00 cubic inches shall be furnished as specified hereinbefore except where sheet metal types are shown , in which case, furnish such sheet metal enclosures in NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel construction with gasketed covers of same material. B. Pullboxes and junction boxes whose volume is I 00 cubic inches and greater shall be NEMA 4X 304 grade stainless steel type with gasketed stainless steel covers. Provide print pocket and interior back panel for mounting of terminal strips where terminal strips are called for on the drawings. Sheet metal boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman or equal. C. Covers for sheetmetal pullboxes and junction boxes over I 00 cubic inches (and for smaller s ized where shown) shall have hinged doors . All hardware shall be stainless steel. D. Cast metal junction boxes shall be cast aluminum type with gasketed , cast metal covers and with stainless steel cover screws. 2.05 LABELS A. Buried conduit marking tape for marking path of secondary buried conduits shall be four (4") inch nominal width strip of polyethylene with highly visible , repetitive marking "BURIED CONDUIT" or similar language , repeated along its length. B. Voltage warning labels for cabinets shall be waterproof vinyl strips with adhesive back and shall have "DANGER (VOLTAGE) -DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER BEFORE ENTERING". Letters shall be highly visible red color on white background . 2 .06 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Mounting hardware, nuts, bolts, lockwashers , and washers, shall be Grade 304 stainless steel. B. Unless otherwise indicated , channel framing and supporting devices shall be manufactured of ASTM 6063, T06 grade aluminum; 1-5/8" wide x 3-1/4" deep (double opening type). Clamp nuts for use with channels shall be grad e 304 stainless steel. Northside m Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 5 of 8 C . Where indicated , furnish grade 304 stainless steel slotted channel members 1-5 /8" wide x 1-5/8" deep or l 5/8" x 3 1/4" deep , double-faced type. All hardware and conduit clamps shall be grade 316 stainless steel. D. Conduit clamp supports for terminating conduits onto cable trays shall be mechanically galvanized malleable iron with adjustable angle clamp. Fittings shall be provided with 316 stainless steel hardware. Furnish OZ/Gedney type CTC products. E. All such channel members and fittments shall be B-Line, Unistrut or equal. F . Conduit straps, and associated nuts, lockwashers and bolts for use with channels shall be 304 stainless steel with 316 stainless steel hardware. Furnish B-Line products or equal. G . After-set concrete inserts (drilled expansion shields "D.E.S.") shall consist of two types . For anchors to accommodate 5/16" diameter bolts and smaller, provide HIL TI "HDI" series 304 stainless steel anchors. For anchors to accommodate 3/8" diameter and larger bolts, provide HIL TI "HV A" series with 316 stainless steel threaded inserts . H. Hanger rod shall be 3/8" minimum diameter Type 304 stainless steel all-thread. I. Nest-back or clamp-back conduit supports shall be two-piece hot-dip galvanized malleable iron devices. Furnish Crouse-Hinds "MW+CB", OZ/Gedney 140NG Series, or equal. J . One-hole conduit clamps shall be hot-dip galvanized malleable iron type , Crouse-Hinds Type "MW", T &B 1270/1280 Series , OZ/Gedney "14G" Series, or equal cast aluminum products . K . Conduit beam clamps shall be hot-dip galvanized malleable iron and shall be as follows : TYPE MANUFACTURER Right Angle OZ/Gedney Type "UBCG", or equal. Parallel OZ/Gedney Type "UPCG", or equal. Edge OZ/Gedney Type "UECG", or equal. L. Hanger rod beam clamps shall be clamp type with hardened steel , bolt, Steel City "500" Series , Crouse-Hinds type "MW", or equal. Furnish swivel stud for each rod make-up. M. Conduit "J" hangers shall consist of steel straddle with detachable bolt. Finish shall be electro- galvanized . Furnish Kindorftype "C-149", Unistrut "J-1200" Series, or equal. N. Conduit "U" bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized steel with 304 stainless steel hex-head bolts. 0. Equipment stands for supporting devices such as control stations, device boxes and the like, shall consist of a welded structural steel c-channel and plate steel floor plate as detailed on the drawings . Equipment stands shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 6 of 8 A. Double bushings for insulating wiring through sheet metal panels shall consist of mating male and female threaded phenolic bushings. Phenolic insulation shall be high-impact thermosetting plastic rated 150 degrees C. Furnish OZ Type "ABB", or equal. B. Conduit pull-cords for use in empty raceways shall be glass-fiber reinforced tape with foot- marked identification along its length. Furnish Thomas, Greenlee, or equal products. C. Conduit thread coating compound shall be conductive, non-galling, and corrosion-inhibiting. Furnish Crouse-Hinds Type "STL", Appleton Type "ST", or equal. D. Plastic compound for field-coating of ferrous material products shall be PVC in liquid form that sets-up semi-hard upon curing. Furnish Rob Roy "Rob Kote" or equal. E. Zinc spray for coating galvanized steel threads shall be Vaslspar MZ4, Tenemec 90-96 or equal conductive zinc-rich spray enamel product. F. Foam sealant for waterproofing uses shall be Avanti International AV280 or equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAYS A. Install the conduit system to provide the facility with the utmost degree of reliability and maintenance free operation . The conduit system shall have the appearance of having been installed by competent workmen. Kinked conduit, conduit inadequately supported or carelessly installed , do not give such reliability and maintenance free operation and will not be accepted. B. Raceways shall be installed for all wiring runs , except as otherwise indicated . C. Conduit sizes , where not indicated, shall be N.E.C. code-sized to accommodate the number and diameter of wires to be pulled into the conduit. Unless otherwise indicated , 3/4" trade-size shall be minimum size conduit. D . Unless otherwise noted , conduit runs shall be installed exposed. Such runs shall be made parallel to the lines of the structure . Conduit shall be installed such that it does not crea te a tripping hazard or an obstruction for headroom . E. All runs of rigid conduit shall be threaded, and all male threads shall be coated with non-galling thread compound prior to assembly. F. Plastic coated metallic conduit lengths shall be joined with threaded metallic coupling that shall be each equipped with a 40 mil thickness sleeve that shall extend over the threads of the joined conduit. Each joint shall be watertight. G. Field-cut threads in runs of plastic coated metallic conduit shall be cut with a special die that has rear reamed out oversize so as to slip over plastic coating. Do not attempt to cut threads on plastic coated conduit with regular dies , whereby plastic coating is skinned back to allow the Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 7 of 8 incorrect die to be used . Coat all field-cut threads with cold-galvanizing spray, use two coats to provide I-mil minimum coating thickness . H . Conduit runs made in concrete pours or surface-mounted runs that are attached to the structure, shall be equipped with an expansion/deflection fitting where they cross an expansion joint, or at every 100 feet. I. Unless otherwise shown, conduit penetrations through floors located below enclosures, shall be made each with couplings set flush with the outside faces of the concrete pour. Each pair of couplings shall be joined with a threaded spool piece. Use coated aluminum or galvanized steel couplings . J. Rigid metallic conduit runs shall have their couplings and connections made with screwed fittings and shall be made up wrench-tight. Check all threaded conduit joints prior to wire pull. Coat all male threads with Crouse-Hinds "STL" or equal, conductive lubricant prior to joining. K . All conduit runs shall be watertight over their lengths of run , except where drain fittings are indicated. In which cases, install specified drain fittings. L. Plastic jacketed flexible steel conduit shall be used to connect wiring to motors , limit switches, bearing thermostats , and other devices that may have to be removed for servicing. Unless otherwise indicated , maximum lengths of flex shall be three (3') feet. M . Whe re plastic jacketed flex is installed , make up terminal ends with liquid-tight flex connectors . In wet locations , install sealing gaskets on each threaded male connector. Each flex connector shall be made-up tightly so that the minimum pull-out resistance is at least 150 lbs . Install external spirally-wrapped ground wire around each run of liquid-tight flex and bond each end to specified grounding-type fittings . N . Empty conduits shall have pull-tapes installed. Identify each terminus as to location of other end and trade size of conduit. Use blank plastic waterproof write-on label and write information on each label with waterproof ink. Cap exposed ends of empty conduit with plastic caps. 0. Conduit runs into boxes, cabinets and enclosures shall be set in a neat manner. Vertical runs shall be set plumb . Conduits set cocked or out of plumb will not be acceptable. P. Conduit entrances into equipment shall be carefully planned. Cutting away of enclosure structure, torching out sill or braces, and removal of enclosure structural members, will not be acceptable . Q. Use approved hole cutting tools for entrances into sheet metal enclosure. Use of cutting torch or incorrect tools will not be acceptable. Holes shall be cleanly cut and they shall be free from burrs, jagged edges , and torn metal. R. All raceways shall be swabbed clean after installation. There shall be no debris left inside . All interior surfaces shall be smooth and free from burrs and defects that would injure wire in s ulation. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 3.02 CONDUIT BODIES AND BOXES SECTION 16110 Raceways Page 8 of 8 A . Conduit bodies such as "LB", "T", "GUAT", etc ., shall be installed in exposed runs of conduit wherever indicated and where required to overcome obstructions and to provide pulling access to wmng. Covers for such fittings shall be accessible and unobstructed by the adjacent construction . GUA series pulling bodies rather than LB fittings and the like, shall be used for splicing purposes as well as pulling access . B. Covers for all conduit bodies shall be installed with gasketed cast metal type where located in damp or wet locations. C. All conduit boxes installed whose inside volume is less than 100 cubic inches shall be cast metal type with gasketed cast metal cover, unless otherwise indicated. D . All conduit boxes whose inside volume exceeds 100 cubic inches shall be sheet metal type except where gasketed cast metal type , stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester are indicated. 3.03 RACEWAY SUPPORT A. All raceway systems shall be adequately and safely supported. Loose, sloppy and inadequately supported raceways will not be acceptable. Supports shall be installed at intervals not greater than those set forth by the NEC, unless shorter intervals are otherwise indicated, or unless conditions require shorter intervals of supports . B. Multiple runs of surface mounted conduit on concrete or masonry surfaces shall be supported off the surface by means of aluminum channels. Attach each slotted channel support to concrete surface by means of two (2) 1/4" diameter stainless steel bolts into drilled expansion shields. C. Single runs of surface mounted conduit on concrete or masonry surfaces shall be supported with hot-dipped malleable iron conduit clamps and nest-back spacers . Furnish plastic coated malleable iron conduit clamps and nest backs where corrosive areas are called out. D. Conduit runs that are installed along metallic structures shall be supported by means of hot- dipped galvanized beam clamps as specified herein. 3.04 LABELING A. In addition to labeling requirements as specified throughout this and other Sections, install wiring and raceway labeling as follows : 1. Apply write-on identification to empty conduits to identify each conduit as to terminus of other end and also to identify trade size of conduit. 2. Where active conduits terminate into bottoms of motor control centers, install label on each conduit terminus and show number and size of wiring and function of circuitry and trade size of conduit. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page I of 6 This section shall include wire and cable, terminating devices, splice kits, labeling, and appurtenances. I .02 SUBMITT ALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS Process catalog submittals for the following: I. Power and control cable 2. Instrument cable 3. Conductor Connectors 4. Tape Products 5. Labels PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE A. All conductors shall be soft-drawn annealed copper, Class B stranding that meets ASTM B-8 . Copper conductors shall be uncoated, except as otherwise specified. B . Single conductor cable for power, control, and branch circuits shall have cross-linked polyethylene insulation, rated for 600 volts. Cable shall be NEC type XHHW. All such cable shall be rated for wet or dry use . Cable insulation shall be color coded with factory pigmented colors below size #6 awg. Color coding shall be as specified under Part 3 of this section . Cable shall be as manufactured by Southwire or equal. C. Instrument cable for analog circuits, shall be # I 6 awg, twisted shielded pairs or triads with PVC insulation and overall jacket. Cable assembly shall be rated for 600 volts wet or dry locations . Furnish Okonite "Okoseal-N Type P-OS" or approved equal. D . Single conductor cable for 24 volt de control shall be minimum size #16. Furnish MTW type insulation for panel wiring and THWN insulation for field wiring in conduits . E. Ground mat and associated upcomers and grounding conductors shall be tin-plated stranded copper. F . Cable for RS485 applications shall be Belden #9841. Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page 2 of 6 G . Cables for the turbidity metering equipment and transit time flow meters shall be as required by the vendor of the equipment. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Mechanical connectors for 600V class wiring shall be tin-plated copper alloy bolted pressure type with bronze tin-plated hardware. Furnish connectors as follows: TYPE Single conductor to flat-plate connector Multiple conductor to flat-plate connector Split-bolt connector Two-bolt parallel connector with spacer Cross Connector Splice Connector Flush ground connector MANUFACTURER & TYPE Blackburn LH Blackburn L2H , L3H, L4H Blackburn HPS Blackburn 2BPW Blackburn XT Blackburn S OZ Type "VG" B . Insulated spring wire connectors, "wire-nuts", for small building wire taps and splices shall be plated spring steel with thermoplastic jacket and pre-filled sealant. Connector shall be rated for 600 volts, 75 degrees C continuous. Furnish King Technology , or equal. C. Connectors for control conductor connections to screw terminals shall be crimp-type with vinyl insulated barrel and tin-plated copper ring-tongue style connector. Furnish T&B "Sta-Kon", 3M "Scotchlok", or equal. D . Terminal strips for miscellaneous field terminations of control and instrumentation circuits shall consist of 12 point box lug terminals with marking surface. Terminal assembly shall accept # 18 to #12 awg and shall be rated 600 volts . Furnish Allen-Bradley #1492-HJ812 terminal blocks. 2 .03 IN SULA TING PRODUCTS A. Tape products shall be furnished as hereinafter specified and shall be Plymouth-Bishop , Okonite , 3M , or equal. B . General purpose electrical tape shall be 7 mil thick stretchable vinyl plastic, pressure adhesive type , Plymouth-Bishop Premium 111 , 3M , Scotch 33+, or equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page 3 of 6 C. Insulating void-filling tape and high voltage bedding tape shall be stretchable ethylene propylene rubber with high-tack and fast fusing surfaces. Tape shall be rated for 90 degrees C continuous, 130 degrees C overload, and shall be moisture-proof. Void filling tape shall be Plymouth -Bishop W963 Plysafe , 3M Scotch 23, or equal. D . High temperature protective tape shall be rated 180°C continuous indoor/outdoor, stretchable, self-bonding silicone rubber. High temperature tape shall be Plymouth-Bishop 20 Plysil, 3M Scotch 70, or equal. E. Insulation putty filler-tape shall be Plymouth-Bishop 125 Filler Tape, 3M Scotchfill, or equal. F. Arc and fireproofing tape shall be Plymouth-Bishop 20 Plysil, 3M Scotch #70 or equal. 2.04 LABELS A. Colored banding tape shall be 5 mil stretchable vinyl with permanent solid color. Colors shall be as hereinafter specified . Tape shall be Plymouth-Bishop Premium 37, 3M Scotch #35, or equal. B . Numbered wire marking labels shall be PVC sleeve-type markers, T &B, Brady or equal. C. Cable identification ties shall be weather resistant polyester with blank write-on space, T &B, Brady or equal. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MA TERJAL A. Cable grips shall be grip-type wire mesh with machined metal support. Furnish Kellems, Appleton, or equal products . B. Wire pulling compound shall be non-mJunous to insulation and to conduit and shall be lubricating, non-crumbling, and non-combustible. Furnish Gedney "Wire-Quick", Ideal "Yellow" or equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE A. Power and control conductors shall be sized as shown and where no size is indicated, the conductor size shall be # 12 awg for power circuits, # 14 awg for 120 vac control circuits, and # 16 awg for instrumentation circuits. B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed with type XHHW or THHN insulated stranded copper conductors and the insulation color shall be green in sizes up to and including #10 awg. C. Color coding shall be as follows. Non-factory color coded cables shall be marked Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 with specified color tape. Use the following colors : CONDUCTOR l 20/208V 480V SYSTEMS SYSTEMS Phase A or LI Black Phase B or L2 Phase C Neutral Ground Red Blue White Green Brown Orange Yellow NIA Green SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page 4 of 6 D . Branch circuits may be spliced for receptacle, lighting and small appliance load inside appropriate junction boxes. Feeders shall be installed without splice. E . Except as otherwise specified, taps and splices with #IO A WG and smaller, shall be made with insulated spring wire connectors. Such connectors in damp or wet locations shall be waterproofed by filling interstices around wires with silicone rubber and further insulating with an envelope of stretched piece of EPR tape around each wire. Then, apply one-half lapped layer of electrical tape over all. F . Motor connections made with #10 A WG and smaller wire shall be made up with set-screwed copper lugs with threaded-on insulating jacket. After make-up of each connector, install two (2) layers half-lapped, of high temperature tape over connector barrel and down one (I") inch over wires . G . Taps, splices, and connections in #8 A WG and larger wires shall be made with copper alloy bolted pressure connectors. Each such connector shall be insulated by means of applying insulation putty over sharp edges so as to present a smooth bonding surface. Next, apply at least four ( 4) layers, half-lapped each layer of EPR tape. Then, make final wrapping of at least three (3) layers , half-lapped each layer of electrical tape . H. Control wiring connections to stud type and screw type terminals shall be made with ring-tongue type crimp connectors. Label each terminal jacket with wire marking label at each connectio n. I. Each wire connection shall be made up tightly so that resistance of connection is as low as equivalent length of associated conductor resistance. J. Numbered marking labels shall be installed to identify circuit numbers from panelboards. Install labels on each wire in each panelboard, junction, pull box and device connection. K . Label each wiring run with write-on waterproof labels inside motor control center. Install write- on label ties around wire group at conduit entrance and write-on label the wire size , condu it size and service. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page 5 of 6 L. Install PVC sleeve type numbered marking on each control wire termination at each terminal strip and at each device . Do this in motor control center, terminal cabinets , safety switches, remote controllers, pilot operators, and instrumentation equipment. Number selected shall correspond to number on terminal strip. M. All wiring inside equipment enclosures shall be neatly trained and laced with nylon tie-wraps. 3.02 INSTRUMENTATION WIRING A. All 4-20mA analog pairs shall have shields grounded at the instrumentation panel and insulated on the field end unless otherwise required by instrument supplier. Single point grounding shall be maintained . 3 .03 GROUND WIRING A. Each item of equipment shall be adequately and thoroughly grounded. Comply with Article 250 of N.E.C., except where higher standards of grounding have been specified . In addition to following requirements as specified under Section 16450, install grounding for general wiring systems B . Equipment grounding conductors (EGC) shall be installed in each run of power and control conduits . These wires shall be green colored in sizes #6 A WG and smaller and green banded in larger sizes . Ground wires shall be type THHN or XHHW insulated copper wires . C . EGC runs into equipment shall be grounded to equipment bus where available , or to equipment ground lugs. D. Where grounding type bushings are installed , bond EGC thereto, and furthermore , ground each bushing lug to equipment ground bus or ground lug , or ground rod. E. In each motor terminal box, install equipment ground lug and connect EGC thereto. 3.04 LABELING A. In addition to labeling requirements as specified throughout this Section , install wiring and raceway labeling as follows : 1. Apply numbered wire marking labels to control wiring terminations for each termination in each item of equipment. Use PVC sleeve type labels . 2. Apply numbered wire marking labels to power and control wiring terminations in motor control centers , panelboards , and at outlets, to identify circuit numbers . Use PVC sleeve type labels. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16120 Wire & Cable Page 6 of 6 3. Apply numbered wire marking labels to each signal wire termination in each instrument junction box , and in each item of equipment served by instrumentation circuits. Use PVC sleeve type labels. 4 . Apply write-on identification labels to wiring sets in each motor control center, and in each pullbox and junction box. Show wire size, conduit size , and line and load information . Use waterproof plastic write-on labels with nylon tie-wraps. 3.05 TESTING A. Each run of 600V class power and control wiring shall be tested prior to connection of line and load. Make tests with I OOOV de hand-crank or motor driven ohmmeter. Each run of wiring shall be tested phase-to-phase and/or phase-to-neutral, and phase-to-ground. Test results for each test shall be equal to or greater than 25,000 ,000 ohms with I OOOV de applied . All tests shall be made in the presence of the Owners representative or Engineer. B. Test all runs of signal wiring with 250V de megger. Insulation values shall meet or exceed 1,000,000 ohms per 100 feet ( cable to shield). C . Should any cable or circuit fail to meet the above tests, replace wire and retest. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Section 16191 Dry Type Transformers Page I of I This section refers to dry-type transformers . Furnish and install transformers as shown on the Drawings and as specified hereinafter. 1.02 ST AND ARDS Dry-type transformers shall be listed by UL and shall comply with UL-506, NEMA ST-20. 1.03 SUBMITT ALS Process catalog submittals on dry type transformers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Dry type transformers 15 kV A and below shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated , 115 degrees C rise. Core and coil shall be totally encapsulated in sand and resin or equivalent. Dry type transformers above 15 kV A shall be ventilated with NEMA 3R drip shields. B. Each transformer shall be equipped with two 2.5% full-capacity below normal and two 2.5% full capacity above normal taps. C. Furnish transformers in KVA and voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings . Transformer enclosure shall be suitable for indoor use. Enclosure shall be rated 3R. D . Sound level of each transformer shall not exceed 60 db at three feet. E . Transformer shall have electrostatic shield. F . Furnish General Electric, Square D, Cutler-Hammer or equal products. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers where shown. Adequately support wall-mounted transformers. Use stainless steel bolts and hardware. B. Bond neutral of each transformer to its enclosure and to grounding electrode conductors per NEC article 250. Install grounding electrode conductors from transformer secondary neutral to ground mat. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16 199 Miscell a neous Page 1 of 3 A. T h is sect ion shall include disconnect switches, wiring devices, equipment stands , main circuit breaker panels, combination motor starter, and high resistance ground detection . B . Furnish and install all such devices and complete ly connect and wire each device . 1.02 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A . Process cata log submitta ls , and equipment data for the following: I. Wiring Devices 2 . Wiring Device Covers 3. Wiring Device Boxes 4. Disconnect switches 6. Termina l strips 7. Wireways 8. Light fixtures B . Submit shop drawings for light poles , and equipment stands . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2 .01 WIRING DEVICES A . All wiring devices shall be specification grade and shall meet NEMA WD-1 requi rements . Color shall be brown , unless otherwise indicated . B . Cover p lates for wiring devices shall be App leton FSK series unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Boxes sha ll b e App leton type FD, cast metal, raised-lid type. Furnish integral mounting feet whe re called fo r on the drawings. Furnish multi-gang units for two or more switches. C. Furnish the following miscellaneous wiring devices: 1. Single-pole , single -throw, 20A toggle switch shall be Arrow-Hart# 1221, or equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16199 Miscellaneous Page 2 of 3 2. Single-pole, double-throw (three-way) 20A toggle switch shall be Arrow-Hart # 1223 , or equal. D. Weather proof GFCI receptacles shall each consist of the following: I. I-gang cast metal box with mounting feet. 2. Bryant #GFR82FT-GRY hospital grade , 20 amp GFCI receptacle. 3. Bryant #RB5781-0 weatherproof flip lid deep cover meeting NEC article 410-57b (su itable for wet locations "while in use"). E . Receptacles for sump pumps shall be Crouse-Hinds type ENR copper free aluminum with proper rating for sump pump. F . Plugs for sump pumps shall be changed to Crouse-Hinds type ENP upon installation for proper connection to sump pump power cord. G . Receptacle for connection of City of Fort Worth portable generator set shall be Thomas & Betts RussellStoll JRSS2034HR with JAA20 back box. Source contact: Les Conner, Dealers Ele c tric, Phone: 817-831-0054 2.02 TERMINAL STRIPS A . Terminal strips for installation in junction boxes and the like shall be 600 volt, rated for 25 a mps with tin-plated copper box lugs. B. Furnish Allen-Bradley type 1492-HJ 812 or equal in quantities as required. 2 .03 EQUIPMENT ST ANDS A . Equipment stands for mounting control stations (if required) shall be constructed of structural members welded together as called for on the drawings. B. Each equipment stand shall be installed with anchor bolts or 3/8 " anchors . Furnish grout and mastic bottom coating as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Safety switches shall be heavy duty, rated 600 volts ac and shall have class R fuses in sizes as indicated on the drawings. Interrupting rating of all fused switches shall be 100,000 amps rms symmetrical. B. Safety switches shall be as manufactured by Siemens , General Electric , Square D , Cutler- Hammer or equal. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.05 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECTS SECTION 16199 Miscellaneous Page 3 of 3 A . Enclosed circuit breaker disconnects shall have a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure and a minimum interrupting rating of 35 kA rms symmetrical. B. Service entrance circuit breakers shall include long time, instantaneous, and ground fault protection. C. All enclosed circuit breakers shall have metal nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent catalog and maximum rating. Provide padlock as shown or indicated in the drawings. 2.06 SPD (TVSS) PANEL A. SPD (TVSS) Panel at service entrance disconnect shall be Current Technology Cat.# SL2-l 50- 277/480-3GY-L2-S with included disconnect and event monitor in a NEMA 4X SS box . Connection to incoming disconnect switch shall be as close as possible with minimum #6 A WG wire size . B. SPD (TVSS) Panel shall Comply with the latest edition of the applicable provisions and recommendations ofUL 1449 Second Edition 2005 Revision (effective 2/9/2007) and UL 1283. C. SPD (TVSS) Panel shall be installed per Current Technology installation manual requirements. 2.07 RECEPTACLE FOR PORTABLE GENERATOR SET Receptacle for portable generator set shall be RussellStoll Cat.#JRSS2034HR with a JAA20 back box. "HR" in Cat. # represents reverse service . 2.08 MANUAL (NON-AUTOMATIC) TRANSFER SWITCH A. Manual transfer switch (MTS) shall be 150 amp rated at 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 W, 3 pole+ G. B. MTS shall be UL-I 008 listed. C. MTS shall be Russelectric CAT#RMT-MAN-150-3-E, Single operator with emergency, manual, off switch position rated for 150 amps, 42 kA rms symmetrical amps. D. MTS enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. 2.09 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install panelboards as shown on the drawings and as specified herein . B. Submit outline and dimensional drawings, catalog literature, and wiring diagrams, to Engineer for review. C. Enclosures shall be fabricated of 304 or 316 SS and shall be rated NEMA 4X . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 D. Buses shall be tin plated copper. Mains shall be as indicated on the drawings . SECTION 16199 Miscellaneous Page 4 of 3 E. Furnish all circuit breakers and spaces as scheduled or indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have an integrated interrupting rating as shown. Panelboards as noted or scheduled. F . Install panelboards where shown on the drawings and adequately support. Use stainless steel bolt and hardware . G . All conduits shall have grounding bushings installed and grounded to ground bus. Vacuum clean insides of each panelboards after all connections are made. H. Panelboards shall be Siemens, General Electric, Square-D, Cutler-Hammer equal. I. Panelboard shall include an SPD (TVSS) module without changing the available spaces in the panel as shown on the drawing sheet panel schedule . The SPD shall be rated as shown on the drawings and shall include form C alarm contacts for SCADA RTU input. 2 .10 LIGHTING A . Furnish and install light fixtures, poles, bases and accessories as called for on the drawings . B . Light fixtures shall be furnished with lamps . PART 3-EXECUTION 3 .01 WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices where shown and support each box to wall with stainless steel hardware into typical drilled expansion shields. B . Set each wiring device with axis plumb and install with yoke screws so as to adequately support each device. 3.02 TERMINAL STRIPS A . Install terminal strips as herein before specified. Mount to enclosures or backpans with stainless steel hardware . A. Label each terminal directory with numbers corresponding to wire numbers landed. 3 .01 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish one extra overload relay for each type used . B . One control relay for every three or less of each range and type installed complete with mounting socket. Northside IIl Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 END OF SECTION SECTION 16199 Miscellaneous Page 5 of 3 Northside m Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16210 Electric Utility Service Page 1 of2 A. The City of Fort Worth Northside III Elevated Storage Tank with Northside IV Transfer Meter Vault shall be served Tri-County Electric Cooperative, Inc. (TCEC). The service voltage is 480/277 three phase. The Contractor shall allow in bid for furnishing and installing all work associated with the modifications for the new service as specified herein and as required by TCEC. B. The Contractor's work at the Elevated Storage Tank shall include furnishing and installing a new main distribution panelboard with main breaker from a new electrical underground service . In addition the Contractor shall furnish and install the associated new incoming underground conduits from a distribution pole to the meter mounted near the entrance to the elevated storage tank . The Contractor shall install a conduit to to the Contractor furnished and installed new service entrance main disconnect circuit breaker. The contractor shall furnish the metering (as required by TCEC), disconnect, and necessary conduits, sleeves, bonding wires, extra cable lengths, connectors, grounding, and supports. The new service entrance disconnect shall be located as shown on the drawings. Installation of the new service equipment shall be verified by the Contractor to meet the requirements ofTCEC and be installed to meet the requirements of the latest NFPA 70 (NEC) approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Scheduling, sequencing of work and inspection required by TCEC and the Owner shall be done by the Contractor in co- ordination with TCEC. C . The Contractor shall make arrangements for obtaining the meter socket and installation as required for the mounting on the elevated storage tank pedestal as required by TCEC. Wiring from to the service will be by TCEC and will be connected at the electrical service in co- ordination with the Contractor at for the elevated storage tank. Contact Tri-County Electric Cooperative , Scott D . BaumBach, Manager, Northeast Division , Phone: 817-431-1541 , Email: baumbach @ lscorn .net or his designated alternate. D. The Contractor shall coordinate a schedule with TCEC to provide power to meet project schedule requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS Raceways shall be as specified under Section 16110, or as required by TCEC for the primary to the transformer. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE Service wire and cable ( 480 volt) shall be as specified under Section 16120. 2.03 UNDERGROUND Unde rground shall be as specified under Section 16410 and as specified herein. Northside III Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 3-EXECUTION 3 .01 GENERAL A . Underground conduit shall be installed per Section 16410. SECTION 16210 Electric Utility Service Page 2 of2 B . Coordinate with electric utility (TCEC) inspector for inspection of service entrance rack/stand and underground work prior to trenching and backfilling and as otherwise required by utility. C . Pull a mandrel through each conduit to check and clear blockage. Install a mule tape (pull t ape - a flat ribbon, consecutively numbered in feet, wh ich is usually made of polyester or aramid yam and may be coated with plastic for waterproofing) in the empty conduit for use by TCEC. END OF SECTION Northside ID Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 16410 Underground Pagel of 3 Furnish and install a system of underground raceways and wiring as shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICATIONS Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, or otherwise specified, all underground and in-slab conduit raceways shall be of the following type: 1. Except as otherwise specified, all power and control underground conduit runs shall be made with schedule 40 PVC. Bends to grade shall be made with plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. 2. All instrumentation underground conduit runs shall be made with plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. 1.03 SUBMITT ALS Process submittals for the following: I. Non Metallic conduit 2. Metallic conduit 3 . Grounding Bushings 4. Buried conduit marker tape 5. Conduit supporting saddles 1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Refer to Section 16110 for raceways. B. Refer to Section 16120 for wiring. C. Refer to Section 16450 for grounding. D . Refer to Structural Drawings Sheet S4. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS Raceways shall be as specified in Section 16110. 2 .02 MISCELLANEOUS A. Gravel for underbedding of conduits shall be washed type pea gravel. SECTION 16410 Underground Page 2 of 3 B . Plastic saddles for spacing and supporting conduits shall be interlocking types as manufactured by Cantex. C . Plastic marker label tape for buried conduits shall be yellow background with black letters with repetitive marking "ELECTRIC LINE" on yellow background, continuous along its length. Furnish T&B #NA-0608, or equal tape. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A . Do all excavating and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them dry until the work has been installed. B. All excavations shall be made to proper depth , with allowances made for floors, forms, be ams, piping, finished grades , etc. Ground under conduits shall be undisturbed earth or if disturbed , mechanically compacted to a density ratio of 95% before conduits are installed. C. All backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free of rocks and debris, and shall be pneumatically tamped in six (6") inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95%. D. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities prior to any excavating . A void disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are broken into or damaged , they shall be repaired so as to make their operation equal to that before the trenching was started . E. Furnish concrete encased ductbank for conduits where indicated on the drawings. 3.02 RACEWAYS A. All underground conduits shall be PVC schedule 40 unless otherwise noted . All bends to grade shall be made with plastic coated rigid steel conduits and shall extend to 6" above grade. Conduits shall be watertight over the entire length of the underground run. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2'007 SECTION 16410 Underground Page 3 of 3 B. Install all power, control, and signal wiring. Label each single conductor wire at each connection with PVC sleeve type wire labels. Label each signal cable at each end with plastic waterproof write-on type label to identify terminal connection and function and device served. C. Where empty conduits terminate into equipment install blank "disc" under grounding bushing and bring specified foot-marked pull tape through disc. Label each end of each pull tape with waterproof plastic label to identify terminus of other end and also show conduit size. 3.03 WIRING All underground wiring runs shall be installed from line to load without splice. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16450 Grounding System Page 1 of 3 A. Furnish and install grounding systems in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide ground mat grounding electrode system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein . 1.02 SUBMITT ALS Submit manufacturers' catalog sheets with catalog numbers marked for the items furnished, which shall include: 1. Ground well casings 2 . Ground rods 3. Terminal lugs and clamps 4. Exothermal welding materials 5 . Ground cable 6 . Ground connection hardware PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A . All ground mat grounding electrodes and grounding electrode conductors shall consist of tin plated stranded copper. B . All ground rods shall be copper clad steel products, 3/4" diameter x 10 foot long, unless otherwise indicated. Ground rods shall be Blackbum #6258 , or equal. Provide heavy duty ground rod clamps equal to Blackburn #GG58 where vertical connections are installed and #GUY where U-bolt connectors are installed to serve horizontal connections. 2 .02 GROUNDING DEVICES A . Connectors shall be furnished as specified under Section 16120 . B . Conduit grounding bushings shall be furnished as specified under Section 16110 . C. Equipment grounding conductors shall be furnished as specified under Section 16120. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16450 Grounding System Page 2 of 3 D. Flush cast metal grounding plates shall consist of bronze body with flat plate on top and bolted clamp connector on bottom. Furnish OZ type "VG", or equal flush connectors. Each such connector shall be furnished with silicon bronze connector bolts for installation of top-mounted grounding connectors. E. Exothermal welding kits shall be "Cadweld" products as manufactured by Erico. Molds, cartridges, powder, and accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 GROUND TEST WELLS A. Ground test wells shall be furnished each ground rod for the purpose of field testing the ground mat system . B. Ground test wells shall each consist of ground rod with connector attached to a #4 upcomer from the ground mat and contained within an access well with labeled top. C. Ground test well enclosures shall be Brooks-Oldcastle product #3RT series, or equal. Enclosures shall be 10 1/4" diameter and shall include cast iron cover with integrally cut "GROUND TEST WELL" in top of cover. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND MATS AND GROUND WELLS A. Install ground mat around the perimeter and under the new foundations as shown. Use tin-plated copper stranded conductors in sizes as indicated for the ground mat. Install upcomer with indicated wire sizes of tin plated copper conductors . Exothermally weld all connections . The ground mat wire shall have a minimum cover of 24". B. Unless other larger sizes are indicated on the drawings, install #2 upcomers from ground mat to RTU, and other equipment indicated on the drawings. Install "VG" flush floor connector to serve each upcomers and run #2 stingers from top side of each "VG" to ground bus in equipment. Bond VG to rebar in concrete. c: Install ground rods in test wells where indicated on the drawings. 3.02 TRANSFORMER A. Bond transformer neutral to cabinet. B . Install grounding electrode conductor from each transformer neutral to system ground and to local electrodes as shown. Run #2 ground wire to ground mat. 3.03 WIRING SYSTEMS GROUNDING Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16450 Grounding System Page 3 of 3 A. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, metallic conduit systems and exposed structural steel systems shall be grounded. B . Equipment grounding conductors shall be run with all wiring. Sizes of equipment grounding conductors shall be based on Article 250 of the N.E.C. except where larger sizes may be shown. Bond each equipment grounding conductor to the equipment grounds at each end of each run. C. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes l" and larger shall be equipped with external bonding jumpers. Use liquid tight connectors integrally equipped with suitable grounding lugs. D . Where conduits enter into equipment free of the metal enclosure, install grounding bushing on each conduit and bond bushing lug to equipment ground bus. E. Where conduits enter equipment enclosures, equip each penetration inside with grounding bushing. Install bonding jumper from each grounding bushing to ground bus. F . Equipment enclosures that do not come furnished with a ground bus , install ground lug in each enclosure that shall be bonded to the metal cabinet or backpan of the enclosure. G. Separately derived systems shall be each grounded as shown and shall comply with Article 250 of the NEC except where higher standards are shown . 3 .04 TESTING A . All exothermic weld connections shall successfully resist moderate hammer blows . Any connection which fails such test or if upon inspection , weld indicates a porous or deformed connection , the weld shall be remade. B. All exothermic welds shall encompass 100 percent of the ends of the materials being welded. Welds which do not meet this requirement shall be remade. C. Test the ground resistance of the system . All test equipment shall be furnished by Contractor and be approved by Engineer. Test equipment shall be as manufactured by Biddle or approved equal. Dry season resistance of the system shall not exceed five ohms . If such resistance cannot be obtained with the system as shown , provide additional grounding as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION 16455 Lightning Protection Page 1 of 2 Furnish and install complete lighting protection system for the elevated tank. 1.02 STANDARDS The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of the specification: 1. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) Installation Code, LPI 175 and clamps 2. National Fire Protection Association Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 78 3. Underwriter Laboratories, Inc . Installation Code, UL96A 1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of system design and furnishing all labor, materials, and items of service required for the completion of a functional lightning protection system as approved by the engineer, and in strict accordance with this section of the specifications. · 1.04 SUBMITT ALS A. Complete design and drawings showing the type , size, and locations of all grounding, down conductors , down conductors, and painters rail connectors and other miscellaneous components shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. B. Submit shop drawings for all roof penetration details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Upon completion of the installation , the lightning protection installer shall submit the Underwriters Laboratories , Inc. Master Label certification and the Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification . Submit record drawings with the LPI forms LPI-C 1-01, -02, and - 03. 1.06 STANDARDS The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI , UL , NFPA, and NEC code requirements. Northside III Avondal e -Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No . 061018038 Nove mber 2007 PART2-PR0DUCTS 2 .01 GENERAL SECTION 16455 Lightning Protection Page 2 of2 A. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight, and construction to su it the application . Bolt type connectors and splicers shall be suitable for use on Class I structures. Pressure squeeze clamps are not acceptable . All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. B. The system shall consist of a complete system and shall include connectors, splicers, bonds , copper down leads , and proper ground terminals. 2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION DEVICES A. All equipment shall be Thompson Lightning Protection products or equal. Lightning protection devices shall be unobtrusive in appearance and shall be concealed as much as possib le. Cable may be ex posed inside the Elevated Tank Column. Structural steel may be utilized as permitted by UL, NFPA, and LP L B. Down conductors shall be Thompson Lightning Protection #32 STRANDED, ground rods #TL3510 . Ground rod connections shall be cadwelded. Provide cable holders #186X and #166 as necessary to support all downlead , and bonding cables at 3 feet on center maximum. Verify compatibility of any proposed adhesive with roofing system in use . Furnish all fittments and appurtenances as required for a compl ete installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A . Down conductors shall be placed at least 8 feet from the edge of the access platform . At the bottom elevation of the platform fasten a lead with a cast bonding copper connector over to a Y connection at the down conductor. B . Three down conductors shall be installed placed 120 degrees apart or as otherwise designed to meet the lightning protection requirements. Down conductors shall exit the interior of the concrete structure below grade to the ground rods. C. Each down conductor shall consist of not less than 28 wires of soft drawn copper being not less than 14 gauge and not less than 6 ounces per foot. D. Down conductors shall be fastened to the concrete structure with strap fasteners of at least 20 gauge copper, 1/2 inch width , and di stance between fasteners shall not exceed 3 feet . E. Anchor 6 inch e s both sides of any chan ge in direction of conductor. F. All equipment shall be in stalled in a neat , wo rkmanlike manner. Work with other trades to insure a corre ct , neat , and unobtrusive install a tion . Northside ill Avondale -Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16455 Lightning Protection Page 3 of 2 G Place all down conductors no closer than 6 feet from any metal object in the interior of the concrete structure . H . Installation shall comply in all respects to LPI Code 175. Installation shall be made by or under supervision of an LPI Certified Master Installer. Completed installation to receive system certification including submittal of Forms LIP-Cl-01 , LPI-Cl-02, and LPI-Cl-03. END OF SECTION Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART I -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 1 of 8 A . General provisions of contract, including General and Special Conditions, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This item will consist of furnishing all engineering services, labor, equipment and materials necessary to design and install an automatic impressed current cathodic protection system to control corrosion of the interior submerged steel surfaces of a water storage tank. B . This item includes furnishing and installing power unit, conduit, cables,junction boxes , anodes and all other materials required for a complete cathodic protection system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMERJCAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION Standards shall be referred to as AWWA . B . AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TI-IE TESTING OF MATERJALS standards and specifications shall be referred to asASTM. C. U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY shall be referred to as EPA. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and at a minimum shall include : I . Drawings showing system des ign/configuration. 2 . Description of system components . 3 . Copy of ANSI/NSF 61 classification for all system components located within the tank. 4 . Design calculations for required voltage, amperage & life expectancy. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. These s pecifications and attachments are intended to cover a complete cathodic protection system properly designed and installed , suitable for safe and satisfactory operation in accordance with A WWA DI 04 . Unless expressly excluded by these specifications or by specific written exception taken in the successful bidder's proposal, any and all equipment, materials, and/or labor not included but which may be necessary to produce such a product in a proper, complete, s ubstantial and workmanlike manner, are to be furnished by the successful bidder without extra cost to the pure lllS!E:.I..a1.JL.Wau:+w1~--, in contact with the water or exposed to the interior of the tank sh all be classified i ANSI/NSF 61 "Drinking Water System Components." Northside ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 2 of 8 B . The system shall be designed by a corrosion engineer who is an individual accredited by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as being a Senior Corrosion Technologist, Corrosion Specialist, or Cathodic Protection Specialist with experience in cathodic protection for water storage tanks. The Corrosion Engineer shall design the system to provide effective corrosion control in accordance with criteria for protection. The criteria for protection shall be based on a tank-to-water potential, IR drop free, within a range of-0.850 volts to -1.050 volts relative to a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. The potential shall be measured free of the effect of voltage gradients (IR drops). These criteria shall be maintained by an automatically controlled rectifier and a long-life anode system. The minimum anode design life shall be twenty (20) years. C . The following shall be used as the basis for system design: J. Tank Capacity: Length/Height: Diameter: 2,000,000 gallons 35 +/-feet Per manufacturer (see Tank Details) 2. Interior Coating Type and Thickness -See Section 09910 3. Design for 25% of the total submerged surface area of the tank to be bare metal ne e ding protection . 4 . Chemical analysis of the water including resistivity expressed in ohm-cm . 5. The minimum current density shall be 0 .5 MA/ft2 bare surface area. 6 . Susceptibility of the tank to icing conditions. 7. Minimum anode life of twenty (20) years . J .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE The successful cathodic protection bidder shall utilize personnel on this project who have been engaged in the design and installation of impressed current corrosion control systems for five ( 5) or more years . The work shall be performed under the direction of a licensed professional engineer or a person with N.A .C.E. certification who has experience in water tank cathodic protection design. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2 .01 STANDARD PRODUCTS All materials s hall be new and conform to the applicable portion of these specifications . The materials to be furnished under the se s pecifications shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard d esign . Any enclo s ures required to be exposed to the weather shall be N E MA 4X stainless steel enclosures. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2.02 SPECIAL PRODUCTS SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 3 of8 The supplier of the power units, anodes and other special cathodic protection materials and equipment shall have a minimum of five (5) continuous years of successful experience in the manufacture, installation and service of cathodic protection systems for similar structures. 2 .03 COMPONENTS A . Power Unit This specification outlines the minimum quality required for long-term economy and reliability of the cathodic protection power unit. The power unit shall be solid state, air-cooled and consist of the necessary potential control circuitry, transformers, rectifiers, circuit breaker, meter, wiring, terminals and appurtenances of adequate capacity to meet the requirements of the system. Where multiple D.C. output circuits are required, each circuit shall consist of separate transformers, rectifier and control with volts and amperes. The output of each circuit shall be electronically controlled in all modes of operation, no variable resistors or other mechanical devices shall be used. Transformer voltage tap adjusters shall not be used to control the operation of the power unit. The entire power unit shall be field serviceable . The power unit shall be designed to operate on 110 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz, A.C. The power unit shall have the following standard features: (a) Automatic control of current output to maintain potential within 25MV of pre-selected level (b) Accept all standard long-life reference electrodes without internal wiring modification or replacement of components (c) Measure and display potential in any operating mode continuously or on demand (d) Linear current limiting to a preset value (e) Auto-restart after power outage (f) Short circuit , surge, and overland protection (g) Automatic circuit check (h) Dead front panel (i) Clock circuit (j) Fingertip panel control (k) Digital readout of voltmeter(s), ammeter(s), and potential meter(s) (I) Automatic overprotection control in all modes of operation (m) Automatic temperature compensating circuit (n) llluminated panel display ( o) Complied with FCC regulation for digital devices (p) RS-232 Compatibility (q) Monitor the tank-to-water potential, free of IR drop, to a preset value (r) Utilize digital pot e ntial met e r(s) to display tank-to-water potential, free of IR drop Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 B. Transformer SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 4 of8 The transformer shall be of the separate primary and secondary type and shall withstand continuous operation I 0% above rated input voltage at the maximum rated D .C. output. The transformer shall be designed for a maximum hot spot heat rise not to exceed 50°C. C . Rectifiers The rectifier elements shall be silicon with adequate cooling surfaces so that their normal temperature rise at rated capacity will not exceed that specified by NEMA. The rectifier elements shall be air- cooled and shall be housed in the power unit cabinet. D. Control Circuits The control circuit of the power unit shall be designed to continuously monitor the potential of the structure and automatically regulate the protective current as required to maintain the potential at the pre-selected level. A microprocessor shall be used for overall system control and phase controlled SCR's for current regulation . The current output of the unit shall be controlled in all modes of operation to prevent overprotection . The control shall be preset and fixed and shall override all other operating parameters. E. Circuit Breaker The circuit break er shall be of the single phase, 2 pole, series trip, manually reset, magnetic type not affected by change in ambient temperature . F. Power Unit Wiring The wires to connect components of the power unit shall be stranded or so lid copper meeting the requirements of the N.E.C. for allowable current carrying capacities. The D .C. output terminals shall be conveniently located and shall be of the solder less press ure type sized to accommodate wires as required for safe operation of cathodic protection system . Provision for connecting the A.C . power shall be made available in the form of insulated pigtails or shielded terminals . G. Enclosure The entire power unit shall be housed in a stainless steel NEMA 4X metal cabinet inside the tank interior having a tamper proof single latch 3 point locking mechanism and tabs for a keyed lock. The enclosure shall be mounted at a convenient height above grade level for monitoring and service purposes . H. Conduit The wiring between th e power unit and th e under-roof anode feeders shall be run in ri gi d electrical grade conduit of a type and s ize conforming to N .E.C. and all other applicable codes . All hardware used in conjunction with the sys tem s hall be protected against corrosion . Northside III Avondale-Has let Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 I. Wiring SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 5 of8 Wires shall be insulated stranded copper, sized per the N.E.C. for allowable current carrying capacity but not smaller than # 12 A WG. Control signal wires shall be insulated copper not smaller than #22 A WG suitable for the mechanical and environmental exposure anticipated. J . Anodes The anodes shall be s upported from the roof in a vertical position for optimum current distribution, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA DI 04, Section 4.2.4.2.2 Type C, Vertical System. Installation shall not require de-watering, wall penetrations below the high water line or the use of pressure fittings. The anode lead wire for vertical suspension shall be attached to a porcelain insulator bracket bolted to the interior of the tank roof. Handhole assemblies used for the installation of vertical anode suspension systems from the roof of the tank shall consist of a 6" diameter acrylic plastic cover, rubber gasket, and an acrylic plastic bar with a stainless steel bolt assembly for each 5" diameter access opening. Anode material shall consist of metallurgically bonded platinum, with a minimum of25 micro-inches, on niobium substrate 0 .062" diameter, or minimum 0.062" diameter titanium with a mixed metal oxide. Anode shall have a minimum design life of20 years. The anodes can be a continuous length or segmented, if fabricated on continuous stranded copper wire. All anode to head e r cable connections shall be sea led to prevent water migration. K. Reference Electrodes Copper-copper sulfate reference electrodes shall be used to measure the level of protection on the submerged steel s urfaces. (See AWWA D104, Section 3.2) The electrode shall be manufactured to remain stable (plus or minus I OMV) for a minimum of ten (10) years. The reference electrode to lead wire connection shall be encapsulated to prevent water migration . The stationary reference electrode shall be positioned within the tank to provide the most representative measurements for the submerged surface area(s). 2 .04 OPERATING PARAMETERS A . Mode of Operation The power unit shall be capable of operating in the following three (3) modes with the selection of the desired operating mode made on the front panel without additional equipment or tools with access limited to authorized personnel only. I . Manual Mode The powe r unit shall operate as a constant current rectifier continuously delivering pre-selected current to the anod es . In this mode, the automatic control shall be Jocked out without affecting the Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 6 of 8 preprogrammed settings . The output of the power unit shall be regulated from 0-100% of rated capacity without the use of transformer taps. 2. Auto-I Mode In the Auto-I mode, the controller shall automatically and continuously monitor the potential of the structure and make necessary adjustments in the current output to maintain the structure potential at the pre-selected value. A single reference electrode placed within 1 to 2 cm . from the protected structure shall be used to measure the potential and control the operation of the power unit. 3. Auto-2 Mode (IR Error Drop Free) The Auto-2 mode shall function the same as Auto-I except the potential shall be monitored against a reference electrode located some distance from the protected structure. The measured and displayed potential shall be free of IR drop error. B. Potential Criteria The power unit/controller shall be set to maintain an electro-negative tank-to-water potential of at least 850 mv as measured against a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. The potential shall be measured with protective current being applied as recommended in NACE Standard RPO 388-88 latest revision . C. Potential Profile To verify that the cathodic protection system is operating within the specified potential range, an independent series of potential measurements shall be made with a test reference electrode and a 1 0 meg-ohm or greater input impedance meter. When making the measurements, the test cell shall be placed midway between anodes within 2 cm. of the submerged steel tank surface. All measurements shall be taken with protection current applied at intervals of approximately three feet. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3 .01 START-UP Upon a minimum period of one year Final Completion of the elevated tank project, a trained representative of the manufacturer shall provide start-up service which includes energizing, testing, and adjusting the system for optimum performance of the cathodic protection system, as specified in Part 2.04. This start-up service shall be in performed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA DJ 04 Section 5 .2 Testing. This start-up service shall be coordinated with the Owner or his representative. All tank- to-water potential measurements shall be conducted with a calibrated portable copper-copper sulfate reference electrode and a portable high impedance voltmeter. A minimum of five (5) locations shall be measured. All test data shall be reviewed and evaluated by the Corrosion Specialist. The final test and adju stment of the system shall be conducted approximately twelve ( 12) months after the start-up Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 7 of 8 service . In addition to the start-up service, "as-built" drawings and an Owners Maintenance Manual shall be submitted to the purchaser. 3.02 WORK INCLUDED A. All work shall be performed and completed in a thorough, workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modem practice for the manufacture and installation of this type of equipment, notwithstanding any omission from this specification. The successful bidder will be required to perform the following: (a) Furnish and install power unit(s) (b) Furnish and install anodes complete with lead wires ( c) Furnish and install all conduit, cables, junction boxes and wires between the power units and anodes (d) Furnish and install any supplementary equipment and/or materials in addition to that specified which is necessary to insure safe and satisfactory operation of the equipment within the limits of the specifications. (e) The A.C. service to the cathodic protection power unit is covered in other sections of the contract documents. (f) If there is a conflict between requirements covered in separate parts of this specification, or the body of this specification and any attached drawings, or in the requirements covered in this specification and the industry standards, then that requirement which is most stringent shall take precedence. B. Welding of the rectifier hardware shall be performed by the prime Contractor prior to coating the tank. The cutting of 5" diameter access openings for vertical anode suspension shall be performed by the prime contractor prior to coating. The cathodic protection Contractor shall furnish drawings and materials to the prime contractor prior to coating. C. Materials and equipment shall be inspected prior to installation . Any defective component shall be repaired or replaced. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Maintenance and operating instructions shall be provided with sufficient detail to permit the Owner's operator to properly maintain and adjust the system. They shall include a description of the main components and their function, as well as a schematic drawing of the power/unit controller. The cathodic protection constructor shall furnish self-addressed report cards to be completed by the owner. Report cards received by the cathodic protection constructor during the guarantee and service period(s) shall be evaluated for system performance. 3.04 WARRANTY A . The cathodic protection manufacturer shall warrant for two (2) years after the final start-up that the equipment is free from defects in workmanship and materials. The cathodic protection manufacturer shall further warrant that the equipment supplied by him will control corrosion and pitting on the water contact area inside the steel tank described herein for a period of two (2) years after the final start-up, provided the equipment is operated as specified by the manufacturer without interruption . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16642 Cathodic Protection System Page 8 of 8 B . During the warranty period the cathodic protection manufacturer shall make annual inspections of the cathodic protection system as outlined in Appendix C of A WWA Dl 04. An annual service agreement shall be made available to the Owner to purchase at the end of the warranty period. The service agreement shall include services outlined in Appendix C of A WWA DI 04 and include as a minimum: I. One (I) annual job site visit. 2 . Tank-to-water potential measurements conducted at representative locations within the tank. A minimum of five (5) locations shall be measured. 3. Measurements shall be conducted with a portable high impedance voltmeter and a calibrated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode . 4 . Adjustments for optimum corrosion control shall be in accordance with criteria for protection. 5. Data recorded shall provide sufficient information to evaluate the performance for the system relating to criteria for protection. 6. In the event additional work is required , the constructor shall submit a report with recommendations for optimizing corrosion control. END OF SECTION Northside Ill Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section covers the general requirements for the instrumentation and RTU . SECTION 16910 Instrumentation Page 1 of 5 B. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as relays , DIN connectors, or terminals to interface with other Sections of these Specifications , shall be included. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of this type, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years . B . Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation ex perience on projects with work similar to that required for this project. C . NEC Compliance: Comply with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 , as applicable to wiring and other electrical construction of the unit. D . UL Compliance: Provide components with UL listing and labeling for applicable UL categories. Custom panels, control panels, and instrument panels and the like shall be manufactured by a fabricator approved as a UL508A shop and shall bear a UL 508A (UL Industrial Control Panel) label. E . Provide complete unit and installation to conform with NFPA-90A . 1.03 SUBMITT ALS A . Submit catalog literature, specification material and installation and operation manual for each instrument and device specified herein . B. Submit outline and dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams to Engineer for re v iew. C. Submit shop drawings for including wiring and dimensional outlines . Shop drawings shall include ISA loop drawings. Loop drawings shall include all device terminal numbers and wire numbers . 1.04 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY The contractor shall assume complete "SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY" for the instrumentation system other than the HSQ panel design and requirements and HSQ programming . "S y stem Responsibility" shall mean that the Contractor is re sponsible for the overall operation , satisfactory performance, and integration of the individual components into the whole system so that the entire system functions in whole and in its parts as intended by the Contract Documents. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SURGE SUPPRESSORS SECTION 16910 Instrumentation Page 2 of 5 A . Surge suppressors for protecting 120vac circuits shall meet UL 1449, UL 1283, NEMA LS-I 1992 , and ANSVIEEE C62.41 and C62.45 . Load current rating shall be 20 amps at 120vac. B . Surge suppr~ssors shall be series connected and shall have a surge current capacity of 45 ,000 amps . High frequency noise filtration shall be as follows: Mode L-N L-G lkHz 6db 6db IOkHZ 16db 6db IOOkHZ 42db 16db 1MHz 25db 55db C . Surge suppressor shall be Current Technology model MSU45-120-IG-20A-3 . 2.02 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures for instrumentation equipment shall be hinged door type and shall have interior mounting sub panel. Enclosure shall be Hoffman or equal. Enclosure shall be sized to house the specified equipment, but shall not be less than the size indicated on the drawings. B. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X and shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. 2 .03 LEVEL AND PRESSURE CONTROL. A. Provide a Rosemont 1511 GP pressure transmitter with transient protector, range to measure elevated tank pressures with offset zero. B . Output shall be a 4-20 mA signal proportional to level. Provide integral digital display scaled in engineering units . 2 .04 CHLORINE ANALYZER A. Analyzer shall be mounted with ancillary devices as indicated on the drawings and shipped to the jobsite fully assembled in a NEMA 4X enclosrure. B . Analyzer shall be two wire type with local indicator and sensor. The chlorine analyzer shall measure total chlorine. The sensor shall have a range of O to IO mg/I and the calibrated range of the transmitter shall be Oto 5 mg/I. The output shall be 4 -20 mA. The de loop power w ill be supplied from the instrument panel. C . The analyzer shall be Prominent Dulcometer DMT series and shall be packaged by Macaulay Controls. Contact Ann Li pert at 972-769-1226 . Startup services shall be provided by the manufacturers representative. Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 2 .05 HIGH WATER LEVEL SWITCH -NSIV TRANSFER METER VAULT SECTION 16910 Instrumentation Page 3 of 5 A . US ·Filter Control Systems/Consolidated Electric Bulletin BlOO, Model lOlGX Dry Well Float Switches shall be furnished to automatically detect a (high) liquid level in building. A liquid rise of 3/8 inch from the rest position shall operate the float switch and shall reset when the liquid level drops 1/4 inch. B. The float switch shall require no adjustments and need no calibration. Circuit operation under submergence, pressure or following long-term inactivity shall be reliable. Installation shall be in accordance with project plans and manufacturers' instructions. 2 .06 MISCELLANEOUS A . Terminal strips for connection of field wiring shall be DIN rail mounted channel mounted terminals suitable for connecting #22 to #12 wire sizes. Terminals shall be solderless box lug type with pressure plate and removable terminal marking strips. Box lugs shall be tin-plated copper. Terminals shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-HMI series with required DIN rail mounting channel and end clamps . Fused terminals for 24 volt de instrumentation circuits shall be rated 10-57 volts de, shall have blown fuse LED indicator and shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-H5 series. Fused terminals for 120 volt ac circuits shall be rated 300 volts ac, shall have neon blown fuse indicator and shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-H4 series . Terminal strips shall have factory terminal markers . B. Control relays shall be 3 pole double throw with pin base and matching socket. Furnish Potter & Brumfield model KRPA-14G or RR3PA -U with 120 volt coil. C . Furnish control panel devices as indicated in the drawings. I20vac pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be oil tight, Allen-Bradley type 800H or equal. Pilot lights shall be transformer type and shall have push-to-test option. D . Intrinsic safe relays shall be B/W series 5300. E. Intrusion sensors shall be 316 Stainless Steel. Intrusion sensors for pedestal doorways shall be SENTROL 2200 Series Miniature Surface Mount Intrusion Detectors with stainless steel armored cable (McMaster Carr Cat. # 8039A51). Intrusion detection at top of EST tank access hatch and vault NSIV Transfer meter vault hatch shall be Square-D LJOOWT or equal with 3 circuits, adjustable roller arm, set to close contacts when hatch is 1 (one) inch open. 2.07 HEAT TRACING A. Water lines for Chlorine Analyzer and sensing tank level and pressure to the pressure transmitters shall be heat traced and insulated. Electric heat tracing shall be self-limiting type, 120 v AC, and shall be rated 5 watts per foot unless otherwise indicated on the drawings . Wrap each transmitter and the pressure switch . Furnish Thermon type FP with braid and overall jacket. Secure heat tape to piping with aluminum tape. B . Furnish a Thermon TC IO I a controller for the chlorine analyzer piping and a Thermon TC IO I a controller for the pressure and level transmitter sensing lines. Insulation for transmitters shall be O 'Brien Flexpak or equal. Insulation for sensing lines shall be O 'Brien Flexpak strip insulation . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16910 Instrumentation Page 4 of 5 Insulation for chlorine sensing lines shall be Yi" closed cell polyethylene therma-cel. Furnish Therma-Cel Insul-Tube or approved equal. 2 .08 HSQ RTU, RADIO AND ANTENNA A. HSQ RTU Panel shall be furnished to the contractor by the City of Fort Worth for installation in the Elevated Storage Tank pedestal and will include the radio . Contractor shall install the panel and conduits as shown on the drawings . All work shall be coordinated with Tim Allen, C ity of Fort Worth , Phone : 817-293-5036. B. Contractor shall install conduit, antenna, grounding, and antenna cable as referenced and shown in the drawings . UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES A . Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for NSJV Transfer Vault Instrumentation Terminal panel s hall be provided for equipment as shown on the drawings. UPS ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings . UPS shall have surge protection. UPS s hall be installed in the instrument cabinet if possible or otherwise protected from the w eather and shie lded from the sun in a NEMA 4X pane l. B . UPS 's rated 350 VA shall be American Power Conversion (APC) model BK350 or equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION ffi. 2.09 INSTALLATI0}1 GENERAL 3. OJ INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Permanently mount the instruments, and all required appurtenances in accordance with manufacture r 's requirements. All work shall be done in accordance with industry standards, the NEC, ISA recommendations and in a workmanship like manner. B. Calibrate, and test all instruments . C. Certify that a ll instrument installations and calibrations are done in accordance with ISA and the manufacturer's recommendations . D . Provide completed ISA calibration sheets for all new in struments provided . E . All surge suppression devices shall be grounded with minimum #8 ground wire. ffi_ ..... 2 ...... 1 .... o-+-Off'P"f'E-R""',., ...... ,T-1 ...... 0 ..... N ..... s ....... p+i,} .... mt-+-H:r,.,...,4, ...... <\n, ........ ffHFE-~-1,,.,-,} ..... 1....,c-E ...... :r,. .... 1, ..... '\} .... J:l .... u-1 .... L ...... s 3. 02 OP ERA TIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Six (6) weeks prior to the completion of the project, compile an Operations and Maintenance Manual on the instrumentation equipment. These manuals shall include detailed instructions, periodic calibration requirements and maintenance, as well as recommended spare parts lists . Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank KHA No. 061018038 November 2007 SECTION 16910 Instrumentation Page 5 of 5 B . Submit for review per per Technical Specification Civil Section on Operations and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION \. PARTF CONTRACTORS COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Pursuant to Article 8308-3.23 of Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes, Contractor certifies that it provides workers compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on City of Fort Worth project. ST ATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT CB&I Constructors, Inc. Contractor By: {J~d~ff Name: Orville A. Earhart Title: Business Development Manager - Date: February 4, 20Qg BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared ____ _ Orville A. Earhart known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same as the act and deed of Business Development Manager for CB&I Constructors, Inc. the purposes and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated . GfVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this _4_ day of February 2008. F-2 VENDORCOMPLIANCETOSTATELAW The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed House Bill 620 relative to the award of contracts to non-resident bidders . The law, that in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, non-resident bidders ( out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside of the state of Texas) bid projects for construction , improvements, supplies or services in T exas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in the order to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the non-resident's principle place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all out-of-state or non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet specifications . The failure of out-of-state or non-resident contractor's to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B . A. Non-resident vendors in required to be N / A of the statute is attached. NI A (give state), our principal place of business, are percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy Non-resident vendors in N/A (give state), or principal place of business, are not required to underbid resident bidders . B. Oi.Jr principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of Texas. Ii] BIDDER: CB&I Constructors, Inc. Company 21 0 3..::Resea'F ch Forest Drive The Woodlands Texas ·- City State 77380 Zip By: Orville A. EaFhart (please print) Signature: {(2Jt A. !Z/J Title: Business Development Manager TIDS FORM MUST BE RETURNED WITH YOUR QUOTATION F-3 STA TE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT PERFORMANCE BOND § § Bond No . 586 49 341 KNOW ALL MEN BY TIIESE PRESENTS That we (1) cB&r cons truc tor s Inc . _______ __J a (2) Corporation of Te xas hereinafter called Principal, and (3) _w_e _st_e_r _n _s_ur_e_t _y_c_o_mp_a_n_y _______________ _ . d d • • d fth S /ofd Sp u,.t;,h DaJ.<pta . d b • a corporatlon organize an existing un er the laws o e tate an ruuy autnonze to transact usmess in the State of Texas, as Surety. are held and firmly bound unto the Ciiy of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Owner, in the p enal sum of: Three Mil l ion One Hu ndre d Th i rty Three Th ousand a nd 00/100 ----------------------------------------- ($ 3 ,133 ,ooo .oo ) Dollars in lmvful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort Worth, Tarrant County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, finnly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the 0-wner, dated the 5 'th day of &bY''4~J A .D., AO ~ , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof'; for the construction of: Northside Ill Avondale -Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank designated as Project No. (s) P264-607170036833, a copy of which contract is hereby attached, referred to , and made a part hereof as fully and to the same exteut as if copied at length herein, such project and cons truction being hereinafter referred to as the "work''. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shaH well, truly, and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents during the original term thereof, and any extension thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under the contract, and shall fully indemnify ai:ld save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and ; shall reimburse and repay the owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this obligation shall be votd, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, State of Texas. AND PROVIDED FURTIIBR. that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no charge, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to tl1e work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. -I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in eight counterparts each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the S""' day of F ~ 'b \A\.).'<~ , A.D., 2008. r ATTEST : S E RESOLUTIO OF AUTHORmf (Principal) Secretary (SEAL) Witness as to Principal 21 03 Research Fores t Drive, Th e Woodl a nd s , TX 773 8 0 Address ~,a...........;,~=~~-~~'---*"--=---- (Surety) Secre~. Lup e Ta ma yo , Wi t ness as t o Sur~ty ~ (SEAL ) Th e r esa Ga r d ne r Witness as to Surety 1 3 30 Pos t Oa k Bl vd ., #9 00, Ho u s ton , TX 770 56 (Address) CB&I Co ns tru c tors , Inc. PR!NCIP AL ( 4) BY: rfdi:dd !Z.L ~ L ~n.v-:ffc ~;f..o.,.f-. 7...,,..,.,u V.v•f•1-,.,,r M"""j. 2103 Research Fo r es t Dr i ve Th e Woo d l a nd s , TX 77 380 (Address) Wes t e rn Sure t y Com pa ny Surety 1330 Po st Oak Blvd ., #9 00, Ho u s ton , TX 77056 (Address) NOTE : Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract ( 1) Cocrect Name of Contractor (2 ) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as the c.as e may be (3) Correct name of Surety ( 4) If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney-in-fact ~y Western Surety Company lMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain i.nforma tion or make a complaint: • You may call Western Surety Company's toll-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at 1-800-233-8800 • You may also write to Western Surety Company at P. 0. Box 655908 Dallas TX 75265 -5908 or P. 0. Box 5077 Sioux: Falls, SD 57117-5077 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain infonnation on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance P.O. Box: 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX#(512} 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the agent first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. Nl'TACH TIDS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY OR BOND: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. ~- Western Surety Company POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOlNTCNG lNDCVIDUAL ATTORNEY -lN-FA C T Know All M e n By Th ese Prese n ts, That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY, a South Dakota corporati on. is a du ly orga nized and ex is tin g co rpora ti o n hav in g its prin c ip a l office in th e C ity o f Sio ux Fall s. and Stal e o f So uth Da kota. and th at it do es b y virtu e o f th e s ignature and se al here in affixed here by m ake, co nstitut e and app o int Lupe Tamayo, Wendy W Stuckey, William N Burke Jr, Michael J Herrod, Margaret U Theresa Gardner, Patti A Ebarb, Carolyn Sheffield, Nancy A Thomas, Roger Kathleen M Meeks, Indi_vidually Buboltz, Smiddy, of Ho usto n, TX, its tru e and lawfu l Atto rn e y(s )-i n -Fac t with full po wer and a uthority he reby co n fe rre d to sign, seal a nd exec ute fo r and o n its beh a lf bo nd s , . und e rtakin gs and o th er obli gatory in strum ents o f s imil ar nature -In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind it th ere by as fully and to th e same extent as if s uc h in strum ents were signed by a duly authorized officer of the co rp oration and a ll th e acts of said Attorney, purs uant to th e authority he re by given, are here by ratified and co nfirn1 ed . This Power of Attorney is ma de and executed purs uant to and by autho rity of the By-Law printed o n th e re ve rse he reof; dul y ado pted, as indi cated, by th e share hold e rs o f th e corp oration . In Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has cause d these presents to be s ign ed by its Se nior Vic e Pre s id ent and its co rp o rate sea l to be here to affixed o n this 7th day of April , 2006 . S tate of South Dakota County of Minn ehaha WESTERN SURETY COMPANY ~"'"' Vi ce P,esidc"' On this 7th d ay of April , 2006, befo re me pe rso nally came Paul T . Bruflat, to me known , who, being by me duly swo rn , did de pose and say: th at he resides in the C ity o f Sioux Fall s, State of So uth Dako ta ; th at he is th e Senior Vi ce Pres id ent of WEST ERN SURETY COMPANY describ ed in and which executed the above in strume~t ; th at he kn ows the sea l of said corporation; that th e seal affixed to the said in strum e nt is such corporate seal; th at it was so affixed pursuant to a uth ority g iv e n by the Board of Directors o f said co rp o ratio n and that he s igned hi s name there to purs uant to like a utho ri ty, and ackno~ledges sam e to be th e act a nd deed of said corp o rati on. M y co mmiss ion expires November 30 , 2006 , . .f,<-,<-,C,<-,'iC..<,<,<,<,<-,<-,<-,<,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-, t : D KRELL : r · r :~NOTARY PUBLIC~: r~SOUTH OAKOTA~.r r r tc..a<,<-,<-,<-,<-,<,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,<-,c.,t CERTlFICA TE ~Poblic I, L. Nelso n , Assistant Secre tary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do he re by certify th at th e Powe r o f Atto rn ey here in above se t fo rth is still in for ce, and further certify th at the By-Law o f the corpora ti o n printed o n th e reverse he reo f is still in fo rce. !n tes timo ny wh ereof I have hereu nto sub sc rib ed my name and affixed th e sea l of th e said co rp o ra ti on thi s ______ day o f ________________ _ WESTERN SURETY C OMPANY Fnnn F4 28 0-0 l -02 Authorizing By-Law ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY CO MPANY This Power of Attorney is mad e and exec ut ed pur s uan t to and by authority of th e followin g By-Law duly ado pted by th e shareho lde rs of th e Co mpany. Section 7 . All bo nd s, poli c ies, un dertakin gs, Pow ers of Atto mey, or o th er obligations of the co rporation s ha ll be exec uted in th e corpo rate name of th e Co mp a ny by th e Pres ident, Sec re tary, and Ass istant Secretary, Treasure r, o r any Vi ce Pres id ent, or by such oth er officers as the Board of Direct?rs may au th ori ze. The Pres id ent, any Vi ce Pres id ent , Sec retary, any Ass istant Secre tary, or th e Treasurer may appoint Attorneys in Fac t or age nts who sha ll have a uth o ri ty to iss ue bond s, poli cies, or und ertakin gs in the na me of th e Company. The co rp orate seal is no t necessary for the va lidi ty of any bonds, po li c ies, und ertakings, Powers of Attorney o r oth e r ob li gation s of th e corpo ration . The s ignature of any s uc h officer and th e corporate sea l may be printed by fac simile. '>' .. I I I • STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT PAYMENT BOND Bond No . 58649341 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we (l) CB&I Co n st r uc t ors , Inc . (2) Corpo r a t ion of Texas called Principal , and (3) Western Surety Company -hereinafter . . . d d . . d th l f h S /of s.o~t:h Da k,o t a. d b . a corporation organize an musting un er e aws o t e tate and rouy autnonze to transact usmess in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and fumly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Owner, and unto all persons, firms , and corporations who may furnish materials, for or perform labor upon the building or improvements hereinafter referred to in the penal sum of: Three Million One Hu nd r ed Th irt y Three Th ousand a nd 00/100 ----------------------------------------- $3,133 ,ooo.oo***) Dollars in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort Worth, Tarrant County, Texas, for the payment of which swn well and truly be made, we hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors , administrators , and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the 0\1.'Il.er, dated the 5 *' day of f°~b'f"'-'"~, A.O. AO O ~ , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for the construction of: Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank designated as Project No. (s) P264-607180036833 , a copy of which contract is hereby attached, referred to, and made a part hereof as fully and to the same claimants supplying labor and material in the \ prosecution of the \.vork pwvided for in said Contract, as claimants arc defined in said Article 5160, and all such claimants s hall have a direct right of action under the bond as provided in Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statues . -·- PROVIDED FURTHER that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, State of Texas, that said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no charge, extension oftime, alteration or addition to the terms extent as if copied at length herein, such project and · construction being hereafter referred to as the "work". NOW, TIIEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make a payment to all claimants as defined in Article 5160, Revised Civil Statues of Texas, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; other.vise it shall remain in full force and effect. THIS BOND IS MADE AND ENTERED into solely for the protection of all of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bopd, and it does hereby waive noti.ce of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the tenns of the contract or to the workor to the specifications. PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in eight counterparts each one of which .-"" -'b shall be deemed an original, this the :> day of \-~ '<'-'~ Y-) , A.D., 2008. ATTEST: ... _t;: ES LUTIO OF AU HOR! '/ (Principal) Secretary (SEAL) Witness as to Principal 2103 Research Forest Drive , Xhe Woodlands, TX . 77 38 0 Address ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) Lupe Tamayo, Witness as Theresa Gardner Witness as to Surety 1330 Post Oak Blvd., #900, Hou s ton, TX 77056 (Address) CB&I Const ru ctor s , Inc . PRINCIPAL (4) BY: ()~L !2LL 21 0 3 Research Fo r est Drive The Woodl a nd s, TX 77380 ~"'";/1.1 A. ~k.rf -?~r,~,. T>e<.J•flj~-,.,.>/ MA/c. (Address) . Western Sure t y Company 1330 Post Oak Blvd ., #900, Hou ston, TX 77056 (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract (1) Correct Name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as the case may be (3) Correct name of Surety (4) If Contractor is Partnership , all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney -in-fact _ ~y Western Surety Company lMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: • You may call Western Surety Company's toll-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at l-800-233-8800 • You may also write to Western Surety Company at P. 0. Box 655908 DaUas TX 75265 -5908 or P. 0. Box 5077 Sioux: Falla, SD 57117-5077 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at l-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of lnsurance P.O . Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX#(512) 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should , contact the agent first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. A:TTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY OR BOND: Thia notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. Western Surety Company POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOlNTCNG CNDfVIDUAL ATTORNEY-lN-FACT Know All M e n fly Th ese P rese nts, That WE ST ERN SURETY COtvCP ANY, a South Dakota corporati on, is a du ly organ ize d and ex isting corporation hav in g its princ ip a l office in th e C ity of Sioux Fall s, and S tate of South Dako ta , and that it does by v irtue of th e s ign a tur e and seal herein affixed hereby make, co nstitut e and appoint Lupe Tamayo, W en dy W Stuckey, William N Burke Jr, Michae l J Herrod, Margaret U Theresa Gardner, Patti A Ebarb, Carolyn Sheffield, Nancy A Thomas, Ro ge r Kathle e n M Meeks, lndividually Buboltz, Smiddy, of Hous ton, TX, its tru e and lawful Attomey(s )-in -Fac t with full power and authority he reby conferred to s ign, seal and execute for and o n its behalf bond s, unde rtakin gs and other obligatory instruments of s imilar nature -lo Unlimited Amounts - and to bind it th ere by as full y and to th e same extent as if such in s truments were signed by a duly authori ze d officer of the corporation and a ll the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given, are hereby ratified and confirmed . This Power of Attorne y is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed o n the reverse hereof, duly ado pted, as indicated, by th e share holders of the corporation. In Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURETY CONCPANY has caused these presents to be s igned by its Sen ior Vice Pres id e nt and its corp orate sea l to be hereto affixed o n thi s 7th day of April , 2006 . State of South Dakota Co unty of Minnehaha W ESTERN SURETY COMPANY ~,iocVi~P,es ide,,< On this 7th day of April , 2006, before me perso nally came Paul T. Bruflat, to me known, who, bei ng by m e duly sworn , did depose and say: Uiat he res ides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMP ANY described in and whic h executed the above instrumei:it; that he knows th e seal of said corporation; U1at the seal affixed lo th e said in strume nt is s uc h corporate seal; that it was so affixed purs uant to authority g iven by the Board of Directors of sai d corporation and that he signed hi s name thereto purs uant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the ac t and deed of said corporation. My commiss ion expires Novembe r 30, 2006 \' +;;;,;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;+ : D. KRELL : r r ~~NOTARY PUBLIC~: r~SOUTH DAKOTA~r r r +;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;+ CE RTf f lCA TE ~P,blic !, L. Nelson , Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY CONCPANY do hereby certify that th e Power of Attorney he reinabove set forth is s till in fo rce, and further certify that the By-Law of th e corporation printed on th e reverse h ereo f is s till in force . [n te s timony wh e reof I have hereunto sub scribed my nan1 e and affixed th e seal of the said corporation thi s ______ day of ___________ ~ ____ _ WESTERN SURETY C OMPANY l'nrm F4 280-0 l -02 Authorizin g By-Law ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of th e following By-Law duly adop ted by the share ho ld ers of the Company. Section 7. Al l bonds, policies, und ert aki ngs, Powers of Attorney, or other obligations of the corporation s hall be execu te d in the corporate name of the Company by th e Pre sident, Secretary, and As s istant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice Pres ident, or by s uch other officers as the Board of Direct~rs may authori ze. The Pres id ent, any Vice Preside nt , Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer may appoint Attorneys in Fact or a.gents who shall have a uthority to iss ue bonds, po li c ie s, or undertakings in the name of the Company. The corporate seal is not necessary for the va lidity of any bonds, poli c ies, und ertaki ngs, Powers of Attorney o r other obligations of the corporation. The s ignature of any s uch officer and the corporate sea l may be printed by facsimile . MAINTENANCE BOND Bond No . ·sS649341 TIIE STATE OF TEXAS 3 COUNTY OF TARRANT 3 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS : That we (1) CB&I Constructors, Inc., a Corporation of Texas as Principal , acting h e rein by and through (2) ------------------ its duly authorized ___________ and · (3) Western Surety Company a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of south Dakota surety, do hereby acknowledge themselves to be held and bound to pay un.to the City of Fort Worth , a Municipal" Corporation , chartered by virtue of Constitution and laws of the State of Texas, at Fort Worth, in Tarrant County, Texas, the sum of: as Three Million One Hundred Thirty Three Thousand and 00/100 -Dollars ($3 ,133 ,000 .00****), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum \\.-ell and truly be made unto said City of Fort Worth and its successors, said Contractor and surety do hereby bind themselves , their heirs , executors, administrators , and assigns and successors, jointly and severally . This obligation is conditioned, however, that,· WHEREAS , the Principal has entered into a certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the Owner, dated f ~ b _\.\ o." 1 OS°', loo 9 for the petfonnance of the following described public work and the construction of the follo ·wing described public improvements : Northside m Avondale-Haslet Road Ele-vated Storage Tank all of the same being referred to herein and in said contract as the Work and being designated as Proj ect No .(s) P264-60 7 180036833 ; and s aid co ntract , including all of the specifications , conditions and written instrum ents referred to therein as contract documents being hereby incorporated herein by reference for all purposes and made a part hereof, the same as if set out verbatim herein ; and , I WHEREAS, in said Contract, Contractor binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the work that it will remain in good repair and condition fo r and during the period of two (2 ) years after the date of the final acceptance of the work by the City; and, WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to maintain sa id work in good repair and condition for said term of two years ; and , WHERE~, said Contractor binds itself to repair or reconstruct the work in whole or in part at any time within said period, if in the opinion of the Director ofthe Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, it is necessary; and, WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself, upon receiving notice of the need thereof to repair or reconstruct said work as herein provided. NOW THEREFORE , if said Contractor shall keep its said agreement to maintain, repair or reconstruct said work in accordance with all the terms and conditions of said contract, these presents shall be null and void, and have no force or effect. Otherwise, this Bond shall remain in full force and effect, and said City shall have arid recover from the said Contractor and its surety · damages in the premises as prescribed by said contract. lb.is obligation shall be continuing one and successive .recoveries may be had hereon. for successive breaches until the full amount hereof is exhausted. WHEREAS, all parties covenant and agree that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County , Texas; and, . I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is execute d in eight counterparts , each one of which shall be deemed an original , dated fe. t> '>-~ '\ OS1 l o g . f ATTEST: (Principle) Secretary (SE AL) ~~--0::: Witness as to Principal CB&I Constructors Inc . PRINCIPAL (4) BY : /2;// L [2 1,.. <f cJtt v, 1 f;; 11. ~P,,/'hu.,. +-il IA.S ;,.,,r.r v~" •11-.,Ji /tu"'41"/'- 2103 Research Fo r est Drive The Woodlands, TX 77380 (Address) 2103 Resear ch Forest Dr ive, Th e Wood l a nds, TX 77380 Address Western Su r ety Compa ny Surety ( urety) Secretary Lupe Tamayo, Wit ness as to Suret (SE AL) Theresa Ga r d ner Witness as to Surety 1330 Post Oak Bl vd ., #900, Houston , TX 77056 (Address) t Buboltz 1330 Post Oak Blvd ., #900 , Houston , TX 77056 (Address) NOTE:Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract (I) Correct Name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual , as the case may be (3) Correct Name or Surety ( 4) If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney-in-fact ~'¥' Western Surety Company IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain info rma tion or make a compla int: • You may call W es tern Surety Compa ny's toll-free telephone number for info r mation or to make a compla int at l-800-233-8800 • You may also write to Western Surety Company at P. 0. Box 655908 Dallas TX 75265 -5908 or P. 0. Box 5077 Sioux Falls, SD 57 l 17-5077 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at l-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of insurance P.O. Box 149104 AW3tin, TX 78714-9104 FAX#(512) 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the agent first. If the dispute is not r e solved, you may contact the Texas Department of insurance . Nl"l'ACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY OR BOND: Thia notice is for information only and does not b e come a part or condition of the attached document. ~- Western Surety Company POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOCNTCNG CNDCVIDUAL ATTORNEY-lN-FACT KnolV All Men By These Pr ese nts, That WESTERN SURETY CO[V(PA NY, a So uth Dakota corp orati on , is a duly organ ized and exis ting corporatio n hav in g its prin c ip al office in the City of Sioux Fall s, and State of So uth Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the s ign a ture and seal he re in affixed hereby make, co nstitut e and appoin t Lupe Tamayo, Wendy W Stuckey, William N Burke Jr, Michael J Herrod, Margaret U Theresa Gardner, Patti A Ebar-b, Caro lyn Sheffield, Nancy A Thomas, Roger Kathleen M Meeks, Individually Buboltz, Smiddy, of Houston, TX, its true and lawfu l Attorney(s )-in-Fact with full power and a uthority he reby conferred to s ign , seal a nd execute for and on its behalf bond s, undertakings and other ob li gatory ins truments of sim il ar nature -In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind it thereby as fu ll y and lo the same extent as if s uc h in struments were s igned by a duly authori zed officer of th e co rp oration and a ll lhe ac ts of said Attorn ey, pursuant to the authority hereby given, are hereby ratified and confirmed . T hi s Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of th e By-Law printed o n th e reve rs e he reof, du ly adopted, as indicated, by the s hareholders of the corporation. ln Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused U1 ese prese nts lo be s igned by its Seni or Vice Pres id ent and its corp orate sea l to be hereto affixed on this 7th day of April, 2006 . State of South Dakota Co unty of Minnehaha WESTERN SURETY COMPANY On this 7th day of April, 2006, before me personally came Paul T. Bruflat, to me known , who, being by me duly s worn , did depose and say: Uiat he res ides in the C ity of Sioux Fall s, State of South Dakota; that he is the Seni o r Vi ce President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and whi ch exec uted the above in strume~t; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affllCed to the said in strument is such corp orate seal; th at it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said co rp oratio n and that he s ign ed hi s name thereto pursuant to like a uthori ty, and acknowledges same to be th e act and deed of s aid co rporation . My commiss ion expires NovemberJ0,2006 ,. +,c,C,C.,'1C.,C.,C,c.,C,c.,c,-..c.,c,c,c,c,c,c.,c..c,c,'1C., + : D. KRELL : r r :~NOTARY PUBLIC~: r~SOUTH DAKOTA~r r r +c,c,c,c.,c,c,;c,c,c,c,c,c.,c,c,c,c,c,c,c,c,c,c.,, + CERTl F [CA TE ~P,blk (, L. Nelson, Ass ist.ant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY CO MPANY do here by certify that U1 e Power of Attorney hereinabove set forth is still in force, and further certify th at the By-Law of the corp o ration printed o n the reverse he reof is still in force. ln testi mony wh e reof I have he reunto s ub sc ribed my name and affixed th e seal of the said corporation this ____ day of ________________ _ WESTERN SURETY COMPANY Fnrm F4 280-0 l -02 Authorizing By-Law ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY Thi s Power of Attorney is made and exec ut ed purs uan t to and by a uthori ty of the followin g By-Law dul y ado pted by th e share ho ld ers of th e Co mp a ny. Sect io n 7. All bonds, policies, und ert ak in gs, Po wers of Attorney, or other ob li gations of the co rporation s ha ll be execut ed in th e co rporate name of the Company by th e Pres id ent, Secretary, and Ass istant Secretary, Treas urer, or any Vi ce Pre s id ent, or by s uch oth er officers as the Board of Direct~rs may authorize . The Pres id ent, any Vi ce Pres id e nt , Secreta ry, any Ass is tant Secretary, or th e T reasurer may appoint Attorneys in Fact or agents wh o sha ll hav e authority to iss ue bond s , polic ies, or und e rtakings in the na me of th e Com pany . The corporate seal is not necessary for th e validity of any bonds, polici es, und ertakin gs, Powers of Attorney o r o th e r obli gations of the co rporation . The signature of any s uch officer and the corporate sea l may be printed by fa cs imil e. CERTIFICATION OF RESOLUI'ION AND AUI'HORITY I, Robert H. Wolfe, do hereby certify that I am the duly-elected and acting Assistant Secretary of CB&I Constructors, Inc., a Texas corporation, and that as such officer I am duly authorized to make this certificate in behalf of that corporation. I further certify that by consent in lieu of a meeting dated March 6, 2001, as authorized by Texas law, the Board of Directors of said corporation adopted the following resolution in accordance with the By-laws of said corporation: RESOLVED, that the President, any Vice-President, the Treasurer, or any regional sales manager, contracting manager, regional construction manager, manufacturing manager, project manager or business development manager heretofore or hereafter appointed by the Company or any other sales representative as may from time to time be designated by any one of the President, any Vice- President or the Treasurer, is authorized to make bids, prepare quotations and submit and receive proposals for contracts; to negotiate and sign contracts and other agreements, bid bonds, performance bonds, and other related documents; and to otherwise bind and obligate the Company in the conduct of its normal business. I further certify that the foregoing resolution is in full force and effect and that Orville A. Earhart is a duly designated and authorized Business Development Manager of CB&I Constructors, Inc. This certificate shall remain in full force and effect for ninety days from the date it bears, unless sooner revoked, but no such revocation shall be effective as to anyone dealing with any individual named in this certificate in reliance hereon unless written notice of such revocation has been received by the person so relying on this certificate. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereonto set my hand and the seal of CB&I Constructors, Inc., this 4 dayof ___ -=F-=e-=b=-ru=a=r=--y'---------- 20 08 Robert H. Wolfe, Assistant Secr-etary CB&I Constructors, Inc. PARTG PART G -CONTRACT THE ST A TE OF TEXAS COUNTY OFT ARRANT r 'M THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into the ~ day of fi"~ "'~ , ?. o g by and between the City of Fort Worth, a home-rule municipal corporation loc~in Tarrant County, Texas, acting through its City Manager thereunto duly authorized so to do , Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed "OWNER", and CB&I Constructors. Inc of the City of The Woodlands , County of Montgomery and State of Texas , Party of the Second Part, hereinafter termed "CONTRACTOR". WITNESS ETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (Owner), said Party of the Second Part (Contractor) hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (Owner) to commence and complete certain work described as follows: City of Fort Worth, Texas Northside III Avondale-Haslet Road Elevated Storage Tank Project No. P264-607180036833 and all extra work connected therewith , under the terms as stated on the Contract Documents , and at his (their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials , supplies , machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, bonds , insurance , and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents, which include all maps, plats, blueprints and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter ; thereof, and the specifications thereof, as prepared by the Engineers employed by the Owner, each of which has been identified by the endorsement of the Contractor and the Engineers thereon , together with the Contractor's Written Proposal and the other parts of the Contract Documents hereto attached , including the Fort Worth Water Department General Contract Documents and General Specifications, all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him , and to Substantially Complete and Tot a lly Complete same within the time stated in the Proposal. The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the Proposal submitted therefore , subject to additions and deductions , as provided in the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof, and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. G-1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties to these presents have executed this Contract in quadruplicate in the year and day first above written. City of Fort Worth, Texas (Owner) Party of the First Part By: f (SEAL) WITNESS: Fernando Costa , Acting Ass istant City Manager Secretary C:ootolol Date CB&I Constructors, Inc. 2103 Research Forest Drive The Woodlands, Texas 77380 (Contractor) By: VJi .A~~ Title: Business Development Manager Approved for Fort Worth City Water Department: S . Frank Crumb, Director Water Department G-2 APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL STUDY 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTHSIDE III FORT WORTH, TEXAS SUBMITTED TO KIMLEY-HORN AND ASSOCIATES, INC. 801 CHERRY STREET, UNIT 11, SUITE 1025 FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76102 BY HVJ ASSOCIATES, INC. DALLAS, TEXAS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 REPORT NO. DG-06-13380 HVJ ASSOCIATES November 19, 2007 Ms. Jenifer Tatum, PE Kimley-Hom and Associates, Inc. 801 Cherry Street, Unit 11, Suite 1025 Fort Worth, Texas 76102 Re: Geotechnical Study 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank City of Fort Worth Northside III Owner: City of Fort Worth HVJ Project No. DG0613380 Dear Ms. Tatum: Houston Austin Dallas San Antonio 9200 King Arthur Dr. Dallas.TX 75247-3610 214.678.0227 Ph 214.678.0228 Fax www.hvj.com Submitted herein is the report of our geotechnical investigation for the above referenced project. The study was conducted in general accordance with our proposal number DG0613380 dated April 18, 2006 (Revised August 29, 2007) and is subject to the limitations presented in this report. We appreciate the opportunity of working with you on this project. Please read the entire report and notify us if there are questions concerning this report or if we may be of further assistance . Sincerely, Fadi N. Faraj, PE Sr. Project Manager FF/DK: dk Copies submitted: 3 . ,.. ...... ,,,,, .;,.-.,..r:. OF 7'. '1 : ~~-· ····-.f-t-.:.:'.'' • 4-.• * "•:\s' ' -~ ~ J,. ,... · .... .,. '•: ; .. .,. , ................................ .,_ ,_ f .Mll N. f-ARAJ ~ -,_ ••••••••• ,,';a, •••• _;· •••••• _. ••••• ~ \ ~\ 96707 ff5.:' 'I. ;, ( .· .. .: -~ ... ~~(:~--~ 11, 1CJNAl t."'~-,,,,,,,,._ 11/19/2007 The seals appearing on this document were authorized by Fadi N. Faraj, P .E. 96707 on November 19, 2007. Alteration of a sealed document without proper notification to the responsible engineer is an offense under the Texas Engineering Practice Act. The following lists the pages which complete this report: • Main Text -10 pages • Plates -9 pages CONTENTS 1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ................................................................................................ I 2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1 2.1 Project Description ............................................................................................................. 1 2.2 Geo technical Investigation Program ................................................................................... 1 3 FIELD INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................... 1 3.1 Geo technical Borings .......................................................................................................... 1 3.2 Sampling Methods .............................................................................................................. 1 3.3 Water Level Measurements ................................................................................................. 2 4 LABORATORY TESTING ............................................................................................... 2 5 SITE CHARACTERIZATION ......................................................................................... 2 5.1 General Geology ................................................................................................................. 2 5.2 Soil Stratigraphy .................................................................................................................. 2 5.3 Groundwater Conditions .................................................................................................... 3 6 FOUNDATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS ............ 3 6.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 3 6.2 Mat Foundation .................................................................................................................. 3 6.3 Settlement ........................................................................................................................... 3 7 HORIZONTAL BEARING CA PACITY ......................................................................... .4 8 DESIGN REV IEW ........................................................................................................... 4 9 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................. 4 ILLUSTRATIONS Plate SITE VICINI1Y MAP ..................................................................................................................................... 1 PLAN OF BORINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 2 BORING LOGS ............................................................................................................................................ 3-7 KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED ON BORING LOGS .................................................... 8-9 1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY HVJ Associates, Inc. was retained by Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. to perform a geotechnical study for the proposed 2.5 million gallon elevated storage tank at the City of Fort Worth northside III in Fort Worth, Texas. The purpose of this study was to perform soil borings at the site, perform laboratory tests, and provide foundation design recommendations for the proposed elevated storage tank. Based on the subsurface condition revealed by the soil borings, the findings and recommendations of this report are summarized below: 1. The subsurface soils at the site generally consist of very stiff to hard high plasticity fat clays to a depth of 2 feet, followed by tan weathered limestone to depth 13 feet on top of gray limestone to the termination depth of the borings of 25 feet. Thin clay and shale seams were encountered throughout the limestone. 2. Groundwater was not encountered during drilling in any of the borings . However, it should be noted that groundwater levels fluctuate with seasonal changes. 3. We recommend using an allowable net bearing pressure of 7 kips per square-foot (ksf) to design the mat foundation over the natural rock encountered between 5 to 8 feet below grade. This bearing capacity includes a factor of safety of 3.0. We recommend using a mud slab of low-strength concrete from 2" to 6" thick placed over the base before placing the concrete footing. 4. We understand that the project will involve the installation of pipelines with thrust blocks at a depth of approximately 5 feet below the existing grade. Based on our boring logs, the pipelines will be placed in the limestone layer. We recommend using an allowable horizontal bearing capacity of 3,000 psf for pipelines installed with thrust blocks in this layer . This allowable bearing capacity includes a factor of safety 2.0 . Please note that this executive summary does not fully relate our findings and opinions. Those findings and opinions are only presented through our full report. 2 INTRODUCTION 2.1 Project Description HVJ Associates, Inc . was retained by Kimley-Hom and Associates, Inc. to perform a geotechnical study for the proposed 2.5 million gallon elevated storage tank at the City of Fort Worth northside III in Fort Worth, Texas. A site vicinity map is presented on Plate 1. The purpose of this study was to perform soil borings at the site, perform laboratory tests, and provide foundation design recommendations for the proposed elevated storage tank. 2.2 Geotechnical Investigation Program The primary objectives of this study were to gather information on subsurface conditions at the site and to provide recommendations for the proposed utilities. The objectives were accomplished by: 1. Drilling five borings to determine soil stratigraphy and to obtain samples for laboratory testing; 2. Performing laboratory tests to determine physical and engineering characteristics of the soils; and 3 . Performing engineering analyses to develop design guidelines and recommendations. Subsequent sections of this report contain descriptions of the field exploration, laboratory-testing program, general subsurface conditions, design recommendations, and construction considerations. 3 FIELD INVESTIGATION 3 .1 Geotechnica) Borings The field exploration program undertaken at the project site was performed on October 12, 2007. Subsurface conditions were investigated by drilling five borings to a depth of 25 feet below the existing ground surface. All boreholes were backfilled with soil cuttings and/ or bentonite chips . A site plan showing the approximate boring locations is presented on the Plan of Borings, Plate 2. 3 .2 Sampling Methods Soil samples were obtained continuously to depth 2 feet, after which rock was encountered. Cohesive soil samples were obtained with a three-inch thin-walled (Shelby) tube sampler in general accordance with ASTM D -1587 standard. Each sample was removed from the sa mpler in the field , carefully examined and then classified . The shear strength of the cohesive soils was estimated by a hand penetrometer in the field. Suitable portions of each sample were sealed and packaged for transportation to our laboratory. Augering was performed when rock was encountered and TxDOT cone penetrometer test was performed at approximately 5-foot intervals in the rock. The TxDOT cone test is used to determine the relative density or consistency of a so il material. The test consis ts of driving a 3 -inch diameter cone with a 170-pound hammer, which is dropped for a distance of 2 feet. The cone is seated and driven to 12 blows or 12 inches whichever comes first . Then it is driven for two consecutive 6 -inch increments, and th e blow counts for ea ch increment are noted. In hard materials, the cone is driven with the resultin g p enetration in inches recorded for the 50 blows . The number of blows for each 6- 1 inch increment and/ or the amount of penetration for each 50 blows are presented on the boring logs presented on Plates 3 through 7. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered in the borings are given on the boring logs presented on Plates 3 through 7. A key to the soils classification and symbols used in the boring logs is also presented on Plate 8. 3 .3 Water Level Measurements No groundwater was encountered during the drilling operations. 4 LABORATORY TESTING Selected soil samples were tested in the laboratory to determine applicable physical and engineering properties. All tests were performed according to the relevant ASTM Standards. These tests consisted of moisture content measurements, pocket penetrometer, percent passing No. 200 sieve, Atterberg Limits, unconfmed compression and unit dry weight. The Atterberg limits and percent passing number 200 sieve tests were utilized to verify field classification by the Unified Soils Classification System, and the unconfined compression tests were performed to obtain the undrained shear strength of the soil. The type and number of tests performed for this investigation are summarized below: Type of Test Number of Tests Moisture Content (ASTM D2216) 5 Atterberg Limits (ASTM D4318) 5 Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve (ASTM 01140) 5 Hand Penetrometer 1 Unconfmed Compression (UC) (ASTM D 2166) 4 Unit Dry Weight (ASTM D 2166) 4 The laboratory test re sults are presented on the boring logs on Plates 3 through 7. 5 SITE CHARACTERIZATION 5.1 Genera) Geology According to the University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology "Geologic Atlas of Texas Dallas Sheet," the project site area is described as being in an area where Fort Worth Limestone formation is typically encountered. This formation consists of some clays and mostly limestone. It is light to medium gray and it weathers to yellowish brown. It contains some marine megafossils such as Pecten, oysters, echinoids, and ammonites. 5.2 Soil Stratigraphy Our interpretation of soil and groundwater conditions at the project site is based on information obtained at the boring locations only. This information has been used as the basis for our conclusions and recommendations. Significant variations at areas not explored by the project boring may require reevalu atio n of our findings and conclusions. The subsurface soils at the site generally consist of very stiff to hard high plasticity fat clays to a depth of 2 feet, followed b y tan weathered lim es tone to depth 13 feet on top of gray limestone to 2 the termination depth of the borings of 25 feet. Thin clay and shale seams were encountered throughout the limestone. Details of the subsurface stratigraphy encountered in the borings are shown on the boring logs presented on Plates 3 through 7. A key to terms and symbols used on the boring logs is presented on plates 8 and 9. 5.3 Groundwater Conditions Groundwater was not encountered in any of the borings during the drilling operations. It should be noted that groundwater levels will fluctuate seasonally and in response to rainfall. Other factors that might impact groundwater levels include leakage from existing sewers and/ or sanitary sewers. 6 FOUNDATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS 6.1 General We understand that the proposed tank will be a composite-type elevated tank with a mat foundation at approximately 5 to 8 feet below grade. 6.2 Mat Foundation We recommend using an allowable net bearing pressure of 7 kips per square-foot (ksf) to design the mat foundation over the natural rock encountered between 5 to 8 feet below grade. This bearing capacity includes a factor of safety of 3.0. We recommend using a mud slab of low-strength concrete from 2" to 6" thick placed over the base before placing the concrete footing. We estimate a modulus of sub -grade reaction of 100 pounds per cubic inch (pci) for mat foundation constructed over the natural rock. The bearing capacity recommendation assumes the base of excavation is adequately dewatered and the bearing surface is relatively dry and undisturbed. We do not anticipate encountering groundwater during mat foundation installation, however the contractor should be prepared for dewatering in case groundwater is encountered during construction. The applied net bearing pressure may be determined by: 1. Summing the load applied to the foundation, the weight of the foundation and the weight of backfill placed directly above the foundation, if any. 2. Subtracting the weight of soil excavated from above the foundation depth. 3 . Dividing the total by the base area of the foundation. The weight of soil may be taken as 125 pcf for soils above the water table and 65 pcf for soils below the water table. 6.3 Settlement For a mat foundation placed on the limestone at 5 to 8 feet below existing grade, the settlement for the above recommended allowable bearing pressure is estimated to be less than one (1) inch. Differential settlement will result from variances in subsurface condition, loading conditions and construction procedures, such as cleanliness of the bearing area. If a mud slab · ,.,~o lli~.R ..... - loading is uniform, we expect the differential settlement to be negligible. ©?~ll,Jt~\1 d~y~iQ) tint ~~t;~~i~V 3 ~i ~&;ft L;'ii'U 'ii'ii:~7 ri, .:·.i \~!~un , u~t~, 7 HORIZONTAL BEARING CAPACITY We understand that the project will involve the installation of pipelines with thrust blocks at a depth of approximately 5 feet below the existing grade. Based on our boring logs, the pipelines will be placed in the limestone layer. We recommend using an allowable horizontal bearing capacity of 3,000 psf for pipelines installed with thrust blocks in this layer. This allowable bearing capacity includes a factor of safety 2.0. 8 DESIGN REVIEW HVJ Associates, Inc. should review the design and construction plans and specifications prior to release to make certain that the geotechnical recommendations and design criteria presented herein have been properly interpreted. 9 LIMITATIONS This investigation was performed for the exclusive use of Kimley-Hom and Associates, Inc. for the proposed 2.5 million gallon elevated storage tank at the City of Fort Worth northside III in Fort Worth, Texas . HVJ Associates, Inc. has endeavored to comply with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice common in the local area. HVJ Associates, Inc. makes no warranty, express or implied. The analyses and recommendations contained in this report are based on data obtained from subsurface exploration, laboratory testing, the project information provided to us and our experience with similar soils and site conditions. The methods used indicate subsurface conditions only at the specific locations where samples were obtained, only at the time they were obtained, and only to the depths penetrated. Samples cannot be relied on to accurately reflect the strata variations that usually exist between sampling locations . Should any subsurface conditions other than those described in our boring logs be encountered, HVJ Associates, Inc. should be immediately notified so that further investigation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. 4 9200 Kint; Anbur Dr. Dallas, TX 7S2 47 2 14 -673-0227 2 14-671-0228 Fax 11Ht1CJ-'l 1 ~ ----,-----------,-----------1 DATE : 11 /08/2007 APPROVED BY : FF PREPARED BY : DK S ITE VIC IN IT Y P LAN 2.5 MG Elevated Storaee Tank P RO J ECT NO .: DRAWIN G NO.: DG06 1338 0 P LATE I \. AVONDALE~H ASLET ROl\D -~~---~ ... -.. --------i BH TANK NORTH QUAD BC)'RE ~ ~ BH TANK ,GL BORE jf\ .\J BH TANK' EAST (JUW B_'@RE BH TANK WEST QUAD BORE L __ _ BH TANK SOUTH Ql'R PT BORE 9200 Kint An.bur Dr. Dallas, TX 752'7 214-678-0227 214-67&-0228 fax X X AH1l(lflll'S _______________ _. DATE : 11 /12/2007 APPROVED BY: FF PREPARED BY : DK " APPROXIMATE BORING LOCATIONS PLAN OF BORJNGS 2.5 MG Elevated Storaee Tank PROJECT NO.: DRAWING NO .: DG0613380 PLATE 2 l-o <:l > J: ~ <:l 0 <:l z a: 0 a, ...I 6 V) u. 0 8 ...I LOG OF BORING Project: 2 .5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Boring No.: BH TANK CL BORE Date : 10/12/2007 Northing : -- Easting : -- Groundwater during drilling : -- Groundwater after drilling : -- ELEV. DEPTH, FEET SOIL SYMBOLS SAMPLER SYMBOLS AND FIELD TEST DATA SOIUROCK CLASSIFICATION w CJ> zw iii iii <no <(o ll. N ~ iii zu. WO On. ~ Project No .: DG0613380 Elevation : Station : -- Offset: -- SHEAR STRENGTH , TSF • • • * 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 '$.0 z 0 M01Sl1JRE O CONTENT, % 1-----~--------+--------------------+---+-----<PLASTIC LIMIT r----1 LIQUID LIMIT -o -5 -10 -25 ~30 ~35 THO 50/0.25", 50/0" THO 50/1", 50/1" THO 50/0.5", 50/0.5" THO 50/2 .5", 50/1" THO 50/0.25", 50/0" .. HiirC( .diirk ·t,rOWri .FAi .CLAY .(Ci:i) ......................... . -wl occasional gravel . "ian WEATHERED "(iMESTONE .............................. . -wl clay seams Gray LIMESTONE -wl shale seams 83 104 Shear Types : • = Hand Penet. • = Torvane ..& = Unconf. Comp . See Plate 2 for boring location . ~----------- 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 . * = UU Triaxial PLATE 3 5 ' f-- 0 (.'.) > :I: -, Q. (.'.) :.'. z <( f- w (.'.) ~ ~ en 0 w f-;; s w (.'.) :;: "' N 0 CD "' "' $ (.'.) 0 (.'.) z ii: 0 IX) ..., 6 en u. 0 (.'.) s LOG OF BORING Project: 2.5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Boring No.: BH TANK EAST QUAD BORE Groundwater during drilling: --- Groundwater after drilling : -- Date: 10/12/2007 Northing: -- Easting: -- ELEV. DEPTH, FEET SOIL SYMBOLS SAMPLER SYMBOLS AND FIELD TEST DATA SOIUROCK CLASSIFICATION w e>> zw ii,ii5 <no <(O Q..N ~ ii5 Zu. W(.) Co.. ~ Project No.: DG0613380 Elevation : Station: - Offset: - SHEAR STRENGTH, TSF • • * )I( 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2 .0 't!-0 z C MOISTURE O CONTENT, % t-----'---------t-------------------+--+----t PLASTIC LIMIT 1----f LIQUID LIMIT ~o t-5 t-10 t-15 t-20 -35 THO 50/0.25", 50/0" THO 50/1", 50/0.25" THO 50/0 .75", 50/0 .25" THD 50/0.5", 50/0.25" THD 50/0 .5", 50/0.25" . }fare( ·dark ·brown · i=A'f cu. '((CHf .......................... . 91 100 . ·ran VVEAi"'HERED "t:.iMEStONif ............................ . -wt clay seams . "di-a.y iiMEsfoNE° .............................................. . -wt shale seams Shear Types : • = Hand Penet. •= Torvane • = Unconf. Comp. See Plate 2 for boring location . ~----------- 10 20 JO 40 50 60 70 80 90 .02 * = UU Triaxial PLATE 4 f- 0 (!) > I ~ (!) 0 (!) z er 0 a:, -' 6 (J) u. 0 Cl 0 LOG OF BORING Project: 2 .5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Boring No .: BH TANK NORTH QUAD BORE Groundwater during drilling: - Groundwater after drilling : -- Date: 10/12/2007 Northing : - Easting: - ELEV. DEPTH , FEET SOIL SYMBOLS SAMPLER SYMBOLS ANO FIELD lEST DATA SOIUROCK CLASSIFICATION w C>> zW en en 1/)Q <(O Q..N t en ZlL WO On. Project No.: DG0613380 Elevation: Station: -- Offset: - SHEARSTRENGTH ,TSF • • • * 0 .5 1 .0 1.5 2 .0 ~o z >-a::· Cl MOISTURE O CONTENT, % t-----~---------1--------------------;---,---;PLASTIC LIMIT . ~ LIQUID LIMIT 10 20 30 .40 50 60 70 80 90 ~o t-5 -10 >-15 -35 Shear Types : THO 50/0.5", 50/0 .25" THO 5011 .5", 5010 .75" THO 5011 .5", 5010 .5" THO 5012", 5011" THO 5010 .75", 5010.25" .. i-fa'rc( ·dark ·brown · i=Ai .. CLA'<°ici:i)° ........................... . . ·i'aii WEATHERED LiMEsfoNi:( ................. -........... . -wt clay seams Gray LIMESTONE -wt shale seams 86 104 • = Hand Penet. • = Torvane .A = Unconf. Comp . See Plate 2 for boring location . 7 .6 * = UU Triaxial PLATE 5 _..__ __________ _ l-o C, > I -, !l. C, "' z <{ 1- w C, ~ 0 I- "' 0 w I- ~ w C, ::E U) N 0 "' .., .., :g C, 0 C, z er 0 CD __, 0 "' u. 0 C, 0 LOG OF BORING Project: 2.5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Boring No .: BH TANK SOU RH QTR PT BORE Groundwater during drilling : --- Groundwater after drilling : --- Date: 10/12/2007 Northing : -- Easting: - ELEV. DEPTH. SOIL SYMBOLS SM1PLER SYMBOLS AND FIELD TEST DATA SOIUROCK CLASSIFICATION FEET w e>> zw iiiiii <no <(O 0..N /'.: iii Zu. W() Oo.. ~ Project No.: DG0613380 Elevation : Station : -- Offset: -- SHEARSTRENGTH,TSF • • .. )I( 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 ~() z a MOISTURE O CONTENT, % >-----~--------+--------------------.--.....----, PLASTIC LIMIT 1-----i LIQUID LIMIT -o ~10 ~1s ~20 ~2s '-35 Shear Types : THO 50/0.25", 50/0" THO 50/0.75", 50/0 .5" THO 50/0.5", 50/0 .25" THO 50/2", 50/1" THO 50/0 .25", 50/0 .25" . ·very Stiff: ·ciark· brown-FAT CLAY. (CHj ..................... . . "tan .WEATHERED LiMESfoNi:( ............................ . -w/ clay seams Gray LIMESTONE -wl shale seams 90 • = Hand Penet. • = Torvane • = Unconf. Comp . See Plate 2 for boring location. 10 20 30 40 50 E 70 80 90 * = UU Triaxial PLATE 6 --'.___ __________ _ LOG OF BORING Project: 2.5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Boring No.: BH TANK WEST QUAD BORE Groundwater during drilling: -- Groundwater after drilling: -- Date: 10/12/2007 Northing : -- Easting: - ELEV. DEPTH, FEET SOIL SYMBOLS SAMPLER SYMBOLS AND FIELD TEST DATA SOIUROCK CLASSIFICATION ~ iii zu. WO oa. i'i: Project No .: DG0613380 Elevation : Station: -- Offset: - SHEAR STRENGTH, TSF • • • )I( 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2.0 0 MOISTURE O CONTENT, % 1-----..,__--------+-------------------+--+----t PLASTIC LIMIT 1-----l LIQUID LIMIT ,- 0 0 > :x: -, a. 0 "" z <( ,- w 0 ~ ~ <I) 0 w ~ 5 w 0 ::; "' "' 0 l!l <') $ 0 0 (.? z ri 0 (D ...J 6 <I) -o ~15 -25 -35 Shear Types : THO 50/2.5", 50/4" THO 50/2.5", 50/2" THO 50/1", 50/1" THO 50/2", 50/1" THO 50/0.5", 50/0.25" .. i--iarci; "cia,k6i-ow,i"i='A 'f ci.A Y.-(CH) ........................... .. . ·raii .WEATHERED LiMESfoNE .............................. . -w/ clay seams Gray LIMESTONE -w/ shale seams • = Hand Penet. •= Torvane .&. = Unconf. Comp . ~ See Plate 2 for boring location . (.? 0 ...,,..._ __________ _ 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 101 * = UU Triaxial PLATE 7 7 SOIL SYMBOLS SAMPLER TYPES Soil Ty~es I Thin Walled 0 No Recovery 0 [Ilill] m ~ Shelby Tube Clay Silt Sand Gravel ~ Split Barrel [I Auger Modifiers ~ • CJ oocs:~: 0 8 00 .'I. I] Liner Tube B Jar Sample Clayey Silty Sandy Cemented Construction Materials WATER LEVEL SYMBOLS ~ <-"'' [ill ~ Groundwater level determined d uring , ' , .=.... -:-,-...'.; <..._ ,1~ drilling operations ·~' Asphaltic Stabilized Fill or Portland Groundwater level after drilling in .I_ Concrete Base Debris Cement open borehole or piezometer Concrete SOIL GRAIN SIZE Particle Size or Sieve Classification Particle Size No. (U.S . Standard} Clay < 0 .002 mm < 0.002 mm Silt 0 .002 -0 .075 mm 0 .002 mm -#200 sieve Sand 0 .075 -4.75 mm #200 sieve -#4 sieve Gravel 4 .75 -75 mm #4 sieve -3 in. Cobble 75 -200 mm 3 in. -8 in. Boulder > 200 mm > 8 in . DENSITY OF COHESIONLESS SOILS CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS 3/6 50/4" 0/18" Descriptive Term Very Loo se Loose Medium Den se Dense Very Dense Penetration Resistance "N" * BlowsLFoot 0-4 4 -10 10 -30 30 -so > so Consistency Very Soft Soft Firm Stiff Very Stiff Hard PENETRATION RESISTANCE Blows required to penetrate each of three consecutive 6-inch increments per ASTM D-1586 * If more than SO blows are required, driving is discontinued and penetration at SO blows is noted Sampler penetrated full depth under weight of drill rods and hammer Undrained Shear Strength (tsO 0 -0.125 0 .125 - 0 .25 0 .25 -0.5 0 .5 -1.0 1.0 -2.0 > 2 .0 • The N value is taken as the blows required to penetrate the final 12 inches Slickensided Assured Inclusion Parting Seam Layer Laminated Stratified TERMS DESCRIBING SOIL STRUCTURE Fracture planes appear polished or glossy, sometimes striated Breaks along definite planes of fracture with little resistance to fracturing Small pockets of different soils, such as small lenses of sand scattered through a ma ss of clay Inclusion less than 1/4 inch thick extending through the sample Inclusion 1/4 inch to 3 inches thick extending through the sample Inclusion greater than 3 inches thick extending through the sample Soil sample composed of alternating partings of different soil type Soil sample composed of alternating seams or layers of different soil type Intermixed Calcareous Ferrous Nodule Soil sample composed of pockets of different soil type and laminated or stratified structure is not evident Having appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate Having appreciable quantities of iron A small mass of irregular shape 9200 Kini! Arthw Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 214~71-0227 214~18-02 28 Fax KEY TO TE RM S AND SYMBOLS USE D O N BORI NG LOG S PROJECT NO .: I DRAWING NO.: DG0613380 PLATE 8 ROCK TYPES m Limestone rn Shale CJ Sandstone ii Weathered m Weathered ~ Weathered Limestone Shale Sandstone ~ Highly ;----1 Dolomite ~ Granite Weathered Limestone SOLUTION AND VOID CONDITIONS Void Cavities Interstice; a general term for pore space or other openings in rock . Small solutional concavities. Friable Low Hardness Moderately Hard Very Hard SAMPLER TYPES I Thin-Walled [I] Rock Core Tube 0 Standard B Auger Sample Penetration Test §] THO Cone I] Bag Sample Penetration Test HARDNESS Crumbles under hand pressure Can be carved with a knife Can be scratched easily with a knife Cannot be scratched with a knife Vuggy Containing small cavities, usually lined with a mineral of different composition from that of the surrounding rock. WEATHERING GRADES OF ROCKMASS (l) Vesicular Containing numerous small, unlined cavities, formed by expansion of gas bubbles or steam during solidification of the rock. Porous Containing pores, interstices, or other openings which may or may not interconnect. Cavernous Containing cavities or caverns, sometimes quite larg e . Most frequent in limestones and dolomites. Slightly Moderately Highly Completely Residual Soil JOINT DESCRIPTION SPACING Very Close Close Medium Close Wide REFERENCES : <2" 2"-12" 12"-3' >3' INCLINATION Horizontal Shallow Moderate Steep Vertical (1) British Standard (1981) Code of Practice for Site Invest igation, BS 5930. (2) The Bridge Div., Tx . Highway Dept. Foundation Exploration & Design Manual, 2nd Division, revised June, 1974. 0-5 5-35 35-65 65-85 85-90 Discoloration indicates weathering of rock material and discontinuity surfaces. Less than half of the rock material is decomposed or disintegrated to a soil. More than half of the rock material is decomposed or disintegrated to a soil. All rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated into soil. The original mass structure is still largely intact. All rock material is converted to soil. The mass structure and material fabric are destroyed . SURFACES S lickensided Smooth Irregular Rough Polished, grooved Planar Undulating or granular Jagged or pitted BEDDING THICKNESS <2 > Very Thick Thick Thin Very Thin Laminated Thinly Laminated 9200 Kine. Arthur Dr Dallas, TX 1:5241 2 14-678-0227 214-678--0221 Fax >4' 2'-4' 2"-2' 1/2"-2" 0 .08"-1/2" <0.08" KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED ON BORING LOGS Information on each boring log is a compilation of subsurface conditions and soil and rock classifications obtained from the field as well as from laborato;y testing of samples . Strata have been interpreted by commonly accepted procedures. The stratum lines on the logs may be transitional and approximate in nature. Water level measurements refer only to those observed at the times and places indicated, and may vary with time, geologic condition or construction activity . PROJECT NO .: I DRAWING NO .: DG0613380 PLATE 9 APPENDIXB 26227 Research Road Hayward, California 94545-3725 sales@hsq.com http://www.hsq.com TECHNOLOGY Telephone: (510) 259-1334 + Facsimile: (510) 259-1392 Via E-mail tim .allen@fortworthgov.org November 26, 2007 City of Fort Worth Attention: Tim Allen Reference: Northside III RTU City of Fort Worth, Texas HSQ Quotation 0711-0003-AN-A Gentlemen: HSQ Technology is pleased to offer you a revised quotation per the email instructions sent to us on November 08, 2007, November 09, 2007, and November 26, 2007. Included: • Supply one (1) new HSQModel 25X86 RTU with a required 1/0, radio, power supply, and battery backup all installed in a 36"H x 30"W x 8"0 NEMA 4X Aluminum enclosure. • Required software for the RTU • Engineering, submittals, and testing as required • All materials are priced FOB jobsite Excluded: • Installation • On-site testing and startup of RTU • Antenna, Antenna Cable, and cable connectors • Spares • Antenna mast • Displays, reports, and database at central • Sales tax • Bonds Our total lump sum price for the above is Twelve Thousand Eight Hundred Ten Dollars and Zero Cents ($12,810.00) and is valid for a period of ninety (90) days. Please note that HSQ will assume that the contractor has completed all installation, and checked out all wiring and equipment before scheduling the startup trip. Additional trips will be invoiced at $1,500 .00 per day plus expenses in accordance with our normal "Service Pricing Sheet". HSQ needs a minimum of three (3) weeks notice to schedule the startup trip. Please call the undersigned at 800/486-6684 if you have any questions. Sincerely yours, HSQ TECHNOLOGY Alan T. Nelson Estimating Manager An Equal Opportunity Employer Promote Safety . . . Every Day I California Contractor's License 378393